Kiri

EXPLANATORY MEMORANDUM 1. CONTEXT OF THE PROPOSAL • Reasons for and objectives of the proposal This explanatory memorandum accompanies the proposal for a r egulation of the European Parliament and Council establishing a common framework for media services in the internal market ( the ‘ European Media Freedom Act ’ ) . The proposal delivers on the political commitment by President von der Leyen , who announced the initiative in her 2021 State of the Union address . In her speech, s he stressed the role of information as a public good , acknowledg ing that media companies cannot be treated as any other businesses and that their independence must be protected at EU level . The initiative has been included in the Commission’s 2022 w ork p rogramme . The media sector i s part of the cultural and creative industries ecosystem , one of the 14 industrial ecosystems that are key for an inclusive and sustainable recovery and for the twin (green and digital) transition of the EU economy . At the same time, m edia services are not only an important and dynamic economic sector , they are also essential for a healthy civic sphere and for economic freedoms and fundamental rights , including equality . Independent m edia, and in particular news media, provide access to a plurality of views and are reliable sources of information to citizens and businesses alike. They contribute to shaping public opinion and help people and companies form views and make informed choices. They play a crucial role in preserving the integrity of the European information space and are essential for the functioning of our democratic societies and economies . With digital technologies, media services can increasingly be accessed across borders and through various means , while competition in the digital media space is increasingly international . The European Union is already a global standard setter in this field, with this proposal further strengthening and organising the European information space. Against this background , the proposal seeks to tackle a series of problems affecting the functioning of the internal market for media services and the operation of media service providers . In particular , media companies face obstacles hindering their operation an d impacting investment conditions in the internal market such as different national rules and proced ures related to media freedom and pluralism . These rules include in particular scrutiny of market concentrations for media pluralism purposes and protectionist measures affecting the operation of media companies. Such rules have created fragmentation in the internal market, impacting legal certain ty for media market players and resulting in additional costs when operating across borders . The picture is further complicated by insufficient cooperation among national media regulators . The European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA) has limited scope for action , and that scope is related to audiovisual media services only . Moreover , ERGA does not have sufficient tools and resources to contribute to solv ing cross-border matters or practical issues in key areas of media regulation . Th e result ing insufficient regulatory convergence affect s media market players, in particular providers of audiovisual media services and video-sharing platforms , and harms the public interest . The role of media regulators is also key in the protection from rogue media service providers, including those that are state-controlled , be it financially or editorially by certain third countries, which may prejudice or pose risks of prejudice to public security and defence. European media service providers also face increasing interference in their editorial decisions and ability to provide quality media services ( i.e. services produced independently and in line with journalistic standards ) in the internal market, as evidenced by the Commission’s annual r ule of l aw reports and the Media Pluralism Monitor . The problem is driven by fragmented safeguards to prevent interference in the editorial freedom of all media and uneven independence guarantees for public service media , leading to distortions of competitive conditions in the internal market . Finally, internal market barriers and an uneven playing field result from the opaque and unfair allocation of economic resources . In particular, the opacity of and biases inherent to proprietary systems of audience measurement skew advertising revenue flows, affecting negatively in particular media service providers and disadvantaging competitors that provide audience measurement services abiding by industry-agreed standards . T he internal market is also distorted by the opaque and unfair allocation of s tate advertising (i.e. public funds used for advertising purposes) , which may be allocated preferentially to incumbent national service providers or used to favour and covertly subsidise certain media outlets that provide government-friendly views . The regulation in this area is fragmented and limited , with many Member States lacking specific rules and the existing rules varying in scope , to the detriment of legal certainty and with the ensuing risk of arbitrary or discriminatory decisions . While the gravity of the problems varies across the EU, overall they make it difficult for media service providers to use the internal market to its full potential, maintain economic sustainability and properly fulfil their societal role to inform people and businesses. The recipients of media services are also negatively impacted by an insufficient or non- independent media offer , the uneven playing field and the lack ing protection of their interests . Both Parliament and Council have repeatedly called on the Commission to take action to lift barriers to the functioning of the internal media market and promote pluralism and independence in that market. In the final report of the Conference on the Future of Europe, published on 9 May 2022, in their proposals , citizens called on the EU to further promote media independence and pluralism , in particular by introducing a legislation addressing threats to media independence through EU-wide minimum standards . They also called to defend and support free, pluralistic and independent media, to step up the fight against disinformation and foreign interference, and to ensure the protection of journalists . Against this background , the proposal for a European Media Freedom Act aims to improve the functioning of the internal media market. The proposal is articulated around four specific objectives: Fostering cross-border activity and investment in media services by harmoni s ing certain elements of the diverging national media pluralism frameworks , in particular to facilitate cross-border service provision. Through coordination at EU level, t he proposal aims to ensure that when assessing media market concentrations independent national authorities approach media pluralism and media independence in a consistent manner . Increasing regulatory cooperation and convergence through cross-border coordination tools and EU-level opinions and guid elines. This will promot e consistent approaches to media pluralism and media independence , and provide effective protect ion for users of media services from illegal and harmful content, including online and with regard to service providers (including from third countries) not following EU media standards. Facilitating provision of quality media services b y mitigat ing the risk of undue public and private interference in editorial freedom. The proposal aims to guarantee that journalists and editors can work without interference , including when it comes to protecti ng their sources and communications . By fostering editorial independence , i t also guarantees better protection for the interests of recipients of media services . Ensuring transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market by enhancing transparency and fairness in audience measurement and allocation of state advertising . The proposal aims to ensure transparency, non-discrimination, proportionality, objectivity and inclusiveness of audience measurement methodologies, in particular online. It will also ensure transparency , non-discrimination, proportionality and objectivity in allocation of state advertising to media outlets , in order to minimise the risks of the misuse of public funding for partisan interests, to the detriment of other market players . It will thus promote fair competition in the internal media market . The legislative proposal is accompanied by a R ecommendation, which sets out a catalogue of voluntary good practices for media companies to promote editorial independence and recommendations to media companies and Member States aimed to increase media ownership transparency. T he R ecommendation will contribute to mitigating the risks of unjustified interference in individual editorial decisions and enhanc ing access to information on media ownership . • Consistency with existing policy provisions in the policy area This proposal is consistent with the existing EU horizontal and sectoral rules concerning media and online services. It seeks to address regulatory gaps, which affect the functioning of the internal media market. The proposal does so firstly by building on the revised Audiovisual Media Services Directive (AVMSD) , which governs EU-wide coordination of national legislation for audiovisual media. It steps up cooperation within the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA) set up by the Directive by transforming it into the European Board for Media Services ( ‘ the Board ’ ) and giving it a broader scope of action and additional tasks . T he proposal lays down new rules related to media services , such as those on the protection of journalistic sources and communications , s tate advertising and audience measurement. By doing so, it complements the copyright reform , which supports the financial sustainability of the press. The proposal is fully consistent with , and complements the e -C ommerce Directive and the Regulation on platform-to-business relations ( P2B ) . It is also consistent with and complements the Digital Services Act (DSA) and the Digital Markets Act (DMA) , which provide horizontal frameworks setting out harmonised rules for online services. The proposal addresses remaining sector-specific issues which the two horizontal instruments do not fully address. The proposal complem ents the EU competition rules, which do not directly address the impacts that market concentrations could have on media pluralism or independence , and State aid rules, which are applied on a case-by-case basis ( often ex post ) and do not s ufficiently address the problems created by the unfair allocation of state resources to the media service providers . The proposal ensur es that s tate advertising is systematically subject to ex ante rules on transparency, notably as regards the beneficiaries and the amounts spent , and on fair allocation of such advertising . The proposal, and in particular the s tate advertising provisions, are consistent with the proposal for a Regulation on the transparency and targeting of political advertising . Moreover, the proposal is complementary to and does not affect existing EU rules on transparency of ownership. The Anti-Money Laundering (AML) Directive is the main instrument to ensure beneficial ownership transparency , while t he EU Company Law Directive regulate s the information that in particular limited liability companies need to disclose in business registers. The AVMSD encourage s Member States to adopt measures to make accessible information on the ownership structure of audiovisual media . The proposal will complement the existing framework b y requiring all media service providers providing news and current affairs content to provide information on media ownership in particular on direct , indirect and beneficial owners , to recipients of media services . Th e proposal is also consistent with the Protocol on the system of public broadcasting in the Member States (the Amsterdam Protocol) , which recognises the competence of Member States to define the public service remit of public service media and to provide for their funding insofar as such funding does not affect trading conditions and competition in the EU to an extent that would be contrary to the common interest . The Amsterdam Protocol implicitly confirms that public service media are within the scope of the internal market. The proposal is in line with the Strategic Compass for Security and Defence and relevant Council Conclusions . By strengthening the role and cooperation between media regulators , including in matters affecting the EU’s information space, the proposal complements the actions taken to develop the EU’s toolbox on Foreign Information Manipulation and Interference. Th e proposal is in line with the Council of Europe’s Recommendation of the Committee of Ministers to Member States on public service media governance . The r ecommendation states that public service media need to operate and evolve within a sustainable governance framework, which secures both the necessary editorial independence and public accountability. In view of the recent threats to journalistic sources, t he proposal adds a targeted safeguard against the deployment of spyware in devices used by media service providers or journalists , building on protections provided by Directive 2002/58/EC (the ePrivacy Directive) , Directive 2016/680/EU (the Law Enforcement Directive) and Directive 2013/40/EU on attacks against information systems . • Consistency with other Union policies The proposal builds on the European d emocracy a ction p lan in which the Commission proposed a set of measures to promote democratic participation, fight disinformation and support free and independent media. By strengthening the protection of journalistic sources and communications, t he initiative complements the Recommendation on the protection, safety and empowerment of journalists , as well as the proposal for a Directive and Recommendation on protecting persons who engage in public participation from manifestly unfounded or abusive court proceedings ( ‘ Strategic lawsuits against public participation ’ ). The proposal provides concrete actions in response to the European Declaration on Digital Rights and Principles for the Digital Decade , which calls for safeguarding the freedom of expression and information online, and supports the implementation of the M edia and a udiovisual a ction p lan , in which the Commission set out a series of actions to strengthen financial sustainability and digital transformation of the media sector. The proposal aims at strengthening editorial independence of media service providers. In parallel, financial sustainability is a key element for protecting editorial independence from external and market pressures. As raised by stakeholders during the public consultation, the fragile economic situation of the media sector remains an issue, and has been exacerbated by the COVID-19 crisis. Securing diverse and sufficient financing sources could bolster the resilience and independence of media, and support the provision of quality services to Europeans. Consequently, the media sector has been increasingly turning to the EU for financial support, in view of the fact that the Commission has for long co-financed the independent media coverage of European affairs to foster a European publ ic sphere. While inevitably limited in amount relative to the scale and importance of the sector, European funding is indeed well placed to contribute to the recovery of the sector from the COVID-19 pandemic, the digital transformation of news, and the experimenting across borders of new formats or new mode ls to monetise content online. As a result, following the adoption of the M edia and a udiovisual a ction p lan in December 2020, the Commission has bundled actions geared to support news media , in full respect of editorial independence . For example, i t has set up MEDIA INVEST , a dedicated equity investment instrument under the InvestEU programme, designed to foster the financial capacity of European audiovisual companies. Equity support is also available to news media since 2022, combined with investment readiness actions to mobilise private investors and increase equity investment volumes. In parallel, the Commission is supporting the launch of a dedicated co-investment facility under the InvestEU programme with foundations and philanthropic organisations in order to target three specific mission areas, including ‘Media pluralism, democracy and culture’ . Innovation is another focus of the bundle: under the research and innovation and digital programmes, financing is offered to develop innovative solutions, including in particular a soon-to-be-launched call to develop a European media data space. In addition, innovative research funded under Horizon 2020 and Horizon Europe helps to understand the impact of the media on citizens and democracy, and provide tools and strategies to foster a healthier and more diverse media landscape, tackling online disinformation and improving journalistic standards. Regular exchanges with the industry in the context of the European News Media Forum , also cont ribute to monitoring innovation in the sector, and provide a forum to discuss the EU agenda on the matter. Following the M edia and a udiovisual a ction p lan, the news media sector has become a dedicated focus of the Creative Europe programme, designed to support the cultural and creative sectors. The programme can finance partnerships between media organisations in order to innovate, test new formats or share good business practices across borders. Creative Europe also co-finances projects that promote a more pluralistic media environment : grants allow to provide protection for reporters (including legal support) and cover areas such as fact-finding, monitoring, advocacy work , informing the public and awareness raising. EU funding also supported the operations of media councils, as well as the activities of the Media Pluralism Monitor . As of 2023, the Commission will also allocate dedicated funding under the Creative Europe programme to support media that serve the public interest, such as investigative outlets, thus contributing to a pluralistic debate across borders and a more healthy democracy. T he demand for media funding exceeds the funds available. T he European Parliament called for the reinforce ment of the funding opportunities for the news media sector, in particular through a permanent News Media Fund and by strengthening the budgets for the C ross-sectoral and M edia strands under Creative Europe . The Council also invited the Commission to strengthen funding for independent journalism . With a view to complementing current EU policies, and ultimately reinforcing the financial resilience of the sector, t he Commission will map public financial schemes and initiatives developed by Member States and ide ntify financing trends and gaps . 2. LEGAL BASIS, SUBSIDIARITY AND PROPORTIONALITY • Legal basis The legal basis for this proposal is Article 114 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union ( TFEU ) , which provides for the adoption of measures for the approximation of the provisions laid down by law, regulation or administrative action in Member States which have as their object the establishment and functioning of the internal market . The proposal aims to address the fragmented national regulatory approaches related to media freedom and pluralism and editorial independence . This will foster a common approach and coordination at EU level, ensur e the optimal functioning of the internal market for media services , and prevent the emergence of future obstacles to the operation of media service providers across the EU. In particular, t he proposal aims at tackling the following issues hindering the provision of media services in the internal market: national restrictions related to sources and communications of journalists as service providers , affecting th e production and provision of media services; interference in the operation of media service providers, including their editorial decisions, and diverging approaches to protection of editorial independence; the risk of state interference in public service media, to the detriment of a level playing field in the single market and quality of public service media; the market operations of rogue operators (including media service providers that are state-controlled, be it financially or editorially, by certain third countries) that create tensions in the application of the free movement rules within the Union; given the increasing digitalis ation of media service distribution, the risks to free provision of media services on very large online platforms, to the detriment of a level playing field in the internal market; n ational media market measures affecting the operation of media service providers restricti ng the free movement in the Union, thereby fragmenting the internal market and leading to legal uncertainty; the same applies to national rules and procedures for the assessment of the impact of media market concentrations on media pluralism and editorial independence; o pacity and possible biases in audience measurement systems and methodologies , leading to market distortion , to the detriment of the level playing field in the internal market; u nfair and un-transparent allocation of state advertising expenditure to media service providers, to the detriment of other media service providers , including those established in other Member States . In addition, Article 114 TFEU is an appropriate legal basis for the creation of new structures under EU law. This is particularly relevant given the governance aspect of the initiative, which aims to foster closer cooperation between national media regulators within an EU-level Board, which would be tasked to promote the effective and consistent application of EU media rules. The EU legislator must not only comply with fundamental rights when regulating the internal market , but also balance competing fundamental rights . The present Regulation proposal constitutes a harmonious, coordinated and multi-pronged legislative framework by which the legislator contributes to the development and protection of the internal market for media services, thereby also pursuing several further legitimate public interests (including the protection of users) and reconciling in a fair manner the fundamental rights of all the individuals concerned. • Subsidiarity The objectives of the intervention cannot be achieved by Member States acting alone, as the problems are increasingly of a cross-border nature and not limited to individual Member States or to a subset of Member States. Production, distribution and consumption of media content, including news, are increasingly digital and cross-border as the internet continues to drive the transform ation of traditional media business models. The p rovision of media services across the EU is increasingly affected by global platforms, which act as gateways to media content while being prominent online advertising providers . A common EU approach, promoting convergence, transparency, legal certainty and a level playing field for the relevant media market players is the best way to advance the internal media market. It will reduce the burden for media service providers , who have to comply with different national legal regimes when they operate in several Member States. It will enhance legal certainty for media market players, thereby promoting fair competition and cross-border investment. It will also enable media regulators to adopt coo rdinated response s in matters affecting the EU’s information space and in particular the protection of EU consumers ’ interests . The initiative take s due account of the Protocol on the system of public broadcasting in the Member States ( the Amsterdam Protocol) and Article 4(2) of the Treaty on European Union (TEU). It will not interfere with Member States’ competence to provide funding to public service media so that they can fulfil their public service remit, as conferred, defined and organised at national level , nor will it interfere with national identities or regulatory traditions in the media field. It also takes due account of stakeholders’ views ; it thus follows the proposition that exceedingly uniform and detailed EU media pluralism rules would be undesirable and disproportionate, as such rules must be adapted to the historic and cultural background of each Member State. Instead, the initiative strike s the right balance between generally couched provisions and more specific rules to reach the policy objectives . • Proportionality The initiative builds on existing legal frameworks and will only focus on areas where additional EU action appears necessary for the proper functioning of the internal media market , including to ensur e a level playing field and independent operation of media market players across the EU. It is limited to issues on which Member States cannot achieve satisfactory solutions on their own , and provides for a well-calibrated harmonisation that does not go beyond what is necessary to achieve the objective of establishing a common framework for the proper functioning of the internal market for media services, while guaranteeing the quality of such services . The fact that several of the proposed rules are principle-based also contributes to ensuring the proposals’ proportionality. The proposal gives rise to limited compliance and enforcement costs that will likely be offset by significant benefits for media market players and citizens. B y enhancing transparency and reducing regulatory fragmentation in the market, the proposal will enhance legal certainty and fair competition while reducing market distortions. This will increase investors’ confidence and make cross-border media market transactions less burdensome, creating a positive environment for investments and free provision of media services across the EU . Citizens and businesses will also benefit from a more diverse and plural media offer, increased transparency and improved access to information. • Choice of the instrument The proposal takes the form of a r egulation of the European Parliament and of the Council. In view of the issues to be addressed and given the economic, social and political context, a r egulation is more suitable than a d irective to ensure a consistent level of protection throughout the EU and reduce regulatory divergences that would hamper the independent provision of media services in the internal market. It will allow for a quick application of the new EU rules , thus addressing the problems faster . This will avoid a lengthy transposition process, prevent potential divergences or distortions during the transposition process, by stipulating directly applicable provisions and avoiding situations where Member States us e the transposition process as a pretext to introduce or keep legislative measures that in substance run against independent media service providers or are otherwise discriminatory. The recourse to a r egulation is also preferable given the initiative’s institutional component (the establishment of the Board). The choice of a r egulation is equally justified by the increasing digitalisation and cross-border provision of media services , which calls for a swift, consistent approach across the internal market. By establishing directly applicable provisions , t he proposed r egulation will also ensure effective and efficient cooperation among national media regulator y authorities and bodies of the Member States. 3. RESULTS OF EX POST EVALUATIONS, STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATIONS AND IMPACT ASSESSMENTS • Stakeholder consultations Th e proposal is based on extensive consultation with stakeholders, in the light of the general principles and standards for consultation of interested parties by the Commission . A c all for e vidence announcing the initiative was published on 21 December 2021 and was open for feedback until 25 March 2022. A total of 1 473 responses were received . A public consultation was open from 10 January to 25 March 2022 and attracted 917 responses . They were both promoted through the Commission’s website, as well as through social media and specific networks. While the c all for e vidence aimed at gathering general feedback in response to the Commission’s announcement of the initiative, the public consultation collected views through a structured questionnaire containing specific questions regarding the initiative. In addition, t he Commission organised meetings with key stakeholders and experts to gather additional evidence and data on the specific problems to be addressed by the initiative, the policy approach and its impact , as well as technical information about existing industry practices. It also conducted targeted workshops and analysed numerous position and analytical papers received in the context of the initiative’s preparation. The preparation of the i mpact a ssessment underpinning the initiative was supported by two external studies encompassing a series of individual consultations with key stakeholders . Furthermore, the Commission discussed the initiative with members of the AVMSD Contact Committee and ERGA. These expert groups provided a direct channel to consult the most relevant authorities at Member State level. To gather views of researchers and experts with particular expertise in relevant areas (such as public and constitutional law as well as media freedom and internal market), a specific workshop with representatives from academia, ERGA and the Commission was organised on 18 February 2022. The idea of a legislative proposal, regulating at least certain substantive areas, received support from c itizens and most other stakeholders, including the media freedom community, consumer organisations, media regulators and ERGA, public and private broadcasters, content distributors and advertising ecosystem players. Among those stakeholders, there is wide support for a principle-based approach as opposed to no action or detailed standard-setting. Non-governmental organisations and public service broadcasters particularly supported EU-level action to introduce safeguards for editorial independence , including that of public service media, while recalling the importance of the Amsterdam Protocol. Public broadcasters specifically support safeguards for editorial integrity online and guidance on the appropriate prominence of audiovisual media services of general interest. Private broadcasters were especially in favour of common principles for media pluralism measures and audience measurement transparency, objectivity and verifiability, on the latter aspect agreeing with publishers and the advertising ecosystem players. Publishers, who are traditionally unregulated, expressed a general preference for self-regulation or a recommendation . However, they did support EU-wide measures both on protection of journalistic sources and on s tate advertising. Citizens strongly agreed with the need for transparency and fairness in the allocation of state advertising. Broadcasters and publishers called for effective regulation of online platforms. As regards governance, there is overall wide support for oversight based on ERGA but differing views as to its potential future status. Regulators and the media freedom community are in favour of strengthening ERGA, while companies and business associations would rather keep it in its current form. Public authorities supported in particular regulatory cooperation at EU level to facilitate common standards for media pluralism and the strengthening of the role and resources of ERGA for further EU coo rdination . • Collection and use of expertise The Commission has relied on a wide array of expertise for the preparation of this proposal. In addition to the public consultation and other stakeholder consultations described above, the Commission contracted two external studies to ensure a high level of coherence and comparability of analysis for all potential policy approaches. The European Audiovisual Observatory of the Council of Europe also produced a special report on governance and independence of public service media . The publication is accompanied by a comprehensive overview on the main governance safeguards for public service media in Europe. T he Commission’s r ule of l aw reports , the annual reports produced by the Media Pluralism Monitor as well as some Eurobarometer surveys provided evidence and analysis on many relevant issues . These sources were used to identify the problem s, their scale in the internal media market and their drivers. The Commission has also built on the relevant Council of Europe Recommendations, which were agreed on by all Member States . Finally, to further support evidence-based analysis, the Commission conducted a review of relevant case law and an extensive literature review, covering academic literature and a wide spectrum of policy studies and reports, including by NGOs active in the area of media freedom and pluralism . • Impact assessment In line with its ‘ Better Regulation ’ policy, the Commission conducted an impact assessment for this proposal , examined by the Commission's Regulatory Scrutiny Board (RSB). The impact assessment report was first submitted to the RSB on 13 May, and was discussed with it during a hearing on 8 June. Following a negative opinion delivered on 10 June, the report was substantially revised and re-submitted to the RSB on 11 July. The RSB delivered a positive opinion with reservations on 27 July . The impact assessment report was further revised to accommodate the RSB’s suggestions for improvement . The opinions of the RSB, and the comments and explanation s of how they have been taken into account , are presented in Annex 1 to the impact assessment. The Commission examined different policy options to achieve the proposal’s general objective, which is to improve the functioning of the internal media market. Three policy options of different degrees of regulatory intensity were assessed: Option 1: Recommendation on media pluralism and independence , encouraging Member States and, in certain areas, companies in the media market to implement a set of actions to promote media pluralism, editorial independence and transparency and fairness in the media market. Option 2: Legislative proposal and recommendation on media independence , the former providing common rules for the internal market for media services and the latter encouraging media companies and Member States to foster media independence and transparency. Option 3: Enhanced legislative proposal adding on top of all the legislative elements of O ption 2 further obligations for companies in the media market and regulators to foster the availability of quality media services and transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the media market. Two sub-options were considered for the governance of the legislative instrument under options 2 and 3: Sub-option A: a governance system based on a b oard supported by a Commission secretariat ; Sub-option B: a governance system based on a b oard assisted by an independent EU office . According to the Commission’s established methodology, each policy option was evaluated for economic, social and fundamental rights impacts. The preferred option is O ption 2 S ub-option A. This option will meet the general objective of the intervention in an efficient, coherent, proportionate and largely effective way. In particular, the proposed legislative instrument will establish some core principles and rules for the media market, and a ssign important tasks to the Board , as the collective body of independent media regulators, including tasks to provide expert advic e on regulatory, technical or practical aspects of media regulation , to issue opinions on market concentrations likely to affect the functioning of the internal market and to coordinat e action s with regard to media service providers (including from third countries) not following EU media standards . It will be possible to rely on t he principles and rules established in the legislative instrument before national courts , and the Commission will be able to launch infringements proceedings , in ter alia in case of systemic issues. The non-binding element of the policy package - the R ecommendation - will suggest voluntary actions on two specific issues : media independence safeguards and media ownership transparency. Such a multi-layered and flexible approach will bring the desired benefits while optimising the costs for media market players and public authorities, also taking into account the lower cost of a Commission secretariat compared to the EU office. The impacts of the policy options on different categories of stakeholders are explained in detail in Annex 3 to the impact assessment. • Fundamental rights The proposed r egulation, by enhancing regulatory convergence in the internal media market, safeguarding editorial independence in conjunction with media service providers’ business freedom, and increasing transparency and fairness in the allocation of economic resources, will facilitate the provision of independent and quality media services across borders, hence promoting media freedom and pluralism. The key role of the Board in the new framework , fully independent from governments and any other public or private entities, will contribute to effective and impartial upholding of freedom of expression across the EU, protected by Article 11 of the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union ( ‘ the Charter ’ ) , which corresponds to Article 10 of the European Convention on Human Rights. The proposed r egulation will also have a positive impact on the freedom to conduct a business (Article 16 of the Charter), by lifting obstacles to the freedom to provide services and limiting the risks of certain media market players being subject to discriminatory treatment. 4. BUDGETARY IMPLICATIONS The budgetary impact of the proposal for this regulation will be covered by the allocations laid down in the 2021-2027 m ultiannual f inancial f ramework under the financial allocations for the Creative Europe p rogramme , as detailed in the legislative financial statement accompanying th e proposal. 5. OTHER ELEMENTS • Implementation plans and monitoring, evaluation and reporting arrangements The Commission will establish a comprehensive framework to continuously monitor the output, results and impact of this legislative instrument. This includes in particular a new independent monitoring mechanism to identify and assess risks to the functioning of the internal market for media services . An evaluation of the instrument and a report to the European Parliament, the Council and the European Economic and Social Committee are envisaged within 4 years from its entry into force and every 4 years thereafter . • Detailed explanation of the specific provisions of the proposal Chapter I sets out the subject matter and scope of the Regulation and the definitions of key terms used in the Regulation. In particular, it states that Chapter II and Chapter III, Section 5 of the Regulation are minimum harmonisation provisions . Chapter II contains rights of recipients of media services and rights of media service providers in the internal market. It also sets out safeguards for the independent functioning of public service media and duties of media service providers in the internal market . Chapter III lays out a framework for regulatory cooperation and a well-functioning market for media services. Section 1 provides t h a t the independent national regulatory authorities or bodies of the Member States that are in charge of implementation of the AVMSD a re responsible for the application of this Chapter and grants them appropriate powers of investigation to carry out their tasks. Section 2 establishes the European Board for Media Services, the collective body of independent media regulators, replacing and succeeding the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA) . It sets out the requirements for the independence of the Board and specifies its structure. The Board will receive administrative and organisational support, required for carrying out its tasks, from a secretariat provided by the Commission. The Chapter lists t he tasks of the Board under the Regulation. Section 3 establishes rules and procedures for regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market, comprising a mechanism for structured cooperation, requests for enforcement measures, guidance on media regulation matters and coordination of measures concerning third-country media services. The provisions are intended to ensure a closer cooperation among national regulatory authorities and bodies in different areas of media regulation. Section 4 addresses specific issues concerning the provision of media services in a digital environment. Regarding the provision of media services on very large online platforms , i t builds on existing horizontal legislation by providing additional safeguards for editorial integrity of content provided online by media service providers that adhere to certain regulatory or self-regulatory standards, and establishing a structured dialogue between very large online platforms and relevant media ecosystem counterparts. The Section also provides for the right of customization of audiovisual media offer in devices and user interfaces controlling access to audiovisual media services and the corresponding obligation of manufacturers and developers to technically enable such customisation . Section 5 sets out a legal framework for national measures affecting the operation of media service providers and lays down requirements for national rules and procedures related to the assessment of the impact of media market concentrations on media pluralism and editorial independence. The Board will be given the task of taking position on instances where the functioning of the internal market may be affected . Section 6 establishes requirements for audience measur ement systems and methodologies deployed by relevant market players . The rules are accompanied by an encouragement to draw up codes of conduct and to foster exchanges of best practices. Section 6 also provides for common requirements on the allocation of state advertising expenditure to media service providers , without affecting the public procurement rules and the S tate aid rules . Chapter IV sets out final provisions , in particular concerning monitoring, evaluation and reporting. The R egulation includes a mechanism for the Commission to monitor risks to the functioning of the internal market for media services on a regular basis , in consultation with the Board . The Chapter also repeal s the relevant Article of the AVMSD and specif ies the entry into force and the start of application of the Regulation. 2022/0277 (COD) Proposal for a REGULATION OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL establishing a common framework for media services in the internal market (European Media Freedom Act) and amending Directive 2010/13/EU (Text with EEA relevance) THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION, Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union, and in particular Article 114 thereof, Having regard to the proposal from the European Commission, After transmission of the draft legislative act to the national parliaments, Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee, Having regard to the opinion of the Committee of the Regions, Acting in accordance with the ordinary legislative procedure, Whereas: (1) Independent media services play a unique role in the internal market. They represent a fast-changing and economically important sector and at the same time provide access to a plurality of views and reliable sources of information to citizens and businesses alike, thereby fulfilling the general interest function of ‘public watchdog’. Media services are increasingly available online and across borders while they are not subject to the same rules and the same level of protection in different Member States . (2) Given the ir unique role, the protection of media freedom and pluralism is an essential feature of a well-functioning internal market for media services (or ‘ internal media market ’ ) . This market has substantially changed since the beginning of the new century, becoming increasingly digital and international. It offers many economic opportunities but also faces a number of challenges. The Union should help the media sector seize those opportunities within the internal market, while at the same time protecting the values , such as the protection of the fundamental rights , that are common to the Union and to its Member States. (3) In the digital media space, citizens and businesses access and consume media content, immediately available on their personal devices, increasingly in a cross- b order setting . Global online platforms act as gateways to media content, with business models that tend to disintermediate access to media services and amplify polarising content and disinformation. These platforms are also essential providers of online advertising, which has diverted financial resources from the media sector , affecting its financial sustainability, and consequently the diversity of content on offer. As media services are knowledge- and capital-intensive, they require scale to remain competitive and to thrive in the internal market. To that effect, the possibility to offer services across borders and obtain investment including from or in other Member States is particularly important. (4) However, the internal market for media services is in sufficiently integrated. A number of national restrictions hamper free movement within the internal market . In particular, different national rules and approaches related to media pluralism and editorial independence, insufficient cooperation between national regulator y authorities or bodies as well as opaque and unfair allocation of public and private economic resources make it difficult for media market players to operate and expand across borders and lead to an uneven level playing field across the Union. The integrity of the internal market for media services may also be challenged by providers that systematically engage in disinformation, including information manipulation and interference, and abuse the internal market freedoms , including by state-controlled media service providers financed by certain third countries . (5) Moreover, in response to challenges to media pluralism and media freedom online, some Member States have taken regulatory measures and other Member States are likely to do so, with a risk of further ing the divergen ce in national approaches and restrictions to free movement in the internal market. (6) Recipients of media services in the Union ( natural persons who are nationals of Member States or benefit from rights conferred upon them by Union law and legal persons established in the Union ) should be able to effectively enjoy the freedom to receive free and pluralistic media services in the internal market. In fostering the cross-border flow of media services , a minimum level of protection of service recipients should be ensured in the internal market. That would be in compliance with the right to receive and impart information pursuant to Article 11 of the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the E uropean U nion ( ‘ the Charter ’ ) . It is thus necessary to harmonise certain aspects of national rules related to media services. In the final report of the Conference on the Future of Europe, citizens called on the EU to further promote media independence and pluralism, in particular by introducing legislation addressing threats to media independence through EU-wide minimum standards . (7) For the purposes of this Regulation, the definition of a media service should be limited to services as defined by the Treaty and therefore should cover any form of economic activity. This definition should exclude user-generated content uploaded to an online platform unless it constitutes a professional activity normally provided for consideration (be it of financial or of other nature) . I t should also exclude purely private correspondence, such as e-mails, as well as all services that do not have the provision of audiovisual or audio programmes or press publications as their principal purpose , meaning where the content is merely incidental to the service and not its principal purpose, such as advertis ements or information related to a product or a service provided by websites that do not offer media services. The definition of a media service should cover in particular television or radio broadcasts, on-demand audiovisual media services, audio podcasts or press publications. C orporate communication and distribution of informational or promotional materials for public or private entities should be excluded from the scope of this definition. (8) In the digitalised media market, providers of video-sharing platforms or very large online platforms may fall under the definition of media service provider. In general, such providers play a key role in the content organisation, including by automated means or algorithms, but do not exercise editorial responsibility over the content to which they provide access. However, in the increasingly convergent media environment, some providers of video-sharing platforms or very large online platforms have started to exercise editorial control over a section or sections of their services. Therefore, such an entity could be qualified both as a video-sharing platform provider or a very large online platform provider and as a media service provider. (9) The definition of audience measurement should cover measurement systems developed as agreed by industry standards within self-regulatory organisations , like the Joint Industry Committees , and measurement systems developed outside such self-regulatory approaches. The latter tend to be deployed by certain online players who self-measure or provide their proprietary audience measurement systems to the market , which do not necessarily abide by the commonly agreed industry standards. Given the significant impact that such audience measurement systems have on the advertising and media markets, they should be covered by this Regulation. (10) S tate advertising should be understood broadly as covering promotional or self-promotional activities undertaken by, for or on behalf of a wide range of public authorities or entities , including governments, regulatory authorities or bodies as well as state-owned enterprises or other state-controlled entities in different sectors , at national or regional level , or local government s of territorial entit ies of more than 1 million inhabitants . However, the definition of s tate advertising should not include emergency messages by public authorities which are necessary, for example, in cases of natural or sanitary disasters, accidents or other sudden incidents that can cause harm to individuals. (11) In order to en sure that society reaps the benefits of the internal media market, it is essential not only to guarantee the fundamental freedom s under the Treaty, but also the legal certainty which the recipients of media services need for the enjoyment of the corresponding benefits. S uch recipients should have access to quality media services, which have been produced by journalists and editors in an independent manner and in line with journalistic standards and hence provide trustworthy information, including news and current affairs content. Such right does not entail any correspondent obligation on any given media service provider to adhere to standards not set out explicitly by law. Such quality media services are also an antidote against disinformation , including foreign information manipulation and interference . (12) This Regulation does not affect the freedom of expression guaranteed to individuals under the Charter. The European Court of Human Rights has observed that in such a sensitive sector as audiovisual media, in addition to its negative duty of non-interference, the public powers have a positive obligation to put in place an appropriate legislative and administrative framework to guarantee effective pluralism . (13) The f ree flow of trustworthy information is essential in a well-functioning internal market for media services. Therefore, the provision of media services should not be subject to any restrictions contrary to this Regulation or other rules of Union law , such as Directive 2010/13/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council providing for measures necessary to protect users from illegal and harmful content . Restrictions could also derive from measures applied by national public authorities in compliance with Union law . (14) The p rotection of editorial independence is a precondition for exercising the activity of media service provider s and their professional integrity. Editorial independence is especially important for media service providers providing news and current affairs content given its societal role as a public good. M edia service providers should be able to exercise their economic activities freely in the internal market and compete on equal footing in an increasingly online environment where information flows across borders. (15) Member States have taken different approaches to the protection of editorial independence, which is increasingly challenged across the Union. In particular, there is growing interference with editorial decisions of media service providers in several Member States. Such interference can be direct or indirect, from the State or other actors, including public authorities, elected officials, government officials and politicians, for example to obtain a political advantage. Shareholders and other private parties who have a stake in media service providers may act in ways which go beyond the necessary balance between their own business freedom and freedom of expression, on the one hand, and editorial freedom of expression and the information rights of users, on the other hand, in pursuit of economic or other advantage. Moreover, recent trends in media distribution and consumption, including in particular in the online environment, have prompted Member States to consider laws aimed at regulating the provision of media content. Approaches taken by media service providers to guarantee editorial independence also vary. As a result of such interference and fragmentation of regulation and approaches, the conditions for the exercise of economic activities by media service providers and, ultimately, the quality of media services received by citizens and businesses are negatively affected in the internal market. It is thus necessary to put in place effective safeguards enabling the exercise of editorial freedom across the Union so that media service providers can independently produce and distribute their content across borders and service recipients can receive such content . (16) Journalists and editors are the main actors in the production and provi sion of trustworthy media content, in particular by reporting on news or current affairs. I t is essential therefore to protect journalists’ capability to collect, fact-check and analyse information, including information imparted confidentially. In particular, media service providers and journalists ( including those operating in non-standard forms of employment, such as freelancers) should be able to rely on a robust protection of journalistic sources and communications , including against deployment of surveillance technologies, since without such protection sources may be deterred from assisting the media in informing the public on matters of public interest. As a result, journalists’ freedom to exercise their economic activity and fulfil their vital ‘public watchdog’ role may be undermined, thus affecting negatively access to quality media services. The protection of journalistic sources contributes to the protection of the fundamental right enshrined in Article 11 of the Charter. (17) The protection of journalistic sources is currently regulated heterogeneously in the Member States. Some Member States provide an absolute protection against coercing journalists to disclose information that identify their source in criminal and administrative proceedings . O ther Member States provide a qualified protection confined to judicial proceedings based on certain criminal charges, while others provide protection in the form of a general principle. This leads to fragmentation in the internal media market. As a result, journalists, which work increasingly on cross-border projects and provide their services to cross-border audiences, and by extension providers of media services , are likely to face barriers, legal uncertainty and uneven conditions of competition. Therefore, the protection of journalistic sources and communications needs harmoni s ation and further strengthening at Union level . (18) Public service media established by the Member State s play a particular role in the internal media market , by ensur ing that citizens and businesses have access to quality information and impartial media coverage, as part of their mission . However, p ublic service media can be particularly exposed to the risk of interference, given their institutional proximity to the State and the public funding they receive. This risk may be exacerbated by uneven safeguards related to independent governance and balanced coverage by public service media across the Union. This situation may lead to biased or partial media coverage, distort competition in the internal media market and negatively affect access to independent and impartial media services. It is thus necessary, building on the international standards developed by the Council of Europe in this regard , to put in place legal safeguards for the independent functioning of public service media across the Union. It is also necessary to gu a rantee that, without prejudice to the application of the Union’s State aid rules, public service media providers benefit from sufficient and stable funding to fulfil their mission that enable s predictability in their planning . Preferably, such funding should be decided and appropriated on a multi-year basis, in line with the public service mission of public service media providers, to avoid potential for undue influence from yearly budget negotiations. The requirements laid down in this Regulation do not affect the competence of Member States to provide for the funding of public service media as enshrined in Protocol 29 on the system of public broadcasting in the Member States , annexed to the Treaty on European Union and to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union . (19) I t is crucial for the recipients of media services to know with certainty who owns and is behind the news media so that they can identify and understand potential conflicts of interest which is a prerequisite for forming well-informed opinion s and consequently to actively participate in a democracy . Such transparency is also an effective tool to limit risks of interference with editorial independence . It is thus necessary to introduce common information requirements for all relevant media service providers across the Union that should include proportionate requirement s to disclose ownership i nformation . In this context, the measures taken by Member States under Article 30(9) of Directive (EU) 2015/849 should not be affected. The required information should be disclosed by the relevant providers on their website s or other medium that is easily and directly accessible . (20) Media integrity also requires a proactive approach to promote editorial independence by news media companies , in particular through internal safeguards . M edia service provider s should adopt proportionate measures to guarantee , once the overall editorial line has been agreed between their owners and editors, the freedom of the editors to take individual decisions in the course of their professional activity. The objective to shield editors from undue interference in their decisions taken on specific pieces of content as part of their everyday work contributes to ensuring a level playing field in the internal market for media services and the quality of such services. That objective is also in conformity with the fundamental right to receive and impart information under Article 11 of the Charter . In view of these considerations, m edia service providers should also ensure transparency of actual or potential conflicts of interest to their service recipients . (21) To mitigate regulatory burdens, micro enterprises within the meaning of Article 3 of Directive 2013/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council should be exempted from the requirements related to information and internal safeguards with a view to guarantee ing the independence of individual editorial decisions . Moreover, media service providers should be free to tailor the internal safeguards to their needs, in particular if they are small and medium-sized enterprises within the meaning of that Article. The Recommendation that accompanies this Regulation provides a catalogue of voluntary internal safeguards that can be adopted within media companies in this regard. The present Regulation should not be construed to the effect of depriving the owners of private media service providers of their prerogative to set strategic or general goals and to foster the growth and financial viability of their undertakings. In this respect, th is Regulation recognise s that the goal of fostering editorial independence needs to be reconciled with the legitimate rights and interests of private media owners . (22) Independent national regulatory authorities or bodies are key for the proper application of media law across the Union . National regulatory authorities or bodies referred to in Article 30 of Directive 2010/13/EU are best placed to ensure the correct application of the requirements related to regulatory cooperation and a well-functioning market for media services , envisaged in Chapter III of this Regulation . In order to ensure a consistent application of this Regulation and other Union media law , it is necessary to set up an independent advisory body at Union level gathering such authorities or bodies and coordinating their actions. The European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA), established by Directive 2010/13/EU, has been essential in promoting the consistent implementation of that Directive. The European Board for Media Services (‘the Board’) should therefore build on ERGA and replace it. This requires a targeted amendment of Directive 2010/13/EU to delete its Article 30b, which establishes ERGA, and to replace references to ERGA and its tasks as a consequence . The amendment of Directive 2010/13/EU by this Regulation is justified in this case as it is limited to a provision which does not need to be transposed by Member States and is addressed to the institutions of the Union. (23) The Board should bring together senior representatives of the national regulatory authorities or bodies referred to in Article 30 of Directive 2010/13/EU , appointed by such authorities or bodies . In cases where Member States have several relevant regulatory authorities or bodies, including at regional level, a joint representative should be chosen through appropriate procedures and the voting right should remain limited to one representative per Member State. This should not affect the possibility for the other national regulatory authorities or bodies to participate, as appropriate, in the meetings of the Board. The Board should also have the possibility to invite to attend its meetings, in agreement with the Commission, experts and observers, including in particular regulatory authorities or bodies from candidate countries, potential candidate countries, EEA countries, or ad hoc delegates from other competent national authorities. Due to the sensitivity of the media sector and following the practice of ERGA decisions in accordance with its rules of procedure, the Board should adopt its decisions on the basis of a two-thirds majority of the votes . (24) Without prejudice to the powers granted to the Commission by the Treaties, i t is essential that the Commission and the Board work and cooperate closely . In particular, t he Board should actively support the Commission in its task s of ensuring the consistent application of this Regulation and of the national rules implementing Directive 2010/13/EU. For that purpose, the Board should in particular advise and assist the Commission on regulatory, technical or practical aspects pertinent to the application of U nion law, promote cooperation and the effective exchange of information, experience and best practices and draw up opinions in agreement with the Commission or upon its request in the cases envisaged by this Regulation . In order to effectively fulfil its tasks, t he Board should be able to rely on the expertise and human resources of a secretariat provided by the Commission. The Commission secretariat should provide administrative and organisational support to the Board, and help the Board in carrying out its tasks. (25) Regulatory cooperation between independent media regulatory authorities or bodies is essential to make the internal market for media services function properly. However, Directive 2010/13/EU does not provide for a structured cooperation framework for national regulatory authorities or bodies. Since the revision of the EU framework for audiovisual media services by Directive 2018/1808/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council , which extended its scope to video-sharing platforms, there has been an ever-increasing need for close cooperation among national regulatory authorities or bodies, in particular to resolve cross-border cases. Such a need is also justified in view of the new challenges in the EU media environment that this Regulation seeks to address, including by entrusting national regulatory authorities or bodies with new tasks. (26) To ensure the effective enforcement of Union media law , to prevent the possible circumvention of the applicable media rules by rogue media service providers and to avoid the raising of additional barriers in the internal market for media services , it is essential to provide for a clear, legally binding framework for national regulatory authorities or bodies to cooperate effectively and efficiently . (27) Due to the pan-European nature of video-sharing platforms, national regulatory authorities or bodies need to have a dedicated tool to protect viewers of video-sharing platform services from certain illegal and harmful content, including commercial communications. In particular, a mechanism is needed to allow any relevant national regulatory authority or body to request its peers to take necessary and proportionate actions to ensure enforcement of obligations under this Article by video-sharing platform providers. In case the use of such mechanism does not lead to an amicable solution, the freedom to provide information society services from another Member State can only be restricted if the conditions set out in Article 3 of Directive 2000/31/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council are met and following the procedure set out therein. (28) Ensuring a consistent regulatory practice regarding this Regulation and Directive 2010/13/EU is essential. For this purpose, and to contribute to ensuring a convergent implementation of EU media law, the Commission may issue guidelines on matters covered by both this Regulation and Directive 2010/13/EU when needed. When deciding to issu e guidelines, the Commission should consider in particular regulatory issues affecting a significant number of Member States or those with a cross-border element . This is the case in particular for national measures taken under Article 7a of Directive 2010/13/EU on the appropriate prominence of audiovisual media services of general interest . In view of the abundance of information and the increasing use of digital means to access the media, it is important to ensure prominence for content of general interest, in order to help achieving a level playing field in the internal market and compliance with the fundamental right to receive information under Article 11 of the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the Union. Given the possible impact of the national measures taken under Article 7a on the functioning of the internal media market, guidelines by the Commission would be important to achieve legal certainty in this field. It would also be useful to provide guidance o n national measures taken under Article 5(2) of Directive 2010/13/EU with a view to ensuring the public availability of accessible, accurate and up-to-date information related to media ownership. In the process of preparing its guidelines, the Commission should be assisted by the Board. The Board should in particular share with the Commission its regulatory, technical and practical expertise regarding the areas and topics covered by the respective guidelines. (29) In order to ensure a level playing field in the provision of diverse audiovisual media services in the face of technological developments in the internal market, it is necessary to find common technical prescriptions for devices controlling or managing access to and use of audiovisual media services or carrying digital signals conveying the audiovisual content from source to destination. In this context, it is important to avoid diverging technical standards creating barriers and additional costs for the industry and consumers while encouraging solutions to implement existing obligations concerning audiovisual media services. (30) R egulatory authorities or bodies referred to in Article 30 of Directive 2010/13/EU have specific practical expertise that allows them to effectively balance the interests of the providers and recipients of media services while ensuring the respect for the freedom of expression . This is key in particular when it comes to protecting the internal market from activities of media service providers established outside the Union that target audiences in the Union where, inter alia in view of the control that may be exercised by third countries over them , they may prejudice or pose risks of prejudice to public security and defence . In this regard , the coordination between national regulatory authorities or bodies to face together possible public security and defence threats stemming from such media services needs to be strengthened and given a legal framework to ensure the effectiveness and possible coordination of the national measures adopted in line with Union media legis l ation . In order to ensure that media services suspended in certain Member States under Article 3(3) and 3(5) of Directive 2010/13/EU do not continue to be provided via satellite or other means in those Member States, a mechanism of accelerated mutual cooperation and assistance should also be available to guarantee the ‘effet utile’ of the relevant national measures , in complian ce with Union law. Additionally, it is necessary to coordinate the national measures that may be adopted to counter public security and defence threats by media services established outside of the Union and targeting audiences in the Union, including the possibility for the Board, in agreement with the Commission, to issue opinions on such measures, as appropriate. In this regard, risks to public security and defence need to be assessed with a view to all relevant factual and legal elements, at national and European level. Th is is without prejudice to the competence of the Union under Article 215 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union . (31) Very large online platforms act for many users as a gateway for access to media services. Media service providers who exercise editorial responsibility over the ir content play an important role in the distribution of information and in the exercise of freedom of information online. When exercising such editorial responsibility, they are expected to act diligently and provide information that is trustworthy and respectful of fundamental rights, in line with the regulatory or self-regulatory requirements they are subject to in the Member States. Therefore, also in view of users’ freedom of information, where providers of very large online platforms consider that content provided by such media service providers is incompatible with their terms and conditions, while it is not contributing to a systemic risk referred to in Article 26 of Regulation (EU) 2022/XXX [the Digital Services Act], they should duly consider freedom and pluralism of media, in accordance with Regulation (EU) 2022/XXX [the Digital Services Act] and provide, as early as possible, the necessary explanations to media service providers as their business users in the statement of reasons under Regulation (EU) 2019/1150 of the European Parliament and of the Council . To minimise the impact of any restriction to that content on users’ freedom of information, very large online platforms should endeavour to submit the statement of reasons prior to the restriction taking effect without prejudice to their obligations under Regulation (EU) 2022/XXX [the Digital Services Act] . In particular , this Regulation should not prevent a provider of a very large online platform to take expeditious measures either against illegal content disseminated through its service, or in order to mitigate systemic risks posed by dissemination of certain content through its service, in compliance with Union law, in particular pursuant to Regulation (EU) 2022/XXX [the Digital Services Act] . (32) It is furthermore justified, in view of an expected positive impact on freedom to provide services and freedom of expression, that where media service providers adhere to certain regulatory or self-regulatory standards, their complaints against decisions of providers of very large online platforms are treated with priority and without undue delay. (33) To this end, providers of very large online platforms should provide a functionality on their online interface to enable media service providers to declare that they meet certain requirements, while at the same time retaining the possibility not to accept such self-declaration where they consider that these conditions are not met. Providers of very large online platforms may rely on information regarding adherence to these requirements, such as the machine-readable standard of the Journalism Trust Initiative or other relevant codes of conduct. Guidelines by the Commission may be useful to facilitate an effective implementation of such functionality, including on modalities of involvement of relevant civil society organisations in the review of the declarations, on consultation of the regulator of the country of establishment, where relevant, and address any potential abuse of the functionality. (34) This Regulation recognises the importance of self-regulatory mechanisms in the context of the provision of media services on very large online platforms. They represent a type of voluntary initiatives , for instance in a form of codes of conduct, which enable media service providers or their representatives to adopt common guidelines, including on ethical standards, correction of errors or complaint handling, amongst themselves and for themselves. Robust, inclusive and widely-recognised media self-regulation represents an effective guarantee of quality and professionalism of media services and is key for safeguarding editorial integrity. (35) Providers of very large online platforms should engage with media service providers that respect standards of credibility and transparency and that consider that restrictions on their content are frequently imposed by providers of very large online platforms without sufficient grounds , in order to find an amicable solution for terminating any unjustified restrictions and avoiding them in the future . Providers of very large online platforms should engage in such exchanges in good faith, paying particular attention to safeguarding media freedom and freedom of information. (36) Building on the useful role played by ERGA in monitoring compliance by the signatories of EU Code of Practice on Disinformation, the Board should , at least on a yearly basis, organise a structured dialogue between providers of very large online platforms, representatives of media service providers and representatives of civil society to foster access to diverse offer s of independent media on very large online platforms , discuss experience and best practices related to the application of the relevant provisions of this Regulation and to monitor adherence to self-regulatory initiatives aimed at protecting society from harmful content, including those aimed at countering disinformation. The Commission may, where relevant, examine the reports on the results of such structured dialogues when assessing systemic and emerging issues across the Union under Regulation (EU) 2022/ XX X [ D igital S ervices A ct] and may ask the Board to support it to this effect. (37) Recipients of audiovisual media services should be able to effectively choose the audiovisual content they want to watch according to their preferences. Their freedom in this area may however be constrained by commercial practices in the media sector, namely agreements for content prioritisation between manufacturers of devices or providers of user interfaces controlling or managing access to and use of audiovisual media services, such as connected televisions, and media service providers. Prioritisation can be implemented, for example, on the home screen of a device, through hardware or software shortcuts, applications and search areas, which have implications on the recipients’ viewing behaviour , who may be unduly incentivised to choose certain audiovisual media offers over others . Service recipients should have the possibility to change, in a simple and user-friendly manner, the default settings of a device or user interface controlling and managing access to , and use of, audiovisual media services, without prejudice to measures to ensure the appropriate prominence of audiovisual media services of general interest implementing Article 7a of Directive 2010/13/EC, taken in the pursuit of legitimate public policy considerations. (38) Different legislative, regulatory or administrative measures can negatively affect the operation of media service providers in the internal market. They include, for example, rules to limit the ownership of media companies by other companies active in the media sector or non-media related sectors; they also include decisions related to licensing, authorisation or prior notification for media service providers. In order to mitigate their potential negative impact on the functioning of the internal market for media services and enhance legal certainty, it is important that such measures comply with the principles of objective justification, transparency, non-discrimination and proportionality. (39) It is also key that the Board is empowered to issue an opinion, on the Commission’s request , where national measures are likely to affect the functioning of the internal market for media services. This is, for example, the case when a national administrative measure is addressed to a media service provider providing its services towards more than one Member State, or when the concerned media service provider has a significant influence on the formation of public opinion in that Member State. (40) Media play a decisive role in shaping public opinion and helping citizens participate in democratic processes. This is why Member States should provide for rules and procedures in their legal systems to ensure assessment of media market concentrations that could have a significant impact on media pluralism or editorial independence. Such rules and procedures can have an impact on the freedom to provide media services in the internal market and need to be properly framed and be transparent, objective, proportionate and non-discriminatory . Media market concentrations subject to such rules should be understood as covering those which could result in a single entity controlling or having significant interests in media services which have substantial influence on the formation of public opinion in a given media market, within a media sub-sector or across different media sectors in one or more Member States. An important criterion to be taken into account is the reduction of competing views within that market as a result of the concentration. (41) National regulatory authorities or bodies, who have specific expertise in the area of media pluralism, should be involved in the assessment of the impact of media market concentrations on media pluralism and editorial independence where they are not the designated authorities or bodies themselves. In order to foster legal certainty and ensure that the rules and procedures are genuinely geared at protecting media pluralism and editorial independence, it is essential that objective, non-discriminatory and proportionate criteria for notifying and assessing the impact of media market concentrations on media pluralism and editorial independence are set out in advance . (42) When a media market concentration constitutes a concentration falling within the scope of Council Regulation (EC) No 139/2004 , the application of this Regulation or of any rules and procedures adopted by Member States on the basis of this Regulation should not affect the application of Article 21(4) of Regulation (EC) No 139/2004. Any measures taken by the designated or involved national regulatory authorities or bodies based on their assessment of the impact of media market concentrations on media pluralism and editorial independence should therefore be aimed at protecting legitimate interests within the meaning of Article 21(4 ), third subparagraph, of Regulation (EC) No 139/2004 , and should be in line with the general principles and other provisions of Union law . (43) The Board should be empowered to provide opinions on draft decisions or opinions by the designated or involved national regulatory authorities or bodies, where the notifiable concentrations may affect the functioning of the internal media market. This would be the case, for example, where such concentrations involve at least one undertaking established in another Member State or operating in more than one Member State or result in media service providers having a significant influence on formation of public opinion in a given media market. Moreover, where the concentration has not been assessed for its impact on media pluralism and editorial independence by the relevant national authorities or bodies, or where the national regulatory authorities or bodies have not consulted the Board regarding a given media market concentration, but that media market concentration is considered likely to affect the functioning of the internal market for media services, the Board should be able to provide an opinion, upon request of the Commission . In any event, the Commission retains the possibility to issue its own opinions following the opinions drawn up by the Board. (44) With a view to ensuring pluralistic media markets, the national authorities or bodies and the Board should take account of a set of criteria. In particular, impact on media plurali sm should be considered, including notably the effect on the formation of public opinion, taking into account of the online environment. Concurrently, it should be consider ed whether other media outlets, providing different and alternative content, would still coexist in the given market(s) after the media market concentration in question. Assessment of safeguards for editorial independence should include the examination of potential risks of undue interference by the prospective owner, management or governance structure in the individual editorial decisions of the acquired or merged entity. T he existing or envisaged internal safeguards aimed at preserving independence of the individual editorial decisions within the media undertakings involved should also be taken into account . In assessing the potential impacts, the effects of the concentration in question on the economic sustainability of the entity or entities subject to the concentration should also be considered and whether, in the absence of the concentration, they would be economically sustainable, in the sense that they would be able in the medium term to continue to provide and further develop financially viable, adequately resourced and technologically adapted quality media services in the market . (45) Audience measurement has a direct impact on the allocation and the prices of advertising, which represents a key revenue source for the media sector. It is a crucial tool to evaluate the performance of media content and understand the preferences of audiences in order to plan the future production of content . Accordingly , media m arket players , in particular media service providers and advertisers , should be able to rely on objective audience data stemming from transparent, unbiased and verifiable audience measurement solutions. However, certain new players that have emerged in the media ecosystem provide their own measurement services without making available information on their methodologies. This could result in i nformation asymmetries among media market players and in potential market distortions , to the detriment of equality of opportunities for media service providers in the market. (46) In order to enhance the verifiability and reliability of audience measurement methodologies, in particular online, transparency obligations should be laid down for providers of audience measurement systems that do not abide by the industry benchmarks agreed within the relevant self-regulatory bodies. Under these obligations, such actors, when requested and to the extent possible, should provide advertisers and media service providers or parties acting on their behalf, with information describing the methodologies employed for the measurement of the audience. Such information could consist in providing elements, such as the size of the sample measured, the definition of the indicators that are measured, the metrics, the measurement methods and the margin of error as well as the measurement period. The obligations imposed under this Regulation are without prejudice to any obligations that apply to providers of audience measurement services under Regulation 2019/1150 or Regulation (EU) 2022/ XX [D igital M arkets A ct ], including those concerning ranking or self-preferencing. (47) Codes of conduct, drawn up either by the providers of audience measurement systems or by organisations or associations representing them, can contribute to the effective application of this Regulation and should, therefore, be encouraged. Self-regulation has already been used to foster high quality standards in the area of audience measurement. Its further development could be seen as an effective tool for the industry to agree on the practical solutions needed for ensuring compliance of audience measurement systems and their methodologies with the principles of transparency, impartiality, inclusiveness, proportionality, non-discrimination and verifiability. When drawing up such codes of conduct, in consultation with all relevant stakeholders and notably media service providers, account could be taken in particular of the increasing digitalisation of the media sector and the objective of achieving a level playing field among media market players. (48) State advertising is an important source of revenue for many media service providers, contributing to their economic sustainability. Access to it must be granted in a non-discriminatory way to any media service provider from any Member State which can adequately reach some or all of the relevant members of the public, in order to ensure equal opportunities in the internal market. Moreover, State advertising may make media service providers vulnerable to undue state influence to the detriment of the freedom to provide services and fundamental rights. Opaque and biased allocation of state advertising is therefore a powerful tool to exert influence or ‘capture’ media service providers. The distribution and transparency of state advertising are in some regards regulated through a fragmented framework of media-specific measures and general public procurement laws, which, however, may not cover all state advertising expenditure nor offer sufficient protection against preferential or biased distribution. In particular, Directive 2014/24/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council does not apply to public service contracts for the acquisition, development, production or co-production of programme material intended for audiovisual media services or radio media services. Media-specific rules on state advertising, where they exist, diverge significantly from one Member State to another. (49) In order to ensure undistorted competition between media service providers and to avoid the risk of covert subsidies and of undue political influence on the media, it is necessary to establish common requirements of transparency, objectivity , proportionality and non-discrimination in the allocation of s tate advertising and of state resources to media service providers for the purpose of purchasing goods or services from them other than state advertising, including the requirement to publish information on the beneficiaries of s tate advertising expenditure and the amounts spent. It is important that Member States make the necessary information related to s tate advertising publicly accessible in an electronic format that is easy to view, access and download, in compliance with Union and national rules on commercial confidentiality. This Regulation shall not affect the application of the State aid rules , which are applied on a case-by-case basis . (50) Risks to the functioning and resilience of the internal media market should be regularly monitored as part of the efforts to improve the functioning of the internal market for media services. Such monitoring should aim at providing detailed data and qualitative assessments on the resilience of the internal market for media services , including as regards the degree of concentration of the market at national and regional level and risks of foreign information manipulation and interference . It should be conducted independently, on the basis of a robust list of key performance indicators, developed and regularly updated by the Commission, in consultation with the Board. Given the rapidly evolving nature of risks and technological developments in the internal media market, the monitoring should include forward-looking exercises such as stress tests to assess the prospective resilience of the internal media market, to alert about vulnerabilities around media pluralism and editorial independence, and to help efforts to improve governance, data quality and risk management. In particular, the level of cross-border activity and investment, regulatory cooperation and convergence in media regulation, obstacles to the provision of media services, including in a digital environment, as well as transparency and fairness of allocation of economic resources in the internal media market should be covered by the monitoring. It should also consider broader trends in the internal media market and national media markets as well as national legislation affecting media service providers. In addition, the monitoring should provide an overview of measures taken by media service providers with a view to guaranteeing the ind ep endence of individual editorial decisions , including those proposed in the accompanying Recommendation . In order to ensure the highest standards of such monitoring, the Board, as it gathers entities with a specialised media market expertise, should be duly involved. (51) To prepare the ground for a correct implementation of this Regulation, its provisions concerning independent media authorities, the Board and the required amendments to Directive 2010/13/EU ( Articles 7 to 12 and 27 of this Regulation) should apply 3 months after the entry into force of the Act, while all other provisions of this Regulation will apply 6 months after the entry into force of this Regulation . In particular, this is needed to ensure that the Board will be established in time to ensure a successful implementation of the Regulation. (52) Since the objectives of this Regulation , namely ensuring the proper functioning of the internal market for media services, cannot be sufficiently achieved by the Member States, because they cannot or might not have incentives to achieve the necessary harmonisation and cooperation acting alone, but can rather, by reason s of the increasingly digital and cross-border production, distribution and consumption of media content as well as the unique role of media service s , be better achieved at the Union level , the Union may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article 5 of the Treaty on European Union. In accordance with the principle of proportionality as set out in that Article, this Regulation does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve th ose objective s . (53) This Regulation respects the fundamental rights and observes the principles recognised in particular by the Charter, in particular Articles 7, 8, 11, 16, 47, 50 and 52 thereof. Accordingly, this Regulation should be interpreted and applied with due respect to those rights and principles. In particular, nothing in this Regulation should be interpreted as interfering with freedom of information or freedom of the press, or incentivising Member States to introduce requirements for editorial content of press publications. (54) The European Data Protection Supervisor was consulted in accordance with Article 42(1) of Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 of the European Parliament and of the Council and delivered an opinion on XX XX 2022 . HAVE ADOPTED THIS REGULATION: Chapter I General Provisions Article 1 Subject matter and scope 1. This Regulation lays down common rules for the proper functioning of the internal market for media services, including the establishment of the European Board for Media Services, while preserv ing the quality of media services. 2. T his Regulation shall not affect rules laid down by : (a) Directive 2000/31/EC; (b) Directive 2019/790/EU; (c) Regulation 2019/1150; (d) Regulation (EU) 2022/ XX X [the Digital Services Act] ; (e) Regulation (EU) 2022/ XX X [the Digital Markets Act] ; (f) Regulation (EU) 2022/ XX X [Regulation on the transparency and targeting of political advertising ] . 3. This Regulation shall not affect the possibility for Member States to adopt more detailed rules in the fields covered by Chapter II and Section 5 of Chapter III, provided that those rules comply with Union law. Article 2 Definitions For the purposes of this Regulation, the following definitions shall apply: ‘ m edia service’ means a service as defined by Articles 56 and 57 of the Treaty, where the principal purpose of the service or a dissociable section thereof consist s in providing programmes or press publications to the general public , by any means, in order to inform, entertain or educate, under the editorial responsibility of a media service provider ; ‘ m edia service provider’ means a natural or legal person whose professional activity is to provide a media service and who has editorial responsibility for the choice of the content of the media service and determines the manner in which it is organised ; ‘ p ublic service media provider’ means a media service provider which is entrusted with a public service mission under national law or receiv es national public funding for the fulfilment of such a mission ; ‘ p rogramme’ means a set of moving images or sound s constituting an individual item, irrespective of its length, within a schedule or a catalogue established by a media service provider ; ‘ p ress publication’ means a publication as defined in Article 2(4) of Directive 2019/790/EU; ‘ a udiovisual media service’ means a service as defined in Article 1(1) , point (a) , of Directive 2010/13/EU; ‘ e ditor’ means a natural person or a number of natural persons possibly grouped in a body , regardless of its legal form, status and composition, that takes or supervises editorial decisions within a media service provider ; ‘ e ditorial decision’ means a decision taken on a regular basis for the purpose of exercising editorial responsibility and linked to the day-to-day operation of a media service provider ; ‘ e ditorial responsibility’ means the exercise of effective control both over the selection of the programmes or press publications and over their organisation , for the purposes of the provision of a media service, regardless of the existence of liability under national law for the service provided; ‘ p rovider of very large online platform’ means a provider of a n online platform that has been designated as a very large online platform pursuant to Article 25(4) of Regulation (EU) 2022/ XXX [Digital Services Act] ; ‘ v ideo-sharing platform service’ means a service as defined in Article 1(1) , point (aa) , of Directive 2010/13/EU ; ‘ n ational regulatory authorit y or bod y ’ means the authorit y or bod y designated by Member State s pursuant to Article 30 of Directive 2010/13/EU ; ‘ m edia market concentration ’ means a concentration as defined in Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 139/2004 involving at least one media service provider ; ‘ a udience measurement’ means the activity of collecting, interpreting or otherwise processing data about the number and characteristics of users of media services for the purposes of decisions regarding advertising allocation or prices or the related planning, production or distribution of content ; ‘ S tate advertising’ means the placement, publication or dissemination, in any media service , of a promotional or self-promotional message , normally in return for payment or for any other consideration , by, for or on behalf of any national or regional public authority, such as national, federal or regional governments, regulatory authorities or bodies as well as state-owned enterprises or other state-controlled entities at the national or regional level , or any local government of a territorial entity of more than 1 million inhabitants ; ‘ s pyware’ means any product with digital elements specially designed to exploit vulnerabilities in other products with digital elements that enables the covert surveillance of natural or legal persons by monitoring, extracting, collecting or analysing data from such products or from the natural or legal persons using such products , in particular by secretly recording calls or otherwise using the microphone of an end-user device, filming natural persons , machines or their surroundings, copying messages, photographing, tracking browsing activity, tracking geolocation, collecting other sensor data or tracking activities across multiple end-user devices, without the natural or legal person concerned being made aware in a specific manner and having given their express specific consent in that regard ; ‘ s erious crime’ means any of the following criminal offences listed in Art icle 2(2) of the Council Framework Decision 2002/584/JHA : (a) terrorism, (b) traffickin g in human beings, (c) sexual exploitation of children and child pornography, (d) illicit trafficking in weapons, munitions and explosives, ( e ) murder, grievous bodily injur y , ( f ) illicit trade in human organs and tissues, ( g ) kidnapping, illegal restraint and hostage-taking, ( h ) organised or armed robbery, ( i ) rape, ( j ) crimes within the juri s diction of the International Criminal Court. Chapter II Rights and duties of media service providers and recipients Article 3 Rights of recipients of media services Recipients of media services in the Union shall have the right to receive a plurality of news and current affairs content , produced with respect for editorial freedom of media service providers , to the benefit of the public discourse. Article 4 Rights of media service providers 1. Media service providers shall have the right to exercise their economic activities in the internal market without restrictions other than those allowed under Union law . 2. Member States shall respect effective editorial freedom of media service providers. Member States , including their national regulatory authorities and bodies , shall not: (a) interfere in or try to influence in any way, directly or indirectly, editorial policies and decisions by media service providers; (b) detain, sanction, intercept, subject to surveillance or search and seizure , or inspect media service providers or , if applicable, their family members, their employees or their family members , or their corporate and private premises , on the ground that they refuse to disclose information on their sources, unless this is justified by an overriding requirement in the public interest , in accordance with Article 52(1) of the Charter and in compliance with other Union law ; (c) deploy spyware in any device or machine used by media service providers or, if applicable, their family members, or their employees or their family members, unless the deployment is justified, on a case-by-case basis, on grounds of national security and is in compliance with Article 52(1) of the Charter and other Union law or the deployment occurs in serious crimes investigations of one of the aforementioned persons , it is provided for under national law and is in compliance with Article 52(1) of the Charter and other Union law , and measures adopted pursuant to sub-paragraph (b) would be inadequate and insufficient to obtain the information sought . 3. Without prejudice and in addition to the right to effective judicial protection guaranteed to each natural and legal person, Member States shall designate an independent authority or body to handle complaints lodged by media service providers or , if applicable, their family members, their employees or their family members, regarding breaches of paragraph 2, points (b) and (c). Media service providers shall have the right to request that authority or body to issue, within three months of the request , an opinion regarding compliance with paragraph 2, points (b) and (c). Article 5 Safeguards for the independent functioning of public service media providers 1. Public service media providers shall provide in an impartial manner a plurality of information and opinions to their audiences, in accordance with their public service mission. 2. The head of management and the members of the governing board of public service media providers shall be appointed through a transparent, open and non-discriminatory procedure and on the basis of transparent, objective, non-discriminatory and proportionate criteria laid down in advance by national law. The duration of their term of office shall be established by national law, and be adequate and sufficient to ensure effective independence of the public media service provider . They may be dismissed before the end of their term of office only exceptional ly where they no longer fulfil the legally predefined conditions required for the performance of their duties laid down in advance by national law or for specific reasons of illegal conduct or serious misconduct as defined in advance by national law. Dismissal decisions shall be duly justified, subject to prior notification to the person concerned , and include the possibility for judicial review . T he grounds for dismissal shall be made available to the public. 3. Member States shall ensure that public service media providers have adequate and stable financial resources for the fulfilment of the ir public service mission . Those resources shall be such that editorial independence is safeguarded. 4. Member States shall designate one or more independent authorit ies or bod ies in order to monitor compliance with paragraphs 1 to 3 . Article 6 Duties of media service providers providing news and current affairs content 1. Media service providers providing news and current affairs content shall make easily and directly accessible to the recipients of their service s the following information : (a) their legal name and contact details; (b) the name(s) of the ir direct or indirect owner(s) with shareholdings enabling them to exercise influence on the operation and strategic decision making ; (c) t h e name(s) of their beneficial owners within the meaning of Article 3 , point 6 of Directive (EU) 2015/84 9 of the European Parliament and of the Council . 2. Without prejudice to national constitutional laws consistent with the Charter, m edia service providers providing news and current affairs content shall take measures that they deem appropriate with a view to guarantee ing the independence of individual editorial decisions. I n particular, such measures shall aim to : (a) guarantee that editors are free to take individual editorial decisions in the exercise of their professional activity; and (b) ensure disclosure of any actual or potential conflict of interest by any party having a stake in media service providers that may affect the provision of news and current affairs content. 3 . The obligations under this Article shall not apply to media service providers that are micro enterprises within the meaning of Article 3 of Directive 2013/34/EU. Chapter III Framework for regulatory cooperation and a well-functioning internal market for media services Section 1 Independent media authorities Article 7 National r egulatory authorities or bodies 1. The n ational regulatory authorities or bodies referred to in Article 30 of Directive 2010/13/EU shall be responsible for the application of Chapter III of this Regulation. 2. The national regulatory authorities or bodies shall be subject to the requirements set out in Article 30 of Directive 2010/13/EU in relation to the exercise of the tasks assigned to them by this Regulation. 3. Member States shall ensure that the national regulatory authorities or bodies have adequate financial , human and technical resources to carry out their tasks under this Regulation . 4. Where needed for carrying out their tasks under this Regulation , the national regulatory authorities or bodies shall have appropriate powers of investigation, with regard to the conduct of natural or legal persons to which Chapter III applies . Th o se powers shall include in particular the power to request such persons to provide, within a reasonable time period, information that is proportionate and necessary for carrying out the tasks under Chapter III; the request can also be addressed to any other person that, for purposes related to their trade, business or profession , may reasonably be in possession of the information needed . Section 2 European Board for Media Services Article 8 European Board for Media Services 1. The European Board for Media Services ( ‘ the Board’) is established. 2. The Board shall replace and succeed the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA) established by Directive 2010/13/EU. Article 9 Independence of the Board The Board shall act in full independen ce when performing its tasks or exercising its powers. In particular, the Board shall, in the performance of its tasks or the exercise of its powers, neither seek nor take instructions from any government, institution, person or body. This shall not affect the competences of the Commission or the national regulatory authorities or bodies in conformity with this Regulation. Article 10 Structure of the Board 1. The Board shall be composed of representatives of national regulatory authorities or bodies referred to in Article 30 of Directive 2010/13/EU . 2. Each member of the Board shall have one vote. 3. Where a Member State has more than one national regulatory authority or body, those regulatory authorities or bodies shall coordinate with each other as necessary and appoint a joint representative which shall exercise the right to vote. 4. The Board shall be represented by its Chair. The Board shall elect a Chair from amongst its members by a two-thirds majority of its members with voting rights . The term of office of the Chair shall be two years. 5. The Commission shall designate a representative to the Board. The representative of t he Commission shall participate in all activities and meetings of the Board, without voting rights. The Chair of the Board shall keep the Commission informed about the ongoing and planned activities of the Board. The Board shall consult the Commission in preparation of its work programme and main deliverables . 6. The Board, in agreement with the Commission, may invite experts and observers to attend its meetings . 7. The Board shall take decisions by a two-thirds majority of its members with voting rights. 8. The Board shall adopt its rules of procedure by a two-thirds majority of its members with voting rights, in agreement with the Commission. Article 11 Secretariat of the Board 1. The Board shall have a secretariat, which shall be provided by the Commission. 2. The main task of the secretariat shall be to contribute to the execution of the tasks of the Board laid down in this Regulation and in Directive 2010/13/EU. 3. The secretariat shall provide administrative and organisational support to the activities of the Board. The s ecretariat shall also assist the Board in carrying out its tasks. Article 12 Tasks of the Board Without prejudice to the powers granted to the Commission by the Treaties, t he Board shall promote the effective and consistent application of this Regulation and of national rules implementing Directive 2010/13/EU throughout the Union. The Board shall: (a) support the Commission , through technical expertise, in ensuring the correct application of this Regulation and the consistent implementation of Directive 2010/13/EU across all Member States, without prejudice to the tasks of national regulatory authorities or bodies; (b) promote cooperation and the effective exchange of information , experience and best practices between the national regulatory authorities or bodies on the application of the Union and national rules applicable to media services, including this Regulation and Directive 2010/13/EU , in particular as regards Articles 3, 4 and 7 of that Directive ; (c) advi s e the Commission, whe re requested by it , on regulatory , technical or practical aspects pertinent to the consistent application of this Regulation and implementation of Directive 2010/13/EU a s well as all on other matters related to media services within its competence . W here the Commission requests advice or opinions from the Board, it may indicate a time limit, taking into account the urgency of the matter ; (d) whe n requested by the Commission, provide opinions on the technical and factual issues that arise with regard to Article 2(5c), Article 3(2) and (3), Article 4(4 ), point (c ) and Article 28a(7) of Directive 2010/13/EU ; (e) in agreement with the Commission, draw up opinions with respect to : (i) requests for cooperation and mutual assistance between national regulatory authorities or bodies, in accordance with Article 13 (7) of this Regulation ; (ii) requests for enforcement measures in case of disagreement between the requesting authority or body and the requested authority or body regarding the actions recommended pursuant to A rticle 14(4) of this Regulation ; (iii) national measures concerning media service providers established outside of the Union, in accordance with Article 16(2) of this Regulation; (f) upon request of the Commission, draw up opinions with respect to: (i ) national measures which are likely to affect the functioning of the internal market for media services, in accordance with Article 20(4) of this Regulation; (ii ) media market concentrations which are likely to affect the functioning of the internal market for media services, in accordance with Article 22 (1) of this Regulation; (g) draw up opinions on draft national opinions or decisions assessing the impact on media pluralism and editorial independence of a notifiable media market concentration where such a concentration may affect the functioning of the internal market, in accordance with Article 21(5) of this Regulation ; (h) assist the Commission in drawing up guidelines with respect to : (i) the application of this Regulation and of the national rules implementing Directive 2010/13, in accordance with Article 15( 2) of this Regulation . (ii) factors to be taken into account when applying the criteria for assessing the impact of media market concentrations, in accordance wi th Article 21( 3 ) of this Regulation ; (i ii ) the application of Articles 23(1 ) , (2) and ( 3) pursuant to Article 23(4) of this Regulation . (i) upon request of at least one of the concerned authorities, mediate in the case of disagreements between national regulatory authorities or bodies, in accordance with Article 14(3) of this Regulation ; (j) foster cooperation on technical standards related to digital signals and the design of devices or user interfaces , in accordance with Article 15(4) of this Regulation ; (k) coordinate national measures related to the dissemination of or access to content of media service providers established outside of the Union that target audiences in the Union , where their activities prejudice or present a serious and grave risk of prejudice to public security and defence , in accordance with Article 16 (1) of this Regulation ; (l) organise a structured dialogue between providers of very large online platforms, representatives of media service providers and of civil society, and report on its results to the Commission, in accordance with Article 1 8 of this Regulation ; (m) foster the exchange of best practices related to the deployment of audience measurement systems, in accordance with Article 23(5) of this Regulation . Section 3 Regulatory cooperation and convergence Article 13 Structured cooperation 1. A national regulatory authority or body may request ( ‘ requesting authority ’ ) cooperation or mutual assistance at any time from one or more national regulatory authorities or bodies ( ‘ requested authorities ’ ) for the purposes of exchange of information or taking measures relevant for the consistent and effective application of this Regulation or the national measures implementing Directive 2010/13/EU. 2. Where a national regulatory authority or body considers that there is a serious and grave risk of prejudice to the functioning of the internal market for media services or a serious and grave risk of prejudice to public security and defence, it may request other national regulatory authorities or bodies to provide accelerated cooperation or mutual assistance, while ensuring compliance with fundamental rights, in particular freedom of expression. 3. Requests for cooperation or mutual assistance, including accelerated cooperation or mutual assistance , shall contain all the necessary information, including the purpose of and reasons for it . 4. The requested authority may refuse to address the request only in the following cases : (a) it is not competent for the subject matter of the request or for the measures it is requested to take; (b) execution of the request would infringe this Regulation, Directive 2010/13/EU or other Union legislation or Member State law compliant with Union law to which the requested authority is subject. The requested authority shall provide reasons for any refusal to address a request. 5. The requested authority shall inform the requesting authority of the results achieved or of the progress of the measures taken in response to the request. 6. The requested authority shall do its utmost to address and reply to the request without undue delay. The requested authority shall provide intermediary results within the period of 14 calendar days from the receipt of the request , with subsequent regular updates on the progress of execution of the request. In case of requests for accelerated cooperation or mutual assistance, the requested authority shall address and reply to the request within 14 calendar days. 7. Where the requesting authority does not consider the measures taken by the requested authority to be sufficient to address and reply to its request, it shall inform the requested authority without undue delay, explaining the reasons for its position. If the requested authority does not agree with that position, or if the requested authority’s reaction is missing , either authority may refer the matter to the Board . W ithin 14 calendar days from the receipt of that referral, the Board shall issue , in agreement with the Commission , an opinion on the matter, including recommended actions. The requested authority shall do its outmost to take into account the opinion of the Board. Article 14 Requests for enforcement of obligations by video - sharing platforms 1. Without prejudice to Article 3 of Directive 2000/31/EC, a national regulatory authority or body may request another national regulatory authority or body to take necessary and proportionate actions for the effective enforcement of the obligations imposed on video - sharing platforms under Article 28b of Directive 2010/13/EU. 2. The requested national authority or body shall , without undue delay and within 30 calendar days, inform the requesting national authority or body about the actions taken or planned pursuant to paragraph 1. 3. In the event of a disagreement between the requesting national authority or body and the requested authority or body regarding actions taken pursuant to paragraph 1, either authority or body may refer the matter to the Board for mediation in view of finding an amicable solution. 4. If no amicable solution has been found following mediation by the Board, the requesting national authority or body or the requested national authority or body may request the Board to issue an opinion on the matter. In its opinion the Board shall assess whether the requested authority or body has complied with a request referred to in paragraph 1. If the Board considers that the requested authority has not complied with such a request, the Board shall recommend actions to comply with the request. The Board shall issue its opinion , in agreement with the Commission, without undue delay . 5. The requested national authority or body shall, without undue delay and within 30 calendar days at the latest from the receipt of the opinion referred to in paragraph 4 , inform the Board , the Commission and the requesting authority or body of the actions taken or planned in relation to the opinion. Article 15 Guidance on media regulation matters 1. The Board shall foster the exchange of best practices among the national regulatory authorities or bodies , consulting stakeholders , where appropriate, and in close cooperation with the Commission, on regulatory , technical or practical aspects pertinent to the consistent and effective application of this Regulation and of the national rules implementing Directive 2010/13/EU. 2. Where the Commission issues guidelines related to the application of this Regulation or the national rules implementing Directive 2010/13/EU, t he Board shall assist it by providing expertise on regulatory, technical or practical aspects, as regards in particular : (a) the appropriate prominence of audiovisual media services of general interest under Article 7a of Directive 2010/13/EU ; (b) making information accessible on the ownership structure of media service providers, as provided under Article 5(2) of Directive 2010/13/EU. 3 . The Commission may issue an opinion on any matter related to the application of this Regulation and of the national rules implementing Directive 2010/13/EU. The Board shall assist the Commission in this regard, where requested. 4 . The Board shall foster cooperation between media service providers, standardisation bodies or any other relevant stakeholders in order to facilitate the development of technical standards related to digital signals or design of devices or user interfaces controlling or managing access to and use of audiovisual media services. Article 16 Coordination of measures concerning media service providers established outside the Union 1. The Board shall coordinate measures by national regulatory authorities or bodies related to the dissemination of or access to media services provided by media service providers established outside the Union that target audiences in the Union where , inter alia in view of the control that may be exercised by third countries over them, such media services prejudice or present a serious and grave risk of prejudice to public security and defence. 2. T he Board , in agreement with the Commission , may issue opinions on appropriate national measures under paragraph 1. All competent national authorities , including the national regulatory authorities or bodies , shall do their utmost to take into account the opinions of the Board . Section 4 Provision of media services in a digital environment Article 17 Content of media service providers on very large online platforms 1. Providers of very large online platforms shall provide a functionality allowing recipient s of their services to declare that: (a) it is a media service provider within the meaning of Article 2( 2 ); (b) it is editorially independent from Member S tate s and third countries ; and (c) it is subject to regulatory requirements for the exercise of editorial responsibility in one or more Member States, or adheres to a co-regulatory or self-regulatory mechanism governing editorial standards , widely recognised and accepted in the relevant media sector in one or more Member States . 2. Where a provider of very large online platform decides to suspend the provision of its online intermediation services in relation to content provided by a media service provider that submitted a declaration pursuant to paragraph 1 of this Article , on the grounds that such content is incompatible with its terms and conditions, without that content contributing to a systemic risk referred to in Article 26 of the Regulation (EU) 2022/XXX [Digital Services Act ], it shall take all possible measures , to the extent consistent with their obligations under Union law, including Regulation (EU) 2022/ XXX [D igital S ervices A ct ], to communicate to the media service provider concerned the statement of reasons accompanying that decision , as required by Article 4(1) of Regulation (EU) 2019/1150 , prior to the suspension taking effect . 3. Providers of very large online platforms shall take all the necessary technical and organisational measures to ensure that complaints under Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2019/1150 by media service providers that submitted a declaration pursuant to paragraph 1 of this Article are processed and decided upon with priority and without undue delay. 4. Where a media service provider that submitted a declaration pursuant to paragraph 1 considers that a provider of very large online platform frequently restricts or suspends the provision of its services in relation to content provided by the media service provider without sufficient grounds, the provider of very large online platform shall engage in a meaningful and effective dialogue with the media service provider , upon its request, in good faith with a view to finding an amicable solution for terminating unjustified restrictions or suspension s and avoiding them in the future . The media service provider may notify the outcome of such exchanges to the Board . 5. Providers of very large online platforms shall make publicly available on an annual basis information on: (a) the number of instances where they imposed any restriction or suspension on the grounds that the content provided by a media service provider that submitted a declaration in accordance with paragraph 1 of this Article is incompatible with their terms and conditions; and (b) the grounds for imposing such restrictions. 6. With a view to facilitating the consistent and effective implementation of this Article, the Commission may issue guidelines to establish the form and details of the declaration set out in paragraph 1. Article 18 Structured dialogue 1. The Board shall regularly organise a structured dialogue between providers of very large online platforms, representatives of media service providers and representatives of civil society to discuss experience and best practices in the application of Article 17 of this Regulation , to foster access to diverse offers of independent media on very large online platforms and to monitor adherence to self-regulatory initiatives aimed at protecting society from harmful content, including disinformation and foreign information manipulation and interference . 2. The Board shall report on the results of the dialogue to the Commission. Article 19 Right of customisation of audiovisual media offer 1. U sers shall have a right to easily change the default settings of a ny device or user interface controlling or managing access to and use of audiovisual media services in order to customise the audiovisual media offer according to their interests or preferences in compliance with the law . This provision shall not affect national measures implementing Article 7a of Directive 2010/13/EU. 2. When placing the devices and user interfaces referred to in paragraph 1 on the market, manufacturers and developers shall ensure that they include a functionality enabling users to freely and easily change the default settings controlling or managing access to and use of the audiovisual media services offered. Section 5 Requirements for well-functioning media market measures and procedures Article 20 National measures affecting the operation of media service providers 1. Any legislative, regulatory or administrative measure taken by a Member State that is liable to affect the operation of media service providers in the internal market shall be duly justified and proportionate . S uch measures shall be reasoned, transparent, objective and non-discriminatory. 2. Any national procedure used for the purposes of the preparation or the adoption of a regulatory or administrative measure as referred to in paragraph 1 shall be subject to clear timeframes set out in advance. 3. Without prejudice and in addition to its right to effective judicial protection, any media service provider subject to a n administrative or regulatory measure referred to in paragraph 1 that concerns it individually and directly shall have the right to appeal against th at measure to an appel late body . That body shall be independent of the parties involved and of any external intervention or political pressure liable to jeopardise its independent assessment of matters coming before it. It shall have the appropriate expertise to enable it to carry out its functions effectively. 4. The Board, upon request of the Commission , shall draw up an opinion where a national legislative, regulatory or administrative measure is likely to affect the functioning of the internal market for media services . Following the opinion of the Board, and without prejudice to its powers under the Treaties, the Commission may issue its own opinion on the matter. Opinions by the Board and , where applicable , by the Commission shall be made publicly available. 5. Where a national authority or body adopt s a measure that affects individually and directly a media service provider and is likely to affect the functioning of the internal market for media services , it shall communicate , at the request of the Board, and where applicable, of the Commission , without undue delay and by electronic means, any relevant information, including the summary of the facts, its measure , the grounds on which the national authority or body has based its measure , and , where applicable, the views of other authorities concerned. Article 21 Assessment of media market concentrations 1. Member States shall provide , in their national legal systems , substantive and procedural rules which ensure an assessment of media market concentrations that could have a significant impact on media pluralism and editorial independence. These rules shall: (a) be transparent, objective, proportionate and non-discriminatory; (b) require the parties to a media market concentration that could hav e a significant impact on media pluralism and editorial independence to notify that concentration in advance to the relevant national authorit ies or bod ies ; (c) designate the national regulatory authority or body as responsible for the assessment of the impact of a notifiable concentration on media pluralism and editorial independence or ensure the involvement of the national regulatory authority or body in such assessment ; (d) set out in advance objective, non-discriminatory and proportionate criteria for notifying media market concentrations that could have a significant impact on media pluralism and editorial independence and for assessing the impact of media market concentrations on media pluralism and editorial independence. The assessment referred to in this paragraph shall be distinct from the competition law assessment s including th ose provided for under merger control rules. It shall be without prejudice to Article 21(4) of Regulation (EC) No 139/2004, where applicable. 2. In the assessment referred to in paragraph 1, the following elements shall be taken into account: (a) the impact of the concentration on media pluralism, including its effects on the formation of public opinion and on the diversity of media players on the market , taking into account the online environment and the parties’ interests, links or activities in other media or non-media businesses ; (b) the safeguards for editorial independence, including the impact of the concentration on the functioning of the editorial teams and the existence of measures by media service providers taken with a view to guaranteeing the independence of individual editorial decisions; (c) whether, in the absence of the concentration, the acquiring and acquired entity would remain economically sustainable, and whether there are any possible alternatives to ensure its economic sustainability. 3. The Commission , assisted by the Board, may issue guidelines on the factors to be taken into account when applying the criteria for assessing the impact of media market concentrations on media pluralism and editorial independence by the national regulat ory authorities or bod ies . 4. The national regulatory authority or body shall consult the Board in advance on any opinion or decision it aims to adopt assessing the impact on media pluralism and editorial independence of a notifiable media market concentration whe re such concentrations may affect the functioning of the internal market. 5. Within 14 calendar days from the receipt of the consultation referred to in paragraph 4, t he Board shall draw up an opinion on the draft national opinion or decision referred to it , taking account of the elements referred to in paragraph 2 and transmit that opinion to the consulting authority and the Commission . 6. The national regulatory authority or body referred to in paragraph 4 shall take utmost account of the opinion referred to in paragraph 5 . Where th at authority does not follow the opinion , fully or partially, it shall provide the Board and the Commission with a reasoned justification explaining its position within 30 calendar days from the receipt of that opinion . Without prejudice to its powers under the Treaties, the Commission may issue its own opinion on the matter. Article 22 Opinions on media market concentrations 1. In the absence of a n assessment or a consultation pursuant to Article 21 , t he Board , upon request of the Commission , shall draw up an opinion on the impact of a media market concentration on media pluralism and editorial independence , where a media market concentration is likely to affect the functioning of the internal market for media services . The Board shall base its opinion on the elements set out in Article 21 ( 2 ) . The Board may bring media market concentrations likely to affect the functioning of the internal market for media services to the attention of the Commission . 2. Following the opinion of the Board, and without prejudice to its powers under the Treaties, the Commission may issue its own opinion on the matter. 3. Opinions by the Board and , where applicable , by the Commission shall be made publicly available. Section 6 Transparent and fair allocation of economic resources Article 23 Audience measurement 1. Audience measurement systems and methodologies shall comply with principles of transparency, impartiality, inclusiveness, proportionality, non-discrimination and verifiability. 2. Without prejudice to the protection of undertakings ’ business secrets, providers of proprietary audience measurement systems shall provide, without undue delay and free of costs , to media service providers and advertisers , as well as to third parties authorised by media service providers and advertisers, accurate, detailed, comprehensive, intelligible and up-to-date information on the methodology used by their audience measurement systems. This provision shall not affect the Union’s data protection and privacy rules. 3. National regulatory authorities or bodies shall encourage the drawing up of codes of conduct by providers of audience measurement systems, together with media service providers, their representative organisations and any other interested parties, that are intended to contribute to compliance with the principles referred to in paragraph 1, including by promoting independent and transparent audits. 4. The Commission , assisted by the Board, may issue guidelines on the practical application of paragraphs 1 , 2 and 3 of this Article. 5. The Board shall foster the exchange of best practices related to the deployment of audience measurement systems through a regular dialogue between representatives of the national regulatory authorities or bodies , representatives of providers of audience measurement systems and other interested parties. Article 24 Allocation of s tate advertising 1. P ublic funds or any other consideration or advantage granted by public authorities to media service providers for the purposes of advertising shall be awarded according to transparent, objective, proportionate and non-discriminatory criteria and through open , proportionate and non-discriminatory procedures . This Article shall not affect public procurement rules. 2. Public authorities, including national, federal or regional governments, regulatory authorities or bodies , as well as st ate-owned enterprises or other s tate-controlled entities at the national or regional level , or local governments of territorial entities of more than 1 million inhabitants , shall make publicly available accurate, comprehensive, intelligible, detailed and yearly information about their advertising expenditure allocated to media service providers, which shall include at least the following details: (a) the legal name s of media service providers from which advertising services were purchased ; (b) the total annual amount spent as well as the amounts spent per media service provider. 3. National regulatory authorities or bodies shall monitor the allocation of s tate advertising in media markets. In order to assess the accuracy of the information on s tate advertising made available pursuant to paragraph 2, national regulatory authorities or bodies may request from the entities referred to in paragraph 2 further information, including information on the application of criteria referred to in paragraph 1. 4. The a llocation of s tate resources to media service providers for the purpose of purchasing goods or services from them other than s tate advertising shall be subject to the requirements set out in paragraph 1. This Article shall not affect the application of the S tate aid rules. Chapter IV – Final Provisions Article 25 Monitoring exercise 1. The Commission shall ensure an independent monitoring of the internal market for media services, including risks to and progress in its functioning and resilience . The findings of the monitoring exercise shall be subject to consult ation with the Board. 2. The Commission shall define key performance indicators to be used for the monitoring referred in paragraph 1 , in consultation with the Board . 3. The monitoring exercise shall include: (a) a detailed analysis of the resilience of media markets of all Member States , including as regards the level of media concentration and risks of foreign information manipulation and interference ; (b) a n overview and forward-looking assessment of the resilience of the internal market for media services as a whole; (c) a n overview of measures taken by media service providers with a view to guaranteeing the independence of individual editorial decisions . 4. The monitoring shall be carried out annually, and its results shall be made publicly available. Article 26 Evaluation and reporting 1. By [ four years after the entry into force of this Regulation ] at the latest, and every four years thereafter, the Commission shall evaluate this Regulation and report to the European Parliament, the Council and the European Economic and Social Committee. 2. For the purposes of paragraph 1 and upon its request , Member States and the Board shall send relevant information to the Commission . 3. In carrying out the evaluations referred to in paragraph 1, the Commission shall take into account: (a) the positions and findings of the European Parliament, the Council and other relevant bodies or sources; (b) outcomes of the relevant discussions carried out in relevant fora; (c) relevant documents issued by the Board; (d) findings of the monitoring exercise referred to in Article 25 . Article 27 Amendments to Directive 2010/13/EU 1. Article 30b of Directive 2010/13/EU is deleted . 2. R eferences to Article 30 b of Directive 2010/13/EU shall be read as references to Article 12 of this Regulation. 3 . R eferences in Union law to the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA) shall be read as references to the European Board for Media Services (the Board). Article 28 Entry into force and application 1. This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union . 2. This Regulation shall apply from [6 months after the entry into force] . However, Articles 7 to 12 and 27 shall apply from [3 months after the entry into force] and Article 19(2) shall apply from [48 months after the entry into force] . 3. This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States. Done at Brussels, For the European Parliament For the Council The President The President LEGISLATIVE FINANCIAL STATEMENT 1. FRAMEWORK OF THE PROPOSAL/INITIATIVE 1.1. Title of the proposal/initiative 1.2. Policy area(s) concerned 1.3. The proposal/initiative relates to 1.4. Objective(s) 1.5. Grounds for the proposal/initiative 1.6. Duration and financial impact of the proposal/initiative 1.7. Management mode(s) planned 2 MANAGEMENT MEASURES 2.1. Monitoring and reporting rules 2.2. Management and control system(s) 2.3. Measures to prevent fraud and irregularities 3. ESTIMATED FINANCIAL IMPACT OF THE PROPOSAL/INITIATIVE 3.1. Heading(s) of the multiannual financial framework and expenditure budget line(s) affected 3.2. Estimated financial impact of the proposal on appropriations 3.3. Estimated impact on revenue LEGISLATIVE FINANCIAL STATEMENT 1. FRAMEWORK OF THE PROPOSAL/INITIATIVE 1.1. Title of the proposal/initiative Regulation establishing a common framework for media services in the internal market (European Media Freedom Act) and amending D irective 2010/13 /EU 1.2. Policy area(s) concerned Internal market Investing in people, social cohesion and values A new push for EU democracy 1.3. The proposal/initiative relates to: a new action a new action following a pilot project/preparatory action the extension of an existing action a merger or redirection of one or more actions towards another/a new action 1.4. Objective(s) 1.4.1. General objective(s) The general objective of the intervention is to improve the functioning of the internal media market. Improving the functioning of the internal media market w ill foster the provision of quality media services and thus strengthen the integrity of the internal market as a whole. A regulation providing common rules , underpinned by a structured cooperation framework for media regulators within a Board composed of representatives of the relevant national independent media r egulatory authorities or bodies, will achieve this objective. 1.4.2. Specific objective s Fostering cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market The objective is to make it easier for media market players to expand their operations across the internal market, gradually increasing cross-border investments in terms of their number and value. To this end, the initiative would aim to coordinate certain elements of the diverging national media pluralism frameworks in order to facilitate cross-border service provision. It will aim in particular at ensuring that when assessing media market transactions, national independent authorities approach media pluralism consistently across the EU media market through common criteria and coordination at EU level. Increasing regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market The objective is to strengthen regulatory cooperation to better enforce the EU media framework in the cross-border context and to foster regulatory convergence through EU-level opinions and guidance, promoting thus consistent approaches to media independence and media pluralism, including online. The goal is also to provide tools for collective - EU-wide - action by independent regulators to protect the EU internal market from service providers (including from third countries) not following EU media standards Facilitating free provision of quality media services in the internal market The objective is to ensure that consumers and businesses benefit from trustworthy content provided by independent media in an increasingly digital and inherently cross-border market for media services. In order to foster provision of quality media services in the internal market, the initiative will aim to mitigate the trend of undue public and private interference in editorial freedom. It will enhance media-specific ownership transparency, with a view of strengthening media accountability and independence. It will also aim to promote self-regulation for the independent functioning of media companies. Moreover, the initiative will aim to ensure that journalists can work without interference in particular when it comes to protection of their sources. Ensuring transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market The objective is to ensure a level playing field for media market players by promoting transparent and fair allocation of economic resources. This would be achieved by enhancing the transparency, non-discrimination, proportionality, objectivity and inclusiveness of audience measurement methodologies, in particular online. It would also aim at ensuring transparency , non-discrimination, proportionality and objectivity of state advertising to media, in order to minimise the risks of favouring pro-government outlets or using public support for partisan interests, to the detriment of other players in the market, and thus promote fair competition in the internal media market. 1.4.3. Expected result(s) and impact It is expected that a regulation and a recommendation to media companies and Member States to foster media independence, underpinned by a governance structure consisting of the Board assisted by a Commission secretariat, will improve the functioning of the internal media market through approximation of national rules and approaches in areas related to media pluralism - in an efficient, coherent, proportionate and largely effective way. The financial modelling for the Impact Assessment accompanying the proposal estimates the net economic benefits, in terms of increased revenues, at EUR 2 885 million for the first year and EUR 2 898.1 million for the following years. Media market players will see direct regulatory benefits. The audiovisual sector will particularly benefit from the introduction of common requirements for national media pluralism laws and market scrutiny procedures and will enjoy economies of scale in a better functioning and more predictable, coherent and less protectionist internal media market. Broadcasters and providers of (audiovisual) news content and non- domestic entities, which are more likely to suffer from regulatory fragmentation, will be able to expand their operations in other Member States. Those broadcasters and press companies that take up the recommendations on safeguards for editorial independence will strengthen their editorial independence and increase their freedom to make decisions without public or private interference, expanding the plurality of voices or opinions expressed and issues analysed in their media content. Journalists will also be more independent vis-a-vis media owners due to the increased deployment of these safeguards within media companies. Greater transparency of media ownership and, in particular on owners’ other business interests, will enhance fair competition, especially in the press sector (encompassing printed and online media) for which Member States typically do not have specific transparency tools, such as media registers. More transparent online audience measurement systems will reduce market distortions, further strengthen the level playing field between media service providers and online players and will particularly benefit audiovisual media services and online press, as well as online advertisers. Journalists should also benefit, as they will understand better how online players measure audiences of media services. The measures on transparency and fairness of state advertising will reduce market distortions and make sure that a wider range of media outlets have access to this revenue source. SMEs will benefit from more certainty and lower legal costs. Also, potentially increased access to state advertising will represent a proportionally bigger opportunity for smaller companies. Similarly, SMEs are in a particularly weak position vis-a-vis online players when it comes to online audience measurement, therefore the initiative will help balance the playing field for SMEs to compete for advertising revenues. 1.4.4. Indicators of performance Proposed indicators and expected results Baseline Indicator - number and value of cross-border investments in the EU27 Member States’ media markets (annual) Expected result - gradual increase in cross-border investments’ number and value Investments 2013-2021 by investors: EU: 478 transactions non-EU: 389 transactions Value of 60% of transactions: EUR 84 billion Indicator - number of opinions by the Board on national media market scrutiny decisions taken into account by the relevant national authority (annual) Expected result – share of opinions by the Board taken into account by Member States n/a Indicator - share of cases solved by the Board under the cooperation mechanism and the mutual assistance mechanism (annual) Expected result - share of cases solved by the Board n/a Indicator - number of guidance documents /reports issued by the Commission and/or the Board , as the case may be, in key regulatory areas for media pluralism (each 3 years) Expected result – increased number of areas pertinent to media pluralism covered by EU level guidance/reports n/a Indicator - risk scores (annual) on: - political independence of media - editorial autonomy - independence of public service media governance - commercial & owner influence over editorial content - protection of journalistic sources - transparency of media ownership Expected result - gradual reduction in risk scores Respective 2021 MPM risk scores: - 54% - 55% - 50% - 60% - 16% - 58% Indicator - number of Member States with media self-regulatory bodies (annual) Expected result - gradual increase in the number of Member States with self-regulatory bodies 16 Indicator - citizens’ perceived trust in media (biannual) Expected result - gradual increase in trust in media Percentage of respondents who trust the following media: 58%: radio 51%: television 51%: press 35%: internet Indicator – number of cases related to incompliance with the principles for audience measurement systems (annual) Expected result - gradual decrease of audience measurement systems incompliant with the new EU framework Nielsen: 61% of marketers agree to have access to the quality audience data needed to get the most of their media budget Indicator - risk score (annual) on the distribution of state advertising Expected result - gradual reduction in the risk score 2021 MPM risk score on state advertising: 70% 1.5. Grounds for the proposal/initiative 1.5.1. Requirement(s) to be met in the short or long term including a detailed timeline for roll-out of the implementation of the initiative Most of the provisions of t he Regulation will be directly applicable from six months after its entry into force. To prepare the ground for a correct implementation of the European Media Freedom Act, its provisions on independent media authorities and the European Board for Media Services and the related amendment of the Audiovisual Media Services Directive (AVMSD) will already apply 3 months after the entry into force of the Act . This will ensure that the Board will be established in time to ensure a successful implementation of the Regulation. The Board will succeed and replace the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA) established by the AVMSD . It is renamed , to reflect a wider remit , entrusted with additional tasks and supported with additional resources (in particular additional staff within the Commission, DG CNECT). The European Media Freedom Act will ensure that all references to the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA) in EU law and in particular in the AVMSD are read as references to the European Board for Media Services (the Board). As currently the case for ERGA, the Board will be assisted in its activities by a secretariat, provided by the Commission. The secretariat will continue to be located in DG CNECT. The secretariat will provide administrative and organisational support to the Board. The resources envisaged for the secretariat under the Regulation will enable it to assist the Board in carrying out its tasks. The secretariat for the Board will be built up over the initial two years of the implementation, beginning in 2024, with the full staff capacity to be reached in 2025. To support the implementation of the European Media Freedom Act, DG CNECT is expected to procure external studies. Such studies may also be used to support the activities of the Board and informing its work. The relevant annual budget for these studies will be available from the expected start of the implementation in 2024 by redeployment from the Creative Europe programme . 1.5.2. Added value of Union involvement (it may result from different factors, e.g. coordination gains, legal certainty, greater effectiveness or complementarities). For the purposes of this point 'added value of Union involvement' is the value resulting from Union intervention which is additional to the value that would have been otherwise created by Member States alone Reasons for action at European level (ex-ante): Th e initiative aims to ensure that the internal market for media functions better by improving legal certainty and eliminating internal market obstacles. The rules will set out mechanism s to increase the transparency, independence and accountability of measures and actions affecting media markets, freedom and pluralism within the EU. Expected generated Union added value (ex-post): The Impact Assessment accompanying this proposal indicates that the intervention would reduce the burden for market players to comply with different national legal regimes when they operate in several Member States. It would also increase predictability and enhance legal certainty for media market players, thereby promoting fair competition and cross-border investment. It would also allow for a coordinated response of media regulators in matters affecting the EU’s information space. The net economic benefits, in terms of increased revenues, are estimated at EUR 2 885 million for the first year and EUR 2 898 million for the following years. The initiative, by establishing a common EU framework fostering cross-border activity, strengthening cooperation between regulators, promoting provision of quality media content, and addressing practices that distort competition, would create conditions more favourable for the development of media services across borders and increase consumer choice of quality media content. This will strengthen the internal media market whilst promoting media freedom and pluralism, protected under the Charter of Fundamental Rights. 1.5.3. Lessons learned from similar experiences in the past This proposal is informed by the experience s of the Commission with the Audiovisual Media Services Directive ( AVMSD ), which was last reviewed in 2018 and still needs to be transposed in some Member States . While there is not yet a full evaluation of the revised AVMSD , the Directive contains a number of media regulatory measures related to consumer protection and promotion of public policy interests, such as cultural diversity. However, it is limited to audiovisual media services and does not cover issues related to media pluralism and independence (beyond independence of national regulatory authorities and bodies), to be addressed by the intervention. The main relevant lessons learnt are that a regulation is likely to achieve the desired results of the intervention much faster than a directive and that a stronger and better resourced institutional support structure is needed for an effective and consistent media regulation . 1.5.4. Compatibility with the Multiannual Financial Framework and possible synergies with other appropriate instruments This proposal is reflected under the heading of ‘A New Push for European Democracy’ in the Commission w ork p rogramme 2022. The European Media Freedom Act will complement the relevant framework that includes the copyright rules, the revised AVMSD, and the recently adopted Digital Services Act (DSA) and Digital Markets Act (DMA). In the area of ownership transparency, i t will lead to synergies with the Anti-Money Laundering (AML) Directive and the EU Company Law Directive. Regarding journalistic sources, the Act will add a targeted robust safeguard against the deployment of spyware in the devices used by the media service providers or their employees, building on protections provided by Directive 2002/58/EC, Directive 2016/680/EU and Directive 2013/40/EU. The Act is fully compatible with the financing actions undertaken under the Multiannual Financial Framework, Creative Europe programme, in particular concerning monitoring and defending media freedom and pluralism and journalism partnerships. 1.5.5. Assessment of the different available financing options, including scope for redeployment Based on the current experience with the work o f ERGA and its secretariat, the support by the Commission for the new European Board for Media Services, in particular by providing the Board’s secretariat , is estimated to require 8 to 10 FTEs. Other potential options have been considered in the accompanying Impact Assessment. The additional studies to be procured by the Commission are expected to cost up to EUR 1 million per year. The functioning of the Board, in particular the reimbursement of travel expenses is expected to require about EUR 150 000 – 200 000 per year. The recurrent administrative costs for national regulatory authorities (NRAs) for participating in the Board (such as salaries of staff employed for that purpose) would be covered by the NRAs, as is the case today with ERGA and comparable entities. Expenses for the act i vi ti es of ERGA and procurement of AVMSD-related studies are currently financed from the Media strand of the Creative Europe programme (CRE). The C ross-sectoral strand of CRE aims to ‘promote cross-sectoral activities that aim at adjusting to the structural and technological changes faced by the media, including enhancing a free, diverse, and pluralistic media environment, quality journalism and media literacy, including in the digital environment ’ (Article 7(1)(c) of the CRE Regulation (EU) 2021/818). Therefore, the C ross-sectoral strand will be the source of funding of costs related to the functioning of the Board whose remit will cover different types of media market players in the audiovisual and other media sectors. The source for financing of studies will depend on the subject matter of such studies: those covering audiovisual matters only will continue to be financed from the Media strand of CRE, while other required studies will be financed from the C ross-sectoral strand. 1.6. Duration and financial impact of the proposal/initiative limited duration in effect from [DD/MM]YYYY to [DD/MM]YYYY Financial impact from YYYY to YYYY for commitment appropriations and from YYYY to YYYY for payment appropriations. unlimited duration Implementation with a start-up period from 2024 to 2025 , followed by full-scale operation. 1.7. Management mode(s) planned Direct management by the Commission by its departments, including by its staff in the Union delegations; by the executive agencies Shared management with the Member States Indirect management by entrusting budget implementation tasks to: third countries or the bodies they have designated; international organisations and their agencies (to be specified); the EIB and the European Investment Fund; bodies referred to in Articles 70 and 71 of the Financial Regulation; public law bodies; bodies governed by private law with a public service mission to the extent that they are provided with adequate financial guarantees; bodies governed by the private law of a Member State that are entrusted with the implementation of a public-private partnership and that are provided with adequate financial guarantees; persons entrusted with the implementation of specific actions in the CFSP pursuant to Title V of the TEU, and identified in the relevant basic act. If more than one management mode is indicated, please provide details in the ‘Comments’ section. Comments 2. MANAGEMENT MEASURES 2.1. Monitoring and reporting rules After the adoption of the leg islative instrument, Member States will be given between 3 and 6 months to adapt their national frameworks, where required. Its first evaluation will take place 4 years after the new rules’ entry into force, and subsequent evaluations will be car r ied out every 4 years. The m onitoring by the Commission will be supported by the Board. A specific monitoring scheme will also be envisaged for the recommendation accompanying the proposal. It will combine targeted reporting by Member States and the new mechanism for the independent monitoring of risks to the functioning of the internal market for media services under the Regulation . 2.2. Management and control system(s) 2.2.1. Justification of the management mode(s), the funding implementation mechanism(s), the payment modalities and the control strategy proposed Under the European Media Freedom Act, the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA) will evolve into the European Board for Media Services. It will promote the effective and consistent application of both the European Media Freedom Act and AVMSD across the Member States. In line with its tasks under EU law, the Board will , amongst others, provide expert advice on regulatory, technical or practical aspects of media regulation, opinions , coordinate actions with rega rd to service providers (including from third countries) not following EU media standards , and promote cooperation and the effective exchange of information, experience and best practices between regulators. In order to ensure that the Board fulfils its mandate, it is foreseen that the Commission will be in a close contact with the relevant national regulatory authorities and bodies. Moreover, the Regulation provides that the Chair of the Board must keep the Commission informed about the planned and ongoing activities of the Board. In addition, the Board is required to consult the Commission in preparation of its work programme and main deliverables, in accordance with its rules of procedure. In line with current practices and reflecting the chosen policy option, the Commission will implement the intended funding under CRE via direct management. It is covered by the respective control strategy. The controls will be done by DG CNECT. 2.2.2. Information concerning the risks identified and the internal control system(s) set up to mitigate them In order to ensure that the Board fulfils its mandate as established in this Regulation, a secretariat, provided by the Commission , is foreseen. It will assist the Board in its activities, provide administrative and organisational support. The envisaged control and support system allows for the mitigation of potential risks. As the Act builds on an existing structure and taking into account the direct management of the relevant financial resources by the Commission, no major risks have been identified. The controls are part of DG CNECT ’s internal control system. 2.2.3. Estimation and justification of the cost-effectiveness of the controls (ratio of "control costs ÷ value of the related funds managed"), and assessment of the expected levels of risk of error (at payment & at closure) DG CNECT’s internal control systems and procedures will be used. They are function al and cost-effective. The aim is to ensure an error rate under the materiality threshold of 2%. 2.3. Measures to prevent fraud and irregularities The existing fraud prevention measure s applicable to the Commission will cover the additional appropriations necessary for this Regulation. 3. ESTIMATED FINANCIAL IMPACT OF THE PROPOSAL/INITIATIVE 3.1. Heading(s) of the multiannual financial framework and expenditure budget line(s) affected Existing budget lines Heading of multiannual financial framework Budget line Type of expenditure Contribution Number Diff./Non-diff. from EFTA countries from candidate countries from third countries within the meaning of Article 21(2)(b) of the Financial Regulation 2 b 07.010401 – Support expenditure for Creative Europe Non-diff. YES YES YES NO 2b 07.050300 – Creative Europe Cross-sectoral strand Diff YES YES YES NO 2 b 07.050200 – Creative Europe Media strand Diff YES YES YES NO New budget lines requested N/A 3.2. Estimated financial impact of the proposal on appropriations 3.2.1. Summary of estimated impact on operational appropriations The proposal/initiative does not require the use of operational appropriations The proposal/initiative requires the use of operational appropriations, as explained below: Appropriations will be redeployed within the financial envelope s allocated to the Creative Europe Programme Media and Cross- sector al strands as well as to the administrative support budget line in the 2021-2027 MFF. EUR million (to three decimal places) Heading of multiannual financial framework 2b COHESION, RESILIENCE AND VALUES DG CNECT 2024 2025 2026 2027 Post-2027 TOTAL Operational appropriations (reallocated within the Creative Europe programme) 07.050200 – Creative Europe Media strand Commitments (1a) 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 2.000 Payments (2a) 0.250 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.250 2.000 07.050300 – Creative Europe Cross-sectoral strand Commitments (1b) 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 2.000 Payments (2b) 0.250 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.250 2.000 Appropriations of an administrative nature financed from the envelope of specific programmes 07.010401 – Support expenditure for Creative Europe (3) 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.800 TOTAL appropriations for DG CNECT Commitments =1a+1b +3 1.200 1.200 1.200 1.200 4.800 Payments =2a+2b +3 0.700 1.200 1.200 1.200 0.500 4.800 TOTAL operational appropriations Commitments (4) 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 4.000 Payments (5) 0.500 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.500 4.000 TOTAL appropriations of an administrative nature financed from the envelope for specific programmes (6) 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.800 TOTAL appropriations under HEADING 2b of the multiannual financial framework Commitments =4+ 6 1.200 1.200 1.200 1.200 4.800 Payments =5+ 6 0.700 1.200 1.200 1.200 0.500 4.800 Heading of multiannual financial framework 7 ‘Administrative expenditure’ EUR million (to three decimal places) 2024 2025 2026 2027 Post-2027 TOTAL DG CNECT Human resources 0.644 1 . 288 1 . 288 1 . 288 4.508 □ Other administrative expenditure TOTAL DG CNECT Appropriations 0.644 1 . 288 1 . 288 1 . 288 4.508 TOTAL appropriations under HEADING 7 of the multiannual financial framework (Total commitments = Total payments) 0.644 1 . 288 1 . 288 1 . 288 4.508 EUR million (to three decimal places) 2024 2025 2026 2027 Post-2027 TOTAL TOTAL appropriations under HEADINGS 1 to 7 of the multiannual financial framework Commitments 1.844 2 . 488 2 . 488 2 . 488 9.308 Payments 1.344 2 . 488 2 . 488 2 . 488 0.500 9.308 3.2.2. Estimated output funded with operational appropriations N/A 3.2.3. Summary of estimated impact on administrative appropriations The proposal/initiative does not require the use of appropriations of an administrative nature The proposal/initiative requires the use of appropriations of an administrative nature, as explained below: EUR million (to three decimal places) 2024 2025 2026 2027 Post-2027 TOTAL HEADING 7 of the multiannual financial framework Human resources 0.644 1 . 288 1 . 288 1 . 288 4.508 Other administrative expenditure Subtotal HEADING 7 of the multiannual financial framework 0.644 1 . 288 1 . 288 1 . 288 4.508 Outside HEADING 7 of the multiannual financial framework Human resources Other expenditure of an administrative nature Subtotal outside HEADING 7 of the multiannual financial framework TOTAL 0.644 1 . 288 1 . 288 1 . 288 4.508 The appropriations required for human resources and other expenditure of an administrative nature will be met by appropriations from the DG that are already assigned to management of the action and/or have been redeployed within the DG, together if necessary with any additional allocation which may be granted to the managing DG under the annual allocation procedure and in the light of budgetary constraints. Estimated requirements of human resources The proposal/initiative does not require the use of human resources. The proposal/initiative requires the use of human resources, as explained below: Estimate to be expressed in full time equivalent units 2024 2025 2026 2027 Establishment plan posts (officials and temporary staff) 20 01 02 01 (Headquarters and Commission’s Representation Offices) 3 6 6 6 20 01 02 03 (Delegations) 01 01 01 01 (Indirect research) 01 01 01 11 (Direct research) Other budget lines (specify) External staff (in Full Time Equivalent unit: FTE) 20 02 01 (AC, END, INT from the ‘global envelope’) 2 4 4 4 20 02 03 (AC, AL, END, INT and JPD in the delegations) XX 01 xx yy zz - at Headquarters - in Delegations 01 01 01 02 (AC, END, INT - Indirect research) 01 01 01 12 (AC, END, INT - Direct research) Other budget lines (specify) TOTAL 5 10 10 10 The human resources required will be met by staff from the DG who are already assigned to management of the action and/or have been redeployed within the DG, together if necessary with any additional allocation which may be granted to the managing DG under the annual allocation procedure and in the light of budgetary constraints. Description of tasks to be carried out: Officials and temporary staff Supervision of the correct implementation of the obligations set by the Regulation for private companies, Member States and the national regulatory authorities and bodies gathered in the Board Represent the Commission in the Board and engage with the Board on its activities, including also on the annual work programme and the rules of procedure Managing of procedures under the Regulation, in particular with regard to the tasks of the Board Providing support to the Board on its tasks under the Regulation Administrative and logistical support to the Board, in particular with regard to the organisation of the day-to-day organisation and the organisation of meetings Supporting the cooperation and coordination of national regulatory authorities or bodies at EU level Procuring and managing external studies related to the Regulation and the activities of the Board External staff Providing support to the Board on its tasks under the Regulation Administrative and logistical support to the Board, in particular with regard to the organisation of the day-to-day organisation and the organisation of meetings Supporting the cooperation and coordination of national regulatory authorities or bodies at EU level 3.2.4. Compatibility with the current multiannual financial framework The proposal/initiative: can be fully financed through redeployment within the relevant heading of the Multiannual Financial Framework (MFF). Appropriations will be redeployed within the financial envelope allocated to the Creative Europe Programme Media and Cross-sectoral strands as well as to the administrative support budget line in the 2021-2027 MFF. It will not have a significant impact on any other activities of the Programme as it will be absorbed evenly across the actions. requires use of the unallocated margin under the relevant heading of the MFF and/or use of the special instruments as defined in the MFF Regulation. requires a revision of the MFF. 3.2.5. Third-party contributions The proposal/initiative: does not provide for co-financing by third parties provides for the co-financing by third parties estimated below: Appropriations in EUR million (to three decimal places) Year N Year N+1 Year N+2 Year N+3 Enter as many years as necessary to show the duration of the impact (see point 1.6) Total Specify the co-financing body TOTAL appropriations co-financed 3.3. Estimated impact on revenue The proposal/initiative has no financial impact on revenue. The proposal/initiative has the following financial impact: on own resources on other revenue please indicate, if the revenue is assigned to expenditure lines EUR million (to three decimal places) Budget revenue line: Appropriations available for the current financial year Impact of the proposal/initiative Year N Year N+1 Year N+2 Year N+3 Enter as many years as necessary to show the duration of the impact (see point 1.6) Article …………. For assigned revenue, specify the budget expenditure line(s) affected. Other remarks (e.g. method/formula used for calculating the impact on re venue or any other informatio n EUROPEAN COMMISSION Brussels, 27.7.2022 SEC(2022) 322 final REGULATORY SCRUTINY BOARD OPINION European Media Freedom Act {COM(2022) 457 final} {SWD(2022) 286 final} {SWD(2022) 287 final}  EUROPEAN COMMISSION Regulatory Scrutiny Board Brussels, Opinion Title: Impact assessment / European Media Freedom Act Overall 2nd opinion: POSITIVE WITH RESERVATIONS (A) Policy context The European Media Freedom Act aims to establish a common framework to improve the functioning and convergence of the EU media market, including by increasing transparency, independence and accountability around actions affecting media markets, media freedom and pluralism. The initiative also aims to set out EU-level coordination rules for independent and transparent media markets. It is intended to complement the existing EU framework that promotes transparency of media ownership and recognises editorial independence of the media. (B) Summary of findings The Board appreciates the improvements to the revised report in line with the Board’s recommendations, notably on the problem definition, the design and content of options and the analysis of impacts. However, the report still contains significant shortcomings. The Board gives a positive opinion with reservations because it expects the DG CNECT to rectify the following aspects. (1) The report does not sufficiently exploit the existing evidence to support the problem definition, in particular the fragmentation of the single media market and its resulting negative impacts. (2) The report lacks sufficient clarity on the complementarities between the different policy options and their design with regard to the problems they seek to tackle. The analysis of their effectiveness does not provide sufficient clarity as to what will make them successful. (3) The analysis of single market and distributional impacts, among different media services and between Member States, is not sufficiently developed. 1 (C) What to improve (1) Given the absence of quantitative data to support the scale of the problems related to media pluralism frameworks in the internal market, the report should exploit to the maximum, the available evidence. It should expand the presented evidence base by using the relatively plentiful anecdotal evidence in a more systematic way throughout the problem analysis, particularly with a view to underpinning and substantiating the single market angle. (2) The report should make systematic targeted use of the information included in the Annex containing an inventory of the varying media pluralism rules across the EU Member States, to support the argument of market fragmentation, specifically in terms of the problems these diverging rules pose to its good functioning. It should also more precisely define the concept of ‘media pluralism’, providing a framework for practical interpretation and assessment of the desired situation at the EU level and better substantiating the scale of the problems to be tackled. (3) The presentation of policy options should be clearer about the complementarities of options and measures as they increase in legal intensity. The rationale behind the demarcation between the options should be better explained, taking into account the streamlined problem definition, which appears to equalise the significance of all problems while the policy responses vary in ambition. The report should clarify whether some of the problems are indeed more critical for the functioning of the EU media markets than others and how this is reflected in the design and choice of the preferred option(s). (4) The report should more explicitly address the drivers for effectiveness of the different policy options, explaining in detail how precisely a given measure is expected to be more effective. (5) The report should strengthen the single market angle in the analysis of the economic impacts. The current presentation of cumulated impacts for all Member States, without much distinction between the specific problems is insufficient. Presentation of the economic impacts included in the body of the report should be more transparent. The additional explanation included in the methodological Annex should be streamlined and clarified, in particular with regard to the application of the quantitative impact scores. The report should better explain the values assigned to these scores for each policy option and be more explicit about the uncertainty related to the outputs of deterministic modelling. (6) The distributional analysis should be further strengthened, in particular with regard to the impacts on the different market players, which are not sufficiently highlighted. The report should also establish a better link between the supporting information of the Annex and the main body of the report to sustain the analysis of all key impacts. 2 (D) Conclusion The DG must revise the report in accordance with the Board’s findings before launching the interservice consultation. If there are any changes in the choice or design of the preferred option in the final version of the report, the DG may need to further adjust the attached quantification tables to reflect this. Full title Impact Assessment on European Media Freedom Act Reference number PLAN/2021/11882 Submitted to RSB on 11 July 2022 Date of RSB meeting Written procedure 3 ANNEX: Quantification tables extracted from the draft impact assessment report The following tables contain information on the costs and benefits of the initiative on which the Board has given its opinion, as presented above. If the draft report has been revised in line with the Board’s recommendations, the content of these tables may be different from those in the final version of the impact assessment report, as published by the Commission. Overview of benefits (total for all provisions) of the preferred Options Measures Who is affected? Who will benefit? Fostering cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market Media pluralism Media companies Media companies and investors. Particularly beneficial measures and media subject to media for non-national media market players: higher legal market scrutiny pluralism rules, certainty, facilitation of investments across borders mainly Citizens: richer media offer broadcasters (and other companies that invest in the media sector) Member States (media regulators and actors taking measures/decisio ns) Increasing regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market Mechanism for a Audiovisual Mainly media service providers regulated at EU level, structured companies and namely audiovisual media service providers and video- cooperation between VSPs sharing platforms: more legal certainty, more media regulators Media regulators stable/convergent regulatory environment Media regulators: Improved cooperation in tackling cross-border challenges for the media sector. Up to 20% in annual cost savings related to cooperation within ERGA, due to a more efficient cooperation in the Board and reduced tasks as a result of the creation of a dedicated secretariat within the Commission. Relevant authorities in adjacent fields: competition, telecom and digital regulators, relevant ministries. Citizens: better enforcement of EU media rules, in particular online, thus safer online space Collective action by Third country Media companies: protected from rogue media the Board media players Audiovisual distributors: less fragmentation of Media regulators regulatory action, higher level of certainty Media regulators: more effective restrictive measures Citizens: safer information space Mechanism for VLOPs Media companies: wider distribution online, lower risk monitoring media Media regulators to editorial integrity online pluralism online Citizens: more diverse media offer, fewer risks to media freedom/pluralism online, lower level of disinformation 4 Facilitating free provision of diverse quality media services in the internal market Media independence Media companies Media companies: benefit from higher trust in their principles + Journalists services, level playing field - all abide by comparable recommendations to ethical standards, better possibility to take informed promote editorial business/investment decisions independence, self- Journalists: better safeguarded from risks of regulation and media interference within media outlets, empowered by self- ownership regulation that safeguards editorial integrity transparency Citizens: more trustworthy media, higher quality of media services, possibility to evaluate who stands behind editorial line (media accountability) Independence Public service PSM: more independence in management and safeguards for public media editorial decisions service media and an (audiovisual + Private media: fairer competition on the market obligation of balanced radio) Journalists within PSM: lower risks of political pressure media coverage Citizens: access to more diverse and independent quality news and information Safeguards for the Member States Journalists: protection of their societal mission, lower integrity of journalists’ (public actors risks of interference in their job across the EU sources issuing Citizens/entities who provide information to media: surveillance anonymity, protection from negative consequences orders) Citizens in general: higher trust in media Journalists Ensuring transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market Principles/rules on Audience Audiovisual and press companies: fair competition transparent, objective measurement with online players when selling ads, better content and inclusive audience service providers monetisation and potentially higher advertising measurement (including online income players) Business (at large): more informed decisions concerning advertising spending Media regulators: accurate data for market assessments Principles/rules on All (private) Independent media companies: reduced market transparent/fair media distortion resulting from the misuse of state allocation of state advertising; media players critical of governments Member States advertising could benefit from more state advertising (authorities/state -owned entities Citizens: lower risks of dependence of certain media allocating outlets on state and hence manipulated information advertising expenditure to media) 5  Overview of costs – Preferred option compared to baseline Costs for Businesses Costs for Administrations One-off Recurrent One-off Recurrent Scrutiny of media market - EUR 44 100 - 96 600 transactions EUR 9.1-13.7 - Regulatory cooperation and million * EUR 50 000 EUR 1.12 - 3.36 convergence in media markets million EUR 5.1-10.2 Protection of editorial million (55% of - - independence SMEs) Safeguards for Public Service EUR 357 300 - EUR 447 000- EUR 42 000 Media 1.7 million - EUR 0.4-4.2 Transparency of million (55% of - - Media ownership media companies) Requirements for Audience - - EUR 69 000 - EUR 592 200 Measurement Systems 415 000 - - - EUR 415 000 - 1.6 Monitoring of State advertising million - - - EUR 2 - 2.3 million (8-10 FTEs and EUR Governance (sub-option A) 1 million operational budget) Total EUR 9.4-14 EUR 5.6 – 14.5 EUR 566 000 - EUR 4.2-8 million million million** 2.16 million * Costs linked to familiarisation with the new provisions ** The totals may include differences due to rounding. Costs related to the ‘one in, one out’ approach Citizens/Consumers Businesses Administrations One-off Recurrent One-off Recurrent - - EUR 9.4 – EUR 5.6 - Direct adjustment costs 14 million 14.5 million Total Indirect adjustment - - - - costs Administrative costs - - - - (for offsetting) 6  EUROPEAN COMMISSION Regulatory Scrutiny Board Brussels, Ares(2022) Opinion Title: Impact Assessment on European Media Freedom Act Overall opinion: NEGATIVE (A) Context The European Media Freedom Act aims to establish a common framework to improve the functioning and convergence of the EU media market, including by increasing transparency, independence and accountability around actions affecting media markets, media freedom and pluralism. The initiative also aims to set out EU-level coordination rules for independent and transparent media markets. It is intended to complement the existing EU framework that promotes transparency of media ownership and recognises editorial independence of the media. (B) Main considerations The Board acknowledges the additional information provided in advance of the meeting and commitments to make changes to the report. However, the Board gives a negative opinion, because the report contains the following significant shortcomings: (1) The report does not sufficiently explain the single market failures and regulatory gaps that the European Media Freedom Act aims to fill. It does not demonstrate with sufficient evidence the scale and relative importance of the problems to tackle and their prevalence across different media markets and Member States. It does not provide clarity on the overall objectives of the initiative and how they are linked. (2) The report does not present a convincing intervention logic showing how the identified measures are expected to deliver on the objectives and tackle the problems. The presented policy options are not complete and sufficiently precise as to their content and functioning. The analysis of the choice of the legal delivery instrument is missing. (3) The impacts of the policy options are not sufficiently assessed, including on the internal market aspects. The need for and effectiveness of some measures is not clearly demonstrated. The report lacks solid comparative analysis of all costs and benefits and is not sufficiently clear on who will be impacted and how. (4) The report is not sufficiently transparent on the differing views between and within categories of stakeholders’. 7 (C) Further considerations and adjustment requirements (1) The report should be clearer about the magnitude of the problems for the main affected single media markets and substantiate them with solid and convincing evidence. As not all problems seem equally critical for all media market actors or equally relevant across Member States, the report should present a clear problem overview and on that basis set a clear prioritisation and hierarchy of issues and reflect it accordingly in the design of policy options. The significance and evidence of some problems (e.g. lack of media pluralism, cross-border investments, innovation in the media markets, distortions resulting from opacity of audience measurement systems, problems related to the media coverage of European elections) should be further developed. (2) The report should also identify the precise regulatory gaps that the initiative aims to fill, better explaining the shortcomings of the existing regulatory measures applicable to the media markets. It should further develop and substantiate with clear evidence the problem of fragmentation of the single media markets, and the resulting effects on the media market players and media pluralism. It should better explain the different interpretations of regulatory concepts by different national regulators. The analysis should underpin the choice of Article 114 as legal base and better support the respect of the subsidiarity principle in view of the diverse cultural, historical and political traditions of the media frameworks in the Member States. The report should clarify the definition, practical interpretation and measurement of the notion of media pluralism. (3) Given the legal base the report should review the (general) policy objectives and better explain their linkages as well as the interplay between the objective of pursuing well-functioning single media markets and its link to promoting and ensuring media pluralism in the Member States. It should be clearer upfront on the balance and relative importance of further EU-level coordination versus new substantive harmonisation measures. (4) The report should present a fully developed intervention logic by better presenting how the options and their measures will precisely tackle the identified problems (and their drivers). It should provide further detail to clarify the design, content, functioning and rationale of the policy options and their measures. It should better explain some of the measures, including spelling out the precise legal obligations and minimum criteria linked to the principle-based design, to make the practical difference between non-binding recommendations and fully harmonised specific requirements clearer. It should also consider an explicit option combining soft and hard law measures better reflecting the scale and significance of problems and proportionality of some measures. Given the diversity of existing media regulatory frameworks in the Member States the report should discuss the pros and cons and choice of the available legal delivery instruments, at least for the preferred option. (5) The report should further develop the assessment of impacts, in particular on the single market. It should better assess the impact and effectiveness of some measures (e.g. non-binding Board opinions, regulatory sandboxes, etc). It should also explain in greater detail different impacts associated with the two governance options. For instance, it should better justify why the Board governance option involving an external secretariat would be clearly more effective in fostering quality media content than the one where the secretariat is provided by the Commission. In case a combination option of soft and hard law measures is considered its impacts should be assess up-front along with the other options. 8  (6) The report should present the overall impact of all measures and further develop the distributional analysis. It should be clear on the cost and benefit estimates, add an overview of costs and benefits of all measures and present combined impacts on businesses (including SMEs), Member States and the Commission. It should be clear who will be affected and how. Where impacts are different for the different market players (e.g. online platforms, audio-visual, press, corporations versus SMEs, etc.), these should be highlighted and the winners and losers clearly identified. (7) The report should provide a clearer comparison of options in terms of effectiveness, efficiency and proportionality and better explain and justify the qualitative scores. The comparison of options should include the estimates of costs and benefits of each option and the narrative should be clearer about the drivers of effectiveness of the various measures as well as their proportionality. This analysis should be updated to reflect other policy mixes that the report may consider (see combination option above). The comparison of options tables should synthetically include both qualitative (e.g. effectiveness scores) and quantitative elements (e.g. cost estimates). (8) The report should strengthen the evidence base and single market analysis throughout, from the problem definition to the design, analysis and comparison of options. It should also make a better and more targeted use of the evidence contained in the Rule of Law and Media Pluralism Monitoring reports. In parallel it should report the stakeholders views in a more transparent and balanced manner and better distinguish between the views of the different types of media market players, in particular regarding the problem definition and the design and expected impact of policy options. Dissenting views (including within the same category of stakeholders) should be more systematically included as well. Some more technical comments have been transmitted directly to the author DG. (D) RSB scrutiny process The lead DG shall ensure that the report is revised in accordance with the above- mentioned requirements and resubmitted to the Board for its final opinion. Full title European Media Freedom Act Reference number PLAN/2021/11882 Date of RSB meeting 8 June 2022 Electronically signed on 27/07/2022 15:28 (UTC+02) in accordance with Article 11 of Commission Decision (EU) 2021/2121 9  TOC \o "1-2" \h \z \u 1. Introduction: political and legal context PAGEREF _Toc108446421 \h 2 2. Problem definition PAGEREF _Toc108446422 \h 4 2.1 Context and scope PAGEREF _Toc108446423 \h 4 2.2 What are the problems? PAGEREF _Toc108446424 \h 5 2.3 How likely is the problem to persist? PAGEREF _Toc108446425 \h 25 3. Why should the EU act? PAGEREF _Toc108446426 \h 26 3.1 Legal basis PAGEREF _Toc108446427 \h 26 3.2 Subsidiarity: Necessity of EU action PAGEREF _Toc108446428 \h 27 3.3 Subsidiarity: Added value of EU action PAGEREF _Toc108446429 \h 28 4. Objectives: What is to be achieved? PAGEREF _Toc108446430 \h 28 4.1 General objective PAGEREF _Toc108446431 \h 28 4.2 Specific objectives PAGEREF _Toc108446432 \h 29 5. What are the available policy options? PAGEREF _Toc108446433 \h 30 5.1 What is the baseline from which options are assessed? PAGEREF _Toc108446434 \h 30 5.2 Description of the policy options PAGEREF _Toc108446435 \h 31 5.3 The choice of the legal instrument PAGEREF _Toc108446436 \h 40 5.4 Option discarded at an early stage PAGEREF _Toc108446437 \h 41 6. What are the impacts of the policy options? PAGEREF _Toc108446438 \h 42 6.1. Economic impacts PAGEREF _Toc108446439 \h 43 6.2. Social impacts PAGEREF _Toc108446440 \h 55 6.3. Fundamental rights impacts PAGEREF _Toc108446441 \h 58 7. How do the options compare? PAGEREF _Toc108446442 \h 59 8. Preferred option PAGEREF _Toc108446443 \h 62 9. REFIT (simplification and improved efficiency) PAGEREF _Toc108446444 \h 64 10. Application of the ‘one in, one out’ approach PAGEREF _Toc108446445 \h 64 11. How will actual impacts be monitored and evaluated? PAGEREF _Toc108446446 \h 65 1. Introduction: political and legal context The President of the Commission announced a European Media Freedom Act in her 2021 State of the Union address, stating: “ Media companies cannot be treated as just another business. Their independence is essential. Europe needs a law that safeguards this independence – and the Commission will deliver a Media Freedom Act in the next yea r ” . Media services play a unique role in the internal market , b y providing access to a plurality of views and reliable sources of information to citizens and businesses alike . As media services are capital- and knowledge-intensive , they require scale to remain competitive , which can be achieved through cross-border provision of services , investment and establishment in the internal market. For this to happen , they need a predictable regulatory environment. However, the internal media market is not sufficiently integrated. Over the last years, Member States have adopted various national rules related to media pluralism, such as rules to examine the effect of market transactions on media pluralism. While this is a legitimate public interest, divergent approaches at national level, tailored only to local contexts, have created fragmentation in the internal market, causing legal uncertainty and increasing compl iance costs for media companies . U ncoordinated national rules and discriminatory practices make it difficult for media market players to operate and expand across borders. In addition, the internal media market has become increasingly digital as media services are provided and accessed through the internet, which is by nature cross-border . In the last decade, European media companies have also faced fierce competition from global online platforms . While such platforms have become gateways to media content and dominat e online advertisin g, their business models tend to amplify polarising content or disinformation . The corresponding shift of advertising revenues online has drained financial resources from the traditional media sector affecting its financial sustainability , and in turn the quality and diversity of content on offer . T his trend indicates how the market is failing to provide sustainable returns for independent news and quality journalism , which are public goods , and help counter disinformation . There is also increasing influence on media undermining their independence. As evidenced by the Commission’s annual Rule of Law reports and the Media Pluralism Monitor, interference in media, historically present in some EU Member States, has recently increased in several of them. T he Media Pluralism Monitor shows a general deterioration in the EU media landscape in the areas of market plurality, reflecting the growing economic threats to media, and political independence, with risks related mainly to the lack of protection for editorial autonomy . The EU has already acted to protect the financial sustainability of the press through the copyright reform , to foster a level playing field between broadcasters and online media players through the revised Audiovisual Media Services Directive (AVMSD) , and to make digital markets fairer and more contestable with the upcoming Digital Services Act (DSA) and Digital Markets Act (DMA) . T he European Media Freedom Act (EMFA), which is underpinned by this Impact Assessment report, would complement this framework by fostering regulatory convergence and cooperation , promoting free provision of quality media services and ensuring fair and transparent allocation of economic resources in the internal media market. This would make it easier for media outlets to operate in multiple Member States, to produce and provide their content freely across borders, reach wider audiences and compete with online players in the internal market. It w ould facilitate entry of newcomers in media markets, foster quality of media services for the benefit of citizens and businesses and enhance trust in media. The initiative would strengthen the internal market for media and thereby media freedom and pluralism, which are protected by the Charter of Fundamental Rights . In turn, it would also reinforce the rule of law, which as stated in the Conditionality Regulation is a precondition for the integrity and sustainability of the internal market at large . Where the rule of law is strong, businesses feel confident about investing . In contrast, b usinesses will hesitate to invest in countries where media independence is not upheld, with adverse effects on the economy . The intervention would focus on media law areas not regulated at EU level and address a number of regulatory gaps in the existing EU rules . The AVMSD contributes indirectly to fostering media freedom and pluralism by guaranteeing the independence of media regulators, gathered in the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA). However, it does not address directly any of the issues that would be covered by the initiative . Also, the DSA and DMA constitute horizontal instruments, which do not cover the sector-specific issues targeted by the initiative . The EU competition rules do not address the impacts that market operations could have on media pluralism or independence. The antitrust rules cannot tackle the un - transparent methodology for online audience measurement in a structured way. The state aid rules are applied on a case-by case basis and often ex post and do not sufficiently address the problems created by the unfair allocation of state resources to media service providers . The horizontal ownership transparency requirements of the Anti- M oney Laundering and EU Company Law Directives do not address additional, media-specific transparency elements , such as the information on the interests of media owners in other businesses . The initiative will build on the case law of the Court of Justice of the EU (CJEU) which recognised that restrictions to the fundamental freedoms of the Treaty on grounds of the public interest objective of protecting media pluralism must be appropriate and proportionate . It will not interfere with the conditions regulating market access, such as licensing of media services in the Member States. Both the European Parliament and the Council of the European Union have repeatedly called for the Commission to take action to lift barriers to the proper functioning of the internal media market and promote pluralism and independence in that market. Respondents to the public consultation and participants in the targeted stakeholders’ consultations underline d the importance of promoting a common framework removing barriers to the proper functioning of the EU media market and promoting pluralism and freedom in this market . 2. Problem definition 2.1 Context and scope U ncoordinated national rules and procedures related to media pluralism , insufficient cooperation between national media regulators, interference in editorial decisions of media services , a s well as opaque and unfair allocation of economic resources to media raise internal market barriers and /or lead to an uneven level playing field between media market players across the EU . Such barriers and practices make it difficult for media players to use the internal market to its full potential and to fulfil properly their societal role to inform citizens and business es . The gravity of the problems varies across the EU and some issues are more serious for certain Member States. This is explained below when describing the problems and their underlying drivers. The issues identified above concern the entire information ecosystem. They affect both media companies (and journalists) as providers of information services a s well as citizens and businesses as recipients of information. T he init i ative would cover in principle all media , including audiovisual, radio and the press. However , some of its provisions would apply only to a certain category, such as providers regulated at EU level (audiovisual media and video-sharing platform s ) or public service media . Some of the provisions would also concern other media market players (providers of audience measurement systems , media content distributors, and very large online platforms) . 2. 2 What are the problems? The initiative seeks to tackle a series of problems affecting the proper functioning of the internal media market . These problems are the result of a number of drivers . Figure 1 Problem tree 2. 2 .1 O bstacles to cross - border activity and investment in the internal media market Media players face obstacles hindering their operation and investment in the internal media market. As discussed under drivers below, t hese barriers stem from diverging and uncoordinated national measures and procedures related to media pluralism and /or are the result of discriminatory or protectionist measures or decisions . The problem affects especially the broadcasting sector, which is traditionally regulated (at EU and/or national level), and to a lesser extent the press sector ( where covered by the national rules ) . 72% of all respondents to the public consultation consider the legislation in their Member State inadequate or disproportionate to ensure the free provision of media services within the internal marke t and to protect media pluralism and independence . More than half of business associations and (mostly large) companies responding to the public consultation identified difficulties to the exercise of business activities in the EU media market . Among those business associations and companies that identified such difficulties, rules restricting market entry or operation and discriminatory administrative decisions hampering the operation of media outlets were identified among the most prevalent. Rules restricting market entry or operation were pointed out as an obstacle by 50 % of them , while discriminatory administrative decisions were identified by 41 % . Long and costly processes regarding cross-national media market transactions were also mentioned in targeted stakeholder interviews as discouraging cross-border investment . C ompanies and business associations r espond ing to the public consultation that express ed an opinion on this matter considered the following national rules to affect the entry or hinder operation in the EU media market to a large or very large extent: rules setting out quantitative limitations (e.g. on the number of channels or licences owned by a single entity) (mentioned by 32%) ; rules that prevent a media player that has been granted a licence to operate in one media-related service from obtaining further licences to provide other media or related services ( mentioned by 29%) ; rules to examine the effect of market transactions on media pluralism (mentioned by 23%) ; rules to limit the participation or control of media by companies active in other sectors (mentioned by 16%) ; rules on prior notification and approval required for operation of media players ( mentioned by 1 4%) . Large companies generally reported to be affected by such national requirements more than small or micro-sized companies. As regards diverging national scrutiny procedures for the assessment of media market operations, 68% of all respondents to the public consultation consider ed them among the main barriers in the internal media market. 25% of those business associations and companies that identified difficulties in the EU media market were aware of issues in this area. As explained in the corresponding driver below, such divergences relate to the existence of specific media pluralism scrutiny (or lack thereof) , involvement (or not) of media regulator s in such scrutiny or varying assessment criteria . The different approaches to media market scrutiny (or lack of any scrutiny in some cases) translate into an uneven treatment of market transactions from a media pluralism standpoint across the i nternal market. The 2021 Media Pluralism Monitor points to high risk to market plurality in many Member States . Several cases and case studies provide evidence of problems faced by media market players across the EU. In particular, t he Vivendi case has shown that national media pluralism rules can effectively prevent a company established in the EU to enter another EU market. In its judgment, the CJEU held that the Italian legislation was incompatible with the market freedoms because the provisions at stake bore no relation to the risk to media pluralism. Despite the CJEU ruling that the law unduly restricted cross-border investments in the media sector, the uncertainty in the Italian market persists and Vivendi eventually abandoned the transaction. A number of market players reported on regulatory barriers due to the application of national laws and procedures relevant for media in the targeted interviews conducted as part of the Impact Assessment study . The companies interviewed referred to various barriers faced in different Member States (Croatia, Greece, Slovenia and Hungary) . In this context, several companies pointed to a lack of a common framework for media market scrutiny as potential ly discouraging investment and argued for EU-based common principles and criteria and independent institutions . As regards media market scrutiny, when the pro-government media conglomerate KESMA was created in Hungary, the media regulator , although formally empowered by the law to provide opinions on media market operations, was excluded from the scrutiny of the operation . Concerning regulatory obstacles, t he United Media Group reported to have encountered barriers related to a patchwork of restrictions in the South-Eastern region of Europe. Notably in Greece, shortly after the group entered the market through its acquisition of Forthnet, a law preventing satellite operators from holding free-to-air terrestrial broadcasting licences was introduced . This prohibitio n, seemingly targeting the group, has been considered as significantly limiting growth opportunities of cross-border media players in the media market. In some cases , challenges faced in the media market including in the regulatory environment have forced market players to leave certain markets. For instance, in Czechia, Slovakia and Bulgaria, key foreign investors left these markets between 2006 and 2018 . Other market players continue to operate in certain markets but f ace heavier burdens compared to their local competitors : this is the case , for instance, of the independent cross-border broadcaster RTL in Hungary , which following the 2014 enactment of a tax on advertising revenues in Hungary , was the only one subject to this tax . C onsequence s Regulatory burdens and obstacles to the exercise of economic activities in the internal media market create legal uncertainty and undermine the willingness of companies to invest and operate in media markets across the EU. This is true in particular for the complexity of and divergences in the procedural requirements and criteria used in the assessment of media market transactions . As a result , media companies bear additional administrative costs and legal fees when trying to enter new markets , which prevents them from making the most of the internal market and scale up . Th ese obstacles contribute to the relatively low level of cross-border business activity in the media sector within the internal market . S ome EU countries have become increasingly closed to services imports in the broadcasting se ctor . In extreme cases , a s illustrated above, s uch obstacles may force players out of certain markets. What are the problem drivers? Patchwork of media pluralism laws and procedures T here are various national measures related to media pluralism , which are uncoordinated at EU level . The corresponding rules and procedures vary across the EU: s ome Member States do not have rules at all, whereas others do; in the latter case, there are considerable differences. In particular, some Member States have ownership limitations based on audience reach, others have market shares’ limitations or capital control restrictions or cross-media ownership restrictions . For example, under the French Law on the Freedom of Communication , to prevent cross-media concentration and possible negative impacts on media pluralism, a licence cannot be obtained by a person /entity who is in more than two of the following situations: ( i ) it holds one or more licences for terrestrial television services in an area with a population of more than 4 million, ( ii ) it holds one or more licences for radio services serving areas with a population of up to 30 million, or ( iii ) it publishes one or more daily political and general newspapers representing more than 20% of the total circulation of daily political and general newspapers . In contrast, in Ireland there are no specific numerical ownership thresholds, but no person or group of persons should have control of or substantial interests in an ‘undue number’ of sound broadcasting services, or an ‘undue amount’ of communica tions media in a specified area . T here are also differences in the procedures applicable to the scrutiny of market transactions for media pluralism purposes . F or instance , while in some Member States all media transactions are scrutinised regardless of revenue thresholds , other countries apply rev enue multipliers in order to ensure that competitive threats do not pass undetected and are brought under scrutiny even when the outlets involved have low revenues . Fragmentation also characterises the existence of specific pluralism ‘checks’ ( or lack thereof ) , involvement of the media regulator in such media market scrutiny or criteria used during the scrutiny. In particular, s ome Member States have specific rules and procedures for the assessment of the impact of media market operations on media pluralism . This media pluralism ‘check’ is often carried out by the media regulator (in the form of a binding or non-binding opinion) independently and/ or upon consultation by the competition authority . A number of Member States have in place systems enabling Ministries or Governmental bodies to intervene in the media market scrutiny conducted by the relevant regulators , and to override their decisions on non-economic grounds , ranging from protection of media pluralism to the safeguarding of public security or other general interests . Such fragmentation of national approaches to media market scrutiny raises the administrative and compliance costs of and uncertainty for media service providers , affecting their ability to operate a cross border s. Protectionist measures National rules and procedures related to media pluralism may be applied in a disproportionate or discriminatory way and turn ultimately into obstacles to the functioning of the internal media market . T hey can be used to prevent the entry or operation in a given market of non-national media outlets for protectionist or politically motivated reasons . For instance, the controversy surrounding the acquisition of a stake by Vivendi (a French company) in Mediaset ( an Italian company) raised questions as to whether the relevant Italian legislation was applied for genuine media pluralism purposes. As indicated above, the Italian law was ultimately considered by the CJEU as not suitable for the purpose of protecting media pluralism. Another example has been the attempt to pass a law in Poland to prohibit majority ownership of broadcast media by foreign companies. This draft law was considered to be targeting the main independent player on the Polish television market . Albeit vetoed by the President , in practice the rationale of the law was upheld in the resolution by the media regulator . The application of the recent Greek law preventing pay TV satellite licence holders from controlling or investing in terrestrial television and the introduction of a discriminatory advertising tax in Hungary , cited above, provide further examples. 2. 2 .2 Insufficient regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market National media regulators are key for the proper implementation and enforcement of media law across the EU. The AVMSD acknowledged the role of the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA) in fostering “consistent regulatory practice” and “convergent implementation” of the EU media rules . W hile ERGA concluded a voluntary Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) to strengthen cooperation between its members, its current status as an expert group and the informal character of its cooperation leaves ERGA without sufficient tools to solve cross-border issues, take collective action or take a position on practical issues in key areas of media regulation other than technical or factual aspects related to jurisdiction . This problem affects mainly providers regulated at EU level, i.e. providers of audiovisual media service s and video-sharing platforms , and ultimately also impacts consumers and other media market players, such as media content distributors . In its response to the public consultation, ERGA has stated that “additional cooperation, also in areas not covered by the AVMSD, is required”, referring to online issues, in particular as regards media pluralism . Moreover, as reported by ERGA on the implementation of the MoU, “only half of the requests for cooperation monitored were fully completed to the mutual satisfaction of the requesting and receiving NRAs”. Member States also consider the current cooperation framework as not entirely satisfactory, pointing to cumbersome and time-consuming character of the procedures for cooperation between regulators . 86 % of all the respondents to the consultation who expressed an opinion on the issue , including 68 % of companies and business associations and 92 % of public authorities , consider that the current institutional set-up of ERGA is not sufficient to enable national media regulators to effectively contribute to the proper functioning of the internal media market and safeguarding media pluralism. 70% of all the respondents who expressed an opinion on the matter, including 51% companies and business associations and all respondent public authorities, considered that strengthened cooperation and coordination between national media regulators would be needed to find common EU approaches to key concepts of media regulation. 40% o f all the respondents who expressed an opinion on the matter, including 36% of companies and business associations and 71% of public authorities , agreed that there is a lack of legally binding cooperation procedures . Russia’s war against Ukraine has shown the importance of coordination between media regulators , who , in this context , wer e not empowered to jointly address threats stemming from the transmission of Russian propaganda channels endangering public security . L ack o f coordination in this area affects a wide range of media market players , in particular content distributors such as cable , satellite and online providers . Without coordination, t hey can be subject to fragmented national measures vis-a-vis channels in the different market s they operate i n. Moreover, a s explained the corresponding driver below, enforcement of national restrictions vis-à-vis distributors under jurisdiction of other Member States also poses challenges , allowing ‘ rogue ’ traders to continue to operate in the respective markets . ERGA itself confirmed that the “ question of cross border cooperation in the area of channels/media under the influence of third countries […] has repeatedly (and again very recently) raised consistency and coordination issues” and called on the Commission to address this regulatory gap urgently as there is a need for a more joined-up approach to threats coming from abroad . 74 % of respondents to the p ublic consult ation that identified areas for strengthened cooperation of media regulators highlighted the need for coordination in cases related to activities by service provider s (including from third countries) contravening European media standards. Following the outbreak of Russia’s war against Ukraine, regulators from Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania and Poland suspend ed broadcasting of some Russian and Belarussian channels under the AVMSD framework. S uch decisions could not be properly e nforced, a nd the channels continued to be available in the respective territories (in particular via satellite ) . In parallel, in order to address threats to the Union’s public order and security, the EU put in place economic sanctions, targeting the core outlets of the Russian information manipulation machine ( i.e. R ussia Today and Sputnik) . Further channels were covered by the economic sanctions later on . Due to legal gaps, ERGA was not in a position to coordinate national approaches . Moreover, there is no EU-wide framework for monitoring and safeguarding media freedom and pluralism online carried out by independent , specialised regulators . A s explained in the corresponding driver below, a pp roaches in this area vary across Member States, which risks creating fragmentation for services inherently available across borders. Media-specific monitoring is crucial for detect ing and consistently address ing risks to media pluralism and editorial integrity in the online sphere . Online platforms, wh ich play a key role in content moderation and distribution, buil t their business models on capturing users’ attention and stimulating users’ engagement. The y tend to ‘push’ users to a similar type of content, locking them in ‘ information bubbles ’ , and amplify more controversial content that is likely to attract more views and be shared further . O nline platforms are also often misused for the spread and amplification of online disinformation and their content moderation practices may in some cases affect editorial integrity . If not monitored by independent and specialised media regulators , s uch (inherently cross-border) risks may not be properly addressed , with adverse effects on th e integrity and quality of media content offer online and thus the functioning of the internal market . This can ultimately undermine the level playing field between media providers and onlin e platforms. Research has found that, for instance, YouTube recommendations may drive people into “ideologically like-minded information spaces” . A nother study found that YouTube’s recommendation tool prioritises right-wing extremist content after prior interactions with such content . Twitter acknowledged the imbalance of political views within its content feed: its algorithmic amplification appeared to favour right-leaning news sources . On Facebook, dominance of extremist political content was discovered, too . This may have a profound impact on voting patterns . On Google News, five most recommended news organisations accounted for 69% of the recommendations, which suggests a concentration towards a handful of sources . Users also recognise the impact of platforms on the access to trustworthy information: seven out of ten Europeans say they often come across news or information on social media that misrepresents reality or is even false . 84% of journalists surveyed in a study agreed that disinformation is affecting quality journalism . ERGA lack s tools to monitor media-specific risks online in a coordinated manner . While it has been voluntarily monitoring the compliance of platforms with their commitments under the Code of Practice on Disinformation, not all media regulators were involved , as this issue was outside ERGA’s remit. Media regulators have unique expertise in balancing freedom of expression and other societal interests, such as public security. It would be desirable that such a monitoring covered the whole of the EU on a regular basis. Furthermore , disinformation on EU affairs is not monitored systematically at national or EU level, with risks for its spread during EU elections or more generally, as shown recently in the context of the war in Ukraine . T he results of the public consultation and targeted stakeholders’ interviews also confirmed that the current cooperation between media regulators is insufficient to provide a high level of regulatory convergence for media market players . A lmost half of respondents from business associations and companies identifie d diverging interpretation of regulatory concepts as an obstacle for the freedom to exercise a business activity in the EU media market . 40% of companies and business associations who responded to the public consultation supported the need for common guidance or best practices exchange by independent media regulators i n key areas of media regulation , such as prominence of content of general interest . ERGA also recognised deficiencies in its powers and tools , stating that “ERGA could [ … ] where relevant, issue guidance based on existing best practices in order to assist Member States and/or NRAs in developing approaches regarding key areas of media regulation” . C onsequences In the absence of a formalised and structured cooperation and monitoring framework, media regulators cannot provide the legal certainty and consistency required by a wide range of actors active in the internal media market and a sufficient level of protection to EU citizens and businesses . R egulatory fragmentation leads to uneven level playing field between regulated entities in an increasingly digital media market . It also affects cross-border availability of diverse and trustworthy information for citizens and businesses. Moreover, without effective cooperation , the internal media market can easily be abused by ‘rogue’ media players undermining EU democratic values. S uch outlets - directly or indirectly controlled by foreign governments – usually operate without any guarantees for editorial independence , spread disinformation and undermine trust . This put s media players who comply with EU media standards at a competitive disadvantage , further distorting the level playing field in the media market . What are the problem driver s ? Limited framework for cooperation among media regulators Under the AVMSD, ERGA is to provide technical expertise to the Commission ; to exchange experience and best practices on the application of the regulatory framework for audiovisual media services; to cooperate and provide its members with the information necessary for the application of the Directive; and to give opinions, when requested by the Commission, on the technical and factual aspects in a few areas specified by the Directive ( all related to jurisdiction matters ) . EU law, therefore, foresees only a limited cooperation framework among media regulato rs , constraining ERGA, in most cases, to a forum for exchange of best practices and issuing position papers. As regards third country media pro viders affecting the EU information space, Article 3 of the AVMSD allows Member States to restrict reception on their territory of media services from other Member States where they prejudice or present a serious and grave risk of prejudice to public security, including national security and defence. Such temporary restrictions can be enforced only vis- a -vis content distributors (e.g. cable compan ies ) established in the Member State imposing the restrictions. The AVMSD does not provide any tool to have the restrictions implemented by distributors established in other Member States (e.g. satellite operators) . In practice this results in an enforce ment gap: restricted content continues to reach the households which receive the signal of the satellite operator established in an other Member State. Similar problems arise online : there is no framework to ensure that restrictions on re-transmission under AVMSD are complied with by online distributors . Also, the AVMSD does not regulate issues related to protection of the EU’s information space from third country providers outside EU jurisdiction. No EU-wide tools for independent regulators to monitor media freedom and pluralism online The DSA will oblige very large online platforms to assess and mitigate risks for freedom of expression and information as well as for civic discourse and electoral processes, and public security (including those related to disinformation) and regulate platforms’ content moderation practices. The DSA entrusts the monitoring and enforcement of these provisions to the Commission, supported by a network of Digital Services Coordinators (to be appointed by Member States, including by designating existing regulatory authorities such as the media regulators) and with the participation of other relevant national authorities on the basis of their expertise. The DSA allows sector-specific interventions to be plugged in to its framework, for instance as regards tools for cooperation between media regulators in this area. The initiative could address any remaining sector-specific issues related to the monitoring and addressing media-specific risks online by independent regulators ( who have a specialised expertise in media pluralism issues ) , which may not be sufficiently tackled by the DSA as a horizontal instrument. Moreover, a few Member States have taken regulatory measures to address certain aspects of media pluralism and freedom online , with diverging monitoring and enforcement frameworks at national level , which remain uncoordinated at EU level . 2. 2 .3 Interference in free provision of quality media s e rvices in the internal market Editorial independence is a pre-condition for a well-functioning media market where quality media content (i.e. content produced independently and in line with deontological standards) may freely flow across borders . European media increasingly face interference in their editorial decisions, both from public authorities and private owners . This interference affects the editorial freedom of media companies, and their capacity to independently produce and freely distribute their content across borders, thus hindering the exercise of their economic activities. In addition, m edia service providers adher ing to standards of editorial independence and considering to expand the provision of services to additional markets are likely to be deterred by a high risk climate of interference in Member State s they consider to invest in. A s testified by developments in certain countries , such as in Hungary and Poland over the last years , the investment environment has become increasingly hostile vis-à-vis foreign companies in several Member States . The resulting exodus of foreign media owners from certain markets driven by both regulatory and political pressure reasons has not been counterbalanced by new media services entering the markets. Also , j ournalists cannot work freely in the internal market when they face political or undue commercial pressure concerning the media content they produce . Overall, interference with editorial freedom affects the ability of media to inform, educate and entertain the public through quality media services. The issue of availability of quality content is no longer confined to individual national markets. The digital shift has triggered a change in the way citizens access and consume media content which is immediately available on their personal devices. In a digital space frontiers have become much less relevant. As consumers have the right to buy products that abide by common safety standards in the internal market, citizens should be able to expect quality media content in the same market. This is not just important for fundamental rights but also for the economy and functioning of the internal market. Quality of media services is key to foster trust in cross-border services and allow media companies to expand their activities . For example, investors should be able to rely on trustworthy reports in order to make efficient commercial decisions which may affect cross-border transactions. At the same time, a dvertisers increasingly seek to invest in media that fulfil certain quality requirements. Initiatives such as the cross-industry Global Alliance for Responsible Media have been created to encourage monetis ation of online content that ensures a brand-safe environment . The problem is exacerbated by the business models of online platforms that tend to amplify media content which is not produced in line with deontological standards, is biased or amounts to disinformation . This distorts the playing field online against providers of quality media content . The problem of interference in free provision of quality media services affects all media companies and most of the Member States, although to varying degrees. Many media companies, business associations, NGOs and citizens who responded to the call for evidence and took part in targeted consultations pointed to state and commercial interference in media a nd its negative impact on media pluralism, affecting the circulation of media content and the effective functioning of the internal media market. 85 % of all respondents to the public consultation were aware of cases of state interference while almost a third were aware of private interference. 43% of respondents to a recent Eurobarometer survey considered media not to be independent from political or commercial pressure in their Member State . The Commission’s Rule of Law reports refer to political pressure on the media in Czechia, Malta, Slovenia, Poland, Bulgaria and Hungary , with instances of consolidation of pro-government media in Hungary and interference in the editorial independence of media in Poland . According to the 2021 MPM, political independence of media (related to the lack of conflict of interest rules and political control over media outlets and news agencies) is at high or medium risk in 21 Member States . ‘Media capture’ has severely compromised the operation or even led certain media groups to stop operations altogether in some Member States . S tate interference can also take the form of unwarranted surveillance of journalists or their sources, jeopardising such sources and preventing news gathered through them from being produced and provided by the journalists and media . A varying level of protection against deployment of surveillance systems across the EU affect s the functioning of the internal media market: m edia service providers will likely abstain from operating in Member States where they have to fear a lack of effective protection of journalistic sources , in particular since the reputation of a newspaper or a broadcast er might suffer in the eyes of potential sources and the public when its journalists are forced to disclose sources, as the European Court of Human Rights pointed out . Also j ournalists cannot produce media content freely in the internal market if they cannot rely on a consistently high level of protection of their sources. This results in uneven conditions of competition for journalists and media service providers and can caus e barriers to their freedom to provide services . Ultimately, such state interference prevents journalists from fulfilling their societal role of providing citizens and businesses with quality information and investigative reporting which is key to counteract disinformation. P ublic service media play a particular role in the EU’s media landscape, by enriching public debate and ensuring that all citizens have access to quality information and balanced media coverage and thus can participate to a fair degree in public life. In this context, safeguards for their independence are key. However, public service media can be particularly exposed to interference, given their proximity to the state and the public funding they receive . Political interference in editorial coverage and governance of public service media (dismissals and appointments of its management) are common in certain Member States , which shows fragmentation as to the necessary safeguards or their implementation . Biased reporting by public service media , enjoying public funding but not fulfilling the public remit, distort s competition with private media (often coming from abroad) that compete for the same advertising revenues. T he functioning of the internal market can be hampered in this case because private media service providers can be deterred from entering such market s . Moreover, c itizens may turn to alternative sources of information, in particular very large online platforms, which further distorts the level playing field between media and such (global) platforms. 79% of all respondents to the public consultation reported instances of state interference in editorial decisions or management of public service media in the EU. 70% of all respondents were aware of cases of appointment and/or dismissal procedures of management of public service media used to undermine their independent functioning . The 2021 MPM reports the growing politicisation of public service media, with high or medium risk to the independence of their governance and funding in 16 Member States . Private pressure on media and the editorial decisions may come both from inside and outside of the media outlet. M edia owners can unduly interfere in editorial decisions, pursuing their own economic or political interests. Such interference can be facilitated by insufficiently developed internal independence safeguards within media companies . As a result, media can deviate from journalistic principles and report with the sole purpose of attracting viewers, engage in ‘influence peddling’ or even abstain from publishing certain content . The Mapping Media Freedom platform reports 111 alerts under the category of incidents caused by employer or publisher in the past 5 years . A Latvian research project found that a lmost half of the journalists surveyed felt that they had to take into account the interests of their business owners and the latter’s political allies . The 2021 MPM reports high or medium risk of commercial and owner influence over editorial content in 22 Member States . In terms of private interference, Reporters without Borders (RSF) highlighted the decision by a French broadcaster to suppress a documentary in May 2015 as “the classic example of influence peddling in the news media” . According to RSF, the TV channel’s owner used his influence over the media outlet to benefit his business partners and his own interests. Biased coverage by the Polish public broadcaster, in particular during presidential elections, has been identified by ODIHR: “the governance and funding of the public broadcaster TVP does not ensure editorial independence and enables the government to exert pressure on TVP content. During th is campaign […] the TVP failed in its legal duty to provide balanced and impartial coverage ” . Similarly, in the context of the Hungarian parliamentary elections, OD IH R considered that while “the public broadcaster fulfilled its mandate to provid e free airtime to contestants, [ ... ] its newscasts and editorial outputs clearly favoured the ruling coalition” . Interference is also facilitated by the lack or insufficient transparency on the factors of influence over editorial decisions in media . 76% of all respondents to the public consultation identified insufficient media ownership transparency as an issue for the freedom to exercise a business activity in the EU media market . 81% of all respondents considered that the information on who owns or controls the media in the internal market is accessible only to a limited extent or not at all . While the majority of Member States have media-specific ownership registries, covering mainly audiovisual media, the accessibility and granularity of the information (in particular as regards business interests of media owners in other media or no-media sectors ) vary. Such granularity is key to ensure transparency on the factors of influence over editorial decisions and media accountability vis-à-vis their audiences. Access to information on media companies may be used by different groups, such as banks, consumers, suppliers and investors. Access to data on market shares is essential for those companies that aim to invest in any given market, as it is a key indicator for market assessment and an important metric by which to assess how competitors are performing to gauge revenue creating opportunities, to assess their brands’ positioning against those of their competitors and to predict future growth . It is also reported that “transparency contributes to a market environment characterised by open and fair competition, while enabling media providers to demonstrate their own independence and can therefore also be used as indicators of a quality offering” . The specific nature of media services reinforces the need for media ownership transparency also for the general public, a s it contributes to safeguard ing editorial independence . C onsequences I nterference by public and private actors in editorial independenc e impacts the functioning of the internal media market . I t hampers the exercise of economic activities in the media sector and thus the free provision of media content across borders , discourages investment and affects the quality of media service s provided in the internal market . S uch interference - and the resulting lower quality of the affected media services - distort s competition between media service providers and make s it even more difficult for quality media to compete in the online environment. Moreover , as companies ’ decisions are influenced by market information and coverage in news media , i nterference can also misle a d business decisions and distort the market in other sectors . Finally , i nterference lead s to lower public trust in media, with adverse knock-on effects on the financial situation of media operating in the internal market . What are the problem drivers? Fragmented safeguards to prevent interference in editorial freedom In many Member States, legal guarantees for editorial independence are in place. Whereas in some Member States, such legal guarantees rest on general clauses providing for the freedom of expression and/or the ability of broadcasters to choose their programmes , f or instance, in Sweden, the law envisages an institution of a ‘ responsible editor ’ as a sole entity supervising publications in a given news outlet and makes it clear that any restriction of responsible editors’ power is considered null and void . However, in some Member States, these safeguards appear to be insufficient. T he 2021 MPM reports high risks in the area of editorial autonomy in 11 Member States , point ing to the lack of regulatory safeguards to guarantee autonomy (from politically motivated influence) when appointing and dismissing editors-in-chief in those Member States . In particular, for Croatia , the 2021 MPM talks of “systematic cases of interference in appointment and dismissals of editors-in-chief” . In Czechia, it was reported that the former Prime Minister Andrej Babiš could control some of the most popular media outlets . In Poland , the perception of politically biased media is widespread . In Hungary , there was no framework which would have prevented the orchestrated media capture by the government that has taken place over the last years . T he ways in which Member States protect journalistic sources diverge too, leading to uneven protection across the EU . The regulatory divergences relate , among others , to judicial actions that can or cannot be taken in the context of disclosing journalistic sources or legal exemptions when a source must be disclosed . Also, while almost all Member States’ legal frameworks regulate targeted surveillance used by intelligence services, national legal frameworks often lack clear definitions indicating the categories of persons and scope of activities that may be subject to intelligence collection . Moreover , in certain European countries journalists have been put increasingly under pressure to reveal their sources of information . Apart from covert surveillance, it is reported that lawsuits are brought against journalists to force disclosure of their sources . Also, media companies take different approaches to mitigating risks of ‘ internal ’ pressure on their editorial teams. S ome media companies have put in place corporate governance mechanisms, such as charters of ethics, committees of ethics or codes of conduct for journalists . In some media outlets, journalists have a say on the selection of the editor-in-chief or can even veto ownership changes . In others , they can participate in the managerial decisions and the division of the economic gains . However, e ven where som e of the c o rpora t e tools r eferred to above are required by the law (as in France ), their ineffective application may translate into risks to editorial independence . W hen it comes to the question whether commercial interests unduly influence editorial content, the 2021 MPM cites 12 Member States with high risks . This is due to apparent lack of acking safeguards against commercial interests (for example, in Czechia, Greece and Latvia) or also the missing separation between editorial and advertising content (for example, in Sweden). Another key safeguard to prevent interference in editorial freedom is media self-regulation . Self-regulatory mechanisms, which typically bring together journalists and media outlets, and often take form of codes of journalistic ethics, empower journalists and help them resist political and commercial pressure . However, the European landscape of media self-regulation varies . Media councils operate in only sixteen Member States . Also, t here are differences in terms of their size, scope of activities, legal identity or recognition under the national law, which can have a bearing on their effectiveness. In those Member States where media councils are not yet established, the media community may lack incentives to develop them . Uneven independence and balanced coverage safeguards for public service media Public service media are entrusted with a public service remit. Safeguards for the independence of and balanced coverage by public service media are fragmented across the EU, and there are differences in the scope and the level of detail in national approaches . In particular, rules vary across the EU when it comes to the appointment of the management of public service media. For instance, different approaches exist relating to appointment procedures and relevant guarantees of independence . S ome national laws provide for appointments by the parliament (in some cases reflecting the relative representation of parties) or by the government, while others entrust the media authority with this role. Also, the qualification requirements as well as the independence safeguards vary across the EU. In some Member S tates , the law establishes an explicit incompatibility for the members of the management board with a role in political parties, while in others there are no rules concerning political incompatibility . A s regards dismissals of management, most national laws list several grounds, such as criminal convictions, breaches of confidentiality obligation, lack of performance of duties for a certain period of time, misconduct, while others do not provide for any specific rules . When it comes to internal pluralism of public service media, most Member States have in place specific measures during and outside elections periods , but in some Member States the existing provisions serve more as general guidance than a basis for official procedural cases . In addition, the rules may be insufficient or not work in practice. T he 2021 MPM cites a high risk for the independence of public service media governance and funding for 12 Member States . It reports the escalation of pressure on the Czech p ublic t elevision as a consequence of the lack of legislative safeguards for the political independence of public service media . Reporting on Romania, it point s out that the procedures allow for the dismissal of members of the board based on a political vote and without due consideration for their performance . The MPM also highlights the growing partisanship of the public broadcaster in Poland, stemming from the politically-controlled mechanism of appointment of the management . Sometimes legislative reforms aim at strengthen ing government control of public service media. In Hungary, structural changes, implemented through the Media Act of 2010 brought about tighter government control of public service media, and in Italy the 2015 reform of RAI reinforced the role of the government in the appointment of the board members . F ragmented rules on or insufficient transparency of media ownership and control The revised AVMSD merely encourages Member States to adopt measures related to information on media ownership structure and only as regards audiovisual media. It remains silent on the presentation, form or granularity of such information. Rules on the disclosure and reporting of media ownership exist in most Member States. However, the effective disclosure and the granularity of the information available in the media-specific registries varies . Also, making media-specific ownership information accessible to public authorities does not necessarily lead to accessibility to the public and conditions of access may vary . The Anti- Money Laundering (AML) Directive aims to ensure the beneficial ownership transparency of corporate and other legal entities incorporated within the EU. It requires , besides unrestricted access to beneficial ownership information for competent authorities, that information on beneficial ownership is available to the general public through central registers in each Member State. The EU Company Law Directive harmonises disclosure requirements for EU limited liability companies and requires that such information is publicly available in the national business registers and can be accessed through the Business Registers Interconnection System. However, the se instruments do not require the disclosure of information on the interests of media companies’ owners in other media or non-media economic sectors . 2. 2 .4 Opaque and/or unfair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market E conomic resources in the internal media market mainly come from advertising . Advertising resources may come from private parties and from the s tate. D ifferent system s of audience measurement exist across the EU media market which have an impact on the allocation of (private) advertising revenues , in particular in the audiovisual sector . In particular, t he opacity of and biases inherent to proprietary systems of audience measurement skew advertising revenue flows, affecting negatively media companies, and disadvantage competitors that provide audience measurement services abiding by industry-agreed standards . Given that the opacity problem concerns proprietary systems of ( cross-border) online players , the issue is pertinent for all Member States. Moreover, non-transparent and/or unfair allocation of state advertising (i.e. commercial communication paid for by the state authorities or state-controlled entities ) put s independent media outlets in different sectors, including cross-border service providers, at a competitive disadvantage. This is an issue, to a larger or lesser extent, in most Member States. Audience measurement is of key importance for the media and advertising ecosystem, being the core tool for understanding the market dynamics, calculating advertising prices, allocating advertising revenue , and planning the content production in accordance with the preferences of the audiences. However, as described in the corresponding driver below , audience measurement systems developed and used by certain market players outside the agreed industry standards lack transparency and/or fairness. In particular, online players increasingly self-measure or provide to the market their proprietary audience measurement systems which are developing as ‘ alternative currencies ’ competing with the market-wide agreed ones, and lead in some cases to different actual measurement results in practice . As s uch players are often vertically-integrated and have significant market power in online advertising , they can easily modify measurement methods to their benefit and, consequently, have no incentive to share information on their systems and methodologies with other market players. Studies also point to concer ns about ad vertising ‘ fraud ’ in areas where no common measurement systems exist . The issues in this area may prompt Member States to intervene in this market . A coordinated approach by media regulators at EU level would be needed to ensure consistency in the internal market in view of the inherent cross-border nature of proprietary systems of audience measurement provided by online players. In the DAZN case, the Italian media regulator found that the audience data gathered by the streaming provider on the basis of a self-measurement system was 50% hi gher than the audience data measured by Auditel - the Italian joint industry committee - which distorted the distribution of television rig hts revenues . In the Facebook case, the platform was found to have overstated the success of videos posted on its social network, largely exaggerating the time spent by users watching them, with negative effects on the competition in the advertising market . Only 5% of companies and business association respondents to the public consultation regard audience measurement for online platforms to be transparent, objective or performed in an inclusive way . 55% of the respondent companies identify audience measurement methods as the most important area of action at EU level . 54% of all the respondents see potential EU action as useful to ensure an independent auditing of audience measurement. State advertising may be used to favour and covertly subsidise certain media outlets that publish or broadcast government-friendly information. Indeed, state advertising is often a way to reward media outlets that are close to, or uncritical of state authorities . Weakened financial viability of media outlets and consequent increased dependence on state support exacerbates the problem . I nsufficient transparency of the process and criteria used to allocate state advertising makes it easier for state actors to use it to favour only certain media outlets , which are usually local or national players . 75% of respondents to the public consultation assessed the level of transparency of state advertising in their Member States as insufficient . Also, many concrete instances of discriminatory allocation of state advertising were reported in the public consultation, call for evidence and other targeted consultations . 67% of all the respondents agreed that such practices create distortion in the internal market, including 96% of companies and business associations that expressed their opinion on the matter . The 2021 MPM recorded a high risk in the state advertising area in 20 Member States due to the lack of rules on the distribution of such advertising and the lack of transparency on the beneficiaries and the amounts spent . The 2021 Rule of Law Report underlines that regulatory gaps persist in many Member States, while public authorities continue to direct significant advertising revenue only to certain media outlets. In Austria, high amounts of state advertising raise continuing concerns about the transparency and fairness in its allocation . In Croatia, state advertising has been considered as often undermining the political independence of media outlets, which are economically dependent on such funding, notably at local level. In Hungary, the allocation of state advertising has been seen as a factor allowing the government (the largest advertiser in the market) to exert political influence over the media, with high amounts of advertising funds going to government -friendly media , to the detriment of independent media players . In Poland , state advertising appears to be directed mostly to media outlets supportive of the government . C onsequences N on-transparent and/or biased proprietary systems of audience measurement distort competition in the advertising markets across the internal market . They result in information asymmetry, increasing the risks of advertising based on inflated audience data, and prevent media market players from taking informed investment decisions . This affects the ability of media companies to monetise content and invest in new content, with negative impacts on their cross-border economic activity and viability. T he level playing field between audience measurement providers (which often operate across the internal market) is also distorted , as some of them follow agreed industry standards, while others do not. Channeling public funds to pro-government media outlets through state advertising distorts competition and discourages investments by independent media players, including non-national ones . In particular, allocation of state advertising only or predominantly to pro-government outlets risk s - under certain conditions - turning it into a form of uncontrolled state support to the detriment of competing market players. What are the problem drivers? Limited framework for audience measurement The market of online audience measurement is fragmented. A traditional way to measure audience is through Joint industry committees (JICs), which are self-regulatory bodies, comprising the main actors in the television and radio advertising value chain, which are tasked with agreeing on audience measurement systems . Besides organisations following the traditional JIC model (e.g. ÖWA in Austria, AGOF in Germany, Audi tel in Italy, Médiametrie in France), an increasing number of new players emerged that do not take part in the JICs active in the relevant national market and provide proprietary audience measurement solutions which do not abide by the industry-agreed standards of transparency and reliability. As self-regulation has generally worked well in the past, regulation in the sector has been very limited. The main example concerns the Italian media regulator, AGCOM , which monitors the activity of the JICs and has supervision power over the results of their audience measurement systems. To that end, providers are required to provide to AGCOM information on their measurement methodologies . The DMA sets out certain obligations on gatekeepers, such as giving access to performance measurement tools to publishers and advertisers. However, it does not require gatekeepers to be transparent , objective and inclusive i n the methodologies used to carry out audience measurement . Fragmented and limited regulation of state advertising allocation to media EU public procurement rules exclude contracts for audiovisual and radio media services altogether , and the r egulation of state advertising is highly fragmented across Member States. Besides 13 countries lacking specific rules and relying on general procurement rules (where applicable ) , existing specific legal measures show a large variety of approaches as regards the forms of advertising covered, the entities that are subject to the rules , the thresholds triggering their application, the entities entitled to access the information on advertising and the allocation criteria . I n a number of Member States , the legislation addresses the issue of transparency of state advertising, but not the fair or non-discriminatory distribution of such expenditure. For instance, in France, advertising purchased using state or public funds must be contractually defined, and prices must be made transparent and public , while in Ireland, although the placement of public advertising is carried out through a tendering process based on general public procurement rules, the criteria for the distribution of individual advertisement s are unclear . As a result, transparency rules do not automatically eliminate unfair or discriminatory allocation of state advertising to the media, which i n some countries (e.g. Hungary, Bulgaria, Poland) is also used to support partisan outlets, impairing the position of more critical or independent media and altering the competition in national markets . In some Member States, the applicability of the rules depends on thresholds. In Finland, the law only applies to service contracts above EUR 60 000 . In Austria, only advertis ing expenditure exceeding EUR 5 000 per quarter of a year has to be disclosed, leaving many recipients of state advertising unknown . A national report has found that at least one-third of public advertising contracts fall below the threshold. The 2021 MPM reports that state advertising has been used to exert political influence over national and local media by covertly subsidising government-friendly media or buying influence over the rest particularly in Central-Eastern European countries . Such conditions contribute to the growing biased and unbalanced allocation of resources to media service providers across the EU, which ultimately has a structural impact on the proper functioning of the internal market. 2.3 How likely is the problem to persist? Without EU intervention, media will operate in a substantially weakened internal market. Over time, all the above problems and their consequences can be expected to become increasingly acute . Member States will have no incentives to address the fragmentation of their laws and procedures related to media pluralism and such laws will continue to be misused in certain cases for protectionist reasons. Further fragmentation is likely to arise given the inherent cross-border nature of digital media services and Member States’ likely attempts to address media plurality challenges online ( as already manifested in some Member States ). This, in turn, will continue to induce costs and make it more difficult for media companies to invest and operate across borders , while an increase in the level of cross-border investment is unlikely . Insufficient regulatory cooperation and convergence will continue depriving media market players of legal certainty, generating higher compliance costs. Challenges to effective protection of citizens and EU media companies from ‘ rogue ’ non-EU market players would persist . Interference in editorial independence of media would continue disrupting the internal media market and the single market as a whole. The increase in the online consumption of media content is also expected to continue, with online platforms upholding their position as the main news gateway . As a result, free provision of media services across borders would continue to be hampered , leading to a less diverse quality media offer for EU citizens and businesses . Un-transparent and unfair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market would continue distorting fair competition and market conditions and thus weaken the ability of European media companies to scale up. The likely aggravation of the problems would result in less investment in and cross-border ownership of media. The w eaker economic position of m edia companies would reduc e their ability to invest in quality reporting or innovative business models. Overall, the persistence of the problems would translate in less quality content circulating in the EU information space, affecting businesses’ and citizens’ right to receive and impart information, including across borders. 3. Why should the EU act? 3.1 Legal basis If the Commission decides to adopt a legislative proposal , it will be grounded on Article 114 TFEU . This is the appropriate legal basis for measures aiming at improving the functioning of the internal market. It is right to resort to this legal basis where differences between national rules are such as to obstruct the fundamental freedoms and thus have a direct effect on the functioning of the internal market or cause significant distortions of competition . Article 114 TFEU can also serve as a legal basis to prevent the emergence of new obstacles to the functioning of the internal market resulting from the divergent development of national laws, provided that the emergence of such obstacles is likely and that the measure in question is designed to prevent them . The proposal’s primary aim would be to contribute to the development and protection of the internal market for media services, thereby also pursuing several further legitimate public interests (including the protection of users) and reconciling in a fair manner the fundamental rights of all the individuals concerned . It would also seek to prevent future obstacles to the provision of media services, in particular online, where challenges related to media plurali sm are likely to prompt divergent national approaches. Article 114 TFEU has been used by other initiatives pertinent to the media sector, such as the proposal for the Copyright Directive and the proposal for a Regulation on online transmissions and retransmissions . Most recently, the Digital Services Act and the proposal for a Regulation on political advertising were based on Article 114 TFEU. T he CJEU case law confirms that Article 114 TFEU is an appropriate legal basis for the creation of new structures under EU law. This is particularly relevant given the governance aspect of the initiative. The proposal would aim to foster closer cooperation between national media regulators within an EU Board, which would be empowered to promote the effective and consistent application of the new framework ( including via non-binding opinions upon request by or in agreement with the Commission and assisting the Commission in drawing up guidance). The CJEU has previously held that Article 114 TFEU allows for the establishment of a Union body responsible for contributing to the implementation of a process of harmonisation in situations where, in order to facilitate the uniform implementation and application of acts based on that provision, the adoption of non-binding supporting and framework measures seems appropriate . 3.2 Subsidiarity: Necessity of EU action As mentioned above , the European Parliament and the Council have called upon the Commission to address shortcomings in the EU media market and safeguard media freedom and pluralism in that market . Respondents to the public consultation and participants in the targeted stakeholders’ consultations have underlined the relevance of a common framework lifting barriers to the proper functioning of the EU media market and fostering pluralism and freedom in that market . A common EU approach, promoting convergence, tr ansparency , legal certainty and a level playing field for the relevant media market players is the best way to advance the internal media market . The objectives of the intervention cannot be achieved by Member States acting alone, as the problems are increasingly of a cross-border nature and not limited to single Member States or to a subset of Member States. Production, distribution and consumption of media content, including news, are increasingly digital and cross-border as the internet continues to drive the transform ation of traditional media business models. Provision of media services across the EU is affected by global platforms which act as gateways to media content whilst dominating online advertising. The identified m arket failures in the EU media market have Union relevance as they arise across borders and affect several Member States. The initiative will take due account of the Protocol 29 on the system of public broadcasting in the Member States. It will not interfere with Member States’ competence to provide funding for public service media so that they can fulfil their public service remit, as conferred, defined and organised at national level. It would only envisage general principles to strengthen the independence of public service media and reinforce their societal role as recognised in the Protocol. This Impact Assessment discard s the option of a full harmonisation of rules appl icable to public service media ( as regards their remit s, organisation and funding conditions ), to ensure that the initiative is compatible with the Protocol and Member States’ competences in this area. The initiative will not interfere with national identities or regulatory traditions in the media field , in line with Article 4(2) of the Treaty on European Union (TEU) . T h e I mpact Assessment discar ds the option of a full harmonisation of national media pluralism laws. It takes due account of stakeholders’ views that uniform and detailed EU media pluralism rules would be undesirable and disproportionate, as such rules must be adapted to the historic and cultural background of each Member State. Instead, the initiative would aim to strike the right balance between generally couched provisions and more specific rules that allow to reach the policy objectives (including legal certainty) . Member States would have to ensure that independent media regulators are involved in the scrutiny of media transactions, guided by a set of qualitative criteria. It w ould include a mechanism enabling media regulators to consult each other and draw up non-binding opinions at EU level in view of promoting the proper functioning of the internal media market , in respect of Commission’s powers under the Treaties. The Member States’ powers on media concentration would remain with the competent authorities. 3.3 Subsidiarity: Added value of EU action Th e initiative w ould only comprise measures at EU level that are necessary for the proper functioning of the internal media market. It w ould reduce the burden for market players to comply with different national legal regimes when they operate in several Member S tates. It w ould increase predictability and enhance legal certainty for media market players, thereby promoting fair competition and cross - border investment. It w ould also allow for a coordinated response of media regulators in matters affecting the EU’s information space . Intervention at national level would not solve the identified problems. A ction by Member States would lack scale or the necessary harmonising effect and would increase disparity and fragmentation . Furthermore , Member States might lack incentives to reform their media frameworks , e.g. changing rules meant to shield national markets or players from competition or mak ing the allocation of state resources more transparent and fair. The potential creation of a common governance structure to ensure the implementation of the new framework also requires EU intervention . In addition, in view of the inherent cross-border nature of digital markets, any national attempt to regulate media diversity online c ould only partly solve the issues for recipients of media services. Finally , considering that in some cases the interference in editorial independence and operation of media comes directly from the state, it is unlikely that such a problem would be addressed voluntarily and effectively at the national level. The initiative , by establishing a common EU framework fostering cross - border activity, strengthening cooperation between regulators, promoting free provision of quality media content, and addressing practices that distort competition, w ould create conditions more favourable for the development of media services across borders and increas e consumer choice by better access to quality media content . This will strengthen the internal media market whilst promoting media freedom and pluralism, protected under the Charter of Fundamental Rights. This will ultimately promote the rule of law and democracy, two core EU values under Article 2 TEU. 4. Objectives: What is to be achieved? 4.1 General objective Figure 2 Intervention logic 539750 876300 Improving the functioning of the internal media market 0 0 Improving the functioning of the internal media market The general objective of the intervention is to improve the functioning of the internal media market and foster the provision of quality media services , thus strengthen ing the integrity of the internal market as a whole. 4 .2 Specific objectives Fostering cross - border activity and investment in the internal media market T he objective is to make it easier for media market players to expand their operations across the internal market, gradually increasing cross - border investment s in terms of their number and value . To this end , t he initiative would aim to coordinate certain elements of the diverging national media pluralism frameworks in order to facilitate cross - border service provision . I t will aim in particular at ensuring that when assessing media market transactions, national independent authorities approach media pluralism consistently across the EU media market through common criteria and coordination at EU level . Increasing regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market The objective is to s trengthen regulatory cooperation to better enforce the EU media framework in the cross - border context and to foster regulatory convergence through EU-level opinions and guidance , promoting thus consistent approaches to media independence and media pluralism, including online. The goal is also to provide tools for collective - EU-wide - action by independent regulators to protect the EU internal market from service providers (including from third countries) not following EU media standards Facilitating free provision of quality media services in the internal market The objective is to ensure that consumers and business es benefit from trustworthy content provided by independent media i n an increasingly digital and inherently cross-border market for media services . In order to foster provision of q uality media service s in the internal market, t he initiative will aim to mitigate the trend of undue public and private interference in editorial freedom . It will enhance media -specific ownership transparency , with a view of strengthen ing media accountability and independence . It will also aim to promote self-regulation for the independent functioning of media companies. Moreover, the initiative will aim to ensure that journalists can work without interference in particular when it comes to protection of their sources. Ensuring transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market The objective is to ensure a level playing field for media market players by promoting transparent and fair allocation of economic resources . This would be achieved by enhancing the transparency , non-discrimination, proportionality, objectivity and inclusiveness of audience measurement methodologies , in particular online . It would also aim at ensuring transparency , non-discrimination, proportionality and objectivity of state advertising to media, in order to minimis e the risks of favouring pro-government outlets or using public support for partisan interests , to the detriment of other players in the market , and thus promote fair competition in the internal media market . 5. What are the available policy options? 5.1 What is the baseline from which options are assessed? Under the baseline scenario, the Commission would not propose any change to the current EU legislative framework relevant to media services . The baseline scenario is dynamic, as it takes into account all existing relevant EU laws (e.g. AV M S D ) and those being finalised (e.g. DSA and DMA). The Commission would keep enforcing the revised AVMSD , which applies to audiovisual media and video-sharing platforms ( but not to the radio and the press ) , and provides a framework to protect consumers, especially minors, from illegal and harmful audiovisual content , both o ffline and online. A s the AVMSD does not address the fragmentation of national laws and procedures related for media pluralism , there would be no common standards for assessing the impact of media market operations on media pluralism and no coordination of national approaches to media pluralism at EU level . The Commission could launch infringement proceedings following a complaint or on its own initiative, in case of national rules or decisions breaching EU law. However, infringements can only address problems ex post and do not allow for a systematic approach against restrictions in the media market . They are also no effective remed ies against protectionist measures targeting individual companies . Cooperation between national media regulators would continue within ERGA on audiovisual media matters, without a sufficient framework for them to address (enforcement) problems affecting several Member States , to assist the Commission in drawing regulatory guidance on key media law aspects, and to take collective action to protect the EU’s information space. As the AVMSD does not regulate enforceability of national decisions related to restrictions of third country services under EU jurisdiction and does not address such issues at all in relation to providers outside EU jurisdiction , under the baseline scenario, the EU would lack an effective mechanism to protect its internal market against such providers . The Commission would enforce the upcoming DSA and the DMA , which provide horizontal framework s relevant for the EU online space . Given their broad scope , these instruments would not allow to address the issues targeted by the initiative, such as monitoring and addressing media-specific risks online or differences in audience measurement systems , in particular as regards transparency of measurement methodologies used . T he DSA does not recognise specifically the role for ERGA in its coordinated approach to monitoring and evaluation of such risks. The DMA does not specifically require gatekeepers that conduct audience measurement to share their methodologies with partners, including media companies. T he Anti-Money Laundering (AML) Directive would continue to be the main horizontal instrument to ensure beneficial ownership transparency through the central registers in each Member State . The EU Company Law Directive would continue to regulate the information that limited liability companies need to disclose in business registers . The revised AVMSD would continue to encourage Member States to adopt measures to make accessible information on the ownership structure of (only) audiovisual media. However, these instruments would leave unaddressed the specific transparency needs for the entire media sector, in particular the availability of information on the involvement of media companies’ owners in other media or non-media economic sectors. The Commission would also continue to enforce EU competition rules. Such rules, and more specifically the Merger Regulation , do not, however , address the impact of market operations on media pluralism , leaving th e s e issues to Member States. As a result, divergences in national approaches in this area would persist. The EU antitrust rules would not be able to tackle opacity in audience measurement in a structured way. State aid rules would continue to be applied on a case-by-case basis and often ex post , once the harm occurred. In any case, t hey would not compel Member States to be more transparent and fairer when allocating state advertising in the first place and could not address issues with the independent functioning of public service media. In addition to the above, EU Member States, as members of the Council of Europe, would also refer to international instruments such as Council of Europe Recommendation on media pluralism and transparency of media ownership , the Guidelines on the guarantees of the independence of public service broadcasting and the Recommendation to Member States on public service media governance , which however are soft law instruments with no binding force and challenges remain with their implementation in practice including within the EU . 5. 2 Description of the policy options In addition to the baseline, three options are retained for assessment. They each include a different package of measures , with a gradually increasing level of approximation of certain aspects of national frameworks related to media pluralism and independence. The option of full harmonisation was discarded at an early stage, due to its likely incompliance with principles of subsidiarity and proportionality (see section 5.4). The first option is based on a set of r ecommendation s to Member States and, in certain areas, to companies in the media market. While this option has a non-binding character, its uptake would be monitored by a robust evaluation system by the Commission. The second option would envisage a higher level of approximation of national frameworks b y a balanced leg is l ative harmonisation of certain areas of national media frameworks pertinent to the provision of media services in the internal market comprising minimum harmonisation and detailed rules . It would be coupled with and complemented by a Rec ommendation which would include a catalogue of targeted actions for media companies and Member States in the area s of media independence and transparency . The third option would entail the most detailed level of approximation through introduction of specific legal obligations which would aim to more effectively contribute to provision of quality media services in the internal market and transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market, in particular through reporting and transparency obligations. The specific measures envisaged by the options have been designed so that all the problems identified are tackled in a complementary manner in order to remove or minimise the sources of internal market obstacles faced by media service providers and the factors undermining the quality of media services as perceived by consumers. In particular, the measures under different options focus on both rules or administrative practices of public authorities in the Member States and practices of private parties affecting the functioning of the internal media market. The design of the measures under different options also takes account of: (i) the competence of Member States to regulate a particular aspect of the provision of media services or of media freedom and pluralism (e.g. Member States enjoy particular prerogatives in certain fields under Union laws such as those pertaining to public service media) and (ii) the measures already provided by relevant Union law (e.g. several Union law instruments already seek to ensure the transparency of beneficial ownership of companies, including those operating in the media sector) . The proper functioning of the legal provisions envisaged under option s 2 and 3 would be ensured by a new governance structure based on the EU-level cooperation between national media regulators. All the options recognise the core principles of the AVMSD, including provisions on the independence of media regulators. Table 1 Design of policy options CONTENT LEGAL CHARACTER LEVEL OF APPROXIMATION DRIVER FOR EFFECTIVENESS Option 1: Recommendation on media pluralism and independence Recommendations to implement a set of actions to promote media pluralism, editorial independence and transparency/fairness in the media market Non-binding recommendations No legal approximation of national frameworks Readiness and willingness of Member States and companies in the media market to implement the Recommendation Option 2: Legislative proposal + Recommendation on media independence L egislative instrument and a recommendation to media companies and Member States to foster media independence and transparency Binding legislative instrument comprising minimum harmonisation and detailed rules + Non-binding recommendations to complement the legal instrument Approximation of core elements of national media frameworks that are relevant for the internal market , in full recognition of national regulatory traditions Obligation for Member States and private parties concerned to comply with the legal instrument Interest of Member States and media companies to implement the Recommendation in view of ensuring compliance with the legal instrument Option 3: Enhanced legislative proposal All the legislative elements of option 2 + further obligations for companies in the media market and regulators to foster the availability of quality media services and transparent/fair allocation of economic resources in the media market Binding legislative instrument with the higher level of harmonisation (more direct obligations to Member States) Detailed level of approximation, in particular by establishing certain common obligations for Member States Obligation for Member States and private parties concerned to comply with the legal instrument The following table provides an overview of the policy options vis-à-vis the problems and objectives they aim to achieve: Table 2 Summary of policy options PROBLEMS OBJECTIVES OPTIONS Obstacles to cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market Fostering cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market Option 1 Recommendations on standards for media pluralism measures and media market scrutiny procedures Option 2 Principles /rules for media pluralism measures and media market scrutiny +EU level reaction mechanism Option 3 As in option 2 Insufficient regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market Increasing regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market Option 1 - Option 2 Framework for regulatory cooperation, convergence and collective action at EU level Option 3 As in option 2 Interference in free provision of quality media services in the internal market Facilitating free provision of quality media services in the internal market Option 1 Recommendations to foster media independence safeguards , including for public service media , to protect journalists’ sources, and to promote media ownership transparency Option 2 Principles /rules on media independence , including for public service media , and protection of journalists’ sources + R ecommendations to promote editorial independence within media companies and media ownership transparency Option 3 Principles /rules as in option 2 + B alanced media coverage obligations for all audiovisual media Reporting on balanced coverage by public service media Obligation s on editorial independence for media companies M edia ownership transparency requirements + EU-wide registry Opaque and/or unfair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market Ensuring transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market Option 1 Recommendations on transparent, objective and inclusive audience measurement and transparent/fair allocation of state advertising Option 2 R ule s on transparent, objective and inclusive audience measurement and transparent / fair allocation of state advertising Option 3 Rules as in option 2 + Further obligations on transparency of audience measurement and transparency of and reporting on state advertising G overnance for the assessed options Option 1 The European Commission Option 2 and 3 The Board The main actor to promote the effective and consistent application of the new framework Would encompass and reinforce the current ERGA The Board would be supported by Commission secretariat (SUB-OPTION A) Support office (SUB-OPTION B) Provided by the Commission Independent entity A dministrative and organisational support to the Board S upport to the Board for substantive tasks A dministrative and organisational support to the Board S upport to the Board for substantive tasks Additional EU-wide tasks : R eporting on media coverage of European elections M onitoring disinformation related to activities of the EU 5.2.1 Option 1: Recommendation on media pluralism and independence This policy option envisage s a r ecommendation encouraging Member States and, in certain areas, companies in the media market to implement a set of actions to promote media pluralism, editorial independence as well as transparency and fairness in the media market . T o foster cross - border activity and investment in the internal media market, the r ecommendation would invite Member States to follow certain standards with regard to national media pluralism measures /decisions ( transparency, proportionality and non-discrimination ) and media pluralism scrutiny procedures ( involvement of media regulators in examinat ion of media market transactions , recommended criteria for the analysis of the impact of such transaction s on media pluralism ) . T o facilitate free provision of quality media services in the internal market, the r ecommendation would : call on Member States to protect media from interference ( by public and private entities ) ; encourage Member States to provide relevant safeguards for independent management of and balanced coverage by public service media ; invite Member States to ensure protection of journalistic sources and communication ; encourage media companies to deploy internal independence safeguards ; propose a catalogue of recommended independence safeguards for media companies and invite them to foster/adhere to media self-regulation ; and encourage Member States and media companies to step up actions to ensure availability of media ownership information , including on business activities or interests of media owners . T o ensure transparent and fair alloc ation of economic resources in the internal media market the r ecommendation would invite Member States to publish regular reports on the distribution of advertising resources to media and would recommend establishing tools, such as dedicated registries, to monitor state advertising expenditure. It would also invite relevant media market players (including those online) to be transparent, objective and inclusive in their audience measurement methodologies. The recommendation would not envisage any action to increase regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market , as the non-binding nature of the instrument would not be suitable to establish a framework for structured cooperation. The recommendation would be complementary to the existing international guidelines and recommendations , referred to in the baseline. It would have a more targeted character focusing on t he actions in the three areas presented above. It would provide more detailed guidance in such areas and address some novel issues , such as internal safeguards for editorial independence within media companies , which are not yet covered by the international standards. In view of its effective uptake, the recommendation would envisage a specific monitoring and evaluation mechanism by the Commission. For this purpose, Member States would be invited to regularly submit to the Commission all relevant information on actions taken to implement the recommendation . T he Commission, in consultation with ERGA, would also develop a set of key performance indicators that would allow to assess the uptake of the r ecommendation across the Union , by both Member States and companies in the media market . 5.2.2 Option 2: Legislative proposal + Recommendation on media independence This option would consist of a legislative instrument and a r ecommendation on media independence . The legislative instrument would provide common rules for the internal market for media services , governed by a n EU-level framework for structured cooperation between media regulators within the Board . This would be combined with a soft law instrument - a r ecommendation - which would encourage media companies and Member States to foster media independence and transparency . T o foster cross - border activity and investment in the internal media market , the legislative instrument would envisage general requirements of transparency, proportionality and non-discrimination for national measures or decisions affecting the operation of media service providers in the internal market . These requirements would be drawn from the CJEU jurisprudence. It would also coordinate certain process requirements for national scrutiny of media market transactions . I ndependent media authorities would need to be involved in such scrutiny , and be able to issue an opinion or take a decision . They would carry out the analysis of the media pluralism impact based on common qualitative criteria , covering risks to media plurality and editorial integrity as well as media sustainability. The national authorit ies would be required to seek the views of the Board on their draft opinion s or decision s . T he Board would be competent to deliver opinions on such draft decisions or opinions submitted by media authorities affecting the proper functioning of the internal media market. The authorities would be obliged to take utmost account of the opinions of the Board and provide explana tion s in case they would not follow them . Where there is no draft opinion or decision, t he Board would be empowered , upon request of the Commission, to issue non-binding opinions on the transactions potentially affecting the proper functioning of the internal media market. The graph below presents how this framework would work in practice. Figure 3 Coordination of media market scrutiny In view of i ncreasing regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market , the legislative instrument would set up a framework for regulatory cooperation , convergence and collective action . This would include: A mechanism for a structured cooperation between media regulators in all areas of EU media law to exchange information , solve cross-border issues and enforce EU media acquis ( in particular when it comes to media players operating across borders e.g. video - sharing platforms ) . It would also foresee a mutual assistance mechanism for situations of serious media freedom or pluralism risks with a cross-border dimension , including to ensure effective cross-border enforcement of national restrictions to retransmission of audiovisual media services. In cases where a request for cooperation would not be addressed , the Board would act as a mediator in order to find an amicable solution. Ultimately, i t would be able , in agreement with the Commission, to deliver opinion s recommending actions to be taken by the concerned regulator in order to address the request. Tasks for the Board to assist the Commission in drawing up guidance o n technical or practical aspects of regulat ion relevant for media independence and pluralism , in view of reducing risks of divergent interpretations across the Member States. A possibility for the Board to coordinate measures to protect the EU information space from third - country media services which threaten the Union’s public order and security. The Board would be empowered to coordinate national measures related to temporar y restrictions to distribution of such media services, in full compliance of Article 52(1) of the Charter . A mechanism for the Board to monitor media-specific risks on very large online platforms. T o facilitate free provision of quality media content in the internal market , this option would encompass legal principles on media independence and a right of non-disclosure of journalistic sources (contained in a legal instrument) and a recommendation on media independence (contained in a soft law instrument , covering the elements listed under points (iv), (v) and (vi) under option 1 ). T o foster quality media services in the internal market, t he legal instrument would provide for the protection of editorial independence and integrity of media (against interference by both public and private entities ) as well as information requirements as regards the control over news media . To enhance the independent functioning of public service media, it would envisage a general principle of balanced media coverage by public service media and targeted safeguards related to their governance, namely to appointments and dismissals of their management. For journalists , it would stipulate a right of non-disclosure of journalistic sources, coupled with safeguards to ensure that such a right is not circumvented by public authorities , and provide safeguards against the deployment of surveillance software . Th e recommendation would encourage all media companies to deploy internal safeguards for editorial independence and include a catalogue of possible actions that they could take in this regard , within their corporate structures, based on best practices in the sector. Such actions could relate to (i) empower ing journalists within the corporate structure of media, (ii) ensuring independent functioning of editorial teams and (iii) guarantee ing long-term investment in content production . It would encourage media companies to foster and adhere to self-regulatory instruments (codes of journalistic ethics) and bodies. The r ecommendation would also invite Member States and media companies to take actions to ensure availability of media ownership information, including on the interests and activities of media owners in other media or non-media economic sectors. T he effective uptake of the recommendation would be monitored by the Commission (in cooperation with the Board) and as part of a general EU-level monitoring of risks to resilience of the internal media market . T o ensure transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market , the legislative instrument would stipulate rules related to audience measurement and state advertising. For audience measurement systems , it would envisage requirements of transparency of their methodologies , impartiality, inclusiveness and verifiability. It would oblige pro viders of proprietary audience measurement systems to make available, at the request of third parties , information on the methodology of their systems. The Board would foster exchanges of best practices . I ndependent auditing of audience measurement systems would also be encourage d . Regarding state advertising, its allocation across the Member States would need to be subject to transparent, objective and non-discriminatory criteria. A vailability of information on advertis ing spending , including amount s spent and beneficiaries , would need to be ensured . As regards governance, two alternatives could be envisaged under option 2: Sub-option A: the governance system would be based on the Board composed of senior representatives of the relevant national regulatory authorities (building on the current ERGA). It would be the main actor in charge of promot ing the effective and consistent application of the legislative instrument. In its activities, the Board would be assisted by a secretariat, provided by the European Commission . The secretariat would provide administrative and organisational support to the Board. It would also assist the Board in carrying out its substantive tasks, e.g. by conducting analytical or research-oriented tasks. Sub-option B: the Board would have the same role as under sub-option A - it would be the main actor in promot ing the effective and consistent application of the substantive aspects of the new legislation. It would be assisted by an independent EU office , both for administrative and organisational as well as substantive aspects, e.g. conducting analytical or research-oriented tasks and/ or providing technical expertise. The office w ould enjoy independence from the Commission and would be composed of experts with specialised knowledge of media regulation matters. The independent office would also have its own tasks with an EU-wide dimension. These would include (i) monitoring and reporting on the media coverage of the European elections, building upon the Commission’s reports on elections to the European Parliament and (ii) taking appropriate actions to combat disinformation related to the activities of the Union. 5.2.3 Option 3 : Enhanced l egislative proposal This option would encompass all the legislative elements of option 2. In addition, it would include further obligations for companies in the media market and regulators to foster the availability of quality media services and transparent/fair allocation of economic resources in the media market . Firstly, when it comes to facilitating free provision of quality media services , on top of the leg islative elements of option 2, the legal instrument would introduce requirements on balanced media coverage for all audiovisual media, including during elections. Regarding public service media, under this option, on top of the obligation of balanced media coverage of option 2, such media would be required to publish regular reports on how this obligation is fulfilled. Under this option, instead of a flexible recommendation on media independence foreseen under option 2, strict legal obligations would be introduced in this area . The legislative instrument would envisage uniform obligations for media companies to set up internal independence safeguards (with micro enterprises exempted from such rules ). This would include mechanisms to (i) empower journalists within the corpor ate structure of media, (ii) ensure independent functioning of editorial teams and (i i i ) guarantee long-term investment in content production. Media companies would also be legally required to foster and adhere to self-regulatory mechanisms . Moreover, the legislative instrument would include obligations for Member States and media companies to ensure availability of (all) media ownership information, including on the interests and activities of media owners in other sectors . This would be coupled with the establishment of a centralised EU media ownership registry , covering all EU media service providers . Secondly, to further ensure transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market , the legislative instrument would stipulate an obligation of external independent audit that would have to be ensured by all audience measurement service providers. Such providers would also be required to notify the methodologies of audience measurement systems to national media regulators. In the area of state adverti si ng, it would require all media companies to submit to national media regulators the information on state advertising received. Moreover, national media regulators would be tasked to establish and maintain a registry on allocation of state advertising. The two governance sub-options foreseen under option 2 would apply to option 3. Stakeholders ’ views: Citizens and most other stakeholders, including the media freedom community, consumer organisations, media regulators and ERGA, public and private broadcasters, content distributors and advertising ecosystem players are supportive of a legislative proposal, regulating at least certain substantive areas. Among those stakeholders, there is a wide support for a principle-based approach as opposed to no action or detailed standard-setting . According to public authorities, the most useful area s of EU action would be regulatory cooperation to support common standa rds for media pluralism and media ownership transparency . They are also in favour of strengthening the role and resources of ERGA for further EU cooperation. The majority of NGOs identified the independence of public service media as the most important area for EU action . Citizens support in parti cular transparency and fairness in the allocation of state advertising and transparency of media ownership . While public service broadcasters remind of the importance of Amsterdam Protocol , they largely support EU action to introduce safeguards for their o wn independence. T hey advocate for principle-based rules to safeguard independence of all media. They support specifically safeguards for editorial integrity and media plurality online and guidance on the appropriate prominence of audiovisual media services of general interest . On the latter issue, content distributors call for guidance in view of fragmented national approaches. Intermediaries are cautious about new regulatory burdens in this area. Private broadcasters are in favour of common principles for media pluralism measures and audience measurement transparency, objectivity and verifiability , on the latter aspect agreeing with publishers and advertising ecosystem players. They express caution against new burdens and advocate for better prominence of their content. P ublishers, who are traditionally unregulated, are in favour o f self-regulation and express a preference for a recommendation. They do however support measures on state advertising , audience measurement and protection of journalistic sources . P rivate broadcasters and publishers in particular plead for effective regulation of online platforms and warn against measures preventing market consolidation. Both large and SME media companies support EU-level action on state adve rtising and audience measurement. Small and micro companies express more support for EU action on media ownership transparency whereas , in comparison, large companies put more emphasis on th e need to foster self-regulation. As regards governance, there is a wide support for an oversight based on ERGA. R egulators and the media freedom community are in favour of reinforcing ERGA , while companies and business associations would rather keep it in its current form . Concerning the support structure for ERGA, all options covered by the public consultation received similar support. The highest number of respondents considered that ERGA should be assisted by an independent secretariat , followed by ERGA in its current status and ERGA assisted by a Commission secretariat . While all three options presented above respond to the four specific objectives of the initiative and the same substan tive areas, the y vary in their level of ambition and expected effectiveness . The legislative options 2 and 3 are expected to be more effective than Option 1 across the four objectives due to the differences in legal nature. In particular, Option 1 represents a cautious approach mindful of the local, cultural and historical circumstances in each Member State. T he effectiveness of this option largely depends on the readiness and willingness of Member States and private parties concerned to implement the non-binding recommendations . In contrast, legally binding measure s under Options 2 and 3 would guarantee the achievement of the expected policy results , in particular thanks to the generally-available compliance enforcement mechanisms, such as national courts in the Member States and infringement proceedings at the EU level . Regarding the two legislative options, while their effectiveness is considered comparable for the first two specific objectives, Option 3 is expected to be more effective than Option 2 in achieving the results under the third and the fourth objective (albeit at a substantially higher cost) . For example, under the third objective, Option 2 would encompass legal principles on media independence and rules on non-disclosure of journalistic sources a s well as a recommendation on media independence , while Option 3 would envisage uniform obligations for media companies to set up internal independence safeguards , leading to its greater effectiveness due to the binding nature of the detailed rules in this area . C oncerning public service media , Option 2 would establish an obligation of balanced coverage by such media and provide for targeted safeguards for the independent appointments and dismissals of management of public service media . Option 3 would add a further targeted obligation - to publish regular reports on how the balanced media coverage obligation is fulfilled . Such a reporting obligation is likely to incentivise public service media to comply with the balanced coverage obligation . Option 3 would also introduce b alanced media coverage obligations for all audiovisual media , which would lead to its higher effectiveness as regards this objective, although at a substantially higher costs for media companies. Under the fourth objective, f or audience measurement systems, Option 2 would envisage requirements of transparency, impartiality, inclusiveness and verifiability of their methodologies , while Option 3 would also oblige all audience measurement service providers to undergo external independent audit s and to notify the methodologies of audience measurement systems to national media regulators , which would put pressure on the providers to effectively comply with the legal requirements . Similarly, in the field of state advertising, Option 2 would require that its allocation is subject to transparent, objective and non-discriminatory criteria and that key information on advertising spending is published. Option 3 would add a require ment for all media companies to submit to national media regulators the information on state advertising received , and for the regulators - to establish and maintain registries on allocation of state advertising . The additional scrutiny by the regulators and the public - in the latter case thanks to the availability in one place of the information on the advertising expenditure allocated/received by different authorities and media outlets - would lead to a greater effectiveness of the envisaged allocation criteria , although at a cost . 5.3 The choice of the legal instrument The legal basis of Article 114 TFEU (see section 3.1) provides flexibility with regard to the choice of the legal instrument. Therefore, the legislative elements of the assessed options could be potentially delivered by a regulation or a directive. A regulation would be a more constraining delivery instrument, given its direct application . I t would prevent any potential divergences or distortions during the transposition process and w ould stipulate directly applicable rights, for instance to journalists, and obligations, for example , for providers of audience measurement systems. It would also allow to address the problems faster, in order to avoid further obstacles to free provision and reception of media services, which undermine media freedom and pluralism in the internal market . The recourse to a regulation would also be preferable given the institutional component of the initiative ( the establishment of the Board). A directive could also be used for a legislative instrument. This could be supported by the argument of specificities of national media markets and the potential need for a margin of manoeuvre in transposing the legal principles. However, recognising the sensitivities of the topics covered by the initiative and its objective of protecting media companies from state interference, the choice of this instrument has certain drawbacks. First ly , taking into consideration the experience of the recent AVMSD transposition, a directive w ould delay the application of EU rules due to a lengthy transposition process. Secondly, the AVMSD experience has shown discrepancies in national transposition of some of its key concepts. Finally, stakeholders expressed concerns that some Member States could use the transposition process as a pretext to introduce or keep legislative measures that in substance run against independent media service providers or are otherwise discriminatory. Overall, a carefully balanced regulation, underpinned by a structured cooperation framework for media regulators within the Board , could warrant a similar level of flexibility as a directive, while addressing the problems in a quicker manner. 5. 4 Option discarded at an early stage A n option of full harmonisation of national rules rel ated to media pluralism and independence , enforced by a new regulatory EU agency (incorporating the existing ERGA) , was considered but discarded at an early stage . Under s uch an option , full harmonisation of national media ownership laws, including ownership thresholds and transparency , c ould be coupled with notification obligations to and review by the Agency of draft decisions related to media market scrutiny. The agency would be also in charge of an EU media pluralism scrutiny procedure for transactions with an EU-wide dimension (put in place in parallel to the EU competition rules). It would also include ex ante exclusive powers for the EU agency to restrict foreign media service providers. This option would harmonise national laws related to editorial independence and media pluralism, including rules on balanced media coverage by all media, also during election periods, content findability and must-carry obligations , including online . It would also introduce common criteria for remits, organisation and funding of public service media (with the agency tasked to issue reports on independence of public service media). It would also envisage an EU-wide standardisation of audience measurement systems, with the agency certifying systems that could be applied in the EU. I t would also fully harmonise transparency , non-discrimination, proportionality and objectivity in allocation of state advertising (with specific thresholds on expenditure) and establish an EU-wide portal on distribution of state advertising. S uch an option was discarded, based on competence (subsidiarity) and proportionality criteria. Full harmonisation of national media ownership laws, including thresholds , is neither necessary nor proportionate. S takeholders point out that uniform media ownership laws across the Union would be undesirable and disproportionate . In particular, media industry players underlined that any EU-level intervention should not become an anti-concentration tool . Full harmonisation of key media law aspects related to media pluralism could run counter to the freedom of expression and freedom to conduct business, especially for non-audiovisual media . W hile requiring balanced media coverage by public service media is reasonable and proportionate as foreseen in option 2 (given the remit of such media for the fulfillment of which they receive state funding) and could also be considered for all audiovisual media , given that private media may also be subject to national rules in this area , detailed obligations for all media , including the press , could lead to adverse effects on their editorial freedom and capacity to invest in content. H armonised must-carry obligations for media content online could be difficult to implement and enforce. Full harmonisation of criteria applicable to public service media remits, organisation and funding would not respect the subsidiarity principle and undermine the Amsterdam Protocol. Such a detailed EU-level intervention would have adverse effects, in particular in those Member States where there are no risks to the independent functioning of public service media. S tandardisation of audience measurement systems would disrupt the market and future innovation. Setting standards at EU level in this area could undermine the existing well-functioning joint industry committees. T he majority of respondents to the public consultation expressed interest in regulatory intervention promoting a common understanding of the key concepts related to audience measurement, instead of standardis ation in this area. Establishing a regulatory EU agency for the enforcement of EU media law acquis would not be a proportionate way to achieve the objectives. Full centralisation of regulatory competences at EU level would be difficult to justify with regard to the principle of subsidiarity . N ational media regulators oppose such a set up as they fear it would have an impact on their independence. From the budgetary perspective, establishing a new regulatory agency would be a costly option. Such expenditure would be unnecessary as the goals of the intervention could be attained with a lighter, more decentralised governance structure . 6. What are the impacts of the policy options? The policy options were evaluated for the economic, social and fundamental rights impacts, including the SME test. Environmental impacts are expected to be null or marginal for all the options compared to the baseline and are not considered. The quantitative estimates shown in this section should be considered with caution owing to the scarce data availability and the multidimensional nature of the proposed intervention, which makes it difficult to determine with certainty the direction and strength of causal links. Estimates were thus calculated using best-effort assumptions based on qualitative evidence collected from media companies and regulators. 6.1. Economic impacts Overview To estimate the overall economic benefits of the options an economic model is used, in line with other studies carried out to assess the impact of policy options where there are significant gaps in data available . The economic benefits are modelled as increases in revenues for media service providers . As a first step, a baseline scenario is developed on how the identified problems would evolve over time in case no policy action is taken. On this basis , revenues for the media are estimated for the 2021-2027 period. Total revenues are expected to grow at a 3% CAGR in the four sub-segments of the media market (television and home video, internet advertising, newspapers and radio) , driven in particular by the growth in online advertising , whilst newspaper and radio revenues are expected to stagnate. A n annual average for the period is estimated at EUR 105.9 billion , and this serves as the baseline for revenues. Table 3 Breakdown of the (yearly) quantitative estimate of the baseline by sector (2021-2027), EUR million Radio Newspaper TV and home video IT and TV advertising Yearly average 8 591 18 278 51 641 27 462 105 972 Subsequently the impacts , in terms of benefits and costs, of the different policy options are estimated as incremental changes in revenues compared to the baseline. This ensures comparability of the impacts of each option. The impacts a re derived through a causal pathway, for three types of benefits - competitiveness , trade and investment flows ; market viability ; and consumer choice . Also , the costs related to regulatory complexity are integrated. The assessment of the se impacts was informed by the evidence collected through the supporting study (desk research, interviews, online surveys, workshop) . The comparison showed that the benefits impacts would be uncertain or weak in policy option 1 , and increasingly more positive in option s 2 and 3 , as they would be more effective through a more complete set of measures . At the same time, the benefits of option 3 would be off-set by increased regulatory complexity due to the burdensome additional requirements , in particular on balanced media coverage for all audiovisual services and transparency obligations on state advertising . These qualitative impacts were converted into quantitative impact scores using a seven level sca le ranging from highly negative, over uncertain/weak , to highly positive . Each quantitative impact score is determined by comparing how many levels better or worse than the baseline the policy option is from a qualitative perspective. An unweighted average impact score is calculated for each policy option, based on the average of all individual scores for each of the four impacts. The gross economic benefits of the different policy options were then estimated by increasing (multiplying) the baseline revenues by the quantitative impact score. In the final step, f or each policy option, net benefits for the first year were calculated as total increased estimated revenues minus all the one-off and annual costs, while net benefits for the subsequent years were calculated as total benefits less all the recurrent costs . Table 4 Overall economic impacts of the options Unit: EUR million Baseline PO1 PO2A PO2B PO 3A PO 3B Baseline forecast 105 972 105 972 105 972 105 972 105 972 105 972 Impact score 1.00 1.010 1.028 1.025 1.028 1.025 Modelled revenues 105 972 107 032 108 887 108 622 108 887 108 622 PO benefit per year 1 060 2 914 2 649 2 914 2 649 PO cost - companies (year 1 annual cost + one off) 19.4 21.8 21.8 355.3 355.3 PO cost per year - companies (recurrent) 8.0 10.0 10.0 140.8 140.8 PO cost - public authorities (year 1 annual cost + one off) 0.96 7.44 13.66 11.38 17.60 PO cost - public authorities (recurrent) 0.96 6 .12 12.35 9.31 15.54 Net PO – companies - benefit year 1 1 039.3 2 885.0 2 613.9 2 547.6 2 276.4 Net PO benefit year – companies - 1+n (recurrent) 1 050.8 2 898 .1 2 627.0 2 764 . 1 2 493 As shown in the table above, all policy options are expected to have a beneficial net impact compared to the baseline. Benefits are higher for options 2 and 3 compared to option 1, which stems from the non-binding nature of option 1 . Option 2A would provide the highest level of net benefits due to the higher costs for companies in the media market and/or public authorities envisaged in options 2B and 3A-B. With regard to the distribution of economic impacts, measures envisaged within each policy option are expected to affect public authorities and media market players to a different extent. The main economic impacts are assessed by area and by policy option in the section below. An analysis of the single market dimension and distribution of impacts is also provided. However, a quantitative breakdown of economic impacts by Member States and stakeholder group is not captured by the economic model due to the lack of data and the numerous factors on which calculations depend. Therefore a qualitative distributional analysis is developed. Assessment of main economic impacts Media pluralism measures and media market scrutiny Under Option 1, recommendations on standards for media pluralism measures or decisions affecting the operation of media service providers in the internal market and for media market scrutiny procedures will be introduced. These will address the problem of fragmentation by encourag ing and gradually increas ing some level of regulatory convergence with regard to such measures and procedures. The potential additional involvement of the national media regulators will add relevant knowledge and analysis. Some increase in investor confidence and reduction in legal costs are also expected. Respondents to the online survey suggested that the introduction of a recommendation could bring some (limited) improvement of market conditions in Member States currently facing risks of interference in the media market. However, the non-binding nature of the recommendation does not guarantee a uniform distribution of the expected benefits and could even lead to further divergence between Member States. Under Option 2 and Option 3, a combination of general requirements for national measures or decisions and coordination of basic process requirements for national scrutiny of media market transactions will reduce the obstacles created by the current patchwork of media pluralism laws and procedures and mitigate the risk of using media market measures for protectionist reasons. The Board will be tasked to issue opinions on specific cases that may affect the proper functioning of the internal media market. The Board will analyse national decisions/opinions from the market and legal perspective, looking at complex matters such as opinion-forming power of the media, editorial integrity, market dynamics and viability, paying due account to the cross-border dimension, and drawing from its own expertise and best practices across Europe. Moreover, the Board will enjoy a high level of independence from national governments and authorities as well as private parties. As a result, it can be expected that national authorities will take account of the opinions of the Board in most cases. The resulting more predictable, coherent and less protectionist internal media market will provide greater legal certainty and fairer competition for media players, reducing compliance costs and facilitating cross-border investment. Media players, in particular providers of news content and non-national outlets , which are , respectively, more likely to suffer from political pressure or protectionist measures, will have higher confidence to undertake new investments. Based on feedback from stakeholders, potential reduction in legal costs can be estimated at EUR 30 million per year , due to streamlining of procedures for media market operations . SMEs will particularly benefit because of their reduced financial capacity. S takeholders indicated that l arge broadcasters, who have traditionally been regulated in more detail, are expected to benefit because they are more prone to cross-border integration in order to achieve economies of scale in a capital-intensive industry. For example, a cross-border integration between three broadcasters would yield cost efficiencies (stemming from digitalisation of operations, company IT and data, administration, procurement and advertising sales) between EUR 160-360 million. Moreover, if wider business opportunities are also factored in (production of premium content, new technological standards for connected TVs, new digital advertising formats), benefits of between EUR 320-720 million can be projected . Single market dimension and distribution of impact s Impacts of Option 1 can potentially affect a ll media companies in the newspaper, radio and television sectors . However, only media companies operating in Member States which decide to adopt the recommendation will be affecte d both in terms of benefits and costs . Option s 2 and 3 can be particularly beneficial to harmonise divergent media pluralism laws and procedures. This could be particularly relevant for 15 Member States where the re is a lack or weakness of measures on media market scrutiny and a high risk for market plurality has been highlighted (see section 2.2.1). This will lead to improved and more even conditions for investment across significant parts of the internal media market, thus facilitating scaling up across borders, innovation and quality content. With regard to media market players, the two options will particularly benefit: (i) providers of news media content , which are more politically sensitive, and non-national entities especially in countries which are reported to have more protectionist measures ; (ii) l arge broadcasters which can achieve economies of scale through higher cross-border integration ; and (iii) companies active in the r adio sector and digital-only publishers, which can benefit from a clearer legal framework. Framework for regulatory cooperation and convergence Under Option 2 and Option 3 , in order to address the problem of insufficient regulatory cooperation and convergence , a general mechanism for a structured cooperation between media regulators and a specific mutual assistance mechanism for situations of serious media freedom or pluralism risks with a cross-border dimension will be introduced. This will lead to quickly solving cross-border case s and thus to effective enforcement of the legal requirements for media players (including online) . In particular, g uidance by the Commission with the assistance of the Board on technical or practical aspects of regulation relevant for media independence and pluralism, applicable especially in the audiovisual sector, will reduce differences in interpretation and application of EU media rules across the Member States and enable regulators to address emerging obstacles to the functioning of the media market in a structured and coherent way. This will lead to more even and effective enforcement of the legal requirements for media players . The Board will also monitor media - specific risks o n very large online platforms , thus contributing to consistent protecti on of media pluralism online . T he Board will also be empowered to coordinate measures to protect the EU information space from media services providers (including from third countries) which threaten the Union’s public order and security. This will help national regulators to jointly address threats more speedily and consistently and close the current enforcement gap where viewers may receive the restricted content from a satellite provider established in another Member State. It will notably improve the level playing field for media market players by protecting them from entities producing and distributing media content (often disinformation) without observing journalistic standards (‘rogue traders’). It will also provide more clarity for content distributors regarding restrictions they are to comply with. Overall these measures will result in a more stable and convergent regulatory environment for media market players and greater legal certainty . Single market dimension and distribution of impact s Options 2 and 3 will positively affect the cooperation between NRAs of all Member States in comparison to the current collaboration under ERGA , in particular as regards cross-border issues where timeliness and sharing of information are key in delivering positive outcomes . At the same time, each NRA will have to bear costs to familiarise and comply with the new framework. With regard to media market players , all sectors can be positively affected by measures in this area. However, a reduced regulatory fragmentation across borders can be particularly relevant for providers of audiovisual media services , which are currently regulated in a more detailed manner than other media sectors and which are more prone to expand ing their operations to other Member States. In addition, better enforcement of audiovisual regulation across borders will benefit media service providers competing with global video-sharing platforms by enhancing the level playing field through timely and effective measures . Quality of media services Editorial independence safeguards Option 1 would , in order to address the problem of growing interference in the provision of quality media services , call on Member States to protect media independence, invite them to provide safeguards for public service media, encourage media companies to deploy internal independence safeguards ( including a catalogue of recommended safeguards) and to foster media self-regulation. Such recommendations would provide support to all media, in particular to companies who wish to develop their resilience to internal and external pressures. Increased adherence to deontological standards of, for example, accuracy, objectivity and relevance would help deter interference and preserve the quality of content produced. However, the actual impact of the recommendation would depend on the extent to which Member States and companies follow it. The same applies to the call to Member States and companies to step up actions on transparency of media ownership information, including on business activities or interests of media owners in other media or non-media sectors. If such a recommendation is taken up, it would foster predictability of the market and potentially encourage further investments. Option 2 would combine the legal principle of protection of editorial independence or integrity of media and legal principles for public service media independence, with practical recommendations for media companies on editorial independence safeguards and development of self-regulation . By anchoring the recommendations for media companies in the law ( which would spell out a principle of protection of editorial independence of media), and backing them with an effective monitoring system, the actual uptake of internal safeguards (which have shown their effectiveness for companies that already have them) is expected to be greater. Increased adherence to self-regulatory mechanisms and greater media ownership transparency, including on business interests of the owners, will also help deter interference and preserve the quality of content produced and contribute to higher autonomy of editors. Option 2 would, therefore, help reduce the risks for media companies of political or commercial pressures. It will also enable a more level playing between all media companies who abide by the same professional standards. Consumers would benefit from the increase in the choice and trustworthiness of media content, and trust of audiences in media would grow, which, in turn, would generate additional revenue for media companies. Principles for public service media independence would also increase the effectiveness of the use of state resources. Option 3 , in addition to the legal principles of option 2, would require all media service providers to set up detailed and uniform internal independence safeguards . The safeguards will be codified in law in order to specify an obligatory governance architecture for media outlets which will establish checks and balances in favour of editorial independence for all media outlets at national and local levels, across audiovisual, radio and the press (with a derogation for micro-enterprises where governance systems would be disproportionate ). Furthermore, adherence to self-regulatory mechanisms will be obligatory . This approach would have the advantage of providing a mechanism for enforcement and thus provides for full consistency of safeguards across the internal market . Additionally, common transparency requirements for all media compa nies when it comes to the owner s ’ activities in other media or non-media related sectors would contribute to achieve further consistency in the internal market with positive effects on potential investments. The potential benefits would be achieved more quickly, but at a higher cost for media market players . Protection of journalistic sources In response to the unwarranted surveillance or pressure o n journalists or their sources , Option 1 would invite Member States to take actions geared at ensuring protection of journalistic sources and communication , options 2 and 3 would stipulate a right of non-disclosure of journalistic sources, coupled with safeguards to ensure that such a right is not circumvented by public authorities , and safeguards against surveillance . This would, to different degrees depending on the option, protect journalists against unwarranted surveillance or other forms of pressure and ensure that journalists in different media sectors can communicate with their sources, which is necessary for the production of media content, particularly for investigative reporting or reporting on politically and commercially sensitive matters. While under option 1, the level of protection would depend on the uptake of the recommendation across the EU, options 2 and 3 would grant a uniform level of protection to journalists across the EU. They would thus contribute to a freer flow of media services in the EU media space. As a result, trustworthiness and diversity of media content would be safeguarded, also for the benefit of consumers. Single market dimension and distribution of impacts Option 1 can potentially affect all media companies in the newspaper, radio and television sectors. However, the distribution of such impacts is strictly linked to the uptake of the recommendations at the national level, which remains uncertain. Impacts of Option 2 can be particularly relevant for significant parts of the single market as 21 Member States are currently considered (by the Media Pluralism Monitor) at high or medium risk of political or commercial influence over editorial choices (see section 2.2.3). Improvement of common professional standards will increase the quality of media services across the single market thus increasing consumer welfare and demand whilst increasing opportuniti es for cross-border reporting, cooperation , mobility and integration. More transparency across the EU on media owners will increase accountability for their business interests across borders. In this area, under Option 2 a ll media companies could be affected , even if the distribution of benefits and costs depends on the uptake of specific recommendations e.g. the extent to which internal control mechanisms will be introduced. This uptake is however expected to be greater in comparison to Option 1 . On top of policy option 2, O ption 3 would introduce further obligations which would affect all EU Member States as well as all media market players in the newspaper, radio and television sectors, in terms of benefits and especially in terms of higher costs. Transparency and fairness in allocation of economic resources Audience measurement systems Option 1 would recommend that market players are transparent, objective and inclusive in their audience measurement methodologies, which could incite some providers of online proprietary systems to improve their measurement systems . Under Option 2 , the requirements of transparency, impartiality, inclusiveness and verifiability of audience measurement methodologies , accompanied by the encouragement of independent auditing and guidance issued by the Commission with the assistance of the Board, will lead to adoption of minimum standards across all systems for all media in the internal market. The specific requirement for proprietary systems to disclose their methodology upon request will apply, in particular, to online players and will benefit media companies relying on such online systems for audience data, notably broadcasters and the press. The media will thus be empowered to verify and understand the characteristics of their online audiences and their behaviour, recognise any possible biases, as well as to better assess the value for money of online advertising prices. This transparency will also improve accountability of providers of proprietary systems and act as a counterweight against potential attempts by them to unduly inflate their audiences. This option will foster fairer competition for advertising revenue between media companies and online players as well as competition between audience measurement service providers. As advertising revenues are key to the viability of media, the financial benefits for media companies will be significant. In particular, in the traditional media environment, media companies typically receive 85% of the value paid by an advertiser (the remaining 15% going to the intermediating sales agency). However, in the online environment, as a result of targeted programmatic advertising, media companies typically receive only 40% of the value, whilst the majority is captured by vertically integrated online intermediaries (who are active both on the advertising and audience measurement markets). The new requirements would help to redress the balance. If we assume the share of advertising value accruing to the media increases to 45% , due to the strengthened negotiating position of media companies, this would represent a potential increase of EUR 450 million . The possible gain would be recurrent and growing (in line with the growth of internet advertising and the share of programmatic advertisement spending). Furthermore, greater reliability of measurement of online audiences will be valuable to media regulators in the context of assessing the opinion forming power of market players. Under Option 3, the additional obligation of an external independent audit and the obligation to notify the methodologies of audience measurement systems to national media regulators would ensure regular third party verification. This would increase professional level scrutiny, potentially helping those media companies, in particular smaller ones, who do not have the capacity to analyse complex metrics . However there would be increased cost s to audience measurement providers. Allocation of state advertising Under Option 1, Member States would be recommended to establish tools to monitor state advertising expenditure and publish regular reports on its distribution to media. Rendering such information public would increase scrutiny by the media and the general public, nudging public authorities and bodies towards fairer distribution of state advertising. The main beneficiaries would be those private media companies deprived of state advertising so far, in particular news media providers and, especially, media critical of the government in Member States where currently preferential allocation of state advertising is the most acute. However, the impact would greatly depend on the readiness of Member States to follow the recommendation. Option 2 would oblige Member States to adopt rules and criteria to ensure transparent, non-discriminatory and objective allocation of state advertising to media. It would also require pro-active publication of core information about the expenditure of state advertising. This obligation w ould create an opportunity for national authorities to review and justify their advertising policies and to demonstrate their fairness. If the adopted rules or practices d id not comply with the principles, media companies w ould be able to contest them in national courts, and the Commission might launch infringement proceedings concerning systemic issues. As above, the main beneficiaries would be private media companies deprived of state advertising so far, in particular news media providers in the broadcasting and the press sector s (encompassing printed and online media) and, especially, media critical of the government in Member States where currently preferential allocation of state advertising is the most acute. As a result of the measures, a wider range of media outlets would have access to this revenue source and a more level playing field would be established, potentially incentivising cross-border activity. State advertising can, in the most severe cases, be skewed over 80% in favour of pro-government media . If, as a result of this option, the share of advertising of media which are not supportive of the government reached 50% , this would represent a 150% increase in advertising revenue for such media. This would have a significant effect in a context where some news outlets receive the majority of their advertising income from the state, and some other media outlets, in particular SMEs, are in a precarious situation . Fairer allocation of state advertising in many Member States will, ultimately, improve fair competition in the internal media market as a whole. In addition, the measures would increase the effectiveness of the use of state resources. Under Option 3, the additional obligation for national media regulators to establish and maintain a specific registry on allocation of state advertising would maximise the awareness and scrutiny of its distribution. The effect would be to generate further public debate and accountability, potentially increasing the extent of redistribution of state advertising revenues. Maintaining national registries would, however, add costs to companies in the media sector and national authorities compared to option 2. Single market dimension and distribution of impacts Option 1 will affect NRAs and/or relevant national authorities in all Member States. As for the other areas, the uptake at national level should be considered uncertain, given the non-binding nature of the Option. Depending on this uptake, measures in this area can potentially affect all media companies in the newspaper, radio and television sectors. Under Option 2 , provisions on audience measurement would enhance transparency in particular of online player s which operate across borders and have business strategies across the single market. They would benefit in particular broadcasters and newspapers who have lost significant advertising revenues to online platforms, in particular therefore in bigger Member States. Also , the rules on the distribution and transparency of state advertising would have a higher impact i n the Member States which are reported (by the MPM) to lack such rules and where particular problems in this area persist (see section 2.2.4). All media market players in the newspaper, radio and television sectors could benefit from these measures. More effectively than in policy O ption 1, a binding obligation on transparency of state advertising would mainly benefit those news media providers of Member States where the distribution of state advertising is unfair and non-transparent. Such news media providers can increase their revenue from state advertising and, therefore, improve the viability of the sector whilst increasing diverse, independent sources of information in these Member States . Option 3 would lead to further benefits but also additional costs . Audience measurement providers and large online platforms would face additional costs, related to the obligation to undertake independent audits on audience measurement. There would also be further costs for NRAs in all Member States and media market players in the newspaper, radio and television sector s (mainly because a national registry on state advertising w ould be mandatory). SME test In order to fully capture impacts on SMEs, data collection activities targeted this specific sector as much as possible. In particular, of 41 respondents to the online survey, half were SMEs. The responses helped to model the effects on SMEs . Under all options , SMEs will incur basic familiarisation costs related to media pluralism measures and media market scrutiny , estimated at EUR 8 million to 12 million. T he cost-benefit ratios for SMEs differ between options, due to the different requi rements. At the same time, the estimates show that around 40% of the benefits of all three policy options would accrue to SMEs, in line with their share of baseline revenues. Under O ption 1 , SMEs consulted do not expect the adoption of a recommendation to generate major benefits due to its non-binding nature, which does not guarantee that all Member States will actually take action. Concerns therefore emerge about the level playing field across Europe for SMEs. The net annual benefit for SMEs under option 1 is estimated only at around EUR 402 the first year and EUR 414 million recurrently , with EUR 19 million in overall costs the first year and EUR 8 million per year in subsequent years , resulting in a lower cost-benefit ratio. Under Option 2 , mechanisms for increased regulatory convergence and cooperation would improve legal certainty and lower legal costs in particular for SMEs. This would also increase confidence to operate across borders , thus facilitating the entry of new players and increasing competition . In addition, the option would help balance the playing field for SMEs to compete with online platforms for advertising revenues. More transparent audience measurement systems would better inform advertisers’ choices and balance the relations between media SMEs and online platforms. The requirements for state advertising would reduce market distortion and contribute to SMEs’ sustainability. The recommendations on internal independence safeguards will pay due regard to the needs of smaller players. However, overall costs, estimated at EUR 21 million the first year and EUR 10 million per year in subsequent years, are expected to be balanced by increased benefits. The net annual benefit for SMEs under this option is estimated at EUR 1 146 million by the financial modelling. Option 3 would create additional set up and running costs for SMEs stemming from obligations on balanced media coverage for all audiovisual media and the set-up of uniform editorial independence safeguards for all media companies , with the exception of micro companies for the latter. SMEs would also face costs resulting from the obligation to provide information on state advertising received. C oncerns emerged around the cumulative costs linked to these additional measures, estimated at EUR 351 million the first year and EUR 138 million per year in subsequent years, which are not expected to be proportionate to the additional benefits compared to Option 2. The net annual benefit for SMEs under this option is estimated at EUR 1 0 15 million through financial modelling . Governance Under Option 1 , the Commission would develop a set of key performance indicators to monitor and evaluate the uptake of the Recommendation by Member States and relevant companies, based on their input. Three additional full time employees would join the Commission. Under Options 2 and 3 , the newly created Board, based on the current cooperation network between independent media regulators (ERGA), would promote the effective and consistent application of the proposed legal instrument. The output of the Board ( e.g. its opinions) would provide legal certainty for media companies, thereby facilitating cross-border investments, and enhance a level playing field for media companies across the internal market. In particular, the Board would improve the consistency and quality of national market scrutiny measures and media law enforcement (including across borders), and protect the internal market from ‘ rogue ’ third-country media outlets. Enhanced cooperation and regulatory consistency will foster a more predictable regulatory environment for all media market players. It will facilitate the work of relevant national authorities (media regulators themselves as well as those in adjacent fields: competition and telecom regulators, relevant ministries). Citizens would ultimately benefit from a richer, more trustworthy and pluralistic media offer and a better (and quicker) enforcement of EU media rules, in particular online, enjoying a safer information space, with a high level of protection against harmful content and lower levels of disinformation compared to the baseline. The Board would be supported by either a Commission secretariat with 8 to 10 full time employees ( sub-option A ) or an EU office composed of 30 to 35 full time employees - both providing support to the Board (while the office would have its own EU-wide tasks - sub-option B ). Under sub-option A , administrative costs and costs related to the substantive supervisory tasks of the Board would lead to an annual operating budget of 1 million EUR , to be absorbed into the Commission’s structures. Under sub-option B , the overall costs, leading to an annual operating budget of 5 million EUR , would be higher, since the office would need to establish its own administrative operations, cover physical and IT expenditure and take care of own research activities. Compared to the current ERGA governance system in the baseline scenario, a (bigger) secretariat of the Board within the Commission could be set up very quickly and is expected to support the Board more effectively due to the existing pool of expertise within the Commission, which would result in better quality output of the Board. An EU office would arguably provide a similar output in the long term, possibly covering further activities with an EU dimension, but it would take longer to set up and become an EU-level expert body on media regulation. Both sub-options would promote higher confidence and trust in the regulatory and advisory work of the Board, enhancing the predictability in the market for the benefit of media companies and regulators. The national regulators would also see stronger support to their work thanks to an effective burden sharing and the expected spill-over effect of expertise and experience. Compared to the current governance system of ERGA, this would result in up to 20% in cost savings for NRAs, estimated at up to EUR 455 000 , along with increased transparency and accountability of the support structure for media regulators . Single market dimension and distribution of impacts With regard to p olicy Option 1 , limited benefits are expected for NRAs in all Member States due to slightly more efficient cooperation within ERGA thanks to an increased support from the European Commission. With regard to policy O ption 2 and 3 , the introduction of the Board for Media Services will allow all NRAs to benefit from a more efficient cooperation in comparison to the current ERGA, to a substantially higher extent than under policy option 1. Both in the case of sub-option A and sub- o ption B, each NRA can save up to 20% of the current annual expenditure related to coordination work in ERGA. Table 5 Expected costs linked to the elements of the intervention with major economic impacts Public authorities Media market players Media pluralism measures and media market scrutiny Under options 2 and 3 , recurrent administrative costs for NRAs between EUR 44 100 - 96 600 for scrutiny of media market transactions in sub-option A and between EUR 31 500 and 69 000 in sub-option B . Under options 1, 2 and 3 , direct compliance costs between EUR 9.1 million and 13.7 million linked to familiarisation with the new provisions. Framework for regulatory cooperation and convergence Under options 2 and 3, one-off administrative costs of EUR 50 000 for the common IT tool to exchange information + direct recurrent administrative costs for NRAs between EUR 1.12 million and 3.36 million in sub-option A and EUR 0.8 million and 2.4 million in sub-option B . No significant direct costs. Editorial independence safeguards No significant direct costs. Under option 1 , recurrent compliance costs between EUR 4.1 million and 8.2 million for an estimated share of 40% of small and medium media market players (from 10 to 249 employees) in the newspaper, radio and television sectors implementing the recommendation to deploy internal safeguards. Under option 2, these costs would increase to between EUR 5.1 million and 10.2 million for an estimated share of 50 % of SMEs and under option 3 , the costs would amount to between EUR 10.3 and 20.5 million as all SMEs would have to set-up internal independence safeguards. Protection of journalistic sources No significant direct costs. No significant direct costs. Audience measurement systems Under option 2 , one-off adjustment costs for NRAs between EUR 69 000 and 415 000 and recurrent enforcement costs of EUR 592 000 in sub-option A and 423 000 in sub-option B . Under option 2 , minor familiarization costs concerning the requirements, to be incurred mainly by large online players, operating outside the joint industry committees (JICs). Under option 3 , cost of external audits for audience measurement providers operating in the joint industry committees (JICs) around EUR 27 000, and for large online platforms between EUR 55 000 and 545 000. Allocation of state advertising Under options 2 and 3 , recurrent enforcement costs for NRAs between EUR 415 000 and 1.6 million. Obligation for national media regulators to establish and maintain a registry on allocation of state advertising under option 3 : EUR 1.7 million. Under option 3 , recurrent costs are expected to range between EUR 18.3 million and 45.7 million . Governance Under option 1 , EUR 490 000 in direct recurrent costs for the EU + EUR 473 000 enforcement annual costs for NRAs on monitoring and reporting on implementation of recommendations. Under options 2 and 3 , direct recurrent costs for the EU: - 8-10 FTEs (between EUR 1 and 1.3 million) and operational budget of EUR 1 million in sub-option A; - 30-35 FTEs (between EUR 3.9 and 4.6 million) and operational budget of EUR 5 million in sub-option B . No significant direct costs. 6.2. Social impacts This section considers the main social impacts of the initiative, which are described below. Overall, the measures are expected to have considerable positive social impacts, stemming from an improved investment environment and better competitive conditions (e.g. when it comes to fairer audience measurement and allocation of state advertising). Given that the European media sector contributes to job creation and growth with a turnover exceeding 2% of EU added value, strengthening the internal media market (to a varying extent, depending on the option) could bring employment opportunities and provide more stability and security for journalists. Moreover, by enhancing media independence through the whole set of measures (in particular related to editorial independence safeguards and protection of journalists’ sources/communication), the initiative would contribute to ensuring diverse and independent reporting for citizens and businesses. This would reduce risks of exposure to disinformation and raise the level of trust towards media. The intervention would have a positive impact on rule of law and democratic systems: it would contribute to raising the level of democratic debate and help media (and journalists) to fulfil their societal role of holding power to account. Framework for regulatory cooperation and convergence Under Option 2 and Option 3 , to address current weaknesses in the cooperation framework between media regulators, a general mechanism will be established for a structured cooperation as well as a specific mutual assistance mechanism for situations of serious media freedom or pluralism risks with a cross-border dimension . This structured cooperation would more effectively mobilise national regulatory authorities to respond to concrete concerns. Currently, only half of the requests for cooperation are fully completed to the mutual satisfaction of the requesting and receiving NRAs. A best effort assumption of a 50% increase in that proportion would mean that 75% of cases would be completed satisfactorily. This would improve the welfare of citizens and social cohesion , in particular by creating a safer online space with reduced exposure to illegal or harmful content. Moreover, collective action by the Board to protect the EU information space from media service providers (including from third countries) which threaten the Union’s public order and security would shield citizens from ‘ rogue ’ media players ignoring journalistic standards and spreading disinformation. In addition, a mechanism will be established for the Board to detect, evaluate and address media-specific risks on very large online platforms , for instance as regards amplification of online disinformation. It will provide a specialist analysis by independent regulators on sensitive media freedom and plurality issues , looking for example at the consequences of amplification of certain types of content online for shaping of public opinion . It will also monitor potential impacts of content moderation by platforms on media freedom and pluralism and the availability of quality media content to citizens, in particular younger, digital native generations, and to businesses. It would thus contribute to a safer, more reliable online space for the benefit of the entire society. Single market dimension and distribution of impacts In addition to the distribution of economic impacts described in section 6.1, social impacts of policy O ptions 2 and 3 will be mainly relevant for citizens, increasing the effective protection from cross-border risks of illegal or harmful content and threats to media pluralism and media freedom. Quality of media services Public service media independence Under Option 1, the recommendation would call on Member States to provide relevant safeguards for the independent management of and balanced coverage by public service media. Assuming that the recommendation is followed, it would reduce the discretion of governments or other political bodies in appointing and dismissing the management of PSM in an arbitrary manner, contributing to a more stable environment for their activities. As PSM play a central role in providing news and framing public political debate, the balanced coverage recommendation would contribute to a gradual improvement in rule of law and democratic standards. Under Option 2, targeted independence safeguards for PSM (particularly on appointments and dismissals of management) and a general obligation of balanced media coverage would be established in law . The governance safeguards would provide a basis for recourse to courts if, for example, the management of a public broadcaster believes that they were dismissed without due justification, as well as for the Commission to launch infringement proceedings in case of deficient rules, amplifying the social benefits identified under Option 1. The balanced coverage obligation would ensure a more diverse programming, benefiting citizens, companies and civil society. It would also provide an additional protection layer from interference in editorial decisions, as journalists would be able to invoke it in response to attempts to control content, such as political news reporting. As a result, significant improvement in rule of law and democratic standards can be expected, especially in the Member States where issues have been identified. Another likely social benefit is greater EU-wide social cohesion, as citizens of different Member States will gain more equal access to independent , inclusive and diverse public service media content. Under Option 3, the obligation of balanced media coverage by PSM would be combined with a requirement for such media to publish regular reports on the fulfilment of the obligation. This would create an opportunity for PSM to review their practices and results, justify their editorial stance and address specific points of concern. As these reports would be in the public domain, they would stimulate wider scrutiny, thus creating an incentive to meet EU standards, albeit at a cost for PSM. Balanced media coverage for audiovisual media Under Option 3 , given the particularly strong influence of television on public opinion, all audiovisual media would be required to provide balanced coverage in news and current affairs reporting, including during elections. The measure would foster common standards for such reporting by both public and private broadcasters in all Member States. This measure can be expected to enhance equal access by citizens to a plurality of viewpoints, in particular during elections, although at a significant cost for private audiovisual media . Transparency of media ownership Option 1 would call on Member States and companies to step up actions to ensure availability of media ownership information, including on business activities or interests of media owners in other media or non-media sectors. Assuming that the recommendation is followed, it would lead to revealing such specific potential sources of influence on media content in different sectors, enabling audiences to critically analyse the content they are exposed to (e.g. to discover biases in the way news is presented or even withheld) and to make informed choices of their media, in particular for news content of political nature. Option 2 would set out common information requirements for media service providers and would recommend to step up actions to ensure availability of media ownership information, including on business activities or interests of media owners. It would, therefore, help reveal ing the potential sources of influence on media content in different sectors. This would enable interested parties, such as researchers and investigative journalists, to bring media ownership information, covering multiple Member States, to the attention of the general public, thus generating additional social benefits. Enhanced transparency of media ownership would increase accountability, deter interference and ultimately increase citizens’ trust in media, thus strengthening social cohesion. Under Option 3, Member States would be required to ensure the availability of media ownership information, including on the interests and activities of media owners in other sectors. This would be coupled with the establishment of a centralised EU media ownership registry, covering all EU media service providers. The obligation upon Member States combined with the centralised registry would provide a comprehensive overview of media ownership across the internal market. This would considerably amplify the benefits identified above for Options 1 and 2, but at a higher cost. Single market dimension and distribution of impacts As for the distribution of economic impacts, the distribution of social impacts will remain uncertain under policy O ption 1 . In addition to the distribution of impacts described in section 6.1., Options 2 and 3 will have greater impact in those 16 Member States which are reported to be at high or medium risk for the independence of PSM governance and funding (see section 2.2.3) . New c osts to disclose information on media ownership are expected to be borne by media companies in those 12 countries which are reported not to have a national media ownership registry. Option 3 would introduce further obligations which are expected to add costs for public service media (additional obligation to publish regular reports) and broadcasters (additional obligation to ensure a balanced media coverage). Moreover, the compliance with a new EU registry is expected to bring additional costs in particular for NRAs. Table 6 Expected costs linked to the elements of the intervention with major social impacts Public authorities Media companies Public service media independence safeguards Under options 2 and 3 , one-off adjustment costs for NRAs between EUR 447 000 and 1.7 million + EUR 42 000 in recurrent direct enforcement costs. Under option 2 , average one-off costs for PSM of EUR 357 300 (one PSM per Member State). Under option 3 , additional annual costs of EUR 1 million for PSM reporting on the fulfilment of the balanced media coverage obligation. Balanced media coverage for all audiovisual media Under option 3 , EUR 203 000 in recurrent direct enforcement costs Under option 3 , EUR 182 million one-off and EUR 87.4 million recurrent costs for all audiovisual companies to comply with the obligation of balanced coverage. Transparency of media ownership Under option 3 , between EUR 446 672 and 2.05 million in recurrent enforcement costs for NRAs linked to specific ownership transparency requirements and an EU-wide media ownership registry. Under option 1 , recurrent compliance costs between EUR 0.3 million and 3.4 million for an estimated share of 40% of media market players implementing the recommendation on transparency. Under option 2 , these costs would increase to between EUR 0.4 million and 4.2 million for an estimated share of 50 % of media market players. Under option 3 , recurrent costs for all media market players implementing the transparency requirements on media ownership between EUR 4.5 and 45.7 million. 6.3. Fundamental rights impacts All options have a positive impact on protection of media freedom and pluralism, which are an integral part of the EU Charter of Fundamental Rights (Article 11 of the Charter). Under option 1 , citizens will benefit from the recommendations on safeguards for media pluralism and independence, including for public service media, in those countries and by those media companies that decide to take relevant actions. Where implemented, the recommendations could improve citizens’ access to trustworthy information, help them exercise their right to receive information and reduce the social divide in access to media content. At the same time, due to the risk of further fragmentation linked to the uneven adoption of measures by the Member States, it could be expected that Member States already performing better (as assessed by the Commission’s Rule of Law reports, the Media Pluralism Monitor and international rankings) would continue doing so, while those underperforming would not significantly improve; uneven protection of media freedom and pluralism would therefore persist. Options 2 and 3 , by enhancing regulatory convergence in the internal media market, safeguarding editorial independence and increasing transparency and fairness in the allocation of economic resources, will facilitate the provision of independent and quality media services across borders, hence promoting media freedom and pluralism. The key role of the Board, fully independent from the governments and any other public or private entities, will contribute to effective and impartial upholding of freedom of expression across the EU, protected by Article 11 of the Charter. Under option 3, the additional obligations on balanced media coverage for all audiovisual media may impact editorial freedom of private media companies. O ptions 2 and 3 will also have a positive impact on the freedom to conduct a business (Article 16 of the Charter), when it comes to lifting obstacles to the freedom of establishment and to provide services and limiting the risks of certain media market players being subject to discriminatory treatment. Under option 3 , however, businesses would be subject to costs linked to the additional obligations on editorial independence (obligation to establish uniform internal independence safeguards), which could adversely affect the autonomy of business owners to organise their co r p o rate structure and ne w sroom s. This, together with the additional obligations on balanced media coverage for all audiovisual media, media ownership transparency and audience measurement would result in limitations to the freedom to conduct business. 7. How do the options compare? The options were compared in terms of effectiveness (how each option is likely to achieve the specific policy objectives), efficiency (the extent to which the proposals provide a reasonable balance between benefits and costs), coherence with other EU policies, and proportionality (i.e. whether the costs are commensurate with the objectives of the initiative). The comparative analysis of policy options is based on the quantitative results of the economic estimates and qualitative evidence for social and fundamental rights impacts presented in section 6. Table 7 Comparison of policy options Options Effectiveness Efficiency Coherence Proportionality Policy option 1 0/+ + + + Policy option 2 sub-option A + + + + + + + + + + + Policy option 2 sub-option B + + + + + + + + + Policy option 3 sub-option A + + + + + + + + Policy option 3 sub-option B + + + + + + + +++ very positive impact; ++ positive impact; + moderate positive impact; 0/+ - limited positive impact; 0 no or very limited positive impact; - moderate negative impact; -- negative impact; --- very negative impact 7.1 Effectiveness 1) Fostering cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market: Option 1 would imply voluntary actions by Member States which could lead, only over time and depending of their uptake, to a better functioning internal media market and greater legal certainty. Options 2 and 3 (which are the same in substance in this area) would significantly increase legal certainty over the baseline reducing the current fragmentation in the procedures for (and outcomes) of media market scrutiny. A Board supported by a Commission secretariat would provide an agile and expert supervisory system to be set up rapidly, while a Board supported by an EU office could, over time, acquire a high degree of specialisation in media regulation . 2) Increasing regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market : Option 1 is not suitable to address this objective. Options 2 and 3 (which are the same in substance in this area) would increase the effective cooperation of media regulatory authorities in tackling the cross-border challenges of media regulation, such as protecting the EU information space from ‘rogue’ third-country media service providers, convergence of regulatory approaches in key areas of media regulation relevant for media pluralism or lack of tools to monitor media-specific risks on very large online platforms. They are expected to result in higher regulatory predictability which can increase incentives for legitimate market entries. A Commission secretariat would effectively assist the Board to address key cross-border challenges and emerging issues, while an EU office could support the Board with research activities linked to regulatory guidance. 3) Facilitating free provision of quality media services in the internal market : Option 1 is expected to bring improvements compared to the baseline scenario over time, if its different recommendations are implemented by all or most Member States and media companies consistently. Under Option 2 , the combination of a legislative instrument and a recommendation on media independence, is expected to largely meet this objective, marking a clear improvement compared to the baseline scenario both in terms of magnitude and timing, ensuring free provision of quality media services in the EU. The additional targeted obligations under Option 3 , in particular balanced coverage by all audiovisual media, uniform internal independence safeguards within companies and an EU-wide media ownership-registry, would further contribute to the availability of quality media content. A Board supported by a Commission secretariat or an EU office would promote the effective and consistent application of the legislation and could contribute to the uptake of the recommendation. The EU office would in addition have EU wide tasks of monitoring media coverage of EU elections and EU-related disinformation . 4) Ensuring transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market : depending on the readiness of the actors involved to follow the recommendations, Option 1 could nudge public authorities and market players towards more transparency and fairness in distribution of economic resources. Under Option 2 , the obligations for providers of audience measurement systems and requirements to Member States on transparency , non-discrimination, proportionality and objectivity in allocation of state advertising should improve the conditions for fair competition (by providing the level playing field in the internal media market) compared to the baseline. The convergent application of the new rules would be supported by the fact that the Board would foster best practices regarding audience measurement systems and of state advertising allocation. Option 3 would be slightly more effective in achieving the objective, due to the additional obligation on external audit for audience measurement systems and the obligation to notify the methodologies of such systems to national media regulators and the additional reporting and transparency measures for state advertising. Table 8 Effectiveness Options Objective 1 Objective 2 Objective 3 Objective 4 Baseline 0 0 0 0 Policy option 1 0/+ 0 + 0/+ Policy option 2 sub-option A + + + + + + + + Policy option 2 sub-option B + + + + + + + + Policy option 3 sub-option A + + + + + + + + + + Policy option 3 sub-option B + + + + + + + + + + +++ very positive impact; ++ positive impact; + moderate positive impact; 0/+ - limited positive impact; 0 no or very limited positive impact; - moderate negative impact; -- negative impact; --- very negative impact 7.2 Efficiency Option 1 is expected to generate low costs for public authorities and media market players, which should get acquainted with the new framework, in line with limited expected benefits (notably increased revenues for media of EUR 1 billion per year). Option 2 is expected to bring higher direct compliance and enforcement costs for public authorities in comparison to the baseline. However, NRAs can expect between 10% and 20% in costs savings compared to the current NRAs’ expenditure related to coordination in ERGA . Media companies that take voluntary actions on independence safeguards and media ownership would face marginal costs. Public service media would face some costs linked to the principle of balanced media coverage. Economic benefits are estimated at EUR 2.9-2.6 billion in the form of increased revenues for media per year. Overall, option 2 is the most cost-effective option as costs are a very low proportion of benefits. Option 3 entails additional compliance and enforcement costs for public authorities and, especially , for media companies and other media market players . These stem from the obligations on internal independence safeguards (for all media companies except micro enterprises ) and on balanced media coverage (for all audiovisual media companies), requirements on external independent audit and notification to media regulators (for all audience measurement service providers) and reporting and transparency obligations on state advertising (for all media companies and media regulators). No significant additional benefits are expected for public authorities, while media market players may experience only slightly higher benefits in comparison to Option 2 related to the additional obligations on fair allocation of resources . Overall, i ncreased gross revenues of EUR 2. 9 -2. 6 billion are accompanied by higher costs , equivalent to up to 1 3 -1 4 % of the benefits in year 1 , thus representing lower cost-effectiveness than option 2. C itizens are expected to face no costs, while direct benefits and wider positive impacts increase with options 2 and 3. Regarding governance sub-options A and B , for both Options 2 and 3, the Commission secretariat (sub-option A) would be less costly than an EU office (sub-option B), since its administrative costs would be streamlined and absorbed into the Commission’s structures. Establishing an EU office would incur overhead costs and require a high level of staffing whilst, at the same time, not benefitting from wider expertise available in the Commission. This would make in particular option 2A much more efficient than option 2B (while for options 3A and 3B, the main factor further decreasing their overall efficiency are their significant costs, especially for media companies). 7.3 Coherence with other EU policies All policy options are coherent with the single market objectives of freedom of establishment and freedom to provide services laid down in the TFEU (Articles 49 and 56), with the right to receive and impart information enshrined in the EU Charter of Fundamental Rights (Article 11) and with the objectives of the revised AVMSD, including the independence of media regulators gathered in ERGA. Options 2 and 3 would further contribute to achieving these objectives with the more constraining measures foreseen and with the creation of the Board. All options are also coherent with the Digital Services Act (DSA) and the Digital Markets Act (DMA). Under options 2 and 3, the Board would be able to monitor media-specific risks, including disinformation spread, on very large online platforms (VLOPs ). Options 2 and 3 would complement the DMA by requiring proprietary audience measurement providers to share the methodologies of their measurement systems with third parties, including media companies. Horizontal ownership transparency requirements of the Anti-Money Laundering and EU Company Law Directives would be complemented by media-specific transparency elements included in the three options, aimed in particular at promoting transparency on the business interests and activities of media owners. However, O ption 3 would be less coherent with regard to the measures envisaged in this area, as hard law media-specific ownership requirements and an EU registry under this option would create additional regulatory density vis-à-vis the existing horizontal ownership frameworks . When considering the two governance sub-options, sub-option A will assure a smoother interaction between NRAs and the support structure and higher coherence of the measures with other EU interventions (such as those under the DSA and DMA) , due to closer coordination and easier access to wider expertise in the Commission. 7.4 Proportionality Option 1 , while in line with the problems and drivers identified, does not seem to use the most appropriate tools to address them and would not provide the necessary elements to improve the functioning of the single market, at least in the short term. Options 2 and 3 bring more substantial costs for compliance and enforcement, but these costs are likely to be outweighed by the significant potential benefits to be reaped for media market players, national regulators and citizens. These options are expected to improve the functioning of the internal media market without interfering with national identities or regulatory traditions in the media field, in line with Article 4(2) of the Treaty on European Union (TEU). This is especially true of option 2 that combines soft and hard law instruments. Moreover, both options are expected to increase the cross-border dimension of the media sector, both in terms of investment and consumption, supporting the creation of a genuine single market for media. National regulatory authorities will benefit from enhanced cooperation to deal with cross-border and EU-wide issues, while (as members of the independent Board) remaining in the lead of enforcing media regulation. European citizens will enjoy higher levels of quality media content and a safer information space providing a plurality of views, without having to incur costs. The additional costs for media market players (and national regulators) stemming from option 3 reduce partially the proportionality of that option to reach the specific objectives of the initiative. Regarding the two governance options, a positive proportionality effect of sub-option B in terms of savings for national regulators is neutralised by its higher cost compared to sub-option A . 8. Preferred option Against the above assessment, the preferred option recommended for political adoption is option 2 sub-option A , i.e. a legislative instrument and a recommendation to media companies and Member States to foster media independence, underpinned by a governance structure consisting of the Board assisted by a Commission secretariat. This option will meet the general objective of the intervention - to improve the functioning of the internal media market - in an efficient, coherent, proportionate and largely effective way. The financial modelling estimates the net economic benefits, in terms of increased revenues, at EUR 2 885 million for the first year and EUR 2 898 .1 million for the following years, above the expected benefits from other options. In particular, the legislative instrument will establish some core principles /rules for the media market , and emp ower the Board, the collective body of independent media regulators, to come up with expert views, opinions and collective action , hence preserving national regulatory discretion in the media sector. The principles/rules could be relied upon in front of national courts and the Commission could launch infringements proceedings in particular in case of systemic issues. Moreover, national media authorities could be granted targeted enforcement powers in certain areas of the new legislation, such as the rules on audience measurement. The non-binding element of the option - the recommendation - will guide the regulatory effort on the more sensitive issues (media independence safeguards) or matters where significant progress has been achieved as a result of other EU legal instruments (media ownership transparency). Such a multi-layered and flexible approach will bring the desired benefits while optimising the costs for media market players and public authorities, especially taking into account the l ower cost of the Commission secretariat compared to the EU office. The table below presents how the measures of the preferred option would address the problems identified and what would be their expected outcomes. Table 9 Measures and their expected outcomes Problem: Obstacles to cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market Objective: Fostering cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market Measures: Principles /rules for media pluralism measures and media market scrutiny procedures + EU level reaction mechanism (opinions by the Board) Expected outcomes: Higher legal certainty for media companies and investors Greater consistency in assessments of media pluralism impacts of market transactions Increased cross border investment in the media market Richer media offer Problem: Insufficient regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market Objective: Increasing regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market Measures: Mechanism for a structured cooperation between media regulators within the Board and tasks for the Board to assist the Commission in issu ing technical/practical guidance in key areas of media law Expected outcomes: Improved cooperation in tackling cross-border cases in the media sector Better enforcement of EU media rules, in particular online, thus safer online space More stable/convergent regulatory environment, more level playing field and fairer competition in the internal media market Collective action by the Board vis-à-vis service providers (including from third countries) Safer information space (better protection against ‘ rogue ’ media players) Higher level of certainty for the media content distributors established in the EU Mechanism for monitoring media pluralism online by the Board More level playing field and fairer competition in the internal media market, more diverse media offer online Fewer risks to media freedom/pluralism online, lower level of disinformation Problem: Interference in free provision of quality media services in the internal market Objective: Facilitating free provision of quality media services in the internal market Measures: Principles on media independence + common information requirements for media service providers + recommendations to promote editorial independence and media ownership transparency Expected outcomes: More level playing field and fairer competition in the internal media market Higher quality and greater diversity of media services, higher trust in media services Better informed business/investment decisions by media companies and other media market investors Higher level of citizens’ media literacy Independence safeguards for governance of public service media and an obligation of balanced media coverage for PSM More independence in management and editorial decisions of public service media Fairer competition in the internal media market Higher quality and greater diversity of content provided by public service media Safeguards for the integrity of journalists’ sources and communication Enhanced protection of journalists from risks of interference Greater diversity of quality content in the internal media market Problem: Opaque and/or unfair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market Objective: Ensuring transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market Measures: Principles/rules on transparent, objective and inclusive audience measurement + best practices exchangeby the Board Expected outcomes: Fairer competition between traditional media players and online players for advertising revenue across the internal market, better media content monetisation Better informed decisions on advertising spending by businesses Accurate data for assessment of audience reach and opinion forming power of media by media regulators Principles/rules on transparent/fair allocation of state advertising Fairer and more transparent allocation of state advertising resources in the market Broader range of media players benefitting from state advertising, lower risks of competition distortion resulting from misuse of state advertising Lower risks of dependence of certain media outlets on the state and hence of manipulated information 9. REFIT (simplification and improved efficiency) REFIT is not applicable to this initiative. No fitness check or evaluation of the existing policy framework were carried out. The current EU policy framework for media is determined by the AVMSD that was last reviewed in 2018 and still needs to be transposed in some Member States. The Directive contains a number of media regulatory measures related to consumer protection and promotion of public policy interests, such as cultural diversity, and does not regulate media pluralism and independence issues, to be addressed by the intervention . 10. Application of the ‘one in, one out’ approach The preferred option would entail no costs for citizens, and only negligible adjustment costs for businesses, i.e. overall one-off costs for all companies between EUR 9 . 4 and 14 million and recurrent annual costs between EUR 5.6 and 14.5 million that will be absorbed into business-as-usual costs . Most of the measures considered under the preferred option would result in obligations on Member States or their authorities. Only a few measures contemplated under the preferred option may arguably entail some new burdens in the form of negligible costs for media market players. Media service providers already keep, provide to the national authorities and make public media ownership information as a result of legal obligations stemming from the laws transposing the AML Directive and the AVMSD, as well as national rules on business registers. Companies that decide to implement the recommendation to take (additional) actions to ensure availability of media ownership information, including on the interests and activities of media owners in other media or non-media economic sectors, could face marginal additional costs only. The (voluntary) deployment of internal independence safeguards and adherence to self-regulatory instruments by SMEs following the recommendation would also entail marginal additional costs only that will be absorbed into the business-as-usual costs. The initiative is not expected to impose burdens on the providers of traditional audience measurement systems. The preferred option will oblige providers of proprietary audience measurement systems, namely online players, to disclose relevant information on methodologies of their audience measurement systems to third parties so that results of such systems can be verified. In view of wider transparency obligations under the DMA, such specific additional disclosure obligations are not expected to generate significant new burdens, and the relevant costs are expected to be absorbed into the business-as-usual costs. Monitoring media-specific risks on very large online platforms by the Board is expected to lead to heightened scrutiny of such risks and measures to mitigate them by the platforms. In view of wider risk assessment and mitigation obligations for very large online platforms under the DSA, such monitoring is not expected to generate significant new burdens, if any at all, and the relevant costs are expected to be absorbed into the business-as-usual costs. Since there are no significant costs for citizens or businesses associated to the measures considered under the preferred option, there is no need to apply the one in, one out approach. 11. How will actual impacts be monitored and evaluated? Following the adoption of the legislative instrument, a period between three and six months will be given to Member States to adapt their national frameworks , depending on the relevant provisions . Subsequently, its effectiveness will be assessed by the Commission four years after the entry into force of the new rules and every four years thereafter. This will be a part of the Commission’s obligation to monitor and report on the implementation to the Council, the European Parliament and the European Economic and Social Committee. The evaluation will be based on a robust system for data collection and monitoring, which is in itself foreseen in the legislative instrument under the preferred option. This includes both the reporting obligations to the Board by Member States (for instance, in relation to fair and transparent allocation of state advertising), as well as the new resilience mechanism. This mechanism would take the form of an upgraded and more systematic Media Pluralism Monitor, integrating the internal market dimension and based on specific key performance indicators. It would provide a detailed analysis of risks to the resilience of the internal media market . It would entail both a granular analysis of the situation in the Member States and an overview of the situation in the internal market as a whole. The recommendation under the preferred option will envisage a specific monitoring scheme to assess its uptake. Member States will need to submit to the Commission all relevant information regarding actions taken on media ownership transparency . Other areas covered by the recommendation will be included in the above resilience mechanism. The table below summarises tentative indicators proposed to monitor the achievement of the specific objectives of the intervention, to be further developed, including as part of the resilience mechanism. Table 10 Summary of monitoring actions an d indicators Specific objective Proposed indicators and expected results Baseline Dara source Fostering cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market Indicator - number and value of cross-border investments in the EU27 Member States’ media markets (annual) Expected result - gradual increase in cross-border investments’ number and value Investments 2013-2021 by investors : EU : 478 transactions non-EU: 389 transactions Value of 60% of transactions: EUR 84 b i l lio n Eurostat ORBIS or similar database Resilience mechanism Data by the Board Stakeholders’ reports Indicator - number of opinions by the Board on national media market scrutiny decisions taken into account by the relevant national authority (annual) Expected result – share of opinions by the Board taken into account by Member States n/a Resilience mechanism Data provided by the Board and Member States Increasing regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market Indicator - share of cases solved by the Board under the cooperation mechanism and the mutual assistance mechanism (annual) Expected result - share of cases solved by the Board n/a Data provided by the Board Reports of the Digital Services Board Indicator - n umber of guidance documents /reports issued by the Commission and/or the Board , as the case may be, in key regulatory areas for media pluralism (each 3 years) Expected result – increased number of areas pertinent to media pluralism covered by EU level guidance/reports n/a Data provided by the Board Facilitating free provision of quality media services in the internal market Indicator - risk scores (annual) on: - political independence of media - editorial autonomy - independence of public service media governance - commercial & owner influence over editorial content - protection of journalistic sources - transparency of media ownership Expected result - gradual reduction in risk scores Respective 2021 MPM risk scores : - 54% - 55% - 50% - 60% - 16% - 58% Resilience mechanism Council of Europe platform to promote the protection of journalism and safety of journalists Media Freedom Mapping database Stakeholders’ reports Indicator - number of Member States with media self-regulatory bodies (annual) Expected result - gradual increase in the number of Member States with self-regulatory bodies 16 Resilience mechanism Stakeholders’ reports e.g. the Alliance of Independent Press Councils Indicator - citizens’ perceived trust in media (biannual) Expected result - gradual increase in trust in media Percentage of respondents who trust the following media: 58%: radio 51%: television 51%: press 35%: internet Eurobarometer or other similar surveys Ensuring transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market Indicator – number of cases related to incompliance with the principles for audience measurement systems (annual) Expected result - gradual decrease of audience measurement systems incompliant with the new EU framework Nielsen : 61% of marketers agree to have access to the quality audience data needed to get the most of their media budget Data provided by the Board EAO reports Stakeholders reports Indicator - risk score (annual) on the distribution of state advertising Expected result - gradual reduction in the risk score 2021 MPM risk score on state advertising : 70% Resilience mechanism Data provided by Member States Glossary Term or acronym Meaning or definition Audience measurement Audience measurement is the process of collecting, reporting and interpreting data about the number and characteristics of individuals using media services. It is crucial for companies operating in the internal media market, allowing them to understand market dynamics, calculate and foresee advertising prices and plan content production in accordance with the preferences of the audiences. AVMSD Directive 2010/13/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 10 March 2010 on the coordination of certain provisions laid down by law, regulation or administrative action in Member States concerning the provision of audiovisual media services (Audiovisual Media Services Directive), as amended by Directive 2018/1808 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 14 November 2018. CJEU Court of Justice of the European Union Deontological standards Principles of ethics and good practice for journalistic work often included in a self-regulatory code. While various codes may have some differences, most share common elements such as the principles of truthfulness, objectivity and accuracy. DSA Proposal for a Regulation of the European Parliament and of the Council on a Single Market for digital services (Digital Services Act) and amending Directive 2000/31/EC [COM/2020/825 final] DMA Proposal for a Regulation of the European Parliament and of the Council on contestable and fair markets in the digital sector (Digital Markets Act) [COM/2020/842 final] Editorial independence Freedom of editors to make decisions without public or private interference (e.g. by politicians or owners/management of the media in question). ERGA European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Services, which brings together heads or high-level representatives of national independent regulatory bodies in the field of audiovisual services, to advise the Commission on the implementation of the EU’s Audiovisual Media Services Directive. EAO European Audiovisual Observatory, which focuses on collection, preparation and distribution of economic and legal information on the film, linear TV and VOD sectors in Europe. Media pluralism Media pluralism encompasses a plurality of voices or opinions expressed and issues analysed in the media (diversity in the range of content available – internal pluralism), and a plurality of media outlets and their types - print, radio, television or online - (diversity of ownership and sources – external pluralism). Media service provider The natural or legal person who has editorial responsibility for the choice of the content of the media service and determines the manner in which it is organised. Online platforms P roviders of hosting services which, at the request of a recipient of the service, stores and disseminates information to the public. PSM Public service media, i.e. media service providers entrusted with a public service mandate. SME Small and medium-sized enterprise, i.e. an enterprise that satisfies the criteria laid down in Commission Recommendation 2003/361/EC of 6 May 2003 concerning the definition of micro, small and medium-sized enterprises (OJ L 124, 20.05.2003, p. 36): employs fewer than 250 persons, has an annual turnover not exceeding EUR 50 million, and/or an annual balance sheet total not exceeding EUR 43 million. State advertising Any advertising funds for media by national, federal, regional and local governments, regulatory authorities or bodies, fully or partially state-owned enterprises and other state-controlled entities, functioning at national, federal and local level. Very large online platforms Online platforms with a significant societal and economic impact by covering, among their monthly users, at least 10% of the EU population (approximately 45 million users). Contents TOC \o "1-1" \h \z \u Annex 1: Procedural information PAGEREF _Toc108434721 \h 2 Annex 2: Stakeholder consultation (Synopsis report) PAGEREF _Toc108434722 \h 12 Annex 3: Who is affected and how? PAGEREF _Toc108434723 \h 33 Annex 4: Analytical methods PAGEREF _Toc108434724 \h 41 Annex 5: market description PAGEREF _Toc108434725 \h 119 Annex 6: Mapping of media pluralism risks across the EU PAGEREF _Toc108434726 \h 131 Annex 7: Mapping of media market related laws across the EU PAGEREF _Toc108434727 \h 137 Annex 8: overview of self-regulatory press/media councils PAGEREF _Toc108434728 \h 256 Annex 9: Interplay between the intervention and relevant EU legislation PAGEREF _Toc108434729 \h 258 Annex 1: Procedural information 1.1. Lead DG, Decide Planning/CWP references Lead DG: DG Communications Networks, Content and Technology (DG CNECT) Directorate: I – Media Policy Decide number of the underlying initiative: PLAN/2021/11882 (European Media Freedom Act) CWP: Commission work programme 2022 COM(2021) 645 final, Annex I: New initiatives: European media freedom act (legislative, incl. impact assessment, Article 114 TFEU, Q3 2022) 1.2. Organisation and timing The impact assessment process started with the publication of the call for evidence on 21 December 2021. It was followed by a feedback period that lasted from 21 December 2021 to 2 5 March 2022. A total of 1 47 3 stakeholder responses were received. A substantial amount of answers have been submitted by Slovak citizens ( 1 159 answers ) who seem to have been encouraged to take part in the consultation by a blogger covering current affairs . T heir ( differently worded ) answers appear to be part of a pro-media freedom campaign and are generally supportive of EMFA aims. The Commission held a n open public consultation , through a questionnaire in EU Survey, from 10 January until 2 5 March 2022. The public consultation received 91 7 responses , of which 68 1 contributions came from Slovak citizens as part of the abovementioned campaign . 4 stakeholders contributed separately an answer to the consultation. For details of the consultation, please see Annex 2. In addition to the European External Action Service, the following DGs (Directorates General) have been invited to contribute to this impact assessment as part of the interservice steering group (ISSG): SG (Secretariat-General), SJ (Legal Service ), BUDG (Budget), COMP (Competition), GROW (Internal Market, Industry, Entrepreneurship and SMEs), EAC (Education, Youth, Sport and Culture), FISMA (Financial Stability, Financial Services and Capital Markets Union), FPI (Foreign Policy Instruments), HOME (Migration and Home Affairs), INTPA (International Partnerships), JRC (Joint Research Centre), JUST (Justice and Consumers), REFORM (Structural Reform Support), REGIO (Regional and Urban Policy), NEAR (European Neighbourhood and Enlargement Negotiations), RTD (Research and Innovation), SANTE (Health and Food Safety), TAXUD (Taxation and Customs Union) and TRADE (Trade). The first ISSG meeting took place on 14 October 2021, followed by a written consultation on the draft Call for Evidence and Public Consultation. The ISSG then met on 7 April 2022 for an update on the ongoing work and to discuss preparations for the Impact Assessment report . It was shortly followed by a written consultation on the draft Impact Assessment . Another ISSG meeting took place on 5 May 2022 to discuss new elements of the Impact Assessment, how feedback given by the ISSG members had been addressed and to validate the draft . The ISSG met again on 6 July 2022 to discuss and validate the revised Impact Assessment, ahead of its re-submission to the RSB. The RSB was consulted in an up stream meeting on 10 March 2022. The I mpact A ssessment report was first submitted to the RSB on 13 May , and it was discussed with the RSB during a hearing on 8 June . Following a negative opinion delivered on 10 June , the report was revised and re-submitted to the RSB on 11 July. The RSB delivered a positive opinion with reservations on 27 July. 1.3. Consultation of the RSB T he Impact Assessment report h as been substantially restructured and complemented with further information in light of the comments received : First submission to the Regulatory Scrutiny Board Comments of the RSB How and where comments have been addressed (B) Main considerations (1) The report does not sufficiently explain the single market failures and regulatory gaps that the European Media Freedom Act aims to fill. It does not demonstrate with sufficient evidence the scale and relative importance of the problems to tackle and their prevalence across different media markets and Member States. It does not provide clarity on the overall objectives of the initiative and how they are linked. We have further clarified the single market failures stemming from the identified problems by adding a sub-section ‘ consequences ’ under each problem . We have also explained, including in a dedicated Annex (9) , the regulatory gaps to be filled by E MFA in several areas of EU law . The report now includes further evidence o n and a more granular explanation of the scale and prevalence of the problems on the national markets and in the different media sectors to the extent possible . In particular , the report refer s in a systematic way to the findings of the Commission’s rule of law reports and Media Pluralism Monitor ( MPM ) reports, as well as the targeted interviews conducted in the context of the external study and academic publications . The report also acknowledges limitations of the available data in this regard. On the objectives, see the section below. (2) The report does not present a convincing intervention logic showing how the identified measures are expected to deliver on the objectives and tackle the problems. The presented policy options are not complete and sufficiently precise as to their content and functioning. The analysis of the choice of the legal delivery instrument is missing. The general objective has been reformulated to better correspond to the legal bas is . The specific objectives have been reviewed to express them in more smart terms, taking into account the monitoring indicators set out in Section 11 of the report , and linking them better with problems and solutions. The policy options have been clarified and made more precise , with further details added on the content of the envisaged measures . Option 1 has been elaborated by providing examples of concrete measures which could be recommended to Member States and media companies as well as details o f the monitoring mechanism envisaged for the recommendation. Notably, w e have also clarified that the preferred option would be a combination of a principle-based legislat ion and a soft-law instrument (recommendation to media companies and Member States on media independence ). A dedicated table summarising policy options was added (in section 5.2 ) , linking problems and objectives with the proposed measures under the assessed options. Moreover, another dedicated table was added in section 8 presenting the expected outcomes of the proposed measures under the preferred option. A dedicated section (section 5.3) was added to consider the choice of the legal delivery instrument. (3) The impacts of the policy options are not sufficiently assessed, including on the internal market aspects. The need for and effectiveness of some measures is not clearly demonstrated. The report lacks solid comparative analysis of all costs and benefits and is not sufficiently clear on who will be impacted and how. We have included in section 6 an overview of the expected economic impact s of the different options following a deterministic model approach. Using data on current revenues in the sector as a baseline, expected impacts are assessed qualitatively and quantitatively and averaged to estimate the net benefits of each option. We have also analysed in greater detail economic and social impacts of the three policy options, in particular how effective they are in address ing the drivers /problems and how they would improve the functioning of the internal media market . Firstly, w e have assessed - on top of the overall economic impacts on the basis of the new model (net benefits) - the economic benefits of the three options, focusing on measures with the expected direct economic impact , such as measures on media market scrutiny, regulatory cooperation, media independence and transparency and fairness in allocation of economic resources , as well as the two governance sub-options . A table summarising the expected costs linked to these measures has been added . Second ly , we have assessed overall social impacts of the initiative and have highlighted social benefits of (selected) measures in the areas of regulatory cooperation and media independence, as expected under the different options. A table summarising the expected costs of these measures has been added. Finally, we have enhanced the comparative analysis of all costs and benefits, explaining who will be impacted and how. A detailed table to that effect has been included in Annex 3. (4) The report is not sufficiently transparent on the differing views between and within categories of stakeholders The report and the corresponding Annex (2) provides further details on the views of different stakeholder groups. In particular, Section 2. 2 (problems) and the box on stakeholders’ views (following section 5.3 ) have been revised to p resent views of stakeholders on the areas to be covered by the initiative, the problems and policy options in a more granular way, both across the different categories of stakeholders and within the respective categories . Similarly, views of companies depending on their size (micro, small, large) and also replies from different Member States have been added where relevant . Diverging and opposing views have been reflected in a clearer manner. (C) Further considerations and adjustment requirements (1) The report should be clearer about the magnitude of the problems for the main affected single media markets and substantiate them with solid and convincing evidence. As not all problems seem equally critical for all media market actors or equally relevant across Member States, the report should present a clear problem overview and on that basis set a clear prioritisation and hierarchy of issues and reflect it accordingly in the design of policy options. The significance and evidence of some problems (e.g. lack of media pluralism, cross-border investments, innovation in the media markets, distortions resulting from opacity of audience measurement systems, problems related to the media coverage of European elections) should be further developed. We have streamlined the presentation of problems , their consequences on the functioning of the internal market and corresponding drivers in order to improve clarity and eliminate potential overlaps. Moreover, as said above, t he problems have been further substantiated (some of the main examples were included in boxes for better readability) , and more detail has been added to differentiate the magnitude of a given problem by Member State. For that purpose , we have gathered further evidence and made references to the Rule of Law and MPM reports (which have also been included in a new Annex 6 to illustrate trends in Member States ) . In addition, after a careful review of the available evid e nce, we no longer include ‘innovation in the media markets’ within the scope of the initiative and have re-designed policy options, recognising greater role for soft-law instruments. (2) The report should also identify the precise regulatory gaps that the initiative aims to fill, better explaining the shortcomings of the existing regulatory measures applicable to the media markets. It should further develop and substantiate with clear evidence the problem of fragmentation of the single media markets, and the resulting effects on the media market players and media pluralism. It should better explain the different interpretations of regulatory concepts by different national regulators. The analysis should underpin the choice of Article 114 as legal base and better support the respect of the subsidiarity principle in view of the diverse cultural, historical and political traditions of the media frameworks in the Member States. The report should clarify the definition, practical interpretation and measurement of the notion of media pluralism. The report has further developed the dynamic baseline in order to explain better the implementation/enforcement issues related to the AVMSD as well as the regulatory gaps left by existing and upcoming instruments, in particular the DSA/DMA , horizontal ownership transparency requirements and competition law/state aid rules . The new Annex 9 provides further details on the interplay between the initiative and the relevant EU legislation. The justification for the use of Article 114 TFEU as a legal basis has been strengthened, to demonstrate that it suits best the objectives of the initiative to approximate national laws and approaches to media pluralism. We have also better explained the flexible and principle-based approach of the preferred option, which would not aim to jeopardise well-functioning national mechanisms related to media pluralism. We have further specified the added value of the action at EU level too . (3) Given the legal base the report should review the (general) policy objectives and better explain their linkages as well as the interplay between the objective of pursuing well-functioning single media markets and its link to promoting and ensuring media pluralism in the Member States. It should be clearer upfront on the balance and relative importance of further EU-level coordination versus new substantive harmonisation measures. W e have updated the objectives of the initiative, expressed them in more smart terms and clarified in the objective section and in the c ontext part the linkages between the internal market objectives of the initiative and the overall goal of promoting media pluralism . We have also clarified the policy options to explain better the intended role of EU-level coordination versus the proposed substantive (principle-based) harmonisation measures under the initiative . (4) The report should present a fully developed intervention logic by better presenting how the options and their measures will precisely tackle the identified problems (and their drivers). It should provide further detail to clarify the design, content, functioning and rationale of the policy options and their measures. It should better explain some of the measures, including spelling out the precise legal obligations and minimum criteria linked to the principle-based design, to make the practical difference between non-binding recommendations and fully harmonised specific requirements clearer. It should also consider an explicit option combining soft and hard law measures better reflecting the scale and significance of problems and proportionality of some measures. Given the diversity of existing media regulatory frameworks in the Member States the report should discuss the pros and cons and choice of the available legal delivery instruments, at least for the preferred option. The section on options was developed to clearly present the intervention logic by show ing the link s between the identified problems, the specific objectives that the initiative aims to achieve and the possible actions that could be taken under each option (see table in section 5.2) . Concerning the design of the options considere d in the report , we clarified that they were constructed taking into account the level of approximation between national media pluralism frameworks. We also further specifi ed the measures envisaged under each option. For instance, we added the precise requirements for the national measures affecting entry and operation of media service providers in o ption 2 (transparency, proportionality, non-discrimination) . In addition, the preferred option has been re-designed to become a combination of (principle-based) legislation and soft law instrument. The report now clearly explains which measures would be covered by the legislative and soft law instrument s . A new section (5.3) was added to present the pros and cons and choice of the available legal delivery instruments. (5) The report should further develop the assessment of impacts, in particular on the single market. It should better assess the impact and effectiveness of some measures (e.g. non-binding Board opinions, regulatory sandboxes, etc). It should also explain in greater detail different impacts associated with the two governance options. For instance, it should better justify why the Board governance option involving an external secretariat would be clearly more effective in fostering quality media content than the one where the secretariat is provided by the Commission. In case a combination option of soft and hard law measures is considered its impacts should be assess up-front along with the other options. The report (section 6) has been revised to strengthen the assessment of impacts, especially economic impacts and impacts on the single market - across the three options and the relevant specific measures. The analysis of impacts of non-binding Board opinions has been expanded, while regulatory sandboxes are no longer among the envisaged measures. The assessment of impact s of the two governance sub- options ha s been further detailed . The revised assessment favours the sub-op t ion of the secretariat provided by the Commission. Impacts of a combination of soft and hard law instruments (under option 2) are assessed up-front . (6) The report should present the overall impact of all measures and further develop the distributional analysis. It should be clear on the cost and benefit estimates, add an overview of costs and benefits of all measures and present combined impacts on businesses (including SMEs), Member States and the Commission. It should be clear who will be affected and how. Where impacts are different for the different market players (e.g. online platforms, audio-visual, press, corporations versus SMEs, etc.), these should be highlighted and the winners and losers clearly identified. The report has been revised accordingly, to present both overall (economic and social) impacts and the distributional analysis. In particular, the revised report emphasise s the respective impacts on public authorities, the Commission , citizens and media companies, including SMEs, where relevant. A detailed table summarising who will be impacted and how by which measures has been added to A nnex 3 . The exemption for micro-enterprises from uniform internal control mechanisms has been explained. The section on ‘one-in, one-out’ has been revised to reflect the changes to the preferred option, in particular the inclusion of the measures related to media ownership transparency in a recommendation to media companies and Member States . (7) The report should provide a clearer comparison of options in terms of effectiveness, efficiency and proportionality and better explain and justify the qualitative scores. The comparison of options should include the estimates of costs and benefits of each option and the narrative should be clearer about the drivers of effectiveness of the various measures as well as their proportionality. This analysis should be updated to reflect other policy mixes that the report may consider (see combination option above). The comparison of options tables should synthetically include both qualitative (e.g. effectiveness scores) and quantitative elements (e.g. cost estimates). The report has been revised accordingly, and the narrative on the comparison of policy options has been expanded. Section 7 includes a full description of the effectiveness (how each option is likely to achieve the specific policy objectives), efficiency (the extent to which the proposals provide a reasonable balance between benefits and costs) , coherence with other EU policies and proportionality, i.e. whether the costs are commensurate with the objectives of the initiative. The qualitative and quantitative elements have been combined in the deterministic model , and scores in tables have been adjusted accordingly. (8) The report should strengthen the evidence base and single market analysis throughout, from the problem definition to the design, analysis and comparison of options. It should also make a better and more targeted use of the evidence contained in the Rule of Law and Media Pluralism Monitoring reports. In parallel it should report the stakeholders views in a more transparent and balanced manner and better distinguish between the views of the different types of media market players, in particular regarding the problem definition and the design and expected impact of policy options. Dissenting views (including within the same category of stakeholders) should be more systematically included as well. Further evidence and examples ha ve been added systematically throughout the report . Targeted references to the Rule of Law and MPM reports were added to demonstrate trends across Member States , alongside a new Annex 6 illustrating those references in the form of risk maps . The report , i n particular Annex 2 , ha ve been revised to reflect better the various stakeholders’ views in a more balanced way , distinguishing between and within different categories of stakeholders and referring to d issenting views. Second submission to the Regulatory Scrutiny Board Comments of the RSB How and where comments have been addressed (C ) What to improve (1) Given the absence of quantitative data to support the scale of the problems related to media pluralism frameworks in the internal market, the report should exploit to the maximum, the available evidence. It should expand the presented evidence base by using the relatively plentiful anecdotal evidence in a more systematic way throughout the problem analysis, particularly with a view to underpinning and substantiating the single market angle. Evidence, particularly of anecdotal nature, has been used more systematically with regard to the different problems presented in the single market context (sections 2.2.1 – 2.2.4). This includes, for example, regulatory fragmentation linked to prominence of audiovisual media services of general interest and political interference in editorial decisions of media service providers. (2) The report should make systematic targeted use of the information included in the Annex containing an inventory of the varying media pluralism rules across the EU Member States, to support the argument of market fragmentation, specifically in terms of the problems these diverging rules pose to its good functioning. It should also more precisely define the concept of ‘media pluralism’, providing a framework for practical interpretation and assessment of the desired situation at the EU level and better substantiating the scale of the problems to be tackled. Comparison of different national rules supporting the argument of market fragmentation and better substantiation of the scale of the problems has been added in sections 2.2.1 – 2.2.4. This concerns, for example, procedures applicable to the scrutiny of market transactions for media pluralism purposes, safeguards to prevent interference in editorial freedom and rules on state advertising. The concept of ‘media pluralism’ has been elaborated based on existing literature in a footnote under section 2.1. (3) The presentation of policy options should be clearer about the complementarities of options and measures as they increase in legal intensity. The rationale behind the demarcation between the options should be better explained, taking into account the streamlined problem definition, which appears to equalise the significance of all problems while the policy responses vary in ambition. The report should clarify whether some of the problems are indeed more critical for the functioning of the EU media markets than others and how this is reflected in the design and choice of the preferred option(s). The presentation of policy options has been revised in section 5.2 to better explain t he rationale behind the demarcation between the options , the factors that have been taken into account in devising the specific measures envisaged by the options as well as their complementarities , on the premise that there is no clear overall hierarchy between the identified problems – they all affect different aspects of functioning of the internal media market . (4) The report should more explicitly address the drivers for effectiveness of the different policy options, explaining in detail how precisely a given measure is expected to be more effective. A new table has been added to section 5.2 to highlight the drivers for effectiveness of the different policy options. In addition, explanations of how precisely a given measure is expected to be more effective were added at the end of section 5.2. (5) The report should strengthen the single market angle in the analysis of the economic impacts. The current presentation of cumulated impacts for all Member States, without much distinction between the specific problems is insufficient. Presentation of the economic impacts included in the body of the report should be more transparent. The additional explanation included in the methodological Annex should be streamlined and clarified, in particular with regard to the application of the quantitative impact scores. The report should better explain the values assigned to these scores for each policy option and be more explicit about the uncertainty related to the outputs of deterministic modelling. The assessment under each area of intervention has been expanded with a new section analy s ing the s ingle market dimension and the distribution of impacts in a more detailed manner , providing concrete examples of specific problems and the countries where these are more acute . The presentation of the model in the A nnex has also been amended, providing further details on the deterministic model and on the qualitative evidence behind the quantitative impact scores assigned to each policy option . The A nnex also explains in a more detailed manner the scarcity of the data and the limitations of the model. (6) The distributional analysis should be further strengthened, in particular with regard to the impacts on the different market players, which are not sufficiently highlighted. The report should also establish a better link between the supporting information of the Annex and the main body of the report to sustain the analysis of all key impacts. T he assessment under each area of intervention includes a section on the single market dimension and the distribution of impacts detailing how specific stakeholders can be affected by the proposed measures. Further details are also provide d in the A nnex with regard to the impacts expected under each policy option, including cross-references to the results of the open public consultation and the feedback from the surveys and expert consultation s . 1.4 Evidence, sources and quality To ensure a high level of coherence and comparability of analysis for all potential policy approaches, DG CNECT contracted two external studies in support of the impact assessment: PwC, Intellera and Open evidence , “Support for the preparation of an impact assessment to accompany an EU initiative on the European Media Freedom Act”, VIGIE 2021 – 644 European University Institute, Katholieke Universiteit Leuven, Universiteit van Amsterdam and Vrije Universiteit Brussel, “Study on media plurality and diversity online”, VIGIE 2020-825 Linked to the external studies, altogether three workshops were organised. During these workshops, the contractors, under the steering of the Commission, presented and discussed some of the key preliminary or final findings of the studies and received feedback from the participants. Particularly the first study, aimed specifically for the preparation of an impact assessment of the European Media Freedom Act, collected evidence and concrete data underpinning the identified problems and the potential policy approach, options and impacts in this impact assessment. The European Audiovisual Observatory of the Council of Europe also produced a special IRIS report on governance and independence of public service media. The publication is accompanied by a comprehensive overview table on the main governance safeguards for PSM in Europe . Besides collecting input to the Public Consultation and the Call for Evidence (see further details in Annex 2) , the Commission has engaged with key stakeholders and experts through bilateral meetings, organised by DG CNECT or upon the request of stakeholders. Such meetings have served in particular as a follow-up or to deepen the information gathered via the public consultation. The Commission has also discussed the initiative with members of the AVMSD Contact Committee and ERGA. These expert groups have provided a direct channel to consult some of the most relevant authorities at Member State level. To gather views of researchers and ERGA experts with a particular expertise in relevant areas (such as public and constitutional law as well as media freedom and internal market issues), a workshop with representatives from academia, ERGA and the Commission was organised on 18 February 2022. A balanced European geographical coverage was ensured in the selection of the academics. Both the Rule of Law reports and the annual reports produced by the Media Pluralism Monitor, as well as some Eurobarometer surveys, provided evidence and analysis on many of the issues around media freedom that were used to describe the problem and problem drivers. Finally, to further support evidence-based analysis, the Commission has conducted an extensive literature review, covering academic books, surveys, journals, as well as a wide spectrum of policy studies and reports, including by non-governmental organisations. Annex 2: Stakeholder consultation (Synopsis report) 2.1. Consultation strategy In line with the Better Regulation Guidelines , stakeholders were widely consulted as part of the impact assessment process. The consultation strategy for the impact assessment on the European Media Freedom Act targeted all types of stakeholders impacted by the initiative, including media outlets (including private and public television and radio broadcasters, press publishers), advertisers, online platforms and media market players , journalist s associations and trade unions, regulatory authorities, NGOs, academia and citizens. 2.2. Consultation actions - Call for Evidence (CfE) The Call for Evidence announcing the EMFA initiative was published on 21 December 2021 and open for feedback until 25 March 2022. The CfE targeted all types of stakeholders and aimed at gathering general feedback on the initiative and the preliminary options that could be considered for the intervention . - Public Consultation on the EMFA A public consultation was open from 10 January 2022 to 25 March 2022. The Public Consultation was launched to collect views on the most important issues affecting the functioning of the EU internal media market and gather feedback on the potential areas and options for the intervention. The Public Consultation targeted all types of stakeholders. Both the Public Consultation and the Call for Evidence were promoted through the Commission’s website, as well as through specific networks. Broad outreach to the wider stakeholder community was organised by the c ommunication services of the Commission ( notably via social media). - Interviews in the context of an external study supporting the impact assessment A first round of 11 interviews with EU stakeholders was conducted in February 2022 in the context of the external study supporting this impact assessment . It aimed to collect additional feedback on the problem definition. The interviewees included EU media associations, an advertising association, a n association of broadcasting regulators , NGOs, and a research institute . A second round of 10 interviews was conducted by the contractor in April 2022 and involved NGOs, t hink t anks, research institutes and academic experts in the field of media. The aim was to discuss their views on the potential impacts of the EMFA policy options on citizens and journalists, to complement the data gathered from the desk research and from the online survey addressed to media market players and national regulatory authorities. Finally, following the closure of the media market players ’ survey, the contractor invited one relevant stakeholder organisation for an interview in April, as they did not answer the questionnaire and asked for a deadline extension. The interview questions focused on the main topics of the media market players ’ survey and included a section aimed to assess the effectiveness of the policy options . Thus, the aim of this interview was the same as the related survey. - Workshop in the context of the external study supporting the impact assessment On 24 March 2022 , a workshop was held by the contractor with 17 participants representing EU stakeholders (media associations, regulatory authorities, advertisers, NGOs) and academic experts. The workshop aimed to present and validate the problem definition and to collect preliminary feedback from stakeholders on the policy options. - Case studies Case studies were conducted by the contractor with 8 media companies to investigate their experience with cross-border investments and mergers and acquisitions , and to inform the problem definition . They were based on desk research and interviews with each company. - Surveys Two targeted surveys, for media market players and for National Regulatory Authorities (NRAs) respectively , were launched by the contractor on 6 April 2022 . These surveys aimed at collect ing evidence on the impacts of the policy options. The questionnaire s closed respectively on 15 and 19 April . Overall, the study team collected 41 answers (of which 3 were partially completed) for the media market players ’ survey and 20 for the NRAs ’ survey. ERGA Academy To gather views of researchers and ERGA experts with a particular expertise in relevant areas (such as media and internal market issues, as well as public and constitutional law), a workshop with representatives from academia, ERGA and the Commission w as organised on 18 February 2022. A balanced European geographical representation was ensured in the selection of the experts participating in the event. Ad hoc bilateral meetings with stakeholders and experts In addition, the Commission has engaged with key stakeholders and experts for the initiative by assessing numerous position papers and analyses and through bilateral meetings, to gather additional evidence and data on the specific problems addressed by the initiative, as well as on the policy options and their impacts. Such meetings have served in particular as a follow-up or to deepen the information obtained in the context of the preparation of the initiative and gathered via the public consultation. The Commission has also discussed the initiative with members of the AVMSD Contact Committee and ERGA. These expert groups have also provided a direct channel to consult other relevant authorities at Member State level. 2.3 Public consultation Overview of respondents A total of 917 responses were received from 24 EU Member States and three non-EU countries ( United Kingdom, Switzerland and Norway ) . A total of 915 submissions were received via the Have your say portal , while two additional ones were received outside the site but within the timeline of the consultation and were therefore included in the responses. The majority of replies came from Slovakia , followed by France, Belgium and Italy. The detailed geographical distribution of responses is provided in the figure below. Figure 1 : Geographical distribution of Public Consultation respondents. With regard to the category of respondents, 77 5 identified themselves as EU citizens (85%), 1 as non-EU citizen (<1%), 42 as NGOS (5%), 29 as companies (3%), 28 as business associations (3%), 19 as public authorities (2%), 9 as trade unions (1%), 3 as academic and research institutions (<1%), 2 as consumer organisations (<1%), and 9 as ‘Other’ category (<1%) . In the case of EU citizens ’ responses, it is important to note that most of them corresponded to Slovak citizens (681 replies from 77 5 ). The large number of such responses is explained by a Slovak campaign . Figure 2 : Distribution of consultation responses by type of respondent Results of the Public Consultation The public consultation was organised in five different sections. The first four sections included questions on the problems which potentially impact media freedom , independence and plurality in the EU internal media market (sections 1 to 4). Each section also included questions about potential policy options and specific intervention areas to address the problems identified. In addition, section 5 looked into the governance options for the potential oversight structure under EMFA . Section 1: Safeguarding the EU internal media market, media independence and pluralism O verall, 8 1 % of all respondents (745 out of 917) found the freedom to exercise a business activity in the media sector and the safeguards for media independence and pluralism in their Member States as unsatisfactory . A significant part of citizens ( 92% ) were of this opinion . 72 % of all respondents (66 2 out of 917 ), and more than half of respondents from Hungary, Spain, Italy, Romania, Poland, Greece, Croatia, and Slovakia consider ed that the legislation in their Member State is not adequate and proportionate to ensure both the free provision of media services within the internal market and to protect media pluralism and independence. In addition, altogether 8 5 % of all respondents stated that they were aware of cases of state interference (national state interference: 750 out of 917 and foreign (non-EU) interference: 251 out of 917) , while almost a third (2 85 out of 917 respondents) were aware of private interferences. A s exhibited in Figure 3 , 76% of all respondents (693 out of 917) and 83% of citizens (647 out of 776) identified that the main difficulty for the freedom to exercise business activities in the EU media market is related to the insufficient transparency on media ownership . This difficulty would remain the one most signalled also i f the responses from the Slovak campaign were not taken into account ( 105 out of the 236 respondents ) . The second biggest overall difficulty mentioned by 68% of all respondents (622 out of 917 , including in particular citizens, civil society and trade unions ) was diverging national scrutiny procedures over media market operations, while 37% mentioned the diverging interpretations of regulatory concepts for media pluralism. Without considering responses from the Slovak c ampaign , t he second most mentioned difficulty was related to diverging interpretations of regulatory concepts relevant for media pluralism , with 70 out of the 236 responses. Almost half of companies and business associations (15 out of 32 - 49%) that identified difficulties for the freedom to exercise a business activity in the EU media market, identified diverging interpretation of regulatory concepts as an obstacle . More than half of companies and business associations (32 out of 57, companies were mostly large) reported to be aware of at least one difficulty to the exercise of business activities in the EU market. Among those, the biggest difficulty was the existence of rules restricting market entry or operation (16 out of 32 ), while discriminatory administrative decisions were identified by 13 out of 32 and diverging national scrutiny procedures o ver media market operations by 8 out of 32 . In addition, some respondents reported ‘Other’ barriers to media business activities in the EU media market. In the case of th e 13 respondents who only reported ‘Other’ barriers (including citizens, companies, NGOs, a business association and a public authority) , three business respondents from Czechia mentioned the unbalanced playing field o n the media market due to the dominant position of very large online media platforms (VLOPs) which enables them to capture most of advertising revenues. Moreover, a respondent mentioned that online platforms are not subject to the same rules as traditional media. In this respect, the three business respondents referred to above claimed that new regulations (i.e. the DSA, the ePrivacy proposal) would set further restrictions on advertising revenues for European publishers, thus hampering their economic sustainability. In the case of the 20 respondents (18 EU citizens and 2 NGOs) who pointed to ‘Other’ barriers in addition to at least one of the barriers outlined in the public consultation , most of the respondents who provided further details (6 respondents) mentioned examples of limited pluralism and political interference by their national governments. The y mentioned , in particular, several examples of political interference in Slovakia, while one of the respondents mentioned the recent law adopted on 26 February 2022. Two other respondents mentioned examples o f political interference with PSM, notably, an example of the unfair imposition of levies on the PSM in Italy; and an example of favouring politically aligned-PSM with state resources in Poland. T he majority of respondents did not provide an opinion on whether the level of cross-border media ownership has stagnated, decreased or increased over the past five years ( 542 out of 917 responses) . The most popular opinion that was expressed was that the cross-border media ownership has increased ( 277 out of 917 responses), which was largely supported by citizens (249 responses). A few respondents claimed it has decreased (5 0 responses) or stagnated (4 4 responses). 4 respondents chose more than one answer option. With respect to policy options at EU level that could address these barriers , 81% (747 out of 917) of all respondents identified as the preferred one action enhanc ing transparency of media ownership, with the backing of at least half of all the stakeholder categories , except business associations that represent mainly the press sector and private broadcasters . The second most popular policy option related to the transparency and fairness in allocation of state advertising , mentioned by 71% ( 65 3 out of 917) of all the respondents. If the responses from the Slovak campaign were not included in the analysis, out of the 236 responses, 158 identified transparency of media ownership as the key area of EU-level action, followed by transparency and fairness in allocation of state advertising (139 responses) and independence of public media service governance (133 responses). Differentiating across categories of respondents, the majority of companies and business organisations (1 6 out of 29) identified audience measurement methods as the most important area of action at EU level . In the case of NGOs, the independence of public service media governance was identified as the most popular future action at EU level (30 out of 42), while in the case of public authorities , citizens and small and micro-sized companies , the most important area was transparency of media ownership, with 1 4 out of 19 , 668 out of 776 and 5 out of 7 identifying it, respectively. In the case of citizens, the second most voted area of action was transparency and fairness in allocation of state advertising with 574 responses. The preferences of citizens would remain the same if the responses from the Slovak campaign were removed. Notably, 80 out of the 9 5 non-Slovak citizen responses identified transparency of media ownership as the key area, followed by safeguards for editorial independence of media with 68 responses . Figure 3 : Responses collected from the public consultation on barriers to media busine s s activities in the EU media market. Section 2: Transparent and independent media markets W ith respect to the set of questions on transparency of media ownership , 94% of all respondents (864 out of 917) agreed that it is important to have access to information on who owns or controls media companies. Altogether 81% of all stakeholders claim ed that this data is only available to a limited extent (602 out of 917) or not at all (139 out of 917) . In this respect, most respondents reported that they access information on media ownership through business registries (75% of respondents, 688 out of 917) while 63% claimed they use the website s of individual media service provider s (582 out of 917). Differentiating across categories of respondents, n early half of companies (12 out of 29), and a third of business associations (10 out of 28) consider ed that the information on who owns or controls media companies operating in the EU media market is accessible to a large extent. The company respondents included 20 large and 9 micro, small or medium enterprises. Out of the 20 large companies, 10 consider ed the information to be accessible to a large extent, 6 accessible to a limited extent, 2 neutral while 2 did not know or did not answer. Out of the 9 micro, small and medium enterprises, 5 consider ed it accessible to a limited extent, 2 to a large extent, and 2 did not know or did not respond. T o the question as to whether the level of transparency on media ownership had affected media companies’ decisions to enter a given EU market, the same number of media companies (4) agree d and respectively disagree d that it ha d affected their decisions. T he majority of citizens (84% - 694 out of 776) and NGOs who responded to the public consultation ( 64% - 27 out of 42) claimed that information on who owns or controls media companies is not provided in a comprehensive and user-friendly manner. In the case of public authorities, the majority of them (1 6 out of 19 responses) supported the idea to foster the exchange of best practices between Member States on media ownership transparency; and the introduction of obligations applicable to all media companies in the EU to disclose their ownership structure, including beneficial owners. In general terms, as exhibited in Figure 4 , 80% of all respondents (735 out of 917) mentioned that it would be useful to introduc e EU -level mechanism for all media companies to disclose their ownership structure, including beneficial owner s . This was the preferred policy action also when the responses from the Slovak campaign were not taken into account, with 158 out of the 236 respondents pointing to this. In the case of citizens, most of them supported it , namely 654 out of 77 6 . It was also the case for non-Slovak citizens. NGOs also showed their vast support , with 31 out of the 42 responses. In the case of companies, 13 out of 29 , more than half of them consisting of companies which did not provide media services , supported th is action . At the same time, h alf of media player respondents (22 out of 42 – 52%) considered that the introduction of common information requirements on media ownership would benefit their business to a small, moderate or large extent in terms of investment decisions and strengthened fair competition. Finally, 21% (197 out of 917) of all respondents mentioned as a useful mechanism the introduction of an independent EU body which would monitor national measures on media ownership transparency. The establishment of an EU-wide registry covering information on ownership structure, including beneficial owners, of media companies operating in the EU, was supported by 45% of all respondents (412 out of 917), with a large share of public authorities (74% - 14 out of 19), trade unions (67% - 6 out of 9), NGOs (60% - 25 out of 42) and citizens (46% - 354 out of 776) backing this initiative. The EU registry on ownership structure received support from 8 out of 29 companies of which half (4) from the press sector. Figure 4 : Responses collected from EMFA public consultation on preferences over EU-level actions on media ownership transparency. Regarding media market scrutiny procedures and restrictions to media market entry and operation , the main national requirements reported as affecting to a large or very large extent the entry or operation in the EU media market are i) the rules to limit the participation/control of media by companies active in other sectors (e.g. telecommunications) ( 385 out of all the 917 respondents ), ii) the rules that prevent a media player that has been granted a licence to operate in one media-related service from obtaining further licences to provide other media or related services ( 363 out of 917), iii) the rules setting out quantitative thresholds e.g. limitations on the number of channels/licences owned by a single entity ( 306 out of 917), and iv) the rules on prior notification and approval required for operation of media players, including any renewal procedures ( 293 out of 917). C ompanies and business associations r esponding to the public consultation that expressed an opinion on this problem considered the following national rules to affect the entry or hinder operation in the EU media market to a large or very large extent: rules setting out quantitative limitations (e.g. on the number of channels or licences owned by a single entity) (mentioned by 12 out of 37 - 32%), rules that prevent a media player that has been granted a licence to operate in one media-related service from obtaining further licences to provide other media or related services (mentioned by 11 out of 38 - 29%), rules to examine the effect of market transactions on media pluralism (mentioned by 9 out of 39 - 23%), rules to limit the participation or control of media by companies active in other sectors (mentioned by 16%), rules on prior notification and approval required for operation of media players (mentioned by 14%). Large companies generally reported to be affected by such national requirements more than small or micro-sized companies. In this respect, m ore than half of the respondents (489 out of 917) identified that the best EU-level action on media ownership restrictions /authorisation requirements would be to require M ember S tates to justify any national measure that has the effect of restricting/limiting the entry or operation in the media market. This finding was largely driven by citizens (442 out of 776). If the responses from the Slovak campaign were not considered, there were three policy options that virtually recorded the same amount of support, namely setting out common criteria for justified restrictions of ownership/control of media outlets by Member States (95 out of 236 citizens responses), introduc ing requirements for Member States to justify any national measure that has the effect of restricting or limiting the entry of operation in the media market (94 out of 236) and setting out common procedural criteria for administrative decisions affecting media outlets (94 out of 236). Additionally, 17% of citizen s and almost half of companies and business organisations (1 3 out of 29) were of the view that no EU-level action in this respect was needed. Particularly , private broadcasters expressed caution against new burdens , and publishers stressed the need for mergers in their sector in view of the increasing competition from online platforms. At the same time, i n the case of NGOs and public authorities, the EU-level action most identified as useful was setting out common criteria for justified restrictions of ownership and control of media outlets. Entrusting an independent EU body to monitor and provide opinions on national measures/procedures that may result in restricting entry or operation of media was considered useful by 19% of respondents overall (174 out of 917), supported mainly by trade unions (56% - 5 out of 9), public authorities (53% - 10 out of 19) and NGOs (45% - 19 out of 42). With regards to the transparency of audience measurement , agreement with the statement that audience measurement is carried out in a transparent, objective and inclusive way varies considerably depending on the category of respondents. W hen it comes to citizens, o nly 6-8% fully or somewhat agreed with the above statement in relation to all the different media services ( television broadcasting, video-on-demand services, radio broadcasting, online radio broadcasting, online press and online platforms) . 65% of c itizens (504 out of 776) disagreed with the statement in relation to television broadcasting and 37% (285 out of 776) in relation to online platforms. C ompanies and business associations , including those pertaining to the sectors concerned by the question, tend to consider audience measurement for TV broadcasting, radio broadcasting, online radio, online press and video-in-demand services to be more transparent, objective and inclusive than citizens (68%, 51%, 47%, 47% and 40% fully agreeing or somewhat agreeing with the statement, respectively). However, o nly 5% of companies and associations fully or somewhat agreed with the statement that audience measurement for online platforms is transparent, objective and inclusive (3 out of 57 , including one tech company, a public relations company and a national media association ) . 54% (31 out of 57 , almost all representing the press or broadcasting sectors ) fully or somewhat disagreed with the statement . In the relevant open text field and position papers accompanying the consultation responses, TV and radio broadcasters , publishers and advertising ecosystem players stressed the issue of lack of access to objective and independently verified audience measurement data /methodologies by big online platforms. With regards to EU-level actions on audience measurement, 54% of all the respondents (49 4 out of 917) claimed that EU action would be useful to ensure an independent auditing of audience measurement, while only 16% of respondents (144 out of 917) would entrust an independent EU body with competences in this respect, and 22% (203 out of 917) would introduce common EU standards for audience measurement. If the responses collected from the Slovak campaign were not considered, the two policy actions which were identified as most useful were setting out principles to enhance transparency, objectivity and inclusiveness of audience measurement (113 out of 236 respondents) and ensuring the independent auditing of audience measurement (108 out of the 236 respondents). M ore than half of responses from companies (59% - 17 out of 29) identified the introduction of principles to enhance transparency, objectivity and inclusiveness of audience measurement as the most useful EU-level action to be carried out in this area . Section 3: Conditions for healthy media markets With regards to the first set of sub-questions on balanced and impartial media coverage , 567 out of all the 917 respondents ( 62%) and 530 out of 776 citizens (68%) reported having encountered issues in having access or being exposed to a diverse media offer. If the responses from the Slovak campaign were not taken into account, the answers were split evenly (4 2 citizen respondents claimed that they had encountered issues in having access or being exposed to a diverse media offer and 4 1 claimed that they had not ) . The majority of public authorities gave no answer. More than half of the respondents (493 out of 917) declared accessing news/information both through editorial media (newspapers, news websites, TV, radio) and online platforms as their main source. Nearly a quarter of respondents (205 out of 917 ) declared accessing news/information mainly through online platforms. Out of them, 166 (81%) deemed that the level of diversity of views they are exposed to in online platforms was unsatisfactory. At the same time, 191 (93%) of them thought the same about diversity of views in editorial media. Only 65 out of 917 respondents identified editorial media as their main source of news/information. Out of them, 57% considered the level of diversity of views they are exposed to in editorial media as unsatisfactory, while 62% of them thought the same regarding online platforms. Among Member States, editorial media remain prevalent as one of the main sources of news in Estonia, Spain, Greece and Finland, according to the respondents. 63% of all respondents (574 out of 917) claimed that divergent regulatory approaches create challenges for media companies regarding balanced media coverage or exposure to plurality of views (including during elections) , a view largely driven by citizens, NGOs and trade unions . T he majority of companies and business organisations , including those to whom possible obligations w ould apply (25 out of 29) , thought that the EU should not consider actions to ensure balanced and impartial media coverage and exposure to plurality of views. With regards to regulatory convergence and cooperation , of all the respondents who expressed an opinion on the issue , 40% (210 out of 520) fully or somewhat agreed that there is a lack of legally binding cooperation procedures, including 36% of companies and business associations (10 out of 28) and 71% of public authorities ( 10 out of 14) . 70% of all the respondents who expressed an opinion on the matter (605) , including 51% companies and business associations (18 out of 35) and all the public authorities, considered that strengthened cooperation/coordination between national media regulators would be needed to find common EU approaches to key concepts of media regulation. Academic institutions, companies and business associations, citizens (also excluding the Slovak campaign), NGOs, public authorities and trade unions all identified common guidance/best practices exchange by independent media regulators on key areas of media regulation as the best action to ensure more regulatory convergence in the EU media market . 40% of companies and business associations who responded to the public consultation supported the need for common guidance or best practices exchange by independent media regulators on key areas of media regulation. The results of the public consultation show interest in guidance on media law concepts that are not coordinated at EU level such as balanced media coverage or exposure to plurality of views (including during election periods): 38% of all respondents (347 out of 917) consider that guidance on this concept is needed. Prominence of content of gene ral interest was mentioned by 10 companies or business associations , including public service broadcasters and also digital distributors, as a concept that would need further guidance in view of fragmented national approaches (totalling 53% of all companies and business associations that expressed a need for further regulatory guidance regarding any concept) . I ntermediaries were cautious about new regulatory burdens in this area. 74% of respondents of the public consultation that identified areas for strengthened cooperation of media regulators also highlighted the need for coordination in cases related to licencing (or administrative authorisations) of activities by third countries’ providers contravening European media standards. 1 7 % of all respondents, 12 out of 19 public authorities and 11 out of 57 companies and business associations, agreed with the idea of introducing a legally binding framework for the cooperation of media regulators at the EU level , to facilitate the enforcement of media rules, in particular across borders . However, i f the responses from the Slovak campaign were not considered, the percentage of all agreeing respondents raised to 35% (83 from the subsample of 236 responses ) . The findings under the sub-section on media self-regulation revealed that more than half of citizens (4 59 out of 776 ) were unaware of media self-regulatory bodies in their Member State. This rate decreased among companies, business associations and NGOs, where only 14% of companies or business associations (mostly those that did not provide media services) and 12% of NGOs did not know about the existence of these bodies . M o re respondents fully or somewhat agree d ( 355 out of 917) than fully or somewhat disagreed (302 out of 917) with the need for EU action to foster the independence of media self-regulatory bodies . M ost of the respondents fully disagreed with the idea of setting up an EU-level coordination network to exchange best practices for media self-regulatory bodies. At the same time, more than half of all respondents (584 out of 917) claimed to be aware of problems regarding the application of journalistic standards and ethics in the EU media market. This was particularly the case among citizens (526 out of 776), trade unions (7 out of 9) and NGOs (24 out of 42). Regarding potential actions , most trade unions (8 out of 9) and NGOs (3 2 out of 42) fully or somewhat agreed on an EU-level action to foster independence of media self-regulatory bodies and with the creation and recognition of media-self-regulatory bodies where they do not yet exist ( 8 out of 9 and 27 out of 42 , respectively ) . Large companies (10 out of 20) placed more emphasis on the need to foster self-regulation at EU level than small and micro-sized companies (1 out of 7) (result derived from section 1). The respondents also gave their views on which technologies or process would be most relevant for media innovation over the next five years. In this regard, 71% of respondents (649 out of 917) identified data spaces and analytics to be the most relevant new technology, while 339 of them identified artificial intelligence, and 164 extended reality. Moreover, almost half of the respondents (420 out of 917) though t that the financial health of European editorial media had been weakening in the past five years, while 40% had no opinion on the matter and 9% did not provide an answer. If the responses from the Slovak campaign were not considered, more than half of respondents claimed that the financial health of European editorial media had been weakening (141 out of 236 respondents). More than half of the business associations (58%) and company respondents (33 out of 57) consider ed that the editorial media’s financial health has weakened in the last five years. Whereas m ost of citizens did not give any opinion on the use of media sandboxing schemes , it was identified by 11 out of 19 public authorities and 13 companies and business associations based in Belgium, Czechia, Finland, France, Italy, Portugal and Romania as useful in supporting innovation in the media sector . T he majority of respondents from companies and business associations ( 33 out of 57 ) identified artificial intelligence to be the most relevant technology for media innovation over the next five years (the most popular choice for large and small and micro-sized companies alike) , while 31 of them mentioned data spaces and analytics, and 20 mentioned extended reality. However, the majority of these respondents did not provide an y opinion ( 20 respondents) or gave no answer ( 22 ) to the question on whether the resources invested in their companies in research and innovation were sufficient or not. At the same time , 2 0 of them claimed that improved access to finance for editorial media, including through guarantees for debt financing and equity investments, would help enhanc e the economic sustainability of media outlets. Section 4: Fair allocation of state resources in the media markets Regarding the functioning of public service media , 79% of all the respondents (726 out of 917) were aware of some instances of state interference in editorial decisions or management of public service media (PSM) in some EU Member State s , and 70 % of them (6 39 out 917) claimed that this interference affected competition in the EU media market to a large or very large extent. Furthermore, 70% of respondents (644 out of 917) were aware of cases of appointment and/or dismissal procedures of PSM management used to undermine the independent functioning of PSM. This includes more than three quarters of citizens (5 91 out of 77 6 ), more than half of trade unions ( 6 out of 9) and 43% of NGOs ( 24 out of 42) and a quarter of business associations and companies (1 4 out of 57). 18 out of 57 business associations and companies were not aware of such instances, while 2 5 of them did not provide an answer to this question . According to three quarters of all respondents (639 out of 917), state interference in the editorial decisions or management of public service media affects competition in the EU media market to a large or very large extent. The view is shared by 19 companies and business associations out 33 (56%) which responded to the question. 710 out of 917 of all respondents (78%) consider ed that action at EU-level could help to strengthen the independence of public service media with a view to safeguarding fair competition. The options receiving most support were i) the introduc tion of independence safeguards for the appointment procedures regarding public service media management (583 out of 917 respondents, with a majority of citizens , NGOs, public authorities and trade unions), ii) independence safeguards for the dismissal procedures regarding public service media management (554 out of 917 respondents, with a majority of citizens, NGOs and trade unions) , and iii) rules on the absence of conflict of interest for public service media management (465 out of 917 with a majority of citizens and NGOs). The representatives of public broadcasters expressed support for independence safeguards for the appointment and dismissal procedures in PSM and more generally advocated for proportionate principle-based rules to safeguard independence of all types of media , reminding also of the importance of respecting the Amsterdam Protocol . With regards to the allocation of state resources, and in particular of state advertising , 687 out of 917 respondents (75%) assessed the level of transparency of state advertising in their Member State and the EU as a whole as insufficient. This opinion is shared in particular by 82% of EU citizens (63 9 out of 77 5 ) and 52% of NGOs (22 out of 42). Of the 87 responses received from non-Slovak EU citizens, 53 respondents reported the levels of transparency of state advertising to be insufficient in their Member State. By country, the lack of transparency of state advertising was particularly reported by respondents from Slovakia (where a campaign was identified for this public consultation ) , Czech Republic, Italy, Poland, France, Spain and Austria. Moreover, around two thirds of respondents agreed that the criteria for allocation (70% - 640 out of 917), the beneficiaries (64% - 584 out of 917) and the amounts (59% - 545 out of 917) of state advertising were not transparent in their Member State. All stakeholder categories except public authorities found the transparency of these elements insufficient rather than sufficient. Finally, 22 out of 42 NGOs and 21 out of 57 companies and business associations were aware of instances of discriminatory or preferential allocation of state advertising. 140 respondents gave examples of such practices. A majority of the 917 respondents agree d, to a large or very large extent, that the main practices related to state advertising that create distortion in the internal market are the discrimination in the allocation of state advertising (612 respondents), the absence of clear criteria for allocation (596) and the heavy reliance of media companies on state advertising to finance their operations (530). This is backed up by 23 out of 24 , 23 out of 25 and 13 out of 20 companies and business associations (representing mostly television and radio broadcasters and publishers) that expressed their op inion on these practices. In this respect, a bit over half of the respondents (486 out of 917 responses) identified the introduction of reporting obligations for Member States with regard to the allocation of state advertising as the preferred EU-level action to improve transparency and fairness in the allocation. This was also the most identified action if the responses from the Slovak campaign were not taken into account, with 119 out of the 236 respondents of the subsample mentioning it. Figure 5 below provides the responses on this particular question from the whole sample. It should be noted that if the responses from the Slovak campaign were not included, the second most supported policy action was the introduction of general standards for Member States for the allocation of state advertising (100 out of the 236 respondents), followed by the establishment of an EU-wide monitoring of state advertising allocation (98 out of the 236 respondents). With regard to the responses from companies, 35% of respondents did not provide any answer on this aspect, while the same percentage identified the introduction of reporting obligations for M ember S tates on the allocation of state advertising as an optimal EU-level action. Additionally, most NGOs (26 out of 42) supported an EU-level action to establish an EU-wide monitoring of the state advertising allocated by Member States or the introduction of general standards for Member States for the allocation of state advertising. With regards to citizens ’ responses, more than half of the respondents (421 out of 77 6 ) reported that EU-level action should introduce reporting obligations for Member States for the allocation of state advertising. Figure 5 : Responses collected from EMFA public consultation on preferences over EU-level actions on allocation of state advertising. Section 5: Governance options W ith regards to the questions on governance options , nearly half of all public consultation respondents did not to have an opinion concerning the role of ERGA in ensuring a consistent and healthy regulatory framework for media across the EU. 80% of respondents (737 out of 917) did not have an opinion in particular on the status, level of available resources, and administrative support of ERGA. This percentage can be explained by the high number of responses from EU citizens (6 5 8 out of 77 5 ) , which may not have an opinion on such a specialised matter. Taking into consideration only the replies provided by the other categories of respondents, over half of the m (7 5 out of 14 1 ) and most of the public authority respondents (16 out of 19) consider ed the role of ERGA as quite or very important. 86% of all the respondents who expressed an opinion on the issue (155 out of 180), including 13 out of 19 (68%) companies and business associations and 12 out of 13 (92%) public authorities, consider ed that the current institutional set-up of ERGA is not sufficient to enable national media regulators to effectively contribute to the proper functioning of the internal media market and safeguarding media pluralism. 80% of respondents (737 out of 917) did not express their view on the issue. With regards to the most appropriate governance arrangements for the institutional structure of the possible new EU framework for independent and pluralistic media, there is a significant diversity of views, including among different categories of respondents. While all the governance options proposed ( ranging from keeping ERGA in its current status to creating a fully-fledged EU regulatory agency ), gathered similar critical feedback, t he option with the relatively highest support corresponds to ERGA being an independent European regulatory body, assisted by an independent secretariat , with 143 out of 917 respondents fully or somewhat agreeing with this arrangement . In particular, this was the preferred option for more than half of respondents from public authorities (1 1 out of 19) and NGOs (22 out of 42) , fully or somewhat agreeing with this option . The second most popular option (105 respondents out of 917) was to keep ERGA in its current status, which receiv ed more support by companies and business associations (16 out of 57) . On the other hand, 98 respondents were in favour of having a reinforced ERGA assisted by the Commission secretariat , strengthened in resources compared to the situation today . This was supported by 7 out of 9 public authorities and 16 out of 42 NGOs. Figure 6 provides the overview of the responses from the whole sample on this question. Figure 6 : Responses collected from EMFA public consultation on preferences on governance arrangements. 2.4. Call for Evidence The call for evidence collected the feedback of 1 473 individuals, responding for themselves or representing an organisation. A total of 1 470 submissions were received via the Have your say portal , while three additional ones were received outside the site but within the timeline of the consultation and were therefore included in the responses. In this regard, there were 1 402 responses collected from citizens (95%), of which 1 389 were EU citizens. With respect to the feedback collected from organisations, 20 were from NGOs (1.4%), 12 from business associations (<1%), 8 were from companies and business organisations (<1%), 5 from academic and research institutions (<1%), 4 from public authorities (<1%), 4 from trade unions (<1%), 1 from a consumer organisation, and the rest were classified as either citizens or were under the ‘other’ category. However, it should be noted that some media companies and organisations identified themselves as belonging to the ‘Other’ or ‘Public authority’ category in their submission to the CfE. There were also some responses from EU citizens who identified themselves under the ‘Other’ category. With regard to the feedback collected from EU citizens , as with the p ublic c onsultation, a campaign conducted in Slovakia was identified . As a matter of fact, of the 1 389 responses collected from EU citizens, 1 168 were from Slovak citizens (84%). Most of the Slovak respondents called for the right to freedom of expression and of speech to be safeguarded while demanding for any instances of state censorship to be banned in the EU. The rest of the feedback collected from EU citizens also widely mention ed the practices of censorship and the limits to the freedom of speech that media is under. In this regard, citizens reported that EU-level regulation should not restrict freedom of the press but help in safeguarding it. Moreover, EU citizens point ed to their growing concern about political and commercial influence on media outlets. Several position papers and feedback collected from media companies and business organisations pointed to cases of state and commercial influence and how this negatively affected media pluralism and the effective functioning of the EU internal media market. Some publishers pointed to the weakening financial situation of traditional private media in view of the competition from global online players for advertising revenues. One public broadcaster noted that the shift to subscription -based models may impact the diversity of content as me d ia companies may focus on content that subscribers are interested in. A publisher expressed caution about EU level supervision of the entire media sector that may not take into account national cultural and linguistic diversity and argued that media pluralism can be fostered through national self-regulation . In contrast , one public service broadcaster expressed support to an update of the regulatory framework to reflect the latest evolutions of the media market and changes in consumption habits (including VoD and online platforms). The responses collected from business associations mainly encompassed responses from representatives of the press. Their feedback shows their concern on whether EU-level regulation on media would have a negative effect on the freedom, pluralism and quality of the press. In this respect, several business associations pointed to the fact that the best performing countries in the World Press Freedom Index for the last years have in fact been those with the highest level of deregulation and the most developed self-regulation for the press. One press association also argued that concentration was not necessarily a threat to media pluralism and could help sustain the viability of some media outlets. At the same time, some publisher associations pointed that the EMFA could be the opportunity to promote a level-playing-field in media sectors across the EU. In addition, the CfE also collected the views of a VoD business association that raised concerns about introducing a new EU legislation when the revised AVMS D has not yet been implemented in all the M ember S tates . In the case of responses collected from NGOs , many of them mentioned the growing levels of state interference across EU Member States as the main threat to media pluralism. In particular, the position papers of some NGOs provided examples of protectionist measures implemented by national governments which limit the entry and operation of foreign companies in the market. One example concerned the ambivalence of the Bulgarian scrutiny regarding the acquisition of Nova. Moreover, several position papers identified a wide range of pressure strategies from state authorities which could range from phone calls to stopping the publication of articles, the de - legitimi s ation of journalists, or the acquisition of once independent media outlets by the state or state-owned companies. Two NGOs also mentioned the negative effects that the unfair allocation of public subsidies, and in particular state advertising, has on the market competition and on guaranteeing a level playing field. With regard to the responses collected from public authorities , it should be noted that one of them identified itself as pertaining to this category while it was , in fact , a media group. The feedback collected from the other three public authorities focused on different aspects that the upcoming EMFA should include. One of them raised the concerns on SLAPPs and other forms of intimidation targeting journalists and called on the EMFA to safeguard journalists’ freedom to conduct their profession. Another authority believed that the concept of gender equality should be included in media ethical standards , while a third one welcomed the initiative to extend ERGA’s role in the EU. 2.5. Workshop The workshop organised by the contractor was held on 24 March 2022 and involved 17 participants representing National Regulatory Authorities (NRAs), media associations representing the press/news publishing, radio, commercial TV and public service broadcasting , journalists and media research institutes. The workshop’s aim was to validate the problem definition and to define the impacts for each policy option which were contemplated at the time the workshop was held. After a quick presentation of the EMFA initiative and the purpose of the workshop, the problem tree, methodology and basis for EU i ntervention were presented to the participants. Afterwards, the participants engaged in a discussion aimed at validating the problem definition. A commercial TV association expressed concerns on the potentially negative effect that the EMFA could have if it exacerbat ed the current fragmentation of media legislation across EU Member St ates. In this respect, several media associations from the press and commercial TV sectors referred to the revised AVMSD being unequally and not fully transposed across the EU. Additionally, several press and publishing associations pointed to the fact that the press sector has historically been a self-regulated sector, and therefore raised their concerns on a layer of EU regulation in the press sector. A press association further argued that, in fact, the countries that score the highest in media independence and freedom indexes in the EU and globally are those with the highest levels of self-regulation. An NGO representative put forward the argument that not all problems were equally important, while mentioning that growing interference in media and the opacity of media markets were the most worrisome issues in the media sector. In addition, an academic expert stated that the problem definition on media sustainability and the online environment should be stressed more . With regard to the online environment, there was a broad agreement on the threat that large online platforms represent to the fair competition with traditional media market players. This problem was particularly stressed by media associations from the commercial TV and press sectors , which argued that gatekeeper platforms’ business model allowed to capture most revenue from advertising. In terms of the sustainability of media outlets, media associations from the press sector agreed that market concentration should not be regarded negatively but was needed to guarantee the continuity of operations of small and local media. In this respect, the representative of a press association stated that they preferred to use the term consolidation rather than concentration. Furthermore, a public authority representative claimed that concentration was not harmful per se as long as it was well-regulated. Additionally, the representative of the public authority also supported the argument that the media market needed more transparency, including for online platforms. The second part of the workshop focused on the preliminary definition of the impacts of each of the policy options as envisaged at the time of the workshop. These included a recommendation (policy option 1) , a principle-based legislation (policy option 2) , as well as a full harmonisation legislative option that was later discarded by the Commission. Hence, the workshop did not collect the views from stakeholders on p olicy option 3 or any combination of hard law and soft law . With regard to policy option 1, participants agreed that the most relevant benefits from this initiative were the improved information for citizens and consumers, and the increased protection against interference with fundamental rights , provided the r ecommendation is implemented . In addition, participants also identified other benefits such as reduced levels of media capture. At the same time, the majority of participants did not consider that increased adjustment, administrative and monitoring costs w ere a relevant impact. The same applied for costs savings for media outlets and platforms due to market harmonisation, and improved environment for cross-border investment. Additional other beneficial impacts mentioned by participants included improved trust in information and improved monitoring of media markets (including for concentration purposes). Moreover, several participants pointed to the need of further measures to protect the freedom of journalists, and in particular of freelance journalists. The participants also had to identify which stakeholder groups would be more impacted by this policy option. They clearly showed that consumers would be the stakeholder group benefiting the most , as they will have access to improved information, they will enjoy increased protection against interference with fundamental rights, they will increase their trust in information, and consumer choice will increase. In the case of media outlets and SMEs, participants stated that the main benefits referred to improved consumers’ information, and the protection against interference with fundamental rights (impacting also journalists). Concerning policy option 2, the benefits which were deemed most relevant related to increased consumer choice, improved information due to fairer allocation of state advertisement , which fosters a level playing field and media pluralism , increased protection of journalists and fundamental rights, and improved environment for EU cross-border investment. In terms of costs, the most frequently identified ones were the monitoring costs for risk analysis and familiarisation costs linked to general requirements and obligations. Additionally, participants pointed to additional impacts such as benefits in terms of the sustainability and viability of media outlets; and the creation of a level-playing field thanks to the enhanced transparency of the market. Participants to the workshop also mentioned that a reinforced ERGA would result in additional benefits and could tackle new fields. At the same time, several participants raised their concerns on the negative impact that media regulation could have on press freedom. Moreover, other s pointed to the fact that measures to reduce market concentration were rather a cost than a benefit. With regard to the stakeholder group most affected by policy option 2, most of the impacts were identified to be borne by media outlets and SMEs. Notably, the measures contemplated by this option would improve the sustainability and viability of media , while it would help balance the playing field for media outlets to compete with large online platforms. Nevertheless, participants identified that the distribution of the impacts would be uneven . With regard to public authorities , participants identified all the measures to have an impact on them, although they mentioned this impact to be higher for smaller authorities which would need more tools. In the case of consumers, as with policy option 1, the benefits identified from this option were related to increased trust in media thanks to the improved transparency of the market. 2.6. Interviews As part of this study, two rounds of interviews were conducted. The first round of interviews aimed at obtaining the views from relevant stakeholders at EU level on the problems encountered in the internal media market to inform the problem definition. A total of 11 interviews were conducted with representatives of regulatory authorities, media associations from the press, private TV and public service broadcasting sectors , an advertising association, NGOs, and a research institute . The second round of interviews was conducted at a later stage to discuss the impacts of certain policy options on citizens and journalists. A total of 10 interviews were conducted with research institutes, NGOs, and a think tank. With regard to the first round of interviews, the different stakeholders interviewed provided several examples that helped to inform on the problems in the EU media market. In this respect, for instance , the NGO interviewees pointed to several cases of public and private interference with media across different EU Member States, and also identified in which countries the allocation of state advertising was alarming. The interviews conducted helped to gain further insights on the barriers to the effective functioning of the internal media market, and on the low levels of cross-border investment. In this respect, it was identified that market scrutiny procedures for mergers and acquisition s can entail long and costly processes which discourage cross-border investment. A media association interviewed mentioned a particular example in which the involvement of regulators created a significant administrative burden along with legal fees which deterred the merger from happening. At the same time, a press association, an association of broadcasting regulators , two NGOs and a research institute stated that the main barrier to cross-border investment w as related to language and cultural differences across the EU. According to a press association, decisions to invest cross-border are spurred by the size and the strategy of companies. In addition, several interviewees from the press and commercial television associations and NGOs pointed to the weakening financial position of media outlets in recent years. These interviewees identified the dominant position of emerging online media platforms as representing a threat to the sustainability of traditional media. In particular, interviewees highlighted the capacity of online media platforms to capture advertising revenues, as well as the existing imbalance of power as media platforms are bigger, have more technology available and can exploit more legal loopholes, among others. Furthermore, interviewees raised their concerns on the power of the use of data-driven personalisation by platforms to polarise society. In this regard, several stakeholders interviewed (including a public service broadcasting association, an NGO and a research institute) agreed on the importance of media literacy and education to enable citizens to access quality information and to discern and avoid misinformation. In turn, higher levels of exposure to misinformation were recogni s ed by some NGO interviewees as reducing the overall trust of citizens on traditional media sources. The second set of interviews with NGOs, research institutes and a think tank was performed to gather information on the impacts on citizens and journalists of the envisaged policy options. There was an overall consensus among the stakeholders interviewed on the fact that a non-binding recommendation would not be an effective measure as it would have limited effects in only certain Member States. Concerning the policy option based on a principle-based harmonisation, the majority of interviewees agreed on the positive effect that this measure would have on both citizens and journalists. In the case of citizens, the different measures contemplated to enhance transparency in the media market will provide citizens with improved access to information. However, for this transparency to have the expected beneficial outcomes on democratic values and on the overall functioning of media markets, several of the stakeholders interviewed agreed that this information should be truthful and easily accessible. Moreover, some of the interviewees also mentioned that these measures should be accompanied with others aiming at increasing media literacy. With respect to journalists, the majority of interviewees agreed that measures contemplated by this second policy option would strengthen professional journalism. However, one of the stakeholders interviewed expressed concerns that absolute editorial independence could potentially have unintended effect related to media accountability . O ther interviewees stated that the impact of the measures would depend on how they would be specifically defined. 2.7. Surveys As part of this study, two surveys were launched to collect evidence on the impacts of the measures envisaged by the main policy options (recommendation and principle-based harmonisation) for two distinctive stakeholder groups: national r egulatory authorities (NRAs) and media market players. A combination of hard and soft law was not considered in the surveys. General questions on a full harmonisation legislative instrument were included but not considered in the analysis as this option was later discarded. The s urveys were developed in English and were launched through the EU Survey portal on 6 April. The survey developed for media market players closed on 15 April, while the one for NRAs closed on 19 April, although it was initially planned to close on the same date as the one for media market players. In the case of NRAs, answers were collected from 20 different Member States, while a total of 41 answers were collected from media market players (38 fully completed surveys and 3 partially completed surveys). Survey to media market players: T he majority of the respondents consisted of large enterprises (21 out of the 41), while 11 were considered as small, and the rest as either medium (2) or micro (7). The respondents included companies from the press, commercial TV and radio, public service broadcasting and advertising sectors. The majority of media player respondents (26 out of 42 – 62%) including from the press, commercial TV and radio and public service broadcasting considered that a recommendation ( p olicy o ption 1) would improve the environment for investment to a small, moderate or large extent . H alf of media market respondents (23 out of 42 – 55%) , including from the press, public service broadcasting, commercial TV and radio, consider that it would improve the environment for cross-border investment. Moreover, 40% of respondents (17 out of 42 from the press, commercial TV and radio, public service broadcasting ) stated that a r ecommendation would enhance information and trust, 24% (10 out of 42 from the press, commercial TV ) that it would improve market predictability and 14% (6 out of 42 from the press ) that it would increase market opportunities . The rest of respondents did not foresee any relevant impact from this o ption. Regarding the legislative instrument based on a principle-based harmonisation ( p olicy o ption 2), one third of media player respondents (14 out of 42 - 33%) including from the press, commercial TV and public service broadcasting, considered that the introduction of general legal principles related to independence and pluralism of the media would have a small, moderate or large impact on their editorial freedom, while the rest of them expected no relevant impact. Half of media player respondents (22 out of 42 - 52% - including from the press, commercial TV and radio ) considered that the introduction of common information requirements on media ownership would benefit their business to a small, moderate or large extent (in terms of investment decisions and strengthened fair competition). Almost half of the respondents (19 out of 42) believed that the introduction of common requirements for media market scrutiny procedures would have a small, moderate or large impact on their investment decisions. Regarding the introduction of general obligations for transparency of state advertising, two thirds of media player respondents believed that this would have a small, moderate or large extent on their business (27 out of 42 - 64%) and on fairness of resource allocation (28 out of 42 - 66%), by reducing potential discriminations and improving media pluralism. Concerning the introduction of common requirements for media market scrutiny, 40% of media players (17 out of 42) considered that it would have a small, moderate or large positive impact on reducing costs linked to regulatory fragmentation and to legal uncertainty, while the rest did not foresee relevant impacts. Similarly, 40% of media players (17 out of 42) stated that common principles for national media market entry or operation decisions (e.g. licensing) would have a small, moderate or large positive impact on investment and on reducing costs linked to legal uncertainty, while the rest did not foresee relevant impacts. The abovementioned answers included those from representatives from the press, commercial TV and radio and public service broadcasting. Regarding the introduction of safeguards for the independent governance of PSM, one third of media players (15 out of 42 - 36%) considered that it would have a small, moderate or large positive impact on their own editorial freedom, and two thirds (26 out of 42 - 62%) on fair competition in the media market, while the rest did not foresee relevant impacts. Concerning the introduction of general requirements for audience measurement systems, half of the media players (22 out of 42 - 52%) consider that would improve transparency for advertising purposes, 43% (16 out of 42) that it would improve accountability for advertising purposes, 40% (18 out of 42) that it would improve revenues for their business and 38% (17 out of 42) that it would improve efficient allocation of state advertising resources to a small, moderate or large extent, while the rest did not foresee relevant impacts. All responses referred to above included representatives of the press, commercial TV and radio and public service broadcasting. The majority of media players (25 out of 42 - 60%) considered that a structured cooperation framework between national media regulators would have a positive impact on legal certainty and investment to a small, moderate and large extent. Similarly, at least half of media players (23 out of 42 - 55%) consider ed that introducing general obligations for Member States to protect the integrity of journalists’ sources would secure the flow of information from sources to journalists and the (cross-border) provision of information and 48% (20 out of 42) that it would contribute to equal conditions of competition and the free movement of media outlets and journalists in the internal media market. All responses referred to above included representatives of the press, commercial TV and radio and public service broadcasting. S urvey to NRAs : 7 of the 20 respondents claimed that the introduction of a recommendation ( p olicy o ption 1) would bring additional costs to a large extent, and 5 to a moderate extent. At the same time, 11 of them claimed that this policy option would bring additional benefits to a large extent, and 4 to a moderate extent. For what concerns the introduction of a principle-based harmonisation ( p olicy o ption 2), with regard to the measure on issuing non-binding opinions on national scrutiny procedures, 10 of the 20 NRA respondents claim ed this would bring them additional costs to a moderate extent, while 6 to a small extent. In the case of the introduction of general requirements for audience measurement systems, there were difference s between the expected additional costs this measure would imply. 7 NRAs stated that this initiative would involve additional costs to a large extent, while 9 to a moderate extent. With regard to a governance framework based on the support of a secretariat provided by the Commission or an independent EU office, the majority of NRA respondents (12 out of 20) claimed that it would help improve the cooperation among NRAs in the new Board to a large extent, and 5 to a moderate extent. Additionally, 8 out of the 20 respondents found that this structured framework would bring additional benefits to their authorities to a large extent, and 7 to a moderate extent. T he majority of respondents expected additional benefits for their authorities to a large extent (8 out of 20 respondents) or to a moderate extent (7 of 20) , stemming more from a structured framework for regulatory cooperation than a reinforcement of the Commission’s support. Annex 3: Who is affected and how? 3. 1. Practical implications of the initiative (d istributional analysis ) Overall, the evidence available indicates that all the main media markets would benefit from the positive economic impacts of the initiative under the preferred option , which would have a positive effect on the functioning of the single market for media . Media market players No significant costs are expected for media market players, which would see direct regulatory benefits . All media companies would face familiarisation costs with the new regulatory framework. Public s ervice m edia would face some costs related to the independence safeguards and a general obligation of balanced media coverage. Those m edia companies that decide to take up actions in response to the recommendations on safeguard s for editorial independence and actions related to certain aspects of media ownership transparency would see marginal costs. The audiovisual sector, which has traditionally been regulated in a more detailed manner, would particularly benefit from the introduction of common requirements for national media pluralism laws and market scrutiny procedures . As it is a capital-intensive industry, it would enjoy economies of scale in a better functioning and more predictable, coherent and less protectionist internal media market , which will be strengthened through the Board’s opinions on cases that may have a negative effect on the proper functioning of the internal market . The establishment of a regulatory cooperation and convergence framework, including the mutual assistance mechanism for situations of serious media freedom or pluralism risks with a cross-border dimension, would contribute to increase legal certainty and reduce compliance costs and should encourage in particular broadcasters and providers of (audiovisual) news content and non-national entities, which are more likely to suffer from regulatory fragmentation , to expand their operations in other Member States. A higher level of regulatory convergence in key areas of media law (e.g. prominence of media content of general interest ) would improve fair competition in the internal media market and economic viability of (audiovisual) media companies. Possibility for a c ollective action by the Board would improve the level playing field for media market players by protecting them from entities producing and distributing media content (often disinformation) without observing journalistic standards (i.e. from ‘rogue traders’). Those broadcasters and press companies that take up the recommendations on safeguard s for editorial independence ( and development of and adherence to self-regulation ) would strengthen their editorial independence and increase their freedom to make decisions without public or private interference, expanding the plurality of voices or opinions expressed and issues analysed in their media content . This is expected to reduce media capture and increase the quality of the news content, thereby increasing the independent provision of quality media services . Public service media independence safeguards and the obligation of balanced media coverage would also provide an additional protection layer from interference in editorial decisions, as journalists would be able to invoke them in response to attempts to control content, such as political news reporting. Journalists would also be more independent vis-a-vis media owners due to the increased deployment of these sa f eguards within media companies. The right of non-disclosure of journalistic sources and communication , coupled with safeguards to ensure that such a right is not circumvented by public authorities, would protect journalists against unwarranted surveillance or other forms of pressure and ensure that journalists in different media sectors have access to the necessary material for the production of media content, particularly for investigative reporting and reporting on politically and commercially sensitive matters . Greater transparency of media ownership and, in particular on owners’ other business interest s , would enhance fair competition, especially in the press sector (encompassing printed and online media) for which Member States typically do n o t have specific transparency tools, such as media registers . More transparent online audience measurement systems , in particular the possibility to request and obtain information on the methodology of such systems , would reduce market distortions , further strengthen the level playing field between media service providers and online players and will particularly benefit audiovisual media services and online press , as well as online advertisers. Journalists should also benefit , as they will understand better how online players measure audiences of media services . The measures on transparency and fairness of state advertising would reduce market distortions and make sure that a wider range of media outlets have access to this revenue source. In particular , in the broadcasting and the press sector (encompassing printed and online media) , media critical of the government in Member States where currently preferential allocation of state advertising is most acute as well as local and regional outlets can expect a fairer distribution of state advertising revenues, which would benefit especially more independent media players. SMEs would particularly benefit from the initiative. The current costs of regulatory fragmentation are proportionately higher for smaller companies, who will benefit from more certainty and lower legal costs . Also, potentially increased access to state advertising will represent a proportionally bigger opportunity for smaller companies. Similarly, SMEs are in a particularly weak position vis-a-vis online players when it comes to online audience measurement , therefore the initiative would help balance the playing field for SMEs to compete for advertising revenues. T he following two tables reflect the overall costs of the preferred policy option. T he average costs for year 1 as well as the recurrent costs for the following years are presented . Similarly, the overall costs are provided for SMEs only. Such costs are expected to be outweighed by increased benefits. Table 1 . Overall costs for media market players (EUR million) One-off + year 1 annual costs Recurrent LB UB Average LB UB Average 15.1 28.5 21.8 5. 5 14.5 10 LB – lower band, UB – upper band Table 2 . Overall costs for media market players – SMEs only (EUR million) One-off + year 1 annual costs Recurrent LB UB Average LB UB Average 14.6 28.3 21.4 5.5 14.3 9.9 T he following tables show the unitary costs which is expected to be borne on average by each affected enterprise in the media market sector. T he same unitary costs are provided for SMEs only. Table 3 . Unitary cost s per media market player, by type of costs (EUR) One-off costs + year 1 annual costs Recurrent costs Compliance (L B ) Compliance (U B ) Enforcement (L B ) Enforcement (U B ) Compliance (L B ) Compliance (U B ) Enforcement (L B ) Enforcement (U B ) 681 1, 3 06 0 0 257 670 0 0 Table 4 . Unitary cost s per SMEs, by type of costs (EUR) One-off costs + year 1 annual costs Recurrent costs Compliance (L B ) Compliance (U B ) Enforcement (L B ) Enforcement (U B ) Compliance (L B ) Compliance (U B ) Enforcement (L B ) Enforcement (U B ) 681 1, 3 05 0 0 257 670 0 0 Public authorities The implementation of the measures under the preferred option is expected to improve the cooperation among national authorities and hence the effectiveness and efficiency of their activities to promot e the single market while protecting m edia pluralism. A general mechanism for a structured cooperation between media regulators and a specific mutual assistance mechanism for situations of serious media freedom or pluralism risks with a cross-border dimension would lead to more even and effective implementation of the legal requirements for media services, especially in the audiovisual sector. Guidance by the Commission assisted by the Board on technical or practical aspects of regulation relevant for media independence and pluralism, especially in the audiovisual sector, would reduce differences in interpretation and application of media rules across the Member States and enable regulators to address emerging obstacles to the functioning of the media market in a structured and coherent way. T he establishment of a common regulatory framework is expected to make the work among NRAs more efficient, leading to cost-savings between 10% to 20% of the current annual costs borne by NRAs to cooperate within ERGA. The governance option of a Board supported by a secretariat within the Commission would entail EUR 2 to 2. 3 million in annual costs for the EU. National public authorities would also face some additional one-off and recurrent costs, for example, one-off costs of adjusting national rules to the new requirements or recurrent costs pertaining to their implementation. These costs will be relatively minor, EUR 7.4 million on average in the first year and EUR 5.10 million in subsequent years . The support provided by the Commission secretariat will significantly reduce the effort needed at the national level to implement the new measures and hence the associated costs of national authorities. The table s below show the overall costs for public authorities for the preferred option as well as the unitary cost s for each NRA and/or relevant national authority affected by the option, assuming one authority per Member State. Table 5. Overall costs for public authorities (Unit: EUR million) One-off+ year 1 annual costs Recurrent LB UB Average LB UB Average 4.8 10.1 7.4 4.2 8 6 .1 LB – lower band, UB – upper band Table 6 . Unitary cost per NRA and/or relevant national authority, by type of costs (Unit: EUR) One-off costs+ year 1 annual costs Recurrent costs Compliance (L B ) Compliance (U B ) Enforcement (L B ) Enforcement (U B ) Compliance (L B ) Compliance (U B ) Enforcement (L B ) Enforcement (U B ) 19 111 78 333 0 0 43 115 128 022 38 859 82 748 Citizens Under the preferred option, t he legal principle of non-interference in editorial independence, the recommendation on independence safeguards in media companies and the protection of journalistic sources , along with the independence safeguards for public service media governance and the obligation of balanced media coverage would lead to an improved citizens’ exposure to pluralistic and trustworthy media services and reduce disinformation, therefore improving citizens’ access to information and choice of media services . Trust of audiences in media would grow, which, in turn, would generate additional revenue for media companies. In addition, t he legal measures on allocation of state advertising, along with the recommendation on transparency of media ownership, would empower citizens to better discern political or commercial interference with media outlets. The preferred p olicy o ption is also expected to have wider economic , social and fundamental rights impacts. Overall, citizens’ improved access to information would ensure the respect of EU citizens ’ fundamental rights of freedom of expression and information. Furthermore, enhanced access to information and transparency would help to safeguard rule of law and well-functioning of democratic state s . Similarly , the improved sustainability of media outlets , stimulated by growing trust of citizens in media, could improve the overall well-functioning of democra tic systems , and avoid further polari s ation of societies . 3. 2. Summary of costs and benefits of the preferred option Measures Who is affected? Who will benefit? Fostering cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market M edia pluralism measures and media market scrutiny Media companies subject to media pluralism rules , mainly broadcasters (and other companies that invest in the media sector ) Member States (media regulators and actors taking measures/decisions) Media companies and investors . Particularly beneficial for non-national media market players : higher legal certainty, facilitation of investments across borders Citizens: richer media offer Increasing regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market Mechanism for a structured cooperation between media regulators Audiovisual companies and VSPs Media regulators Mainly media service providers regulated at EU level, namely audiovisual media service providers and video-sharing platforms: more legal certainty, more stable/convergent regulatory environment Media regulators : Improved cooperation in tackling cross-border challenges for the media sector. Up to 20% in annual cost savings related to cooperation within ERGA, due to a more efficient cooperation in the Board and reduced tasks as a result of the creation of a dedicated secretariat within the Commission. Relevant authorities in adjacent fields: competition, telecom and digital regulators, relevant ministries. Citizens: better enforcement of EU media rules, in particular online, thus safer online space Collective action by the Board Third country media Media regulators Media companies: protected from rogue media players Audiovisual distributors: less fragmentation of regulatory action, higher level of certainty Media regulators: more effective restrictive measures Citizens: safer information space Mechanism for monitoring media pluralism online VLOPs Media regulators Media companies: wider distribution online , lower risk to editorial integrity online Citizens: more diverse media offer, fewer risks to media freedom/pluralism online, lower level of disinformation Facilitating free provision of diverse quality media services in the internal market M edia independence principles + recommendations to promote editorial independence, self-regulat ion and me dia ownership transparency Media companies Journalists Media companies: benefit from higher trust in their services, level playing field - all abide by comparable ethical standards, better possibility to take informed business/investment decisions Journalists: better safeguarded from risks of interference within media outlets, empowered by self-regulation that safeguards editorial integrity Citizens: more trustworthy media, higher quality of media services, possibility to evaluate who stands behind editorial line (media accountability) Independence safeguards for public service media and an obligation of balanced media coverage Public service media ( audiovisual + radio) PSM: more independence in management and editorial decisions Private media: fairer competition on the market Journalists within PSM: lower risks of political pressure Citizens: access to more diverse and independent quality news and information Safeguards for the integrity of journalists’ sources Member States (public actors issuing surveillance orders) Journalists Journalists: protection of their societal mission, lower risks of interference in their job across the EU Citizens /entities who provide information to media: anonymity, protection from negative consequences Citizens in general: higher trust in media Ensuring transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market Principles/rules on transparent, objective and inclusive audience measurement Audience measurement service providers (including online players) Audiovisual and press companies: fair competition with online players when selling ads, better content monetisation and potentially higher advertising income Business (at large): more informed decisions concerning advertising spending Media regulators: accurate data for market assessments Principles/rules on transparent/fair allocation of state advertising All (private) media Member States (authorities /state-owned entities allocating advertising expenditure to media) Independent media companies: reduced market distortion resulting from the misuse of state advertising; media players critical of governments could benefit from more state advertising Citizens: lower risks of dependence of certain media outlets on state and hence manipulated information Costs for Businesses Costs for Administrations One-off Recurrent One-off Recurrent Scrutiny of media market transactions EUR 9.1-13.7 million * - - EUR 44 1 00 - 96 6 00 Regulatory cooperation and convergence in media markets EUR 50 000 EUR 1.12 - 3 . 36 million Protection of editorial independence EUR 5.1 - 10 . 2 million (55% of SMEs) - - Safeguards for Public Service Media EUR 357 300 - EUR 447 000-1.7 million EUR 42 000 Transparency of Media ownership - EUR 0.4 - 4.2 million (55% of media companies) - - Requirements for Audience Measurement Systems - - EUR 69 000 - 415 000 EUR 592 2 00 Monitoring of State advertis ing - - - EUR 415 000 - 1.6 million Governance (sub-option A ) - - - EUR 2 - 2. 3 million (8-10 FTEs and EUR 1 million operational budget) Total EUR 9.4-14 million EUR 5. 6 – 14. 5 million * * EUR 566 000 -2.16 million EUR 4.2-8 million * Costs linked to familiarisation with the new provisions * * The totals may include differences due to rounding. Costs related to the ‘one in, one out’ approach Citizens/Consumers Businesses Administrations One-off Recurrent One-off Recurrent Total Direct adjustment costs - - EUR 9.4 – 14 million EUR 5.6 -14.5 million Indirect adjustment costs - - - - Administrative costs (for offsetting) - - - - The preferred option would entail no costs for citizens, and only negligible adjustment costs for businesses, i.e. overall one-off costs for EU media companies between 9.4 and 14 million EUR and recurrent annual costs between 5.6 and 14.5 million EUR to be distributed among affected media companies. On average, recurrent costs would for example range between 257 and 6 70 EUR per small and medium size d company , that will be absorbed into business-as-usual costs . 3.3. Relevant sustainable development goals III. Overview of relevant Sustainable Development Goals – Preferred Option Relevant SDG Expected progress towards the Goal Comments SDG 16: peace, justice and strong institutions Media f reedom and pluralism, enshrine d in Article 11 of the EU Charter of Fundamental Rights, is a key pillar of the rule of law and of democracy . Th e initiative underpinned by this impact assessment aims to improve transparency in the internal media market, in particular on ownership of media outlets and on audience measurement systems. This will benefit businesses and citizens, and facilitate cross - border operations and investments in the internal EU media market , hence fostering media pluralism . The initi ative also aims to ensur e that when assessing media market transactions, national authorities take due account of the importance to safeguard media pluralism . The initiative also purports to protect the editorial independence of the media. By foster ing media pluralism and freedom in the EU , this initiative will contribute to upholding the rule of law and to strengthening democracy in the EU , and hence allow progress towards SDG 16 . SDG 16 includes promoting the rule of law, democracy and transparency . SDG 8 Decent work and economic growth Measures aimed at protecting the integrity of journalists’ sources and recommendations for media companies to safeguard editorial independence will improve quality of working condition s contributing to the achievement of decent work within the media sector ( SDG 8.5 ) . Annex 4 : Analytical methods This annex provides information on the methodology used in the external support study for calculating the estimates included in this Impact Assessment. The study was based on a mixed method of quantitative and qualitative analysis with primary and secondary data used to identify and quantify costs and benefits. A summary of the analytical methods adopted in the study along with a summary of the calculations, including key assumptions and limitations, is provided below. Details on the consultation activities carried out under the support study are also provided. The table below show s the type of analytical methods adopted in each task. Overall approach The Impact Assessment was developed following a three step approach. Identification of the impacts Once the problem definition was finalised and the policy options defined, the study team developed a long list of potential impacts to be assessed. The long list of impacts was developed through desk research, consultation activities with experts, and causal chain analysis. Based on the long list of impacts, an initial breakdown of costs and benefits indicators was also developed. Impacts were defined by stakeholder groups (i.e. public authorities, media market players and citizens). Selection of the impacts A shortlist of impacts was defined during a validation workshop, h e ld virtually (i.e. via Teams) on 24 March 2022. Together with experts and representatives of the Commission, 17 external stakeholders - representing National Regulatory Authorities (NRAs), media associations, journalists and institutes dedicated to research in the field of media- participated to the workshop. The purpose of the workshop was two-fold: validate the problem definition and discuss the impacts related to specific policy options. The second part of the workshop was used to: • validate the initial list of potential impacts linked to each policy option; • prioritize these impacts and; • analyse the distribution of impacts across key stakeholders. In order to address these three aims, a series of activities were developed. Specifically: • Activity 1: Anything missing? The aim of this first activity was to walk participants through the long list of impacts identified by the study team (i) and discuss any additional impacts not considered in the long-list. • Activity 2: How would you prioritise these impacts? The second activity looked at prioritisation of impacts. Following a discussion around priority for each impact, the prioritisation exercise was finalised by assigning a definition of priority (i.e. low, medium, high, not relevant) to each impact. • Activity 3: Impact Analysis : The final activity analysed high priority impacts by stakeholder groups (main stakeholders affected; quantification of the impacts; impacts distribution) Workshop participants were divided into three groups to ensure impacts for each policy option (PO 1, 2 and 4 ) were extensively discussed and analysed. Each group rotated across p olicy options so that each participant had the opportunity to express their views on impacts linked to each policy option. Each policy option had one facilitator from the core study group (i.e. Intellera consulting and Open Evidence) assigned to run the activities and manage participants. This part of the workshop was conducted using MURAL to allow participants to actively contribute to the discussion and the activities prepared. Where possible, participants provided their input directly in MURAL. However, a co-facilitator was assigned to each MURAL in order to ensure all contributions from participants (i.e. via chat box or via discussion) were recorded into the canvas. The canvas reporting output for each policy option is shown below. Policy Option 1 – MURAL activities Policy Option 2 – MURAL activities Policy Option 3 – MURAL activities It should be noted that policy options analysed during the workshop included the Recommendation ( p olicy o ption 1), and the principle-based legislative framework ( p olicy o ption 2), as well as an option that was later discarded by the Commission at an early stage ( Discarded Option). Hence, the workshop did not collect the views from citizens on p olicy o ption 3 . Impacts for policy option 3 were added at later stage and were identified through desk research, consultation activities with experts, and informed conversation with the Commission. Despite not being discussed during the workshop, stakeholders had the opportunity to express their views on impacts linked to policy option 3 during interviews and online surveys developed as part of Task 2. After the workshop, the study team identified key costs and benefits to be assessed for each type of stakeholder, as shown below. Main costs and benefits for NRAs Main costs and benefits for media outlets Main costs and benefits for citizens DETERMINISTIC MODEL Q uantifying the economic impacts of the different policy options is challenging due to the lack of data. No well-established metrics of economic benefits are available, and media pluralism embraces multiple dimensions for which costs and benefits are difficult to quantify. This was confirmed also by the data collection activities carried out during the study, where stakeholders struggled to quantify the economic value of potential changes introduced by the proposed policy measures. In addition, the evidence collected through primary (e.g. interviews, case studies, surveys) and secondary (e.g. desk research, analysis of relevant databases) data collection activities is not adequate for robust quantitative modelling. As a result, the quantification of the economic impacts faces a number of challenges, namely: • Difficulty in establishing clear causal links between variables. Macro-economic impacts are usually affected by numerous factors, making it difficult to identify the causality of media pluralism. • If causal links are difficult to identify, the following step is to explore possible correlations between the independent variable (media pluralism) and the different dependent variables (economic impacts). However, in this area , correlation between different variables is difficult to identify and measure. Evidence between the proposed measures and their economic impact is available only to some extent, and the evidence collected through data collection activities does not allow to draw general conclusions on their economic impact. For example, capturing the correlation between cross-border investments and market fragmentation would require detailed data on cross-border investments in the media sector. This information is currently patchy or not available. As part of the study some case studies focused only on this issue, however information was limited. • The data collection activities carried out, such as the case study approach, w ere useful to qualitatively assess some relationships such as insufficient investment in the internal market in the media sector but proved little effective ness in obtaining quantitative estimates. In general, respondents found it easier to explain qualitatively the impact of a certain measure rather than sharing quantitative figures. This feedback was clearly reported to the study team during the workshop, but also during interviews and surveys. Often, participants to the data collection activities were unable to provide figures, reasonable estimates or educate d guesses on the impact of policy choices. • It is difficult to define the media sector using the standard statistical classification systems. None of the reviewed models, some of which include several industries, consider the media sector as such. This challenge is also reported in similar exercises, where high level proxies, such as the entire ICT sector, have been used. Given these limitations, a full economic model would not be able to demonstrate the economic benefits generated by the proposed policy options and measures. For this reason, a second-best methodology – that uses the qualitative assessment as an input to model the quantitative impact- is followed. Therefore, the economic impacts were estimated using deterministic estimates built on the basis of the qualitative evidence collected both at micro (media company, citizen) and meso (stakeholder group) level. The sections below provide a detailed description of the methodology developed to quantify economic impacts of the different policy options. 1.1 Overall methodology The support study uses qualitative evidence as an input to quantify the economic impacts of the different policy options comparing the results against the baseline. As a first step, the economic impact of the baseline scenario is quantified. The baseline scenario is pivotal as the impacts of the different policy options are estimated as incremental changes to the baseline. Once the baseline has been estimated, additional impacts of the different policy options are identified. These additional impacts are mapped through a casual pathway, i.e. linking elements of the options and the impacts. The identified economic impacts are then assessed for each policy option. The assessment is informed by the evidence collected through the data collection activities (e.g. desk research, interviews, online surveys, workshop) and converted in quantitative terms, by comparing the qualitative ranking to the baseline scenario. This approach is in line with other studies carried out to assess the impact of policy options where little data is available. Finally, the economic benefits of the different policy options are estimated by increasing the baseline benefit (i.e. annual revenues) by the same percentage. Net benefits are calculated as total benefit estimated in the model minus costs for each policy option. While it is not possible to develop a stochastic model that embeds uncertainty in the stochastic estimates it produces, the use of a deterministic model is the most plausible approach to determine expected outcomes . Although the deterministic model incorporates uncertainty in the qualitative-based scoring – upon which it is built – the quantitative impacts are estimated through percentage parameters that are produced deterministically (i.e. not considering uncertainty). In conclusion the main limitation of this approach is that uncertain t y is only considered in the qualitative assessment of each type of impact and not in the parameter s applied to the baseline to produce the quantitative estimate of impacts. 1.2 STEP 1: Q uantification of the baseline The baseline scenario illustrates how the problems would evolve in case no policy action is taken, i.e. it consists on the extrapolation over time of what would happen in a business-as usual scenario. A detailed description of the methodology developed for the estimation of the baseline is presented in the following sections. Baseline scenario The methodology consisted of three steps: firstly, revenue data were extracted from PwC Global Entertainment & Media Outlook ( GEMO ) dataset; multipliers where then calculated to obtain a representative value - at EU level - of the average revenue per company by segment. Finally, revenues by sector are estimated for the 2021-2027 period. Methodology The main data source for the estimation of the baseline consisted in the PwC Global Entertainment & Media Outlook 2021-2025 which provides five-year projections (2021-2025) of consumer and advertiser spending data. More specifically, the baseline scenario was calculated taking into account data on revenues across the following sub-segments: Sub-segment Description Radio Includes radio advertising and public radio license fees. Newspapers Includes digital newspaper advertising and print newspaper advertising Traditional TV and home video Includes physical home video, TV subscription and public license fee Internet and TV advertising Includes mobile other display Internet advertising, mobile video Internet advertising, mobile paid search Internet advertising, classified Internet advertising, display Internet advertising, paid search Internet advertising, wired in-stream video Internet advertising, mobile in-stream video Internet advertising, connected TV in-stream other video Internet advertising, connected TV in-stream broadcaster video Internet advertising, mobile out-stream video Internet advertising, wired out-stream video Internet advertising Source: PwC Global Entertainment & Media Outlook (GEMO), 2021-2025. Before proceeding with the quantitative estimation of the baseline , the following aspects should be considered: In the PwC database, digital advertising components (e.g., online television, online radio, digital newspaper, digital consumer magazine, digital trade magazine, streaming music advertising, sports streaming advertising and podcasts advertising) are included either in the respective segments or in the Internet advertising segment to avoid double counting. In addition, consumer spending on radio licence fees is included in both the TV and video and the radio segment but only once in the overall total. The sub-segment “Internet and advertisement” also includes revenues from large online providers, which are not in the scope of this study. Therefore, the total amount of revenues has been reduced by 70% to exclude the large online platforms in the calculation. The assumption is based on desk research and data from the financial statements of the biggest online platform in operation (e.g. Google, Facebook, Amazon). All the elements above might lead to some overlaps in terms of revenues distribution by segments and should be considered when analysing revenues for the development of the baseline The table below shows the total spending amount (reported in EUR m illion ) for each above-mentioned sub-segment for the period 2016-2020 as reported in the PwC dataset. As shown in the table below, the PwC dataset provides historical revenues data for 17 Member States and does not include revenues information for the remaining 10 EU Member States . Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 1 : Total revenue (2016-2020) by country and by sub-sector for countries covered by the PwC analysis. Unit (EUR m illion ) ) Country Radio Newspapers TV and Home video Internet and TV advertising* Austria 1 788 7 035 6 185 6 002 Belgium 2 777 4 752 9 377 9 609 Czech Republic 640 1 861 2 492 4 994 Denmark 578 5 504 7 378 8 205 Finland 620 4 534 6 202 5 131 France 6 810 15 879 32 909 48 488 Germany 17 165 37 259 58 681 74 951 Greece 276 718 2 723 4 022 Hungary 243 820 1 537 2 518 Ireland 557 2 489 3 673 3 910 Italy 2 546 7 753 25 406 37 480 Netherlands 1 088 5 196 6 264 12 384 Poland 646 1 581 8 501 10 335 Portugal 565 794 7 858 4 753 Romania 169 243 2,558 2 638 Spain 2 233 7 008 10 470 24 314 Sweden 1 144 6 159 6 475 11 238 *Raw data on revenues from Internet advertising and TV advertising have been aggregated. For the scope of this study the two sub-sectors will be addressed as a single advertising sector. The second step of this process consisted in the calculation of a multiplier to estimate total revenues by sector at EU-level . The multiplier was built based on the annual number of active companies in the EU . Th e number of companies by sub-sector active in the 2016-2019 period has been extracted from Eurostat . In order to ensure consistency , t he NACE sectors presented in the table below have been used as a proxy to match the corresponding PwC sub-segment presented above. PWC report sub-segment NACE Code Radio J.60.1 “Radio broadcasting” Newspapers J.58.13 “Publishing of newspapers” J.63.91 “News agency activities” TV and Home video J.60.2 “TV programming and broadcasting” IT advertising M73.1 "Advertising agencies" Specifically, multiplier s ha ve been calculated by extracting both the PwC data on revenues ( R ), for each of the 17 available countries ( c ), and the Eurostat data on the number of active companies ( # C) in the same countries, for each year ( t) between 2016 and 2019. Multipliers were defined for each sub-segment ( s ): Finally , the multipliers’ annual average was calculated in order to obtain a representative value - at EU level - of the average revenue per company operating in that sub-segment. A breakdown of these average multipliers ( M*s,t ), expressed in EUR m illion per company, is provided in the following table. Average yearly multiplier by sub-segment 2016 2017 2018 2019 M* Radio,t 2.96 2.93 3.26 3.02 M* Newspapers,t 4.77 4.85 5,10 5.11 M* TVandHomevideo,t 20.87 22.81 22,74 20.82 M* IT and TV advsertising,t 0.21 0.24 0,25 0.25 The annual revenues of the countries not covered by the PwC analysis, have been estimated for each sub-segment by multiplying the annual multipliers with the number of media market players active in the 2016 _ 2019 period . The equation below illustrates how revenues have been calculated for these countries ( nc ). Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 2 : Total revenue (2016-2019) by country and by sub-segment for countries not covered by the PwC analysis. Unit (EUR m illion ) Country Radio Newspapers TV and Home video IT and TV advertising Bulgaria 674 2 545 12 434 2 621 Estonia 124 286 349 860 Croatia 1 911 1 173 4 083 1 848 Cyprus 431 172 1 329 477 Latvia 543 528 6 789 1 707 Lithuania 273 1 075 5 692 3 750 Luxembourg 82 401 1 219 381 Slovenia 1 909 1 095 13 903 1 451 Slovakia 414 1 061 2 590 9 142 Given that the Eurostat data on the annual number of active companies was available only up to the year 2019, a further step was needed to determine the revenues for the year 2020 for the EU countries not covered by the PwC analysis. In this regard, the 2019 revenue values for the remaining EU countries have been multiplied by the factor (1 + d* ) where d* represents the average percentage rates of variation, between 2019 and 2020, of the revenues observed in each of the 17 EU countries available in the PwC report: After having obtained the historical annual revenues, for the period 2016-2020 at European level, future revenues (2021-2027) were estimated by calculati ng the Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) for each Member State, based on the previous period 2016-2019: It should be noted that, although information on revenues in the PwC report is available till the year 2020, data for that year was not taken into account for the calculation of the CAGR. In this regard, future growth rates will not take into account the economic impact of the Covid-19 pandemic that has also affected significantly the m edia sector. Consequently, revenues for 2020 have not been forecasted but have been obtained from historical statistics. Finally, revenues for each Member State for the 2021-2027 period were forecasted through the following formula: Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 3 : Total revenue (2016-2027) by country and by sub-segment at European level. Unit (EUR m illion ) Country Radio Newspapers TV and Home video IT and TV advertising 2016 9 828 26 010 51 558 48 028 2017 9 667 25 626 53 214 74 417 2018 9 931 24 390 53 772 75 477 2019 9 598 23 583 50 466 61 181 2020 8 480 20 574 49 415 59 467 2021* 8 480 19 942 49 405 65 311 2022* 8 500 19 340 49 612 72 038 2023* 8 533 18 768 50 076 79 788 2024* 8 575 18 224 50 852 88 730 2025* 8 626 17 707 52 011 99 059 2026* 8 682 17 215 53 649 111 006 2027* 8 744 16 749 55 887 124 842 Limitations There are a number of limitations that became evident when developing the methodological approach that should be kept into consideration throughout this process. These limitations, which have also been covered in the previous section are listed below: Limited availability of data : As already described above , the PwC report “Global Entertainment & Media Outlook 2021–2025” only includes historical data on revenues for the period 2016-2020 and limited to 17 EU Member State s . Consequently, it was necessary to indirectly estimate the revenues for the remaining countries by using multipliers obtained from historical statistics. Time limit of multipliers : Eurostat statistics based on NACE Rev.2 codes for the annual number of active companies are available up to 2019. Therefore, 2020 revenues for EU countries not covered by the PwC analysis have not been obtained by using the multipliers. Instead , they were calculated on the basis of the average percentage rate of change in revenues between 2019 and 2020 for the other 17 EU countries. Representativeness of NACE Rev.2 sector : It is important to mention that while the most representative NACE Rev.2 sector have been used in order to extract for each sub-segment the statistics on both the annual number of active companies and turnover share by company size, these codes are not equal to the ones included in PwC’s Media report’s sub-segments. Estimation of the baseline scenario Based on the steps described in the methodology above (section 1.2.1), the total revenues have been calculated as a sum of the revenues estimation for the four sub-sectors analysed in this study. The paragraph below depicts the total historical and forecasted revenues for media sector. For the purpose of this study, large online platforms have been removed from the baseline. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 4 : Historical and forecasted revenues for Media sector, excluding large platforms, 2021 - 2027 EUR b illion Total revenues of the four sub-segments of the media sector are expected to grow at a 3% CAGR starting in 2021, reaching EUR 119 b i l lio n in 2027. Despite these expectations of future recovery, not all sub-segments are expected to contribute similarly to the upwards trend in revenues. The graph below shows that the growth in the media sector will be driven by the IT and TV advertising sector (excluding large online platforms) which is expected to grow at a 9.7% CAGR in the 2021-2027 period, reaching a value of EUR 37.5 billion in 2027. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 5 : Historical and forecasted revenues for Media sector, excluding large platforms, 2021 - 2027 EUR b i l lio n With regards to the remaining sectors, TV and home advertising are expected to grow at a lower pace (1.8% CAGR in the 2021-2027), whereas newspaper revenues are expected to decline (-2.5% CAGR in the same period). Growth in the radio sector is expected to be positive but not significant (0.4% CAGR in the same period). The table below summarises the expected growth by sector in the 2021-2027 period. CAGR forecast (2021-2027) Radio Newspapers TV and Home video IT and TV advertising EU level 0.4% - 2.5% 1.8% 9.7% With regards to the distribution of revenues, a similar approach was used to extract revenues from SMEs in the 2021-2027 period. Once the estimates up to 2027 for each sub-segment were obtained, a deep dive on the potential distribution of future revenues for both small-medium enterprises (SMEs) and large companies was carried out. In particular, for each year between 2016 and 2019, the turnover share at EU level of SMEs (up to 249 people employed) and large companies (250 or more people employed) were calculated. As per the methodology described above , data related to the most representative NACE Rev.2 sectors was used. . Finally, the average percentages over the 2016-2019 period w ere applied to the data estimated up to 2027 to obtain the share of annual revenues generated by SMEs. The graph below shows that SMEs will drive growth in the IT and TV advertising sector. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 6 : Historical and forecasted revenues for SMEs by sector, 2021 - 2027 EUR b i l lio n In conclusion, the table below shows the breakdown of the (yearly) quantitative estimate of the baseline (excluding large online platforms) by company size in the 2021-2027 period. According to the analysis, SMEs will capture about 40% of the total forecasted revenues. Level of impact Revenues per year (EUR b illion ) SMEs EUR 42.2 b illion Large companies EUR 63.7 b illion All companies EUR 105.9 b illion 1.3 STEP 2: Qualitative assessment of the economic impacts The problem definition identified four specific problems, namely (i) obstacles to cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market, (ii) insufficient EU level regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market , (iii) the interference in free provision of diverse quality media services in the internal market and (iv) the opa que and/or unfair allocation of economic resources in the internal market. As specified in the problem definition , s everal policy options, based on different regulatory approach es , were defined to address the drivers of these problems. In order to understand the potential impacts generated by these policy options, a conceptual map has been developed, with the aim to link the drivers and problems, the elements of the policy options designed to address the problem and their related impacts. The strength of the impacts depends on the effectiveness of the measures included under each policy option to tackle the specific problem. Possible causality and correlation between these elements were informed and tested through the data collection activities carried out in the study. However, in some cases the information and data available presented limitations . Therefore, the strength of the different elements of the proposed causal pathway may vary, especially with regard to the elements of the policy options and the identified direct outcomes. However, the proposed causal pathway is in line with the problem tree presented in the study. Causal chain analysis As specified at the beginning of th is section , causal links and correlations of the proposed policy measures are difficult to identify and impossible to measure in quantitative terms . While data collection activities allowed to collect some evidence, this evidence is not sufficient to generalize the strength and relevance of the different relationships. T he conceptual map below identif ies the impacts of the different policy options and map s their causal pathways with problems and drivers . The impacts are assessed taking into account the evidence collected through the data collection activities (i.e. desk research, interviews and online surveys, workshop etc.). Once the evidence has been collected and systematized, a scoring system to the mix of quali tative and quantitative evidence is applied. The qualitative assessment of the impacts is done taking the baseline scenario as a comparator. The scoring system used for the qualitative assessment is the same proposed in similar studies and is presented in the table below. Score Description of the impact +++ (3) Highly positive ++ (2) Moderate positive + (1) Small positive 0 Uncertain/weak - (-1) Small negative - - (-2) Moderate negative - - - (-3) Highly negative Economic impacts by policy options T his section discuss es the expected economic impacts of policy options. These options are made incrementally by policy option and measure. The impacts depend on the relative effectiveness of the different measures to address the problem drivers, and ultimately, improve the functioning of the media single market. For the assessment of options, it is assum ed that the effects of the measures are additive, i.e. leaving aside trade-offs or possible spill-over effects. Impacts by option are estimated as incremental changes compared to the baseline Policy option 0 – Baseline scenario Quantifying the consequences and extrapolating in time is challenging due to insufficient quantitative data and because the concepts are not captured by specific metrics. Therefore, the baseline scenario relies mostly on qualitative data and quantitative figures that are included for illustrative purposes. The quantitative estimation of the baseline with its methodological considerations, assumptions and limitations is described above . Based on the analysis carried out above, the baseline was quantified as follows. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 7 : Breakdown of the (yearly) quantitative estimate of the baseline by company size (2021-2027), EUR m illion Level of impact Baseline (EUR billion ) SMEs EUR 42.2 b illion Large companies EUR 63.7 b illion All companies EUR 105.9 b illion Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 8 : Breakdown of the (yearly) quantitative estimate of the baseline by sector (2021-2027), EUR m illion Radio Newspaper TV and home video IT and TV advertising 8 591 18 278 51 641 27 462 Evolution of the baseline scenario The baseline scenario entails no policy change and relies solely on the existing or upcoming instruments. The baseline scenario is detailed in section 5.1 of the report (Problem definition) and i ts key impacts v are summarized below , in relation to the key problems identified in section 2 : Obstacles to c ross-border activity and investment in the internal media market The current level of cross-border activities and investments in the internal media market is expected to remain sub-optimal due to complexity and divergence in the procedural requirements and criteria used in the assessment of media market transactions. In addition, as evidenced by the desk research and the case studies, regulatory burdens and obstacles for accessing and operating in the internal media market and protectionist media market decisions create legal uncertainty . . As a result, media companies bear additional administrative costs and legal fees when trying to enter new markets , which prevent them from making the most of the internal market and scal ing up. These obstacles contribute to the relatively low level of cross-border business activity in the media sector within the internal market . In extreme cases, such obstacles may force players out of certain markets. C hallenges linked to sub-optimal cross-border activities are expected to remain and grow over time. Difficulties for media compan ies to invest and operate cross border and cross sector are expected to persist. More than half of business associations and companies responding to the public consultation identified difficulties to the exercise of business activities in the EU media mark et . Among those business associations and companies that identified such difficulties, rules restricting market entry or operation and discriminatory administrative decisions hampering the operation of media outlets were identified among the most prevale nt. Rules restricting market entry or operation were pointed out as an obstacle by 50% of them , while discriminatory administrative decisions were identified by 41% . Insufficient r egulatory cooperation and convergence As this option foresees no change, the governance needed for maintaining the status quo does not foresee an update either . The European Commission will continue overseeing the implementation of the existing legislation and ERGA’s mandate will remain unaffected and will continue to have a very limited impact on further market convergence. ERGA will continue advising and assisting the European Commission in ensuring the implementation of the AVMSD and in any other audiovisual media matters within the Commission’s competence. It will continue facilitating cooperation among NRAs, although without structured cooperation channels. However, its current status as an expert group and the informal character of its cooperation leaves ERGA without powers to take collective action, issue practical guidance in key areas of media regulation or opinions on media law matters other than technical or factual aspects related to jurisdiction. According to the OPC, 86% of all the respondents who expressed an opinion on the issue , including 68% of companies and business associations and 92% of public authorities, consider that the current institutional set-up of ERGA is not sufficient to enable national media regulators to effectively contribute to the proper functioning of the internal media market and safeguarding media pluralism. In addition, in its response to the public consultation, ERGA has stated that “additional cooperation, also in areas not covered by the AVMSD, is required”, referring to online issues, in particular as regards media pluralism . Moreover, as reported by ERGA on the implementation of the MoU, “only half of the request s for cooperation monitored were fully completed to the mutual satisfaction of the requesting and receiving NRAs”. As a result, media regulators are expected not to be able to provide the legal certainty and consistency required by a wide range of actors a ctive in the internal media market and a sufficient level of protection to citizens and businesses in the internal market . Also t he lack of cooperation between media regulators will prevent consistent implementation of media rules for which strictness of enforcement vary widely across Member States. In fact, 40% of all the respondents who expressed an opinion on the matter in the public consultation, including 36% of companies and business associations (from the press, commercial broadcasters and online media) and 71% of public authorities, agreed that there is a lack of legally binding cooperation procedures . Moreover, without effective cooperation the internal media market can easily be abused by ‘rogue’ media playe rs undermining EU democratic values. Such outlets - directly or indirectly controlled by foreign governments – usually operate without any guarantees for editorial independence . This puts EU media players, who comply with EU media standards, at a competi tive disadvantage. Interference in f ree provision of diverse quality media service s in the internal market Under the baseline scenario, European media will increasingly face interference in their editorial decisi ons , both from public authorities and private owners , affecting the functioning of the European media market. With regards to state and commercial interference in media, 85% of all respondents to the public consultation were aware of cases of state inter ference while almost a third were aware of private interference. 43% of respondents to a recent Eurobarometer survey considered media not to be independent from political or commercial pressure in their Member State . The interference will continue hamper ing the free provision of independent media content across borders, affecting also the quality of media services provided across Europe . Such interference is likely to distort competition in the market, making it more difficult for media to compete in an e nvironment where online platforms will continue playing a prominent role as gateways of media content. In addition, as companies’ decisions are influenced by market information and coverage in news media, interference is also expected to mislead business decisions and distort the market in other sectors. Finally, interference leads to lower public trust in media, with adverse knock-on effects on the financial situation of all media operating in the internal market . All these effects are going to create barriers affecting the functionin g of the internal media market, reducing the free provision of independent media content across borders and affecting the quality of media services provided in the internal market. The problem is expected to be exacerbated by the current media market trends, namely the digital (inherently cross-border) services becoming the main gateway for distribution and consumption of news. In this context, the commercial models used by online players are considered to have left much of the traditional media weakened due to heightened competition, and with much less advertising revenues than previously . Thus many media outlets are struggling to find alternative sustainable business models, increasing the risk of political and commercial interference due to their poor financial situation . These challenges are expected to continue under the baseline scenario. Opaque and un fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market Audience measurement is of key importance for the media and advertising ecosystem, being the core tool for understanding the market dynamics, calculating advertising prices, allocating advertising revenue, an d planning the content production in accordance with the preferences of the audiences. However, only 5% of companies and business association respondents to the public consultation regard audience measurement for online platforms to be transparent, objective or performed in an inclusive way. Non-transparent and/or biased proprietary systems of audience measurement are widely considered to distort competition in the advertising markets. Their opacity leads to information asymmetr y, increasing the risk of advertising based on infl ated audience data, and prevents advertisers from taking informed investment decisions . This affects the financial viability of media companies, which rel y heavily on advertising revenues. As a result, the ability of media companies to monetise content, invest in new content and use the internal market to its full potential is reduced . Several business associations interviewed stated that a common audience measurement for online platforms would be beneficial as it would help in creating a level playing field in media markets. In addition, half of media market respondents to the online survey (from the press, commercial TV and radio and public service broadcasting) agreed that improved audience measurement system will facilitate fairer distribution of advertising within the sector. As a result, revenues from advertising are expected to increase to some extent. In the public consultation, 55% of respondent companies identify audience measurement methods as the most important area of action at EU level . Unfairly allocating public funds to pro-government media outlets through state advertising can distort competition and discourage investments by independent media players, including non-national ones. 75% of respondents to the public consultation assessed the level of transparency of state advertising in their Member States as insufficient . Also, many concrete instances of discriminatory allocation of state advertising were reported in the public consultation, call for evidenc e and other targeted consultations . 67% of all the respondents agreed that such practices create distortion in the internal market, including 96% of companies and business associations that expressed their opinion on the matter . The MPM 2021 and 2021 Rule of Law Report underlines that regulatory gaps persist in many Member States, while public authorities continue to direct significant advertising revenue only to certain media outlets. Qualitative assessment of economic impacts of the baseline scenario In addition to the quantification of the economic benefits measured by profits of the media companies’ revenues, there are other relevant impacts. Additional economic impacts are assessed b ased on the evidence reported in the supporting study and summarized in the previous section . A n overview of key impacts of ‘no policy change’ scenario is provided below . Sectoral competitiveness, trade and investment flows. Fragmentation of media regulation and insufficient cooperation between media regulators will continue preventing a consistent implementation of media rules, hinder ing cross-border investment and pluralism in the internal media market . Therefore, in a no policy change scenario the negative impact is most likely to persist . Market viability . Lack of transparency of media ownership, state advertising allocation and audience measurement of online platforms will prevent media outlets and advertisers from taking informed economic decisions , and hinder the right of information for citizens, affecting the level playing field on the internal media market. In a no policy change scenario, the reduced economic viability will persist and will have a moderate negative impact on market plurality . Consumer choice . Consumers will continue experiencing suboptimal media services, to the detriment of their right to receive information . T hat will lower their overall trust in media . F urthermore, lack of actions to ensure a more balanced media coverage (in particular in public service media and online) will not help reducing the current levels of exposure to disinformation online and to unbalanced political coverage, which could ultimately lead to a market failure and a more polarised society . From an economic perspective, reduced consumer choice is expected to have a small negative impact . Indirect Impacts . In the baseline scenario there is neither an introduction of a new set of measures nor a change in governance. In this regard, regulatory complexity is not expected to change significantly , and impacts are not certain. Summary of the impacts The table below summarises the anticipated magnitude or importance of the impacts in a business-as-usual scenario. It should be noted that in the baseline scenario, impacts are not incremental but rather reflect the stock of issues. Economic impacts described above are assessed through the scoring system presented above. Impact Score Sectoral competitiveness, trade and investment flows [ - ] Small negative Market viability [- -] Moderate negative Consumer Choice [ - ] Small negative Indirect impacts (e.g. regulatory complexity) [0] Uncertain/weak Policy option 1 – Recommendation Policy Option 1 envisages a set of voluntary actions and recommendations to Member States and media companies in the areas of media market entry and operations, promoting the availability of diverse quality media content , and fair competition of media market. This section provides a summary of qualitative evidence collected to assess the impact of policy option 1 on the key problems identified in section 2 of the report . This complements the analysis in section 6 on each main type of impact across options. Obstacles to c ross-border activity and investment in the internal media market In Option 1, the recommendation would invite Member States to follow certain standards with regard to national media pluralism measures and media pluralism scrutiny procedures . A recommendation to Member States on national media market scrutiny procedures is expected to help achieving a common understanding across national authorities and reduce the current regulatory fragmentation. If these recommendations are followed by Member States, regulatory convergence at the national level can increase. As a result, predictability of decisions and legal certainty would improve and generate a positive impact for media market players which could benefit from reduced legal costs and facilitated cross-border investment. In this regard, interviews conducted with media associations confirmed that long and costly processes related to mergers and acquisitions are a cause behind sub-optimal cross-border investment. Furthermore, the recommendation to involve media regulators in the examination of media market transactions and to analyse the impact of transaction on media pluralism can potentially enhance media pluralism in Europe. T he majority of media player s replying to the survey - including press, commercial TV and radio and public service broadcasting –consider that policy option 1 would improve the environment for investment. In particular, media outlets highlight that this policy option could be a cataly s er to enhance market conditions in those Member States currently facing risks of state interference in the media market. However, the non-binding nature of the Recommendation does not guarantee a uniform uptake of the relevant measures in this area , which would be necessary to experience the benefits described above. This was also noticed in interviews with NGOs, research institutes and think tanks. All of them highlighted the fact that a non-binding recommendation would have limited effects and only in certain Member States. Therefore, the distribution of the expected benefits is uncertain, and could also result uneven, leading the way to increased fragmentation between Member States. Insufficient r egulatory cooperation and convergence No specific measures on regulatory cooperation and convergence are envisaged in Policy Option 1. As already assessed in the area “Cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market” above, the introduction of a recommendation is expected to promote regulatory convergence among Member States but an uneven uptake can also result in increasing fragmentation. Interference in free provision of quality media service in the internal market The introduction of Policy Option 1 will encourage Member States to safeguard media independence from interference. Media market players will be encouraged to adopt internal independence safeguards (proposing a catalogue of such recommended safeguards) and to foster media self-regulation. Moreover, both Member States and media companies will be encouraged to disclose media ownership information, including business activities or interests of media owners. On one side, these measures are expected to enhance editorial independence in the media sector. Specifically, The set-up of internal safeguards for each company will reduce the probability of incurring complaints. In this sense, when codes of ethics are followed and applied, companies will benefit from cost savings of resolving possible litigations. In addition, self-regulation would generate a series of cost savings when handling complaints. In f act, if these are handled by media council s there are a series of savings in terms of time (e.g. smoother process and less time required to resolve a litigation case), and costs (e.g. reduced complexity to reach a solution). Media outlets would benefit from increased trust , which could translate in increased revenues and market viability . On the other side, the invitation to Member States to protect the integrity of journalists’ communications and sources will most likely strengthen the existing framework and will increase accountability in Member States where there have been pressures against journalists. The protection of journalists’ sources is expected to secure the flow of information from sources to journalists and eventually support the provision of information. In addition, increased transparency on media ownership will increase freedom to write and report independently. In the interviewee’s opinion, the proposed measure will make it easier to identify possible sources of control and influence. If such a recommendation is taken up, it would foster predictability of the market and potentially encourage further investments. However, as assessed above, the non-binding nature of the Recommendation does not guarantee a uniform uptake of the relevant measures in this area. Therefore , the distribution of the above expected benefits remains uncertain. Opaque and un fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market Policy Option 1 is expected to support transparency and fairness in the allocation of economic resources. In particular, the main beneficiaries would be media market players who had not received state advertising so far (especially private media outlets), including media outlets critical to governments where preferential treatment is more acute, strengthening competition and market viability . This is confirmed by the literature review conducted and the survey with media market players. One academic interviewee also stated that improved fairness would reduce media capture by changing the balance of power between pro-governmental media outlets and other media through a redistribution of s tate funding. Citizens would also benefit from improved transparency which could lead to improved trust in media, and increased choice if fairer distribution of state advertising leads to a more diverse media offer. However, the voluntary nature of measures recommended in this area do es not give any guarantees on the potential uptake and the benefits will depend on the uptake of the recommendation by Member States and media market players. Accordingly, also for this area, the non-binding nature of the r ecommendation does not guarantee a uniform uptake of the relevant measures. Therefore, the distribution of the above expected benefits remains uncertain. Qualitative assessment of economic impacts of policy option 1 In addition to the quantification of the economic benefits measured by profits of the media companies’ revenues, there are other relevant impacts. Based on the evidence reported above , an overview of key impacts linked to specific measures included in Policy Option 1 is provided below. Impacts of policy option 1 are assessed against the baseline and are summarised below: Sectoral competitiveness, trade and investment flows . A Recommendation around measures on (i) transparency and fairness of state advertising, (ii) media ownership, (iii) national media market scrutiny procedures, and (iv) restrictions to media market entry and operation, is a first step to facilitate cross-border investment and improve sectoral competitiveness. However, the non-binding nature of the recommendation does not guarantee a uniform uptake of the measures across Member States. Due to this, the impact of policy option 1 on sectoral competitiveness is expected to be uncertain. . Market viability . A Recommendation on (i) transparency and fairness of state advertising would improve allocation of resources and would have a positive impact on market v iability. However, the non-binding nature of the recommendation does not guarantee a uniform uptake of the measures across Member States. To this extent, impact of policy option 1 on market viability is expected to be uncertain. . Consumer choice . Exposure to more pluralistic and quality media services would improve with a recommendation on (i) introduction of internal independence safeguards and self-regulatory mechanisms, and (ii) internal independence safeguards and governance standards. However, the non-binding nature of the recommendation does not guarantee a uniform uptake of the measures across Member States. To this extent, the impact of policy option 1 on consumer choice is expected to be uncertain . Indirect Impacts . The non-binding nature of the recommendation is not likely to increase regulatory complexity. To this extent, indirect impacts linked to complexity are expected to be null. Summary of the impacts The table below summarises the anticipated magnitude of the impacts for policy option 1 compared to a business-as-usual scenario. Economic impacts described above are assessed through the scoring system . Impact Score Sectoral competitiveness, trade and investment flows [0] Uncertain/weak Market viability [0] Uncertain/weak Consumer Choice [0] Uncertain/weak Indirect impacts (e.g. regulatory complexity) [0] Uncertain/weak Policy option 2 – Legislative proposal + Recommendation This option envisages a legislative harmonisation of certain aspects of the national frameworks related to media pluralism and independence, governed by an EU-level framework for structured cooperation between media regulators within the Board. This would be combined with a soft law instrument – a recommendation- which would include a catalogue of actions that could be taken by Member States and media companies to protect their editorial independence. For the new oversight mechanism based on the Board, a body of the Union encompassing and reinforcing ERGA, two alternative approaches are assessed: the Board supported by a Secretariat provided by the Commission, the Board supported by an independent EU Office. In governance option s A and B , the Board would have similar roles. This section provides a summary of qualitative evidence collected to assess the impact of option 2 on the key problems identified in section 2 of the report . This assessment complements the analysis in section 6 of the report on the main types of impact across policy options. Obstacles to c ross-border activity and investment in the internal media market Concerning the introduction of common requirements for media market scrutiny procedures, consultation activities at the EU level suggest that it would have a positive impact on reducing costs linked to regulatory fragmentation and to legal uncertainty. This is confirmed by a significant share of media market players consulted in the online survey (40%). Subsequently, it is expected that increased legal certainty would create a safer space for businesses encouraging innovation and facilitating cross-border operations. However, these benefits are likely to vary across sectors. One of the respondents to the online survey highlighted that a common EU framework for media market entry and operation would have a significant impact on specific sectors – such as radio and digital-only publishing- where the current framework is either unclear (radio), or virtually non-existent (digital), while other sectors of the industry, such as TV and print press, are sufficiently regulated and it is most likely that a common EU framework will have a less significant impact. At the same time, large broadcasters will see more significant impacts as they are more focused on cross-border integration in order to achieve economies of scale in a capital-intensive industry. Another respondent highlighted that the introduction of common approaches on media market scrutiny will ensure coherence between the different national rules and the national decisions related to media market entry. As a result, this would stimulate the cross-border development of European media groups and their access to new audiences and revenues. In addition, the Board ’s opinions on specific cases affecting the proper functioning of the internal media market will have positive effects on competition for media players and is expected to facilitate cross-border activity. As a European body, the Board will enjoy a high level of independence from national governments and authorities as well as private parties. As a result, media players, in particular providers of news content and non-national entities, which are more likely to suffer from political pressure or protectionist measures, will have higher confidence to undertake additional cross border activities and new investments. Insufficient r egulatory cooperation and convergence Policy Option 2 would also set up a framework for regulatory cooperation, convergence, and collective action, by providing the relevant tools, procedures, and powers to national authorities in the Board. This measure will have positive effects on the current work of NRAs, leading to a more efficient and effective cooperation in comparison to the current ERGA. This positive spill - over emerges clearly from almost all the NRAs consulted (18 out of 20) claiming that this framework will benefit cross-border cooperation. According to some of them , a structured cooperation can help saving costs related to handli ng cross-border cases between 10% and 20% of current expenditure. In addition, it should be noted that the majority of NRAs consulted (15 out of 20) confirm that the establishment of structured framework for regulatory convergence and cooperation would be more beneficial (to a moderate or large extent) than the slight reinforcement of Commission’s support envisaged in Policy Option 1. From a market perspective, a common approach to media regulation is expected to reduce obstacl es to operate cross-border. As a result, investors ’ confidence is going to increase and investments level is expected to grow. From the citizens’ perspective, citizens replying to the OPC were in favour of establishing a framework for a structured cooperation between media regulators, suggesting it could lead to an increase of trust and therefore of demand of media content. As a result, growth is likely to be fostered by increased levels of cross-border investments across the EU and by the augmente d demand for media services. In addition, a general mechanism for a structured cooperation between media regulators and a specific mutual assistance mechanism for media freedom or pluralism risks will lead to more even and effective enforcement of the lega l requirements for media players (including online) and, accordingly, increase legal certainty. Similarly, coordination by the Board to protect the EU information space from threats of third country media services will improve the level playing field for media market players by protecting them from entities producing and distributing media content (often disinformation) without observing journalistic standards (‘rogue traders’). Finally, a higher level of regulatory convergence on prominence of content of general interest will improve fair competition in the internal media market and economic viability of media companies. This is confirmed in the OPC, where some media companies or business associations, including public service broadcasters and also digital distributors, highlighted prominence of content of general interest as a concept that would need further guidance in view of fragmented national approaches. Stakeholders consulted underline also that systems which guide viewers to watching certain media services affect significantly viewing figures and, therefore, revenues. This systemic impact is explained by the fact that (based on Auditel data concerning the Italian market) as much as 50% of all TV viewing time is ‘spontaneous’, where end-users are ‘open’ to view media content promoted to them. Also, such regulatory convergence will foster the economies of scale in the internal media market: content distributors (such as cable providers) or providers of user interfaces (such as smart TV manufacturers) will be subject to comparable prominence requirements across the EU. Interference in free provision of diverse quality media service in the internal market Option 2 would combine the legal principle of non-interference in editorial independence or integrity, both from public and private entities, and legal principles for public service media independence, with practical recommendations for media companies on editorial independence safeguards, development of self-regulation, transparency of media ownership as well as monitoring of the uptake of safeguards as part of the EU-level monitoring of risks to media freedom and pluralism. By enshrining the recommendations for media companies in the law (which would spell out a principle of non-interference in media), and backing them with an effective monitoring system, the actual uptake of the internal safeguards (which have shown their effectiveness for companies that already have them) is expected to be greater than in Policy Option 1. Increased adherence to self-regulatory mechanisms and greater media ownership transparency, including on business interests of the owners, will also help deter interference and preserve the quality of content produced and contribute to higher autonomy of editors. Option 2 would, therefore, help develop a media ecosystem which is more resilient to interference and provides for a level playing among all media companies who abide by the same deontological standards. As a result, consumers would benefit from the increase in the choice and trustworthiness of media content, and trust of audiences in media would grow, which, in turn, would generate additional revenue for media companies. This stands out from the OPC, where the majority of recorded responses identified transparency of media ownership and safeguards for editorial independence of media as the most important topic for the safeguard of the EU internal media market, media independence and pluralism . The OPC provides evidence also with specific reference to the promotion of self-regulatory bodies . Furthermore, the protection of journalistic sources would protect journalists against unwarranted surveillance or other forms of pressure and ensure that journalists in different media sectors can communicate with their sources, which is necessary for the production of media content, particularly for investigative reporting or reporting on politically and commercially sensitive matters. While under option 1, the level of protection would depend on the uptake of the recommendation across the EU, option 2 (as well as option 3) would grant a uniform level of protection to journalists across the EU. They would thus contribute to a freer flow of media services in the EU media space. As a result, trustworthiness and diversity of media content would be safeguarded, also for the benefit of consumers. In addition, targeted independence safeguards for PSM (particularly on appointments and dismissals of management) are expected to generate positive benefits in terms of increasing the effective use of public resources. Opaque and un fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market The obligation to provide information about state advertising would improve transparency of state advertising allocation and increase fair competition in the internal media market. On the one hand, this obligation will create an opportunity for national authorities to review and justify their advertising policies an d to demonstrate their fairness. Transparency requirements will increase the information on the allocation of state advertising, while establishing fairness principles will ensure that state advertising does not favour specific media outlets and distort co mpetition and will prevent the influence of state advertising on editorial independence. Compared to Option 1, the introduction of an obligat ory requirement would allow national authorities to better enforce the measure and, according ly, increase the likelihood of achieving its benefits. Literature review and consultation activities confirm that common information requirements on transparency and fair allocation of state resources will reduce market distortion . T his measure is supported by the majority of SMEs responding to the OPC- with a third of them feeling that market fairness will be improved to a large extent. As a result, it is expected that funding will be shared among more players in the market, avoiding the concentration of investments on a limited number of players. The requirements on audience measurement systems will lead to the adoption of minimum standards across all systems for all media in the internal market. The specific requirement for proprietary systems to disclose their methodology upon request will apply, in particular, to online players and will benefit media companies relying on such online systems for audience data, notably broadcasters and the press. This measure will foster fairer competition for advertising revenue between media companies and online players as well as between audience measurement service providers. As advertising revenues are key to the viability of media, the financial benefits for media companies will be significant. In particular, it will help to redistribute value in the online media environment where the majority is captured by vertically integrated online intermediaries (who are active both on the advertising and audience measurement markets) . As confirmed by the literature review , enhanced transparency in audience metrics will improve advertiser companies’ ability to understand market dynamics, foresee advertising prices and provide contents in line with audience’s preferences. This will improve their ability to compare potential investment cases and will reduce asymmetries in the market. Subsequently, a positive effect may occur on revenues for traditional media deriving from advertising and on their ability to monetise contents. More than half of companies responding to the OPC supported the introduction of EU-level principles on transparency, objectivity and inclusiveness of audience measurement. Moreover, several business associations stated also that a common audience measurement for online platforms would be beneficial as it would help in creating a level playing field in media markets. In addition, media market respondents to the online survey agreed that improved audience measurement system will facilitate fairer distribution of advertising within the sector. As a result, revenues from advertising are expected to increase. Governance Policy Option 2 foresees two possible governance structures. Both options envisage the establishment of a body of the Union - Board for Media Services - encompassing and reinforcing ERGA which is supported by: A secretariat provided by the Commission which will provide administrative assistance to the Board ( Option A ) An independent office providing comprehensive support to the Board ( Option B ) Both sub-options would promote higher confidence and trust in the regulatory and advisory work of the Board, enhancing the predictability in the market for the benefit of media companies and regulators. As confirmed in the online survey, the national regulators would also see stronger support to their work thanks to an effective burden sharing and the expected spill-over effect of expertise and experience. Compared to the current governance system of ERGA, this is estimated to be around 20% in annual cost savings for NRAs, namely up to EUR 455,000 . However, Option A is expected to add on top of these potential costs savings, further benefits for NRAs and/or relevant national public authorities in comparison to Option B. The increased relevance of this Option is due to two factors: the Secretariat will assure a smoother coordination across NRAs a nd higher coherence of the measures with other EU interventions, due to easier access to wider expertise in the Commission. the Secretariat can be set up quickly and is expected to support the Board more effectively due to the existing pool of expertise within the Commission, which would result in better quality output of the Board. Qualitative assessment of impacts of policy option 2 In addition to the quantification above of the economic benefits measured by profits of the media companies’ revenues, there are other relevant impacts. Based on the evidence reported above , an overview of key impacts linked to specific measures included in Policy Option 2 is provided below. Impact for Policy Option 2 are detailed by governance type and assessed against the baseline: Sectoral competitiveness, trade and investment flows would be reinforced by procedural requirements for national media market scrutiny and the introduction of obligations on transparency and fairness in allocation of state resources and a general obligation of balanced media coverage for PSM. The introduction of legislative principle s and obligations are expected to generate a moderate positive impact in this area. This would be equally valid both for Option A and Option B, as no significa nt difference would be linked to the governance structure adopted. Market viability would be further improved by obligations on transparency and fairness of state advertising and transparency requirements for audience measurement system. Market viability will be further reinforced by improved trust from the introduction of independence safeguards for public service media and a general obligation of balanced media coverage for PSM. This would be equally valid both for Option A and Option B, as no significative difference would be linked to the governance structure adopted. Consumer choice would increase with exposure to more pluralistic and quality media content, stemming from the measures fostering media independence, pluralism, and free operation in the internal market. Consumer choices will be further reinforced by improved trust from the introduction of recommendations on deployment of internal independence safeguards . This would be equally valid both for Option A and Option B, as no significative difference would be linked to the governance structure adopted. Indirect Impacts would var y according to the governance structure: Option A : Complexity is expected to reduce as a result of a Board supported by a Secretariat provided by the Commission. Option B could increase complexity in terms of time needed to set-up a new office and in terms of challenges for media players and NRAs to deal with a newly created office . Summary of the impacts The table below summarises the anticipated magnitude of the impacts for policy option 2 compared to a business-as-usual scenario. Impact Policy Option 2 A Policy Option 2 B Sectoral competitiveness, trade and investment flows [++] Moderate Positive [+ +] Moderate Positive Market viability [++] Moderate Positive [++] Moderate Positive Consumer choice [++] Moderate Positive [+ +] Moderate Positive Indirect impacts (e.g. regulatory complexity) [+] Small Positive [0] Uncertain/weak Policy option 3 – Enhanced legislative proposal This policy option includes all the legislative elements of Option 2 and additional targeted obligations for media market companies and national media regulator s which are expected to have a significant effect on the overall impacts. This section provides a summary of qualitative evidence collected to assess the impact of policy option 3 on specific problems. This assessment complements the analysis in section 6 of the report on the main types of impact across policy options. Obstacles to c ross-border activity and investment in the internal media market As in Option 2. Insufficient r egulatory cooperation and convergence As in Option 2. Interference in free provision of diverse quality media content in the internal market On top of the legislative elements of option 2, the legal instrument would introduce requirements on balanced media coverage for all audiovisual media, including during elections. Regarding public service media, on top of the obligation of balanced media coverage of option 2, such media would be required to publish regular reports on how this obligation is fulfilled. The legislative instrument would also envisage uniform and detailed obligations for media companies to set up internal independence safeguards and an obligation to adhere to self-regulatory mechanisms. It would also require Member States to ensure availability of (all) media ownership information, including on the interests and activities of media owners in other sectors. This would be coupled with an establishment of a centralised media ownership registry , covering all EU media service providers. The introduction of requirements on balanced media coverage for all audiovisual media companies would further increase benefits described in Policy Option 2, where obligations were limited to PSM. Investments, market efficiency and innovation are expected to be higher as a result of enhanced pluralism. In addition, citizens will be exposed to more diverse and balanced content, and less exposed to biased untrustworthy content and harmful content such as disinformation. This would improve citizen’s access to information and could increase citizen trust in media . The added measure on the obligation on PSM to publish regular reports on the fulfilment of the balanced media coverage obligation will ensure the general principles related to independence and pluralism of the media, improving transparency, and increasing citizen trust in public media. The obligation for all media companies to introduce detailed and uniform internal independence safeguards and adhere to self-regulatory mechanisms is most likely to guarantee that the general principles related to the independence and pluralism of the media is fulfilled by media companies. Hence, it is expected that this additional measure will enhance the benefits and wider positive impacts that were outlined in Option 2 with respect to this specific measure, by further ensuring citizens’ access to pluralistic and quality media content and preventing disinformation and other types of harmful content. This approach would have the advantage of providing full consistency across the internal market. However, micro-enterprises would be exempted, as it would not be proportionate to impose such obligation on them due to their limited size. Additionally, common transparency requirements for all media companies when it comes to the owner’s activities in other media or non-media related sectors would contribute to achieving further consistency in the internal market with positive effects on potential investments. The obligation to establish an EU-wide media ownership registry would provide citizens, media investors and businesses with access to comparative information on media ownership across EU Member States. As argued by one NGO, such a registry would be useful as it ‘would help identify ownership in the EU and possible interconne ct ions’. In addition, as pointed out in the previous subsection with regard to media ownership transparency, an NGO, an academic institution and a think tank interviewed all agreed that access to harmonised information was pivotal to increase citizens’ awareness. Opaque and un fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market In order to further ensure transparent and fair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market, the legislative instrument would stipulate an obligation of external independent audit that would have to be ensured by all audience measurement service providers. Such providers would also be required to notify the methodologies of audience measurement systems to national media regulators. In the area of state advertising , it would require all media companies to submit to national media regulators the information on state advertising received. Moreover, national media regulators would be tasked to establish and maintain a registry on allocation of state advertising With regards to audience measurement system, the additional obligation of an external independent audit and the obligation to notify the methodologies of audience measurement systems to national media regulators would provide additional tools to allow third party verification. This would increase professional level scrutiny, delivering additional insights into the functioning of audience measurement systems and, at the same time, providing a service to those media companies, in particular smaller ones, who do not have the capacity to analyse complex metrics, albeit at a cost to audience measurement providers. In the case of policy actions addressing audience measurement, more than half of EU citizens responding to the OPC (433 out of 774) identified an independent auditing of audience measurement as the most useful EU policy action. In addition, the obligation for national media regulators to establish and maintain a specific registry on allocation of state advertising would maximise the awareness and scrutiny of its distribution. The registry would provide citizen and media businesses with comparative statistics on the allocation of state advertising across EU Member States. The effect would be to generate further public debate and accountability, potentially further increasing the extent of redistribution of state advertising revenues. Maintaining national registries would, however, add costs to the national authorities compared to option 2 . Qualitative assessment of economic and social impacts of policy option 3 In addition to the quantification above of the economic benefits measured by profits of the media companies’ revenues, there are other relevant impacts. Based on the evidence reported in the supporting study and summarized in the previous section, an overview of key impacts linked to specific measures included in Policy Option 3 is provided below. Impact s for Policy Option 3 are assessed against the baseline and are summarised below: Sectoral competitiveness, trade and investment flows . In addition to impacts measured in Option 2, sectoral competitiveness would be further improved due to additional measures on the introduction of an EU-wide media ownership registry. In addition, measures around balanced media coverage for all audiovisual media companies will enhance pluralism. As a result, investments and market efficiency are expected to be higher. To this extent, the impact of option 3 on sectoral competitiveness is expected to be highly positive . Market viability . In addition to impacts linked to measures in Policy Option 2, market viability would be further reinforced by the obligation of external independent audit for all audience measurement providers and notification obligations on the audience measurement methodologies. Finally, the additional obligation for national media regulators to establish and maintain a specific registry on allocation of state advertising would maximize impacts by improving scrutiny and accountability. To this extent, the impact of policy option 3 on market viability is expected to be highly positive . Consumer choice would increase with exposure to more pluralistic and quality media content, stemming from the general obligation for public service media to report on the fulfilment of the balanced media coverage and the obligation for media companies to set up editorial independence safeguards . In terms of economic impacts these are expected to be moderate ly positive, as per Option 2. Indirect Impacts would var y according to the governance structure: Option A would increase complexity due to the introduction of targeted obligations . Increased complexity is expected to have a small negative impact. Option B would increase complexity further as a result of the introduction of hard measures and the creation of the new office. Option B is expected to have a moderate negative impact as complexity will increase both in terms of a change in governance and additional requirements . Summary of the impacts The table below, summarises the anticipated magnitude of the impacts for policy option 3 compared to a business-as-usual scenario. Impact Policy Option 3 A Policy Option 3 B Sectoral competitiveness, trade and investment flows [ ++ + ] Highly Positive [ ++ + ] Highly Positive Market viability [ ++ + ] Highly Positive [ +++] Highly Positive Consumer choice [ ++] Moderate positive [ ++] Moderate positive Indirect impacts (e.g. regulatory complexity) [-] Small Negative [--] Moderate Negative 1.4 STEP 3: Quantitative assessment of the economic impacts As introduced in the overall methodology, q uantifying the economic impacts of the different policy options to enhance media freedom and media pluralism is challenging due to the lack of data , lack of well-established metrics of economic benefits, and due to the multiple dimension s that media pluralism embraces . In addition, the creation of a causal model that could quantitatively link specific problem drivers to specific problems proved to be challenging. For this reason, a deterministic model is developed. T his section present s how the impacts analysed in the previous step are converted from qualitative into quantitative impact s . Evidence collected in Step 2 informed the qualitative assessment of each option against the baseline. A seven level scale was applied, ranging from a highly negative (---) over uncertain/weak (0) to highly positive (+++) , resulting in the following table: Impact Baseline PO 1 PO 2 A PO 2 B PO 3 A PO 3 B Sectoral competitiveness, trade and investment flows - 0 ++ ++ +++ +++ Market viability -- 0 ++ ++ +++ +++ Consumer Choice - 0 ++ ++ ++ ++ Indirect impacts (e.g. regulatory complexity) 0 0 + 0 - -- A preliminary step for the calculation of the impact factors is to translate the qualitative assessment from scores into figure s . This is done based on the scoring table presented in the section on the causal chain analysis . Impact Baseline PO1 PO2A PO2B PO3 A PO3 B Competition -1 0 2 2 3 3 Market viability -2 0 2 2 3 3 Consumer Choice -1 0 2 2 2 2 Indirect impacts (e.g. regulatory complexity) 0 0 1 0 -1 -2 The qualitative assessment is then converted into a quantitative scoring in which each impact score is determined by comparing the qualitative ranking to the baseline scenario. In practice, each quantitative score is determined by comparing how many levels better or worse than the baseline the policy option is from a qualitative perspective. The business-as-usual scenario – recalled in the tables above - represents the starting point to calculate the percentage parameter that will be applied to the baseline revenues to estimate economic impacts for each policy option. The model builds on the hypothesis that a qualitative improvement of a given percentage will translate into an equivalent impact on the baseline scenario. The percentage parameter is calculated as the distance between the baseline and the impact of a specific policy option s. Specifically, for each impact the quantitative percentage parameter is defined as follow s : An equal qualitative score of the specific policy option compared to the baseline would result in a quantitative score of 1 (i.e. no change compared to the baseline impact). A one level lower qualitative score would result in a quantitative score of 0.99; A one level higher qualitative score would result in a quantitative score of 1.01. Finally, an unweighted average impact score is calculated for each policy option, based purely on the average of all individual impact scores. The outcome of Step 3 is summarized in the table below Impact PO1 PO2A PO2B PO3 A PO3 B Sectoral competitiveness, trade and investment flows 1.01 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03 Market viability 1.02 1.04 1.05 1.04 1.05 Consumer Choice 1.01 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03 Indirect impacts (e.g. regulatory complexity) 1 1.01 1 0.99 0.98 Average 1.010 1.028 1.025 1.028 1.025 The table above suggests that Policy Option 1 scores 1% better than the baseline scenario; both Policy Option 2 A and Policy Option 3 A score 2.8% better, and both Policy Option 2 B and Policy Option 3 B 2.5% better . The average percentage parameter for each policy option calculated here will inform the estimation of the net benefits presented in Step 5 ( Estimation of the impacts ) . 1.5 STEP 4: Quantitative assessment of the costs by policy option While quantification remains inherently complex, costs and benefits can be estimated or modelled in order to assess the various policy options in a more nuanced manner. The first section estimates the number of affected companies for each policy option. Given the multidimensional nature of the different policy options, the number of companies affected is presented for each measure. The following section presents the relevant costs envisaged under each policy option by both media market players and national public authorities. Identifying and quantifying affected media market players Each policy option includes a mix of measures affecting a different number of media market players. Therefore, to estimate the costs, the first step requires to assess the number and type of media market players that would be affected by the different policy option s . The baseline number is the total number of media market players in Europe, which is available in Eurostat. Data are presented in the table below. For this assessment, it is assume d that each company operates exclusively in one sector, so that no company is double counted. Moreover, the category “Newspaper” is computed as the average of the media market players registered by Eurostat as active in “Publishing of newspapers” and “News agency activities”. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 9 . Number of companies by country, by sector (unit) Country Number of enterprise s (2019 or latest data available) Newspapers Radio TV Total All of which SMEs All of which SMEs All of which SMEs All of which SMEs Belgium 437 435 205 203 75 74 717 711 Bulgaria 240 239 52 51 142 140 434 430 Czechia 186 185 43 42 100 99 329 326 Denmark 145 144 48 47 66 65 259 257 Germany 1 006 1 001 243 240 142 140 1 391 1 381 Estonia 30 30 10 10 4 4 44 44 Ireland 75 75 0 0 122 121 197 195 Greece 624 621 606 599 201 199 1 431 1 418 Spain 836 832 774 765 538 532 2 148 2 128 France 2 977 2 962 339 335 109 108 3 425 3 404 Croatia 110 109 153 151 49 48 312 309 Italy 779 775 687 679 666 658 2 132 2 112 Cyprus 15 15 34 34 18 18 67 66 Latvia 53 53 44 43 75 74 172 170 Lithuania 110 109 22 22 81 80 213 211 Luxembourg 36 36 6 6 14 14 56 56 Hungary 1 288 1 281 287 284 479 473 2 054 2 038 Malta 13 13 12 12 28 28 53 52 Netherlands 1 335 1 328 278 275 67 66 1 680 1 669 Austria 174 173 29 29 52 51 255 253 Poland 896 891 105 104 266 263 1 267 1 258 Portugal 358 356 295 292 78 77 731 725 Romania 464 462 144 142 227 224 835 828 Slovenia 96 96 158 156 144 142 398 394 Slovakia 59 59 20 20 29 29 108 107 Finland 183 182 50 49 24 24 257 255 Sweden 393 391 57 56 153 151 603 599 Total 12 918 12 851 4 701 4 646 3 949 3 903 21 568 21 400 Source: Eurostat - Annual detailed enterprise statistics for services (NACE Rev. 2 H-N and S95) [SBS_NA_1A_SE_R2__custom_2079104]. Year 2019 or latest data available. If the number of companies in one country was “not available”, the number was considered 0. The table below presents the number of media market players affected by the different policy options and measures. Given the multidimensional nature of the policy options, the number of affected media market players is presented for each measure. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 10 . Number of affected companies, by measure Newspaper Radio TV Total PSM Audience providers PO1 12 918 4 701 3 949 21 568 Familiarisation with the recommendation 12 918 4 701 3 949 21 568 - - Set-up of internal safeguards 453 290 244 987 - - Uptake of the recommendation on transparency on media ownership 2 078 962 783 3 823 - - PO2 12 918 4 701 3 949 21 568 27 27 Familiarisation with the recommendation and related measures 12 918 4 701 3 949 21 568 - - Uptake of recommendation to s et-up internal safeguards 622 399 335 740 - - Uptake of the recommendation on transparency on media ownership 2 857 1 323 1 077 5 257 - - Adaptation to new safeguards /obligations for PSM - - - - 27 - PO3 6 615 4 701 3 949 21 568 27 27 Familiarisation with the new obligations and measures 12 918 4 701 3 949 21 568 - - Set-up of internal safeguards 1 131 726 610 2 467 - - Uptake of the recommendation on transparency on media ownership 12 918 4 701 3 949 21 568 - - Provision of information on state advertising 12 918 4 701 3 949 21 568 - - Obligations on balanced media coverage for audiovisual media - 3 949 3 949 - - External independent audit for traditional audience measurement providers - - - - - 27 Policy Option 1 will affect all media market players in the three sub-sectors identified, namely newspapers, advertising, radio and TV. Under this policy option, all companies will have to familiarise with the new recommendations. Conversely, given the non-binding nature of this policy option, only a share of media market players (40%) is expected to set-up internal safeguards and disclose information on media ownership . Similarly, also for the latter a limited uptake of the measure was considered (40%), but for all the sub-sectors considered and only in the 12 countries that do not have a public registry on media ownership. This is based on the assumption that additional cost s in comparison to the baseline scenario occur only in Member States where media market players are not already asked to provide information on ownership . Policy Option 2 will also require all media market players to familiarise with the new measures. For this Policy Option, a specific legislative framework is envisaged for media market players with regard to the set-up of internal safeguards and the disclosure of information on media ownership. For this reason, a higher uptake compared to Policy Option 1 is assumed. More specifically, it is assumed that 5 0 % of the media market players will be affected by th e s e measure s . With regard to media ownership, only the media market players in the 12 countries that do not have a media ownership registry are considered. In addition, this Policy Option will also affect all public service media, as a result of the introduction of an obligation of balanced media coverage for PSM . In this regard, o ne PSM per country is assumed. Finally, Policy Option 3 is envisaged to have a higher uptake compared to the other two policy measures because it contains a number of obligations. More specifically: All media market players will have to familiarise with the new measures and obligations envisaged. The obligation to set-up internal safeguards is assumed to generate a 100% uptake of stakeholder group targeted by this measure (i.e., all SMEs in the three sub-sectors). The obligation for media market players to collect and report information on media ownership to feed into an EU-registry is also expected to affect all media market players. In particular, media market players operating in countries which already have a national registry in place will have to adjust their procedures because of the new requirements introduced (leading one-off compliance cost s for each media market player in 15 countries). On the other hand, media market players operating in Member States with no national registry are requested to collect and report data on media ownership on a regular basis (leading to new recurrent enforcement cost for media market players in these 12 countries). Policy Option 3 also requires the provision of information on state advertising, which is assumed to affect all media market players included in the fields of newspaper s , radio and TV. All audiovisual companies including public service media will also be affected by the obligation to ensure a balanced media coverage. Quantifying the economic costs by policy option Having estimated the affected companies, costs must also be estimated. This has been done considering the standard cost categories included in #Toolbox 56 of the Better Regulation Guidelines. In particular, two types of costs were considered: direct compliance costs (including administrative and adjustment costs) enforcement costs (including information and monitoring costs) Indirect costs, such as impacts on competition, barriers to market access leading to insufficient levels of investment, can also occur but have been already considered to assess the overall economic impact (see section above). The policy options assessed include a number of measures covering several different areas. As a result, it was decided to calculate the costs for each measure, and sum them up in order to determine the total cost of each policy option. This implies the assumption that no synergies and economies of scale are considered. The sections below provide a detailed overview of costs by measures for each policy option. In addition, costs are presented by stakeholder category (i.e. media market players, SMEs and public authorities). For media market players, costs have been broken down by sub-sector (i.e. newspaper, radio and TV). Finally, an overall summary of costs that will inform the calculation of the net benefit for each policy option is provided in the last section of this chapter. Details on the assumptions and calculations behind the figures presents below are provided in the next section of this Annex. Policy option 1 – Recommendation As described above, this policy option comprises the introduction of a recommendation outlining a set of voluntary actions to be implemented at the national level by Member States and media companies . The measure is entirely non-regulatory, as a result costs could vary significantly depending on the affected media market players (see section above). The table below illustrates the costs associated for each measure included under this policy option. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 11 . Policy Option 1 - Costs overview per measure Policy Option 1 Measure Costs (Financial) Introduction of a set of voluntary actions for Member States on: restrictions to media market entry or operation and national media market scrutiny procedures safeguards for media independence and media ownership transparency and fairness in allocation of state resources Direct compliance costs linked to familiarisation to comply with actions accrued on novel areas introduced by the Recommendations. One-off costs may range between EUR 9.1 million and 13.7 million for all media market players Compliance costs for an estimated share of 40% of media market players implementing the recommendation on transparency on media ownership (this refers only to 12 countries which have no media ownership registry in place). Recurrent costs between EUR 0.3 million and 3. 4 million Compliance costs for an estimated share of 40% of small and medium media market players (from 10 to 249 employees) implementing the recommendation to set-up internal independence safeguards. Recurrent costs between EUR 4.1 million and 8.2 million The table below presents the overall costs estimated for media market players – and related SMEs - and for national public authorities under this policy option. Costs are broken down between direct compliance costs and enforcement costs. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 12 . Policy Option 1 – Cost overview per type of cost, per stakeholder category , all market players including PSM and online platforms Stakeholder category Total costs Direct compliance costs Enforcement costs Media market players One-off costs + annual costs in year 1 between EUR 13.6 million and 25.3 million and recurrent costs between EUR 4.4 million and 11.6 million 0 of which borne by SMEs Between EUR 13.5 million and EUR 25. 1 million initially, and between EUR 4.4 million and 11.5 million Public authorities Approx. EUR 0.96 million per year of which borne by NRAs or other relevant authorities Approx. EUR 0.47 million per year (50% of the total costs) The distribution of the costs experienced by different categories of media market players is illustrated in the table below. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 13 . Policy Option 1 – Cost for media market players broken down by sub-category (newspapers, radio and TV) Sub-sector Estimated cost One-off + annual costs in year 1 Recurrent Newspapers Between EUR 7.9 million and 14.6 million Between EUR 2.2 million and 5.9 million per year Radio Between EUR 3.1 million and 5. 9 million Between EUR 1.2 million and 3 million TV Between EUR 2. 5 million and 4. 8 million Between EUR 1 million and 2.6 million Total Between EUR 13.6 million and 25. 3 million Recurrent costs between EUR 4.4 million and 11. 6 million Policy option 2 – Legislative proposal and recommendation This policy option consists in the introduction of an EU legislative instrument , including a principle-based harmonisation together with a recommendation for media companies and Member States on internal independence safeguards and certain aspects of media ownership transparency. This new framework will include a new Board consisting of the national m edia r egulators (‘the Board’), encompassing and reinforcing ERGA. Overall, it is expect ed that the specific costs of each measure will add on top of familiarisation costs borne by each company to understand the new legislative framework. Such costs are expected to equal, as a minimum, the overall costs needed to familiarise with recommendations envisaged in policy option 1 (i.e. between EUR 13.6 million and 25.3 million one-off + annual costs in year 1 ). With regard to the specific measures of Policy Option 2, they have been grouped based on the area on which they would have an impact. The costs expected for media market players are presented in the following table. Policy Option 2 Area of action: Media market entry and operation Measure Costs (Financial) No additional significant economic costs are expected for media market players Area of action: Regulatory cooperation and convergence framework Measure Costs (Financial) No additional significant economic costs are expected for media market players Area of action: Facilitating free provision of diverse quality media services Measure Costs (Financial) Recommendations for media companies on deployment of internal independence safeguards Compliance costs for an estimated share of 5 0 % of small and medium media market players (from 10 to 249 employees) implementing the recommendation to set-up internal independence safeguards. Recurrent costs between EUR 5.1 million and 10.2 million Recommendations for media companies on deployment of actions related to certain aspects of media ownership transparency Compliance costs for an estimated share of 5 0 % of media market players implementing the recommendation on transparency on media ownership (this refers only to 12 countries which have no media ownership registry in place). Recurrent costs between EUR 0.4 2 million and 4.2 million Area of action: Fair allocation of economic resources in media markets Measure Costs (Financial) Independence safeguards for public service media and a general obligation of balanced media coverage Implementation costs to allow public service media familiarise themselves with the new obligation, understand requirements and adjust internal procedures when needed. These costs are expected to be one-off. One-off cost is expected to reach EUR 357 300. The table below presents the overall costs estimated for media market player s , including SMEs for this specific policy option. In addition, costs for national public authorities under this policy option are added. These include: NRAs’ enforcement of obligations on transparency and fairness in allocation of state resources NRAs’ scrutiny of media market transaction (e.g. issuing opinions and review by the new Board for Media Services) NRA’s monitoring of the implementation of general obligation on balanced media coverage by PSM NRA’s adaptation to new requirements on audience measurement Relevant national authorities’ enforcement of new requirements for audience measurement NRA’s adaptation to tools and procedures of the new regulatory framework The relevant costs for NRAs or other relevant public authorities are highlighted. The remaining costs are intended to be borne by the European Commission Secretariat (Policy Option A) or the EU office (Policy Option B) to support the new governance mechanism. All costs are broken down between direct compliance costs and enforcement costs. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 14 . Policy Option 2 – Cost overview per type of cost, per stakeholder category , all market players including PSM and online platforms Stakeholder category Total costs Direct compliance costs Enforcement costs Media market players One-off costs + annual costs in year 1 between EUR 15 million and 28.5 million and recurrent costs between EUR 5. 6 million and 14.5 million 0 of which borne by SMEs One-off costs + annual costs in year 1 between EUR 14.6 million and 27.9 million , and recurrent costs between EUR 5.5 million and 14.3 million 0 Public authorities (Option A) One-off costs + annual costs for the first year between EUR 2.7 million and 6.9 million and recurrent costs between EUR 2.2 million and 4.8 million One-off costs between EUR 2 million and 3.2 million and recurrent costs between EUR 2 million and 3 .2 million of which borne by NRAs or other relevant authorities One-off costs + annual costs for the first year between EUR 1.6 million and 5.6 million and recurrent costs between EUR 1.1 million and 3.5 million Recurrent costs between EUR 1 million and 2.2 million Public authorities (Option B) One-off costs + annual costs for the first year between EUR 5.3 million and 9.1 million and recurrent costs between EUR 4.7 million and 7 million Recurrent costs between EUR 5.8 million and 7 million of which borne by NRAs or other relevant authorities One-off costs + annual costs for the first year between EUR 1.3 million and 4.6 million and recurrent costs between EUR 0.8 million and 2.5 million Recurrent costs between EUR 0.8 million and 2 million The distribution of the costs experienced by different categories of media market players is illustrated in the table below. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 15 . Policy Option 2 – Cost for media market players broken down by sub-category (newspapers, radio and TV) Sub-sector Estimated cost One-off + annual costs in year 1 Recurrent Newspapers Between EUR 8.5 million and 16.1 million Between EUR 2.8 million and 7.5 million per year Radio Between EUR 3.4 million and 6.6 million Between EUR 1.5 million and 3.8 million TV Between EUR 2.7 million and 5.4 million Between EUR 1.3 million and 3. 3 million Total Between EUR 14.7 million and 28. 1 million Recurrent costs between EUR 5.5 million and 14.4 million Policy option 3 – Enhanced legislative proposal This policy option consists in the introduction of an EU legislative instrument, including all the legislative elements envisaged in option 2, together with targeted additional obligations for media companies . As for policy option 2, measures in policy option 3 have been grouped based on the area on which they would have an impact. The following table shows the detail of each measure by area of intervention. Policy Option 3 Area of action: Media market entry and operation Measure Costs No additional significant economic costs are expected for media market players Area of action: Regulatory cooperation and convergence framework Measure Costs No additional significant economic costs are expected for media market players Area of action: Facilitating the free provision o f diverse quality media services Measure Costs (Financial) Obligation for media companies to set up detailed and uniform internal independence safeguards Compliance costs for small and medium media market players (from 10 to 249 employees) related to the obligation to set-up internal independence safeguards. Recurrent costs between EUR 10. 3 million and 20.5 million Media-specific ownership transparency requirements and an EU-wide media ownership registry Compliance costs for all media market players implementing the transparency requirements on media ownership (this refers only to 12 countries which have no media ownership registry in place). Recurrent costs between EUR 0.8 million and 8.4 million Compliance costs for all media market players implementing the transparency requirements on media ownership (this refers only to 15 countries which have a media ownership registry in place). One-off costs between EUR 3.7 million and 37.3 million Area of action: Transparent and fair allocation of economic resources Measure Costs (Financial) Requirements for audience measurement systems Obligation of external independent audit for all audience measurement service providers and notification obligations on the audience measurement methodologies Cost of external audits for audience providers operating in the joint industry committees (JICs), costs are expected to be around EUR 27 000. Cost of external audits for large online platforms, operating outside the joint industry committees (JICs), costs are expected to range between EUR 55 000 and 545 000. Obligations on transparency and fairness in allocation of state resources Obligation for national media regulators to establish and maintain a registry on allocation of state advertising Media market players will face additional costs to provide information of state advertising received . Recurrent costs are expected to range between EUR 18.2 million and 45.7 million. Independence safeguards for public service media and a general obligation of balanced media coverage Obligation for public service media to report on the fulfilment of the balanced coverage obligation One-off costs for all media market players to adapt to new requirements on balanced media coverage around EUR 182 .2 million Recurrent costs for audiovisual media market players, including public service media, to monitor balanced media coverage each year, including electoral periods, around EUR 87.4 million Additional annual costs for EUR 996 102 per year for PSM reporting on the fulfilment of the balanced media coverage obligation. The table below presents the overall costs estimated for media market player s , including SMEs for this specific policy option. In addition, costs for national public authorities under this policy option are added. These include all the costs related to policy option 2, plus the following elements: NRAs’ cost to inform the EU registry NRAs’ cost to monitor general obligation of balanced media coverage and safeguards for all audiovisual players NRA’s cost to maintain a national registry on state advertisement The relevant costs for NRAs or other relevant public authorities are highlighted. The remaining costs are intended to be borne by the European Commission Secretariat (Policy Sub-o ption A) orhe E U office (Policy Sub-o ption B) to set up the new governance mechanisms and maintain the new EU registry on media ownership. All costs are broken down between direct compliance costs and enforcement costs. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 16 . Policy Option 3 – Cost overview per type of cost, per stakeholder category , all market players including PSM and online platforms Stakeholder category Total costs Direct compliance costs Enforcement costs Media market players One-off costs + annual costs for the first year between EUR 20 7.6 million and 26 4 . 1 million and recurrent costs between EUR 1 2 . 2 and 30.5 million Recurrent costs between EUR 105.7 million and 133 .2 million of which borne by SMEs One-off costs + annual costs between EUR 20 4 . 4 million and 26 0 million , and recurrent costs between EUR 11 million and 28. 7 million Recurrent costs between EUR 10 4 . 9 and 13 2 . 1 million Public authorities (Option A) One-off costs + annual costs for the first year between EUR 3.5 million and 7.6 million and recurrent costs between EUR 2.2 million and 4.8 million Recurrent costs between EUR 4.4 million and 7.2 million of which borne by NRAs or other relevant authorities One-off costs + annual costs for the first year between EUR 2.4 million and 6.3 million and recurrent costs between EUR 1.2 million and 3.5 million Recurrent costs between EUR 3.4 million and 6.2 million Public authorities (Option B) One-off costs + annual costs for the first year between EUR 6 million and 9.9 million and recurrent costs between EUR 4.7 million and 7 million Recurrent costs between EUR 8.3 million and 11 million of which borne by NRAs or other relevant authorities One-off costs + annual costs for the first year between EUR 2 million and 5.3 million and recurrent costs between EUR 0.8 million and 2.5 million Recurrent costs between EUR 3.2 million and 6 million The distribution of the costs experienced by different categories of media market players is illustrated in the table below. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 17 . Policy Option 3 – Cost for media market players broken down by sub-category (newspapers, radio and TV) Sub-sector Estimated cost One-off + annual costs for year 1 Recurrent Newspapers Between EUR 25. 3 million and 76. 5 million Between EUR 17 million and 43.8 million per year Radio Between EUR 9 . 5 million and 2 7.7 million Between EUR 6.8 million and 17 million TV Between EUR 2 77 . 1 million and 2 91 . 1 million Between EUR 92.9 million and 101.2 million Total Between EUR 311 .9 million and 395.3 million Recurrent costs between EUR 116.8 million and 162 million Summary of the overall and unitary costs In light of the analysis of the costs presented above, this section presents a summary of: Overall costs per each option, and the related average which is used in the calculation for the net benefit (step 5 below ). This is provided both for all media market players , SMEs and public authorities. Unitary costs per each option, namely the average (one-off or recurrent) cost which is expected to be borne by one company affected by the policy options. This is provided both for all media market players and for SMEs . Unitary costs per national authority per each option, namely the average cost which is expected to be borne by one NRA and/or relevant authority to implement the option s at the national level T he following three tables reflect the overall costs per policy option explained in detail above. For each option, the average one-off costs and recurrent costs for media market players , SMEs and public authorities are computed. The one-off costs represent the costs to be borne in year 1 of implementation of each policy option, summing up the costs to start implementing each measure (one-off cost per each measure) and the recurrent cost of the first year. R ecurrent costs reflect the costs to be borne each year after year 1 (i.e. Y1+n). These costs are related to all sectors analysed , i.e. newspapers, radio and TV , as well as public service media, large platforms and audience measurement providers . Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 18 . Overall costs for all media market players, including PSM and online platforms , by policy option (Unit: EUR million) One-off costs One-off + year 1 annual costs Recurrent LB UB Average LB UB Average Policy Option 1 13.6 25.3 19.4 4.4 11.6 8 Policy Option 2 15.1 28.5 21.8 5. 5 14.5 10 Policy Option 3 313 . 4 397.3 355.3 117.9 163.7 140.8 Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 19 . Overall costs for media market players – SMEs only ( newspapers, radio and TV ) , by policy option (Unit: EUR million) One-off costs One-off + year 1 annual costs Recurrent LB UB Average LB UB Average Policy Option 1 13.5 25.1 19.3 4.4 11.5 7.9 Policy Option 2 14.6 28 .3 21.4 5.5 14.3 9.9 Policy Option 3 3 09. 6 392 .4 35 1 115. 9 160.7 138.3 Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 20 . Overall costs for public authorities, by policy option (Unit: EUR million) One-off costs One-off + year 1 annual costs Recurrent LB UB Average LB UB Average Policy Option 1 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 Policy Option 2A 4.8 10.1 7.4 4.2 8 6 .1 Policy Option 2B 11.1 16. 2 13.7 10.6 14 12.3 Policy Option 3A 7.9 14.8 11.4 6.7 1 1.9 9.3 Policy Option 3B 14.3 20.9 17.6 13 18.1 15.5 T he following tables show the unitary costs which is expected to be borne on average by each affected enterprise in the media market sector. Similarly, the same unitary costs are provided for SMEs only. The type and number of stakeholders affected by each policy option can be retrieved from Table 9 above. These costs are related to the three key sectors only : newspapers, radio and TV. Therefore, costs borne by public service media, large platforms and audience measurement providers are not included in the calculation. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 21 . Unitary cost per media market player ( newspapers, radio and TV ) , by policy option and type of costs (Unit: EUR) PO One-off costs + year 1 annual costs Recurrent costs Compliance (L) Compliance (U) Enforcement (L) Enforcement (U) Compliance (L) Compliance (U) Enforcement (L) Enforcement (U) PO1 630 1 172 0 0 206 536 0 0 PO2 681 1 3 06 0 0 257 670 0 0 PO3 9 559 12 155 4 903 6 175 515 1 341 4 903 6 175 Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 22 . Unitary cost per SMEs ( newspapers, radio and TV ) , by policy option and type of costs (Unit: EUR) PO One-off costs + year 1 annual costs Recurrent costs Compliance (L) Compliance (U) Enforcement (L) Enforcement (U) Compliance (L) Compliance (U) Enforcement (L) Enforcement (U) PO1 629 1 171 0 0 206 536 0 0 PO2 681 1 3 05 0 0 257 670 0 0 PO3 9 553 12 147 4 900 6 171 514 1 340 4 900 6 171 Finally, the unitary cost s for each NRA and/or relevant national authority affected by the policy options are estimated . Assuming one authority per country, the following table shows th e s e cost s . Only the total costs borne by national authorities are shown, excluding the governance costs borne by the Commission secretariat and the EU office in policy options 1 and 2 as well as the costs for maintenance of an EU registry in policy option 3. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 23 . Unitary cost per NRA and/or relevant national authority, by policy option and type of costs (Unit: EUR) PO One-off costs + year 1 annual costs Recurrent costs Compliance (L) Compliance (U) Enforcement (L) Enforcement (U) Compliance (L) Compliance (U) Enforcement (L) Enforcement (U) PO1 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 531 17 531 PO2A 19 111 78 333 0 0 43 115 128 022 38 859 82 748 PO2B 19 111 78 333 0 0 30 796 91 444 32 593 76 481 PO3A 46 889 106 111 0 0 43 115 128 022 125 883 228 419 PO3B 46 889 106 111 0 0 30 796 91 444 119 616 222 152 1.6 STEP 5: Estimation of net benefits T his section presents how the percentage change previously calculated was used to quantify impacts. It should be noted that the quantitative estimates proposed in this section should be considered with caution. T he lack of data availability and the multidimensional nature of the proposed intervention makes it difficult to determine the direction and strength of causal links. Despite that, the proposed approach allows to draw conclusions on the possible impact of the different policy options assessed in this impact assessment . The deterministic approach proposed builds on the qualitative evidence collected and turned into quantitative estimates. The quantification of the economic impact builds on the key assumption that a qualitative improvement of a given percentage (e.g., 1%, 2.8%, 2.5%) will translate into an equivalent impact on the baseline scenario. The table below calculates a policy option benefit per year, and then deducts the costs of the policy option in order to determine the net benefit. Thus, using policy option 1 as an example, this model estimates the anticipated quantitative impact of the option by taking the baseline scenario as a starting point ( EUR 105 972 million), and using the calculated impact score of th at option (1.01) as a multiplication factor. As a result, a modelled annual profit of EUR 107 032 million is calculated ( EUR 105 972 million x 1.01). By reducing the modelled benefits by the estimated one-off and annual costs for year 1 ( EUR 19.4 million for media market players and EUR 0.96 million for public authorities) and the recurrent costs ( EUR 8 million for media market players and EUR 0.96 for public authorities) for subsequent years , it is possible to identify the net benefits both for the first year ( EUR 1039.2 million) and the following years ( EUR 1050.8 million). The overview of the modelled revenues, costs and net benefits for the three policy options is provided in the table below. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 24 . Modelled benefit for each policy option. Unit: EUR m illion Unit: EUR m illion Baseline PO1 PO2A PO2B PO 3A PO 3B Baseline forecast 105 972 105 972 105 972 105 972 105 972 105 972 Impact score 1.00 1.010 1.028 1.025 1.028 1.025 Modelled revenues 105 972 107 032 108 887 108 622 108 887 108 622 PO benefit per year 1 060 2 914 2 649 2 914 2 649 PO cost – companies ( year 1 annual cost + one off) 19.4 21.8 21.8 355.3 355.3 PO cost per year – companies (recurrent) 8.0 10.0 10.0 140.8 140.8 PO cost - Public Authorities ( year 1 annual cost + one off) 0.96 7.44 13.66 11.38 17.60 PO cost - Public Authorities (recurrent) 0.96 6 .12 12.35 9.31 15.54 Net PO benefit year 1 1 039.3 2 885 2 613.9 2 547.6 2 276.4 Net PO benefit year 1+n (recurrent) 1 050.8 2 89 8 .1 2 627.0 2 7 64 . 1 2 493 As shown in the table above, all policy options are expected to have a beneficial net impact compared to the baseline. Moreover, benefits are higher for Policy Options 2 and 3 compared to Policy Option 1, which is reasonable given that these two policy options build upon the first. Net benefits are however different between Policy Option s 2 and 3, which is again reasonable given the fact that the latter envisages higher costs. Based on available data and given the limitations of the estimates presented in the previous section, the outcome represents a reasonable approximation of the anticipated economic impacts of each policy option. The evidence collected also allows to estimate the effects on SMEs only, using the same methodology. As specified in section 1.2, the baseline scenario for SMEs only can be calculated at EUR 42 258 million. Revising the costs to ensure that these reflect the specificities of SMEs (detailed estimates and calculations have been reported in the previous sections), and applying the impact factor calculated above, SMEs are affected by each policy as follows. Table SEQ Table \* ARABIC 25 . Modelled benefit for each policy option. Unit: EUR m illion – SMEs only Unit: EUR m illion Baseline PO1 PO2A PO2B PO 3A PO 3B Baseline forecast 42 258 42 258 42 258 42 258 42 258 42 258 Impact score 1.00 1.01 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03 Modelled revenues 42 258 42 681 43 420 43 314 43 420 43 314 PO benefit per year 423 1 162 1 056 1 162 1 056 PO cost – companies (year 1 annual cost + (one off) 1 9 . 3 2 1 2 1 351 351 PO cost per year – companies (recurrent) 7.9 9.9 9.9 1 38 1 38 PO cost - Public Authorities ( year 1 annual cost + one off) 1.0 7.4 13.7 11.4 17.6 PO cost - Public Authorities (recurrent) 1.0 6 .1 12.3 9.3 15.5 Net PO benefit year 1 4 02 1 133 1 02 2 800 688 Net PO benefit year 1+n (recurrent) 413.7 1 14 6 . 1 1 034. 2 1 0 14 . 5 9 02 . 6 Comparing the table above to the table for all media market players, the estimates show that around 40% of the benefits of all three policy options would accrue to SMEs, and the remaining 60% to large companies. Based on the estimated SMEs affected, the net benefit per SME would range from around EUR 421.6 m illion (policy option 1) to around EUR 1 147 m illion (policy option 2A) to EUR 1 026.6 m illion (policy option 3A). Distribution of impacts With regards to the distribution of economic impacts, measures envisaged within each policy option are expected to affect public authorities and media market players to a different extent. This section summarises how impacts reported above are distributed , in each area. Media pluralism measures and media market scrutiny Under Policy Option 1 , t he non-binding nature of the Recommendations does not guarantee a uniform distribution of the expected benefits and could even lead to further divergence between Member States . It is expected that a ll media companies in the newspaper, radio and TV sectors could potentially benefit from an increase investor confidence and investments, improved independence from interference, and increased protection of journalists. However, only media companies operating in Member States which decide to adopt the recommendation will be affecte d. The same reasoning applies to costs . With regards to Option 2 and 3 , the introduction of an EU-level scrutiny on media market transactions would help to streamline the different ways in which this scrutiny is conducted across Member States. In particular, the EU-level scrutiny would be beneficial for the 15 Member States where the lack or weakness of measures on media market scrutiny put a high risk for market plurality (see section 2.2.1). All NRAs or other relevant authorities in all Member States will bear relevant costs to implement and monitor the introduction of new rules and recommendations envisaged in these two policy options. Regarding media market players, all companies in the newspaper, radio and TV sectors will benefit from greater legal certainty and fairer competition in the internal media market , reducing compliance costs and facilitating cross-border investment. In addition, measures in this area will particularly benefit some categories of media market players, specifically: (i) providers of news media content and non-national entities especially in countries which are reported to have more protectionist measures (ii) companies active in the r adio sector or digital-only publishers can benefit from a clearer legal framework on market entry, (iii) l arge broadcasters, who have traditionally been regulated in more detail, will benefit because they are more prone to cross-border integration in order to achieve economies of scale in a capital-intensive industry. Framework for regulatory cooperation and convergence With regard to policy options 2 and 3 , the introduction of a new mechanism for structured cooperation will positively affect the work of NRAs in all Member States in comparison to the current work undertaken in ERGA. At the same time, each NRA will have to bear costs to familiarise and comply with the new framework. Moreover , some categories of media market players in the audiovisual sector will also be affected, namely broadcasters and providers of audiovisual news content and non-national entities, which can leverage on a reduced regulatory fragmentation to expand their operations in other Member States. Quality of media services In Option 1 , all Member States will be recommended to safeguard media and journalists ’ independence from interference. However, the uptake at the national level remains uncertain, given the non-binding nature of the o ption. Similarly, a ll media companies in the newspaper, radio and TV sectors could potentially benefit from a greater independence from interference , which could foster predictability of the market and potentially encourage further investments . However, the uptake of measures related to safeguard editorial independence remains uncertain. It is expected that a ll media companies in the newspaper, radio and TV sectors will bear the costs to familiarise with the recommendation , but that the uptake of some recommendations will be limited. It is expected that less than half of companies in the newspaper, radio and t elevision sectors will set-up internal safeguards (which is referred to small and medium companies only) and measures for media ownership transparency. It should be noted that costs to disclose information on media ownership will be borne by media companies active in those 12 countries which are reported not to have a national media ownership registry. Option 2 will affect all EU Member States as in o ption 1. It should be noted that the introduction of legal principles to protect editorial independence can be particularly relevant for those 21 Member States which are currently considered (by the MPM) at high or medium risk of political, or commercial, influence over editorial choices (see section 2.2.3). More specifically the introduction of safeguards for public service media is relevant for those 16 Member States which are reported to be at high or medium risk for the independence of PSM governance and funding (see section 2.2.3). The combination of legal principle s with practical recommendations for media companies is expected to be more effective in increase editors’ freedom to make decisions without public or private interference, expanding the plurality of voices or opinions expressed and issues analysed in all media market players. It is expected that a ll media companies in the newspaper, radio and TV sectors will bear the costs to familiarise with the recommendation , and that the uptake of specific recommendations will increase in comparison to Option 1. On top of the impacts of policy option 2, policy option 3 would introduce further obligation s and rules which would affect all EU Member States as well as all media market players in the newspaper, radio and TV sectors. This measure is expected to have a lower impact on media market players operating in the 15 EU Member States which already have a national registry on media ownership in place. On the contrary, higher impacts can be expected for countries that will have to comply with the requirements of a new EU registry. Transparency and fairness in allocation of economic resources In Option 1 , NRAs and/or relevant national authorities in all Member States will be recommended to monitor audience measurement mechanisms and allocation of state advertising. As for the other areas, the uptake at national level should be considered uncertain, given the non-binding nature of the Option. Depending on this uptake, measures in this area can potentially affect all media companies in the newspaper, radio and TV sector. In Option 2 , the requirements of transparency, impartiality, inclusiveness and verifiability of audience measurement systems would have a higher impact on the 20 Member States which are reported (by the MPM) to lack in rules on the distribution and transparency of state advertising (see section 2.2.4). All media market players in the newspaper, radio and TV sectors could benefit from measures in this option. More effectively than in policy option 1, a binding obligation on transparency of state advertisement would mainly benefit those news media providers of Member States where the distribution of state advertisement resources is unfair. Such news media providers can increase their revenue from state advertisement and , therefore, improve the viability of the sector . This would be of utmost importance for the Member States which are reported to lack in rules and guidelines to fair and transparent allocation of state advertising amongst news media . Option 3 would further enhance the benefit envisaged in Option 2, adding further costs for NRAs in all Member States and media market players in the newspaper, radio and TV sector (mainly because a national registry on state advertisement will be mandatory). In addition, audience measurement providers and large online platforms would have to face additional costs, related to the obligation to undertake independent audit s on audience measurement. Governance With regard to Policy Option 1, benefits are expected for NRAs in all Member States as they would benefit from a more efficient cooperation within ERGA thanks to an increased support from the European Commission. However, this benefit is expected to be limited in monetary terms . With regard to policy option 2 and 3, the introduction of the Board for Media Services will allow all NRAs to benefit from a more efficient cooperation in comparison to the current ERGA , to a higher extent than in policy option 1 . Both in the case of sub-option A and sub-Option B, each NRA can save between 10% and 20% of the current annual expenditure related to coordination work in ERGA . 2. NOTES ON CALCULATION The section below presents a detailed description of the data underpinning the calculations, and an explanation on the methods and assumptions that were used to calculate the costs for relevant stakeholders (i.e. public authorities and media market players). Additional costs C are assessed by multiplying a price variable P (e.g. average labour cost) to a quantity variable Q (e.g. number of additional FTE) and frequency (N) linked to each measure. C (cost) = Q (quantity ) X P (price) In the costs benefit analysis presented in the Report, the support study used the average labour cost in each country outlined in the following table. Table 26 . Average labour cost used in the Study, by country (EUR) Country Average hourly cost Average daily cost Average annual cost Belgium 40.8 408 102 000 Bulgaria 8 80 20 000 Czechia 16.2 162 40 500 Denmark 44.2 442 110 500 Germany 37.1 371 92 750 Estonia 14.7 147 36 750 Ireland 38.8 388 97 000 Greece 16.1 161 40 25 Spain 24.4 244 61 000 France 36.5 365 91 250 Croatia 12 120 30 000 Italy 32.6 326 81 500 Cyprus 30 300 75 000 Latvia 10.8 108 27 000 Lithuania 11.4 114 28 500 Luxembourg 45.1 451 112 750 Hungary 9 90 22 500 Malta 22.9 229 57 250 Netherlands 42.4 424 106 000 Austria 36.4 364 91 000 Poland 13 130 32 500 Portugal 19.7 197 49 250 Romania 10.1 101 25 250 Slovenia 22.1 221 55 250 Slovakia 14.6 146 36 500 Finland 32.5 325 81 250 Sweden 35.3 353 250 Detailed calculations, key assumptions and sources for each measure are reported in the sections below. 2.1 Public Authorities Policy Option 1 Recurrent a djustment costs for European Commission related to the new governance system It is estimated that the annual labour costs for the European Commission will amount at 3 additional full-time equivalents (FTE) working in DG CONNECT. This adjustment cost consists of EUR 390 000 per year , calculated as: C (Annual adjustment costs) = Q (Number of annual FTE) X P (annual cost per FTE -incl. overheads) Key assumptions and sources : EUR 130 000 a nnual cost per FTE (including overheads) for the EC annual average – Estimation based on the Impact Assessment support study for the Digital Markets Act . Recurrent e nforcement costs for the establishment of a monitoring mechanism at European level The establishment of a monitoring mechanism generates an enforcement recurrent cost of EUR 500 000 every 5 years. This estimation was provided by the European Commission (DG CONNECT) in an interview. Therefore, it is assumed these costs will be distributed evenly each year. This generates an annual cost of EUR 100 000 . Recurrent enforcement cost to monitor the implementation of the recommendation at national level The introduction of a monitoring mechanism managed by the Commission will generate direct enforcement costs to NRAs related to (i) monitoring and (ii) reporting activities in all EU Member States. Th e s e annual costs is expected to be around EUR 473 000 . This estimate is based on the sum of the annual cost per country and further assumptions. Firstly, for each country, the following calculation was conducted: Cx (enforcement annual cost in country x) = Q (man-days needed every year to monitor and report to the European Commission) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) Key assumptions and sources : Q is assumed to be 70 man-days per year. To calculate this number, we started from the average man-days required in the Impact Assessment for the AVMS Directive for one national regulator in one month to monitor and report to the European Commission, i.e. around 9 man-days. Given that the recommendation envisaged in Policy Option 1 is expected to bring a lower effort than the measures envisaged in the AVMS Directive, we assume this number of man-days to be reduced by one-third, resulting in 6 man-days per country each month. P is the average daily labour cost reported in Table 26. Policy Option 2 Average labour costs Recurrent enforcement costs related to obligations for transparency and fairness of state advertising to media At EU level, this average annual cost is expected to range between EUR 415 000 and 1.6 million . The range is calculated as the sum of the annual cost expected in 25 countries (EU-27 excluding Germany and Romania). For each country this cost is computed as follows: Cx (adjustment annual cost in country x) = Q (man-days needed every year to monitor the implementation of general obligation on state advertising) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) Key assumptions and sources : One NRA in the survey estimated this cost to be around 66 man/days. The study took this estimate as a lower bound for Q in all countries . Two NRAs in the survey estimated this cost to be around 1 annual FTE (i.e. 250 man/days ). The study took this estimate as an upper bound for Q in all the five countries . Germany and Romania were not included in this estimation as the German and Romanian NRAs claimed in the survey that no cost is envisaged in the two countries in relation to this measure. P is the average daily labour cost reported in table 2 6 . Administrative costs related to media market scrutiny procedures This is expected to be an average annual cost ranging at the EU level between between EUR 63 000 and 138 000. This range is calculated as the sum of the annual cost expected in 26 countries (EU-27 excluding Romania). However, the costs borne by NRAs are lower both in Option A and Option B as they are expected to be divided among NRAs and the EC secretariat in Option 2A or NRAs and the EU office in Option 2B, according to the following shares: % borne by NRAs % absorbed by Secretariat % absorbed by EU office POA 70% 30% - POB 50% - 50% Accordingly , NRAs will spend between EUR 44 100 and 96 600 each year to implement this measure under option 2A, or between EUR 31 500 and 69 000 to implement this measure in option 2B. For each country this cost is computed as follows : Cx (administrative annual cost in country x) = Q (man-days needed every year to review one procedure related to market scrutiny) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) X N (number of procedures to be revised each year) X S (share of costs borne by NRA) Key assumptions and sources : One NRA in the survey estimated this cost to be around 10 man/days. The study took this estimate as a lower bound for Q in all countries . One NRAs in the survey estimated this cost to be around 22 man/days. The study took this estimate as an upper bound for Q in all countries . N equals to 1 procedure per year . Romania is not included in this estimation as Romanian NRAs claimed in the survey that no cost is envisaged in the country in relation to this measure. Two NRAs estimated 1 additional annual FTE as the additional effort needed for this measure. However, these estimates were discarded since it was assumed that the effort required from NRAs does not require additional permanent staff. P is the average daily labour cost reported in table 2 6 . S equals 0,7 in Option 2 A or 0,5 in Option 2 B . One-off adjustment costs for public authorities related to the introduction of s afeguards for public s ervice m edia. This is expected to be a one-off cost ranging at the EU level between EUR 447 000 and 1.7 million . This range is calculated as the sum of the cost expected in 27 countries. For each country this cost is computed as follows: Cx (adjustment cost in country x) = Q (man-days needed to familiarise with new general obligation on public service media) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) Key assumptions and sources : One NRA in the survey estimated this cost to be around 66 man/days. The study took this estimate as a lower bound for Q in all countries . Two NRAs in the survey estimated this cost to be around 1 annual FTE (i.e. 250 man/days ). The study took this estimate as an upper bound for Q in all countries . P is the average daily labour cost reported in table 2 6 . Recurrent enforcement costs for public authorities related to the introduction of safeguards for Public Service Media These annual costs are expected to amount at EUR 42 000 each year for all EU Member States. This range is calculated as the sum of the annual cost expected in 27 countries. For each country this cost is computed as follows: Cx (enforcement annual cost in country x) = Q (man-days needed to monitor public service media) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) X N (number of public service media to be monitored) Key assumptions and sources : Q is estimated to equal the average time spent for one regulator to monitor one regulated company as estimated in the Impact Assessment for the AVMS Directive . N is assumed to be 1 per country . P is the average daily labour cost reported in table 2 6 . One-off adjustment costs for public authorities related to r equirements for audience measurement systems. This is expected to be a one-off cost ranging at the EU level between EUR 69 000 and 415 000 . This range is calculated as the sum of the cost s expected in 25 countries (EU-27 excluding Germany and Romania). For each country this cost is computed as follows: Cx (adjustment cost in country x) = Q (man-days needed to familiarise with new general obligation on audience measurement) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) Key assumptions and sources : One NRA in the survey estimated this cost to be around 11 man-days. The study took this estimate as a lower bound for Q in all countries . The upper bound for Q is assumed to be around 66 man-days. Three NRAs in the survey claimed that it would require from 1 to 2 FTE annual additional effort. However, this measure is not expected to bring such high adjustment cost given that it is more likely that the implementation of new obligation on audience measurement will require highly specialised staff working for a limited amount of time. Therefore, these results were considered outliers. Germany and Romania were not included in this estimation as the German and Romanian NRAs claimed in the survey that no cost is envisaged in the two countries in relation to this measure. P is the average daily labour cost reported in table 2 6 . Enforcement of new requirements for audience measurement systems This is expected to be an average annual cost of around EUR 0.85 million . However, the costs borne by relevant national authorities are lower both in Option A and Option B as they are expected to be divided among national authorities in charge of enforcement and the EC secretariat in Option 2A or national authorities in charge of enforcement and the EU office in Option 2B, according to the following shares: % borne by national authorities % absorbed by Secretariat % absorbed by EU office POA 70% 30% - POB 50% - 50% Accordingly relevant national authorities will spend around EUR 0.59 million to implement this measure under option 2A, or EUR 0.42 million to implement this measure in option 2B. For each country this cost is computed as follows : Cx (enforcement annual cost in country x) = Q (additional FTE needed to work on the preparation and exchange of common guidelines on audience measurement) X P (average annual labour cost in country x) X S (share of costs borne by NRAs) Key assumptions and sources : Q is assumed to be 0 . 5. This is taken from the Impact Assessment support study for the Digital Markets Act which estimates in 0 . 5 FTE the effort needed for one public authority to draft and update guidelines . P is the average daily labour cost reported in table 2 6 . S equals 0 . 7 in Option 2 A or 0 . 5 in Option 2 B . Regulatory cooperation and convergence in media markets. Administrative costs linked to monitor and implementation of the measure. This is expected to be an average annual cost ranging at the EU level between between EUR 1.6 million and 4.8 million . This range is calculated as the sum of the annual cost expected in 26 countries (EU-27 excluding Germany). However, the costs borne by NRAs are lower both in Option A and Option B as they are expected to be divided among NRAs and the EC secretariat in Option 2A or NRAs and the EU office in Option 2B, according to the following shares: % borne by NRAs % absorbed by Secretariat % absorbed by EU office POA 70% 30% - POB 50% - 50% Accordingly , NRAs will spend between EUR 1.2 million and 3.4 million each year to implement this measure under option 2A, or between EUR 0.8 million and 2.4 million to implement this measure in option 2B. For each country this cost is computed as follows : Cx (administrative annual cost in country x) = Q (additional FTE needed to work on (i) the preparation and definition of common guidelines, (ii) monitoring of risks related to very large platforms, and (iii) the implementation of collective actions) X P (average annual labour cost in country x) X S (share of costs borne by NRAs) Key assumptions and sources : One NRA in the survey estimated this cost to be around 1 annual FTE. The study took this estimate as a lower bound for Q in all countries . One NRA in the survey estimated this cost to be around 3 annual FTE. The study took this estimate as an upper bound for Q in all countries . Germany is not included in this estimation as the German NRA claimed in the survey that no cost is envisaged in the country in relation to this measure. P is the average daily labour cost reported in table 2 6 . S equals 0,7 in Option 2 A or 0,5 in Option 2 B . Governance sub-option A: adjustment and enforcement costs It is estimated that the annual labour costs for the European Commission will amount at 8 to 10 additional full-time employees (FTE) working in the new Secretariat of the Board for Media Services (CONNECT.I.1). This adjustment cost ranges between EUR 1 million and 1.3 million per year , calculated as: C (Annual adjustment costs) = Q (Number of annual FTE) X P (annual cost per FTE -incl. overheads) Key assumptions and sources : EUR 130 000 is the annual cost per FTE (including overheads) for the EC annual average – Estimation based on the Impact Assessment support study for the Digital Markets Act Furthermore, sub-option A will bring a recurrent enforcement cost for the EC secretariat in the form of operating budget, which is estimated to be around EUR 1 million per year. This is based on current operating costs for the European Commission support to ERGA. This cost was collected through interviews with the European Commission. Governance sub-option B: adjustment and enforcement costs It is estimated that the annual labour costs for the new EU Office will amount at 25 to 30 additional full-time employees (FTE). This adjustment cost ranges between EUR 3.9 million and 4.5 million per year , calculated as: C (Annual adjustment costs) = Q (Number of annual FTE) x P (annual cost per FTE -incl. overheads)) Key assumptions and sources : EU office annual FTE cost equals the annual cost per FTE (including overheads) for the EC (i.e. EUR 130 000) – Estimation based on the Impact Assessment support study for the Digital Markets Act . Furthermore, sub-option B will bring a recurrent enforcement cost for the EU office in the form of operating budget, which is estimated to be around EUR 5 million per year. This is based on current operating costs for other similar EU supporting agencies, such as BEREC. This cost was collected through interviews with the European Commission. Annual cost savings due to enhanced collaboration in ERGA A nnual cost savings are expected for NRAs from the introduction of a Commission Secretariat (Option A) or an EU office (Option B) to support the work of the new Board for Media services These savings are computed on the baseline costs borne by NRAs to cooperate in the current ERGA. They are expected to range between EUR 227 000 and 455 000 . This estimation is calculated as the sum of the annual cost savings expected in 2 7 countries , which in each country is computed as follows : Y% Cx (annual cost saving in country x) where Cx = Q (man-days needed every year to coordinate with other NRAs within ERGA) X P (average daily labour cost in x ) Key assumptions and sources: One NRA in the survey estimated Q to be around 180 man-days. The study took this estimate as a lower bound for Q in all countries . One NRA in the survey estimated Q to be around 1 . 5 annual FTE (i.e. 375 man-days). The study took this estimate as an upper bound for Q in all countries. One NRA in the survey estimated Y to be around 20% . Two NRAs in the survey estimated Y t o be around 10% . The study assumed Y to range between 10% and 20% . P is the average daily labour cost reported in table 2 6 . Policy Option 3 Recurrent e nforcement costs to inform the EU registry on media ownership The creation of an EU registry on media ownership would add a recurrent enforcement cost for all Member States, asked to collect and provide information to the registry. The overall recurrent costs are estimated to be between EUR 446 622 and 2 million . For each country, these costs are calculated as follows: Cx (annual enforcement cost in country x) = Q (man-days needed every year to keep the registry updated) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) Key assumptions and sources : One NRA in the survey estimated this cost to be around 66 man/days. The study took this estimate as a lower bound for Q in all countries . Another NRA in the survey estimated this cost to be around 300 man/days. The study took this estimate as an upper bound for Q in all countries . P is the average daily labour cost reported in table 2 6 . Recurrent enforcement cost to manage an EU registry of media ownership The recurrent enforcement cost related to the management of the portal is assumed to be similar to the cost estimated for running the MAVISE database. In the Impact Assessment for the AVMS Directive this cost amounts at EUR 50 000 per year . Recurrent enforcement costs for public authorities related to s afeguards for all audiovisual companies on balanced media coverage. These annual costs are expected to amount at EUR 203 000 each year for all EU Member States. This range is calculated as the sum of the annual cost expected in 27 countries. For each country this cost is computed as follows: Cx (enforcement annual cost in country x) = Q (man-days needed to monitor a representative sample of audiovisual companies through one survey) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) Key assumptions and sources : Q is estimated to be around 30 days per year . P is the average daily labour cost reported in table 2 6 . Recurrent e nforcement costs related to maintain a national registry on state advertisement This is expected to be an average annual cost at the EU level up to EUR 1.7 million . This range is calculated as the sum of the annual cost s expected in 27 countries and should be considered on top of the costs already calculated for the measures on state advertising under option 2. For each country this cost is computed as follows: Cx ( enforcement annual cost in country x) = Q (man-days needed every year to collect data into a registry on state advertising) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) Key assumptions and sources : One NRA in the survey estimated Q to be around 1 annual FTE. The study took this estimate as a reliable estimate for Q in all countries . P is the average daily labour cost computed as in table 2 6 . 2.2 Media Market Players Policy Option 1– Recommendation One-off cost of compliance with the new Recommendation Cost= Q (number of man-days required to familiarise with the new Recommendation) x P (average daily labour cost ) x N (number of companies in the market) Total cost envisaged for Policy option 1 ( EUR 9.1 million – 13.7 million ) is detailed by company type and is summarised in the table below: Table 27 . Range of estimated costs for media market players related to the Recommendation (by sector, EUR million) Sector 2 man-days 3 man-days Newspapers 5.8 8.7 Radio 1.9 2.9 TV 1.5 2.2 TOTAL 9.1 13.7 Key assumptions and sources : The number of man-days required to familiarise with the new Recommendations was estimated by respondent to the online survey. Given the non-binding nature of the policy options, the lower range of 2 and 3 man-days was considered. Specifically, four data points were collected and are summarised below. Table 28 . Number of man-days required to familiarise with the new Recommendation Country of respondents Company size Estimated man-days Poland Large 2 Spain Large 3 Romania Small 7 Greece Medium 20 Data for the total number of enterprises operating in the sector is collected from Eurostat (SBS_SC_SCA_R2) and reported below. The source of the average daily labour cost by country is Eurostat . The average national average daily cost of labour refers to the sector “Education; human health and social work activities; arts, entertainment and recreation; other service activities” as reported in t able 2 6 above. Recurrent adjustment costs for the set-up of internal safeguards M edia market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will be recommended to adopt internal safeguards in Policy Option 1 and in Policy Option 2. This recommendation will take the form of an obligation in Policy Option 3. In order to estimate the costs envisaged in each option three scenarios for the uptake of this measure are assumed : In Policy Option 1, only a recommendation will be in place and therefore a low uptake between 20% and 6 0% of small and medium media market players is assumed. In Policy Option 2, the recommendation will be part of a more comprehensive legislative framework and thus a medium uptake between 30% and 7 0% is assumed. In Policy Option 3, the obligation to set up internal safeguards would favour a 100% uptake of this measure by small and medium media companies. Accordingly, in Policy Option 1 the overall costs for small and medium media market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will range between EUR 4.1 million and 8.2 million. This results from the overall average costs between the two levels of uptake assumed for this Policy Option (i.e. 20% to 6 0%), as reported in the following table: Level of uptake Lower bound ( EUR million) Upper bound ( EUR million) 20% 2 4.1 60% 6.2 12.3 Average 4.1 8.2 For each country the cost is estimated as follows: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to set up internal safeguards, e.g. internal working groups on ethics) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) X N (number of small and medium media companies by country in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors) Key assumptions and sources : Based on consultant’s experience in setting up, run and manage internal working groups it is expected that Q would range between 20 and 40 additional man-days. P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . N is taken from Eurostat - Annual detailed enterprise statistics for services (NACE Rev. 2 H-N and S95) [SBS_NA_1A_SE_R2__custom_2079104] , as reported in t able 9 above . Recurrent adjustment costs to ensure transparency of media ownership All media market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will be recommended to ensure transparency on media ownership in Policy Option 1 and in Policy Option 2. This recommendation will take the form of an obligation in Policy Option 3. This measure affects media market players in 12 countries, i.e. Austria, Belgium, Croatia, Czech Republic, Cyprus, Denmark, Finland, Luxembourg, Malta, Slovakia, Slovenia, Sweden . These countries do not have a media ownership registry in place. Therefore, this will require media market players in these countries to face additional recurrent costs in comparison to the baseline scenario, due to the need to collect and publish information on media ownership. However, given the different nature of the policy options, in order to estimate the costs envisaged in each option three scenarios for the uptake of this measure are assumed : In Policy Option 1, only a recommendation will be in place and therefore a low uptake between 20% and 6 0% of all media market players is assumed. In Policy Option 2, the recommendation will be part of a more comprehensive legislative framework and thus a medium uptake between 30% and 7 0% is assumed. In Policy Option 3, the obligation to ensure transparency of media ownership would favour a 100% uptake of this measure . Accordingly, in Policy Option 1 the overall costs for media market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will range between EUR 335 000 and 3.4 million. This results from the overall average costs between the two levels of uptake assumed for this Policy Option (i.e. 20% to 6 0%), as reported in the following table: Level of uptake Lower bound ( EUR million) Upper bound ( EUR million) 20% 0.2 1.7 60% 0.5 5 Average 0.335 3.4 For each country the cost is estimated as follows: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to collect and report information on media ownership) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) X N (number of media companies by country in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors) Key assumptions and sources : Q is assumed to range between 1 and 10 man-days. Evidence from the online survey show s that for 28% of businesses it takes between one and 4 days per year to provide ownership information. Furthermore 12% of the respondents to the questionnaires reported that current effort to report on ownership ranges between 5 and more than 10 days. Hence, a range of 1 to 10 additional man-days is assumed to be a reliable one. P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . N taken from Eurostat - Annual detailed enterprise statistics for services (NACE Rev. 2 H-N and S95) [SBS_NA_1A_SE_R2__custom_2079104] , as reported in table 9 above . Policy Option 2 Recurrent adjustment costs for the set-up of internal safeguards M edia market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will be recommended to adopt internal safeguards in Policy Option 1 and in Policy Option 2. This recommendation will take the form of an obligation in Policy Option 3. In order to estimate the costs envisaged in each option we assume three scenarios for the uptake of this measure: In Policy Option 1, only a recommendation will be in place and therefore a low uptake between 20% and 6 0% of small and medium media market players is assumed. In Policy Option 2, the recommendation will be part of a more comprehensive legislative framework and thus a medium uptake between 30% and 7 0% is assumed. In Policy Option 3, the obligation to set up internal safeguards would favour a 100% uptake of this measure by small and medium media companies . Accordingly, in Policy Option 2 the overall costs for small and medium media market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will range between EUR 5.1 million and 10.2 million. This results from the overall average costs between the two levels of uptake assumed for this Policy Option (i.e. 30% to 70%), as reported in the following table: Level of uptake Lower bound ( EUR million) Upper bound ( EUR million) 30% 3 6.2 70% 7.2 14.4 Average 5.1 10.2 For each country the cost is estimated as follows: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to set up internal safeguards, e.g. internal working groups on ethics) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) X N (number of small and medium media companies by country in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors) Key assumptions and sources : Based on consultant’s experience in setting up, run and manage internal working groups it is expected that Q would range between 20 and 40 additional man-days. P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . N taken from Eurostat - Annual detailed enterprise statistics for services (NACE Rev. 2 H-N and S95) [SBS_NA_1A_SE_R2__custom_2079104] , as reported in table 9 above . Recurrent adjustment costs to ensure transparency of media ownership All media market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will be recommended to ensure transparency on media ownership in Policy Option 1 and in Policy Option 2. This recommendation will take the form of an obligation in Policy Option 3. This measure affects media market players in 12 countries, i.e. Austria, Belgium, Croatia, Czech Republic, Cyprus, Denmark, Finland, Luxembourg, Malta, Slovakia, Slovenia, Sweden . These countries do not have a media ownership registry in place. Therefore, this will require media market players in these countries to face additional recurrent costs in comparison to the baseline scenario, due to the need to collect and publish information on media ownership. However, given the different nature of the policy options, in order to estimate the costs envisaged in each option we assume three scenarios for the uptake of this measure: In Policy Option 1, only a recommendation will be in place and therefore a low uptake between 20% and 6 0% of all media market players is assumed. In Policy Option 2, the recommendation will be part of a more comprehensive legislative framework and thus a medium uptake between 30% and 7 0% is assumed. In Policy Option 3, the obligation to ensure transparency of media ownership would favour a 100% uptake of this measure . Accordingly, in Policy Option 2 the overall costs for media market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will range between EUR 419 000 and 4.2 million. This results from the overall average costs between the two levels of uptake assumed for this Policy Option (i.e. 30% to 70%), as reported in the following table: Level of uptake Lower bound ( EUR million) Upper bound ( EUR million) 30% 0.3 2.5 70% 0.6 5.9 Average 0.42 4.2 For each country the cost is estimated as follows: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to collect and report information on media ownership) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) X N (number of media companies by country in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors) Key assumptions and sources : Q is assumed to range between 1 and 10 man-days. Evidence from the online survey show s that for 28% of businesses it takes between one and 4 days per year to provide ownership information. Furthermore 12% of the respondents to the questionnaires reported that current effort to report on ownership ranges between 5 and more than 10 days. Hence, a range of 1 to 10 additional man-days is assumed to be a reliable one. P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . N taken from Eurostat - Annual detailed enterprise statistics for services (NACE Rev. 2 H-N and S95) [SBS_NA_1A_SE_R2__custom_2079104] , as reported in table 9 above. Year 2019 or latest data available. Familiarization costs for safeguards for public service media The total cost linked the introduction of general safeguards related to the governance of public service media (PSM) is a one-off cost to allow PSM to familiarise with the new obligation, understand requirements and adjust internal procedures when needed. For each country this cost can be estimated as follows: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to familiarise with the new requirements) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) X N (number of PSM by country) The total cost envisaged for this measure is estimated to be EUR 0.3 million. Key assumptions and sources : Based on evidence collected from the online survey for public authorities for the same measure, it is assumed that 66 additional man-days are required for PSM to comply with the new requirements envisaged for this measure. It is acknowledged that PSM are characterized by a variety of regional and local entities which might result in disproportionate impacts. Given the complexity of a local and regional level disaggregation, at this stage, impacts are assessed for one PSM per Member State. P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . Policy Option 3 Recurrent adjustment costs for the set-up of internal safeguards M edia market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will be recommended to adopt internal safeguards in Policy Option 1 and in Policy Option 2. This recommendation will take the form of an obligation in Policy Option 3. In order to estimate the costs envisaged in each option we assume three scenarios for the uptake of this measure: In Policy Option 1, only a recommendation will be in place and therefore a low uptake between 20% and 6 0% of small and medium media market players is assumed. In Policy Option 2, the recommendation will be part of a more comprehensive legislative framework and thus we assume a medium uptake between 30% and 7 0% is assumed. In Policy Option 3, the obligation to set up internal safeguards would favour a 100% uptake of this measure by small and medium media companies . Accordingly, in Policy Option 3 the overall costs for small and medium media market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will range between EUR 10.3 million and 20.5 million. For each country the cost is estimated as follows: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to set up internal safeguards, e.g. internal working groups on ethics) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) X N (number of small and medium media companies by country in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors) Key assumptions and sources : Based on consultant’s experience in setting up, run and manage internal working groups it is expected that Q would range between 20 and 40 additional man-days. P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . N taken from Eurostat - Annual detailed enterprise statistics for services (NACE Rev. 2 H-N and S95) [SBS_NA_1A_SE_R2__custom_2079104] , as reported in table 9 above . Recurrent adjustment costs to ensure transparency of media ownership All media market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will be recommended to ensure transparency on media ownership in Policy Option 1 and in Policy Option 2. This recommendation will take the form of an obligation in Policy Option 3. This measure affects media market players in 12 countries, i.e. Austria, Belgium, Croatia, Czech Republic, Cyprus, Denmark, Finland, Luxembourg, Malta, Slovakia, Slovenia, Sweden . These countries do not have a media ownership registry in place. Therefore, this will require media market players in these countries to face additional recurrent costs in comparison to the baseline scenario, due to the need to collect and publish information on media ownership. However, given the different nature of the policy options, in order to estimate the costs envisaged in each option we assume three scenarios for the uptake of this measure: In Policy Option 1, only a recommendation will be in place and therefore a low uptake between 20% and 6 0% of all media market players is assumed. In Policy Option 2, the recommendation will be part of a more comprehensive legislative framework and thus we assume a medium uptake between 30% and 7 0% . In Policy Option 3, the obligation to ensure transparency of media ownership would favour a 100% uptake of this measure . Accordingly, in Policy Option 3 the overall costs for media market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors will range between EUR 838 500 and 8.4 million. This results from the overall average costs between the two levels of uptake assumed for this Policy Option (i.e. 100%). For each country the cost is estimated as follows: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to collect and report information on media ownership) X P (average daily labour cost in country x) X N (number of media companies by country in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors) Key assumptions and sources : Q is assumed to range between 1 and 10 man-days. Evidence from the online survey show s that for 28% of businesses it takes between one and 4 days per year to provide ownership information. Furthermore 12% of the respondents to the questionnaires reported that current effort to report on ownership ranges between 5 and more than 10 days. Hence, a range of 1 to 10 additional man-days is assumed to be a reliable one. P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . N is taken from Eurostat - Annual detailed enterprise statistics for services (NACE Rev. 2 H-N and S95) [SBS_NA_1A_SE_R2__custom_2079104] , as reported in table 9 above . One-off compliance costs to update national ownership registry. The introduction of common information requirements would imply an additional adjustment cost across European countries which already provide media ownership information. This would affect media market players operating in countries which have already a media ownership registry in place, i.e. Belgium (French speaking Region), Bulgaria, Estonia, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Italy, Ireland, Latvia, Lithuania, Portugal, Poland, Romania and Spain . These costs are expected to be one-off as they include additional costs to update the quality and typology of information for media market players which are already providing input to a national ownership registry. The total one-off cost can be estimated as follows: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to update quality and typology of information to be included in the national registry) X P (average daily labour cost ) X N (number of companies by countries) The total one-off cost envisaged for this measure ( EUR 3.7 million – 37.3 million ) is detailed by company type and is summarised in the table below: Key assumptions and sources : Q ranges between 1 and 10 man-days. Number of additional man-days are assumed to be the same as the one used in the calculation of recurrent compliance costs to inform a national ownership registry. P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . N is taken from Eurostat - Annual detailed enterprise statistics for services (NACE Rev. 2 H-N and S95) [SBS_NA_1A_SE_R2__custom_2079104] , as reported in table 9 above . One-off compliance costs to familiarize with new obligations on balanced media coverage for audiovisual media The total one-off costs to adjust to the new obligation on media coverage is estimated around EUR 182 .2 million for audiovisual companies. For each country, this estimation is based on the following calculation: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to adjust to the new requirements) X P (average daily labour cost) X N (number of companies in the tv sector) Key assumptions and sources : Q is assumed to be around 1 annual FTE (i.e. 250 man / days ) . Th i s is based on the assumption that if PSM , who already have a public service remit, need 66 days to adjust to the new obligations on balanced media coverage , as described in option 2, private TV companies would need to make a considerably higher effort to comply with the se requirements . Commercial channels would not only incur costs in familiarising themselves with new regulatory obligations but also in developing new compliance strategies that would entail additional costs on activities such as training news teams and adapting formats as well as production and editing processes. P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . N is taken from Eurostat - Annual detailed enterprise statistics for services (NACE Rev. 2 H-N and S95) [SBS_NA_1A_SE_R2__custom_2079104] , as reported in table 9 above . Recurrent enforcement costs related to the monitoring of balanced media coverage The total recurrent costs to monitor that a balanced media coverage is ensured would be around EUR 87.4 million . This cost is estimated for the TV sector only as it is assumed that TV companies would be the most affected on a yearly basis, especially during electoral periods. For each country, this estimation is based on the following calculation: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to monitor balanced media coverage) X P (average daily labour cost) X N (number of companies in the tv sector) Key assumptions and sources : Q is assumed to be around 1 2 0 man-days. This is an estimate of the overall number of additional days which, on average, one TV would have to dedicate each year to comply with regulatory requirements on balanced media coverage ( including for elections at the national, regional and local level and including ongoing training needs ) . P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . N is taken from Eurostat - Annual detailed enterprise statistics for services (NACE Rev. 2 H-N and S95) [SBS_NA_1A_SE_R2__custom_2079104] as reported in table 9 above . Recurrent enforcement costs related to the submission of information on state advertising to national regulators The additional cost linked to the introduction for all media companies to submit information to national regulator on state advertising is a recurrent (i.e. annual basis) cost for media market players. Total cost envisaged is estimated to range between EUR 18.3 million and 45.7 million per year . For each country costs can be estimated as follows: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to provide information on state advertising) X P (average daily labour cost) X N (number of media market players in the newspaper, radio and tv sectors) Key assumptions and sources : Q is estimated to range between 4 and 10. Based on evidence collected through the online survey, it currently takes one day for 47% of the respondents to obtain information on allocation of state advertising. For 26% of the respondents, the number of days required to obtain this information increase to 1-4 followed by 19% of respondents for which number of days needed range between 5-10. Assuming the upper bound is considered to provide information on state advertising, media market players will need between 4 and 10 man-days per year to comply with obligations envisaged in this measure. P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . N is taken from Eurostat - Annual detailed enterprise statistics for services (NACE Rev. 2 H-N and S95) [SBS_NA_1A_SE_R2__custom_2079104] , as reported in table 9 above . Compliance costs related to the introduction of obligation on PSM to publish reports on balanced media coverage In addition to familiarisation costs analysed under option 2, the recurrent (i.e. annual basis) compliance cost to publish reports on balanced media coverage for PSM is estimated to be around EUR 1 million . The total cost in each country can be estimated as follows: Cost in country x = Q (number of man-days required to publish regular report on ) X P (average daily labour cost) X N (number of PSM in country x) Key assumptions and sources : Q is estimated to be around 184 man-days. This is based on evidence collected from the online survey for public authorities for the same measure and it is assumed to be the same for PSM to comply with the new requirements envisage in this measure. P equals the average daily labour costs reported in table 2 6 . N is assumed to be 1 per country. It is acknowledged that PSM are characterized by a variety of regional and local entities which might result in disproportionate impacts. Therefore, given the complexity of a local and regional level disaggregation, at this stage, impacts are assessed for one PSM per Member States. Recurrent compliance costs related to the introduction of external independent audit for audience measurement service providers These costs are expected to be marginal, around EUR 27 000 per year, for traditional audience measurement providers which are part of the joint industry committees (JICs). According to market estimates , the cost of one audit in the media sector for small companies can be around EUR 1 000 per audit. T his reliable estimate was used to calculate the overall cost assuming one audience measurement provider per country undertaking one audience each year. In addition, costs for auditing large media platforms were considered separately. According to the impact assessment study developed for the DSA proposal , costs of external audits for large online platforms, operating outside the joint industry committees (JICs), are expected to range between EUR 55 000 and 545 000. Additional calculation notes Estimated savings in legal costs related to cross-border investments C alculations below are based on the following assumptions : There is an average of 108 cross-border investments per year ; Commission monitoring of the media market indicates that a third of these is complex, meaning that they need three legal procedures consisting of a national regulator plus two administrative court instances ; The regulatory convergence under Options 2 and 3 is estimated to simplify legal proceedings by removing the need for the two administrative court instances. This is equivalent to a reduction in legal costs by two thirds. Savings are equal to the number of FTEs multiplied by the number of investment operations multiplied where: 1 man-day of a lawyer is worth EUR 3.200 ( EUR 400/1 hour) Assuming that for a cross-border operation each party needs 1 month work (20 man-days) of 4 lawyers: 80 man-days x 3.200= 256.000 Assuming you need this for 3 procedures (national regulator+2 administrative court instances): 768.000 Euro in legal costs x 2 parties = 1.536.000 euro per average operation There have been 867 operations over 8 years, hence average of 108 per year Assuming that currently a third of the cases is complex and rounding down there are such costs in 30 operations per year Assuming that in the future costs could be contained to the procedure in front of the national regulator, representing a reduction in costs of 2/3; 256.000 x 2 parties = 512.000 per new average operation 1.536.000-512.000 = 1.024.000 saving per operation 30 x 1.024.000 = 30.720.000 total estimated savings. Cross-border integration of large broadcasters Stakeholder consultations (potential integration plan of MediaForEurope, April 2022) indicate that cost savings can be estimated at 5-15% of the companies’ baseline costs. In addition, wider business opportunities can be estimated to be at least as much as these initial savings. Financial statements of EU broadcasters show that the total annual costs of three broadcasters averages 7.5 billion EUR, whilst the baseline applicable costs (total costs minus costs that are out of scope of the integration e.g. radio if it is not symmetric in other countries) are in the range of 4 billion EUR. Out of these, around 80% are addressable costs (baseline costs minus costs that cannot be challenged in the medium term because they are locked in e.g. multi-annual contracts for deals with US majors, some tech/infrastructure costs). Therefore, the expected direct benefits would be around EUR 160-360 million and, including wider opportunities, EUR 320-720 million. Annex 5 : market description This annex provides supplementary data and evidence about the size and nature of the media marke t, as regards demand and supply, as well as societal factors such as trustworthiness. Size M edia is an important sector for the EU’s economy and competitiveness. The added value of the core media industries including news media (printed and online press, radio and audiovisual media services), the audiovisual sector (cinema, television, video streaming and video games) and advertising, together with other related sectors, can be estimated at EUR 282 billion (2.3% of the total EU added value), providing jobs to 4.2 million Europeans . Singling out news media from the rest of media sector would give a distorted picture, as there is an ogoing media convergence, especially in the digital sphere. Media companies feature different combinations of news and entertainment content. Additionally, in the last decade user-generated content competes for consumer attention as well. Global online platforms are important players in the EU media landscape, aggregating and distributing media content, including news , and sometimes also creating content . Therefore, while the concerns about news media and information are at the heart of the European Media Freedom Act (EMFA), the media market should be seen in a larger perspective . Media as a public good with positive externalities It is widely recognised that news media is a public good, i.e. good that everybody benefits from, its consumption is non-rivalrous and it is difficult to exclude anyone from it . Media, in particular news media, also have important positive externalities, as they play a crucial role in our democratic societies. News media shape public opinion and help citizens form views, make informed democratic choices and contributes to a vibrant civic sphere. Lately the Covid-19 pandemic and then Russia’s military aggression against Ukraine underlined the importance of media in empowering citizens with trustworthy information . News media and journalists are a structural pillar of the rule of law, representing the “fourth estate” holding power to account . Media also play a pivotal role in building social consciousness and cohesion by fostering a sense of belonging and social dialogue . Moreover, trustworthy information provided by independent media results in the creation of knowledge across the entire society , including individuals, companies and organisations. Therefore, independent news, in particular investigative journalism could be seen as having a similar value in the society as universities and research institutions . Against this background, t here are widespread concerns about the viability of traditional media. Declining or stagnating revenues coupled with rising costs of purchasing entertainment content due to the intensifying global competition, put them under pressure . This situation jeopardizes the production of quality news content as it is costly, entailing research and facts-checking activities. It may result in a systematic underproduction of investigative, qualitative journalism. Last but not least, the high fixed costs of journalism and the difficulties on the advertising markets have generally made new entry in the news media market difficult. Changing demand TV remains the most widespread form of media, with 95% of Europeans watching broadcasted content at least once a week and 82% every day . However, the last decade has seen a ste a dy migration of consumers towards online activity. Internet use increased from 79 % of Europeans in 2011 to 90 % in 2021 , including 78 % of Europeans using some form of social media networks. The digital consumption of audiovisual content, images and music is one of the main drivers of Internet use (and hence the digital transition) for people. Over 70% of people in the EU use the Internet to consume such content , compared to only about 15% using it to find a job or to do an online course. In particular, television remains one of the main sources of information on European political matters for 76% of Europeans, being followed more and more closely by the Internet, with 57% of Europeans learning about European political affairs from websites in 2021 . The longer time spent online comes at the cost of the intensity of consumption of other media, including even TV. In particular everyday readership of the written press dropped to 25 % of Europeans and one in four Europeans in 2021 did not read either written press at all , compared to only one in eight in 2010 , whereas it i s one of the main source s of information on European affairs for 33% . For example, w hen Europeans actively look for information about the EU, they do the search most preferably online (55% of all those who want to know more), with considerably high shares (26%) of those who go for this purpose to non-professional sources. Table 1 . The sources of online information for Europeans searching for information on the EU (multiple choices possible) Source Share of respondents Newspapers, magazines etc. online 33% Institutional and official websites 28% Online social networks 16% Video-sharing sites 6% Blogs 4% Source: Eurobarometer 94, p. 55. The explosion of digital content has had a profound impact on consumer behaviour. Streaming services, social media and user generated content have contributed to making more content available than ever before . In this context , professional news media organisations have to compete for this consumer attention. Meanwhile , only a minority of European consumers pay for online news content, led by the Nordic markets with an average of 28% . Thus the transition to online consumption for legacy media players often means retaining audiences but still losing revenues. The trust in traditional media has been rising, with radio being the most trusted medium (58%) , with slightly over half (51%) Europeans tending to trust TV and written press. B y comparison, only 19% of Europeans are confident about the veracity of the information found on social media and 35% about what they found on internet websites. As regards consumer choice, 7 in 10 Europeans consider that the media in their country provide them with a diversity of views and opinions and over half of Europeans thinks that their national media – including public service media – are subject to p olitical or commercial pressure . Supply-side overview Revenues trends In Europe, media revenues have been traditionally sourced from public funding (26% of the audiovisual sector revenues in 2017 ), advertising (40% respectively) and sales (34%) . However the digital revolution has been increasingly disrupting the media market and revenue flows. Public funding remains relatively stable. Sales revenues of SVOD increased in the last years and those of the press decreased significantly. Advertising revenue is increasingly captured by online platforms through their advertising arms and news aggregators : advertising revenues decreased by 10% in 2016-2021 for television and radio, and by 20% for newspapers . A watershed moment was in 2016 when online advertising overtook advertising on TV and the written press. The Covid-19 crisis has accelerated this trend. As a result, the written press is shrinking, broadcasting is resilient (including the strong position of public service broadcasters), while growth is driven by SVOD services, dominated by US players. Figure 1 . EU-27 advertising revenues, by media type, 2016-2021 [EUR billion] Source: Preliminary results of the study VIGIE 2021-0646 “The competitiveness and economic viability of the news media sector in the EU”, PPMI & partners for DG CNECT Figure 2 . Share of total EU-27 advertising spend by type, 2000 vs 2021. Source: Preliminary results of the study VIGIE 2021-0646 “The competitiveness and economic viability of the news media sector in the EU”, PPMI & partners for DG CNECT Overall, the audiovisual sector generated about EUR 82 b illion revenues in 2020, a slight increase compared to 2016 (1.9%) However the table below shows that the revenue growth is primarily driven by video on demand which grew by 39.1% from 2016 to 2020. Conversely, revenues generated through traditional TV and radio advertising present decreasing trends (-2.5% and -2.7% yearly respectively between 2016 and 2021) . Table 2 . Variation of revenues between 2016 and 2020 among the audiovisual services (public and private) in the EU28 in EUR million. 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2020/2019 2020/2016 Share AV services Public funding 20 955 21 040 21 165 21 418 21 559 0.7% 0.7% 30.1% Advertising tv 22 718 22 922 23 232 22 802 20 504 -10.1% -2.5% 24.9% Advertising radio 4 188 4 274 . 8 4 377 . 6 4 397.2 3 755 . 7 -14.6% -2.7% 4.6% Pay-tv revenues 25 949 26 832 27 329 27 332 27 265 -0.2% 1.2% 33.2% On-demand pay revenues 2 516 3 391 4 687 6 619 9 146 38.2% 39.1% 11.1% Total 76 326 78 461 80 790 82 568 82 230 -0.4% 1.9% 100% Source: E laboration for the purpose of Impact Assessment based on EAO Yearbook 2021 In the written press revenues decreased as between 2016-2020 newspaper advertising fell by 28% and newspaper circulation by 13%. The local news media sector has been particularly hard hit with some areas suffering from “news deserts”. The main content monetization models for online written news are: direct payments from consumers (subscriptions, individual purchases, micro-payments) and advertising. Whilst digital news revenues grew by 50% between 2016 and 2021 (especially in sub-sectors like podcasts and OTT video services) , this strong growth could not offset falling print news revenues, with total sector revenues declining at a rate 4.2% per year (over 19% during the period) . Figure 3 . Print and digital press revenues 2016-2021 Source: Preliminary results of the study VIGIE 2021-0646 “The competitiveness and economic viability of the news media sector in the EU”, PPMI & partners for DG CNECT The 2016 Impact Assessment for the Copyright Directive found for 39 publishers in eight Member States that in the period 2010-2014 their revenues from digital subscription and advertising rose . However, digital revenues included, the same publishers still reported losses, ranging between 9% and 26% . The problem has grown, most recently due to the overall adverse economic effects of the Covid-19 p andemic. In a 2020 survey conducted by the Reuters Institute, a majority of 165 independent news media reported that their overall audience had increased during the first wave of the pandemic. Nevertheless, only 14% of respondents expected stable or growing revenues in 2020 . In May 2021, a study by the European University Institute confirmed that demand for quality content increased, while revenues declined. News operators who did not have digital business models were hit particularly hard, but the primary reason was a decline in overall advertising spending . Due to the Covid-19 crisis the advertisers preferred to cut spending on TV advertis ing , relatively strengthening their online exposure . In particular, 64.4% of global digital advertising expenditure is now targeting directly online platforms (which display the advertisements to a large extent on the websites of the professional media organisations). Hence, Google, Facebook and Amazon became powerful media advertising intermediaries, dominating digital advertising revenues. Combined, these three platforms represent nearly 90% of all digital advertising spending growth . Public funding remains a relatively stable key source of revenue for the sector across all European countries, as exhibited in Table 2 . In 2020, it represented 30% of the revenues of the audiovisual media sector . EU national governments have historically funded the public broadcasters, which were the first broadcasters in the European context. In 2020, the total public funding of the Public Service Media (PSM) in the EU27 amounted to EUR 26.2 billion, which represented 80% their total revenues . Nevertheless , there are important differences in the rate of public support and these are represented in the Table 3. Table 3 . EU Public AV companies' share of public funding over total revenues in 2020. Country Total revenues 2020 of which public funding AT 990.5 645.1 BE 802.9 553.5 BG 65.2 60.4 CY 35.1 33.3 CZ 325.3 296.5 DE 9 468.6 8 298.2 DK 968 476.2 EE 43.1 41.4 ES 1956 1801 FI 490.3 484.1 FR 4 420.4 3 679.1 HR 171.5 159.1 HU 305.3 251.8 IE 371.6 232.8 IT 2 508.7 1 764.6 LT 47.6 45.9 LU 6.9 6.8 LV 29.6 24.7 MT n.a. n.a. NL 946.5 686.8 PL 777.4 498.7 PT 219.9 180.6 RO 159.4 146.3 SE 771.3 742.8 SI 121.6 99.9 SK 125.3 117.8 Source: EAO Yearbook 2021 , calculations for the purpose of Impact Assessment Employment trends In 2019, an estimated 430 000 persons were employed in the press sector and around 623 000 in audiovisual news and entertainment. It can be estimated that the European media in the core sectors and through affecting other sectors provided jobs to 4.2 million people . Atypical employment (part-time and fixed-duration contracts, temporary work, self-employment and freelancing) has become commonplace in the media in the last decade, lowering its attractiveness for potential employees. In the long run it might lead to lowering the standards as the sector will be losing talent. B etween 2013 and 201 7 , in the EU28 countries , the number of employees declined in the sectors of ‘Newspaper publishing’ (-21%) and of ‘Radio broadcasting’ (-15%), whereas it increased in the ‘TV programming and broadcasting’ (8%) sector and slightly in the ‘News agencies’ (1%) sector. News editorial boards are shrinking dramatically, with journalists experiencing worsening working conditions. It is estimated that around 1/3 professional journalists (400 000 news employees) lost their jobs in the EU 2008-2018 . On top of that, the quality of the work of some of those who stayed, deteriorated. In the wake of the attention economy, many legacy news media players have been compromising their journalistic profile towards "click-bait" content. Also many of the online-only news outlets which have been set up in the last decade ha ve this journalistic profile, characterised by low social value, but profitable in the digital economy . Figure 4 . EU28 Media employment trends 2013-2017 Source: Valdani, Vicari & Associati for DG CNECT, Media Coverage of European Affairs , 2020, based on Eurostat, p. 38-39 . As highlighted by the Media Pluralism Monitor 2021, there are concerns about the working conditions for journalists in several EU Member States (notably Croatia, Czech Republic, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, the Netherlands and Romania). In particular there is a lack of collective contracts protecting journalists’ rights, low wages and unclear competition from online platforms. According to the MPM-COVID-19 assessment, the non-standard employment in the sector suffered more – due to budget cuts - compared to employed journalists, despite most countries introduced extraordinary measures to protect journalists . Structure of the media market The media ecosystem is composed of a high number of SMEs together with some big market players, such as broadcasters and publishers, coming from different national and regional cultures and languages. SMEs account for over 99% of all companies active in the media markets. In 2019 there were only 445 companies which employed more than 250 persons, out of a total of 2001 00 (including 3827 TV broadcasters and 26 000 written press companies and 300 online-only video on demand services). The SMEs were responsible for an estimated 33 % of the total turnover of the sectors and employed an estimated 5 3 % of all media employees . Table 4 . Core media sectors structure, 2020 No of enterprises Turnover (million EUR) Persons employed Film production and distribution (J59) 145 669 46 000 390 000 Including large companies 121 17 046 81 353 Broadcasting (J.60) 9 000 60 633 233 276 Including large companies 114 54 480 172 663 Publishing of newspapers, journals et al. (J5812, J5813, J5814, J5819, J5821) 45 426 63 318 478 070 Including large companies 210* 42 955* 264 377* Source: Eurostat SBS [sbs_na_1a_se_r2] [sbs_sc_1b_se_r2] Out of the top 100 companies active in the AV industry in Europe, US companies account for 31% of revenues. Their share has been rising in recent years due to the subscription video on demand companies (US-based SVODs account for 80% of subscriptions – Netflix 35%, Amazon 20%, Disney 8%, Apple 8%) . The audiovisual media sector features economies of scale. The largest 20 companies represent 70% of revenues. Most are non-European companies but three of the top five are RTL Group, Groupe Canal Plus and ProSiebenSat1. There are some pan-European groups , such as Bertelsmann (RTL Group), Vivendi (Groupe Canal+), Media For Europe (former Mediaset), Bauer Media Group, or Axel Springer, although most media companies are active only in one country. Public Service Broadcasters (PSBs) constitute an important part of the EU market. Their share in the broadcasting market is in slight decline, but they still account for 31% of revenues ( EUR 26.5 bn) with significant country-by-country differences . Table 5 . Companies with top revenues in the EU AV market [2020 ] C ompany Ultimate owner Share of the top 100 revenues in AV Revenues [ EUR billion] AV segments of activity in EU Sky US (Comcast) 13.3% 16.3 Broadcaster, pay-TV operator, studio ARD DE 5.3% 6.5 Broadcaster, studio Netflix Europe US 5% 6.1 SVOD; producer RTL DE 4.9% 6.0 Broadcaster; studio Groupe Canal Plus FR 4.5% 5.5 Broadcaster; pay TV, studio ProSiebenSat1 DE 3.3% 4.0 Broadcaster; studio; Disney Europe US 3.2% 3.9 studio; SVOD Discovery Europe US 2.6% 3.2 Broadcaster; studio France TV FR 2.5% 3 Broadcaster; studio Vodaphone UK 2.2% 2.7 Pay-TV Mediaset IT 2.2% 2.6 Broadcaster; pay-TV; studio Buygues FR 2.1% 2.6 broadcaster Liberty Global US 2.1% 2.6 Pay-TV; studio RAI IT 2.0% 2.5 Broadcaster; studio ZDF DE 1.8% 2.2 Broadcaster; studio Telefonica Audiovisual Digital ES 1.8% 2.2 Pay-TV; studio Deutsche Telekom DE 1.6% 1.9 Pay-TV; Amazon Prime Video Europe US 1.4% 1.7 SVOD; TVOD; studio Legend: commercial, cross-border European players ; Public Service Broadcasters Source: own calculations based on EAO Top players in the European AV Industry Ownership and Concentration The relative strength of the market players can be seen through market capitalisation (see Fig. 5 ), but also through their customer base. Netflix has 213 million subscribers worldwide, Amazon has about 200 million Prime users and Apple has around 500 million App Store users, whereas the largest EU pay-TV operator Orange has around 10 million subscribers. To compare the scale from yet another perspective: the feature content spend of Netflix alone ( EUR 11bn in 2020) is similar to the combined spend of all broadcasters (public and commercial) in 5 largest European markets (DE, FR, IT, ES and UK) (around EUR 12 billion) . Then again, the relative size of media companies needs to be seen in the context of the rise of the much larger digital platforms : Fig ure 5 . Market capitalisation of EU/US biggest media corporations [ EUR billion, as of 12 January 2022] Source: own calculation based on Forbes 500 list The European market is undergoing consolidation, but on a smaller scale and more slowly than in the US. Public service broadcasters (PSBs) have entered into coproduction agreements (DE, IT, FR in The Alliance). There also have been some national tie-ups among TV players for SVOD services in Belgium (Liberty Global/DPG Media JV), Spain (Telefonica/Atresmedia JV) and France (Salto by France TV, TF1 and M6). Some conglomerates, like NENT, are expanding geographically. Single market indicators S tructural media transactions (mergers, takeovers, investment projects) in most cases take place between investors from the same country , but there are also some situations when a foreign investor is involved . From 2013-20 21 there were 867 cross-border investments in media in the EU27 . Transactions were concentrated between the established players, with few new entrants. N on-EU investors ( 224 ) were responsible for 389 of the 867 transactions in the period , equivalent to 45% . In terms of their value (in those 287 cases where it was disclosed), they a mounted to over EUR 60 billion whereas the 260 known values of the transactions made by European companies (116) amounted to only EUR 24 billion . These numbers indicate that the transactions made by non-EU investors are generally bigger than European ones . Figure 6 . Cross-border investments into European media organisations Source: own calculations based on Orbis cross-border investment database Analysis of the top European broadcasters in the EU shows that it is likely that they derive the majority of their revenues from one European country. In particular most public sector broadcasters generate almost 100% of their revenues on their national market whilst private players, even with some level of internationalisation (such as Groupe Canal+ and Mediaset), generate the majority of their revenues from domestic markets. Nonetheless there are some notable exceptions e.g. RTL . Another indicator of cross-border activity of broadcasters is the number of TV channels established in one EU27 country but targeting other EU 27 territories. The proportion of cross-border channels , by number, is significant: there are 1015 cross-border channels, equivalent to 28% of all channels. 42 owners operate 79% of all cross-border channels, made up of 22 EU and 20 non-EU (mostly US-based global media players) competitors. The cross-border targeting can take one of two forms: (1) with no or very little adaptation of the content (for example the same channel targeting Turkish communities and broadcast in all EU countries) or (2) localised, customised content. This second form is based on creating a unique brand in each territory often also producing new content especially for it. In general the higher investments attract higher viewing shares and reap higher advertising revenues, compared to the first option. Non-EU-owned broadcasters are much more active in the cross-border field. They operate 6 times more cross-border channels than the EU-owned ones (678 compared to 111). When only the more prominent, localised-content channels are considered, the disproportion is greater, with the top 16 non-EU-owned broadcasters operating 557 channels, and the top 12 EU-owned broadcasters only 60 . . Annex 6 : Mapping of media pluralism risks across the EU This annex illustrates the references to the 2021 Media Pluralism Monitor made in the Report to signal risks related to me dia pluralism in Member States. 6 .1. Risks related to market plurality The 2021 Media Pluralism Monitor points to high risk to market plurality in more than half of the Member States. That concerns Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czechia, Spain, Finland, Croatia, Hungary, Ireland, Lithuania, Latvia, Malta, Poland, Romania, Slovenia and Slovakia. 6 . 2 . Risks related to political independence of media According to the 2021 Media Pluralism Monitor, political independence of media (related to conflict of interest and political control over media outlets and news agencies) is at high or medium risk in 21 Member States. 6 .3. Risks related to commercial and owner influence over editorial content The 2021 Media Pluralism Monitor reports high or medium risk of commercial and owner influence over editorial content in 22 Member States. 6 .4. Risks related to the independence of public service media governance and funding The 2021 Media Pluralism Monitor reports growing politicisation of public service media, with high or medium risk to the independence of their governance and funding in 16 Member States. 6 .5 Risks related to the editorial autonomy of media The 2021 Media Pluralism Monitor reports high risks in the area of editorial autonomy in 11 Member States. It also points to the lack of regulatory safeguards to guarantee autonomy when appointing and dismissing editors-in-chief in many Member States. 6 .6 Risks related to the distribution of state advertising The 2021 Media Pluralism Monitor recorded a high risk in the state advertising area in 20 Member States , due to the lack of rules on the distribution of such advertising and to the lack, in practice, of transparency on the beneficiaries and the amounts spent. Annex 7 : Mapping of media market related laws across the EU The tables below have been prepared in the context of the study on media plurality and diversity online (VIGIE 2020-825) and illustrate the fragmentation of legislation in M ember States with regard to several topics covered by this impact assessment . 7 .1. Laws regulating media ownership The three tables below summarize the fragmentation of national rules regarding media ownership. While some Member States do not have rules in this regard at all, others do. In the latter case, there are significant divergences among Member States . Some of them have introduced rules limiting ownership based on audience reach, while others have market shares’ limitations or capital control restrictions or cross-media ownership restrictions. 7 .1.1 Measures regulating media reach Bulgaria, Estonia, Luxembourg, Poland and Sweden do not ha ve rules regarding media reach. For those Member States that have introduced legislation, the measures vary, for example some Member States introduced limitations in relation to the geographical reach, while others focus on audience. Country Name of regulation Sectors Which authority is responsible for ensuring compliance What are the applicable procedures and benchmarks Austria Federal Act on Audiovisual Media Services Audiovisual, radio The Federal Competition Authority, the Federal Cartel Prosecutor, media authority KommAustria. Decisions are made by the Federal Cartel Court. Under Art. 11(1) of the Audio-visual Media Services Act, an audiovisual media company may hold several licenses for digital terrestrial television, as long as it covers maximum three geographical areas. One media group’s offer in one particular area of the country is not allowed to include: ▪ more than two analogue terrestrial radio channels; ▪ more than two digital terrestrial radio channels; ▪ more than one terrestrial radio channel and two terrestrial television channels. Further, television broadcasters are considered to belong to the same media groups when the group, one person or partnership or media owner holds more than 25% of the share capital or the voting rights or exert a dominating influence or have one of the possibilities to exert an influence. For a radio broadcaster and analogue terrestrial broadcasting, there cannot be any coverage area overlap. For digital services, rules stipulate that a radio broadcaster can hold several licences for digital terrestrial radio broadcasting as long as there is limited allocation of frequency resources in maximum of 2 coverage areas. Finally, a media group may provide the same location in the national territory simultaneously with only one channel licensed and a maximum of 1/3 of the terrestrial television channels that can be received in that location. For radio, one media group can cover the maximum of 12 mil. inhabitants, while that number is maximum 8 mil. inhabitants when attributed to a person or partnership of the media group. Belgium (FL) Act on Radio and Television Broadcasting of 27 March 2009 (FIRTA) Broadcasting, radio Vlaamse Regulator voor de Media (VRM) Restrictions only applicable to regional TV, under art. 169, 4° FIRTA stating: "one association does not [provide] more than one [regional broadcasting program]". However, the article elaborates that the "Flemish Government may, in individual cases, give permission to an organisation that has entered into an operating agreement to perform more than one programming contract". VRM only has the power to ‘map’ media concentration and publish annual reports about the state of media markets. One legal person can operate maximum two communitywide FM radio stations. Same rules for regional FM radio stations. For local radio stations, it is prohibited to operate another radio station. It is forbidden to control more than one communitywide and one regional radio station at the same time. Sanctions range from warning to suspension or withdrawal of licences to pecuniary penalties up to EUR 125 000 (see Article 228). Belgium (FR) Media Decree (2021) Audiovisual media services (broadcasting, video-sharing) and radio CSA. When there is a significant position, in its case-by-case assessment the CSA is due to ask an opinion to the Competition Authority (see Article 2.2.2. 7) Article 2.2.3 provides thresholds for 'cumulative audience' and 'potential cumulative audience', with the definition of these concepts. - the cumulative audience of several television services owned by the same natural or legal person reaches 20% of the total audience of television services; - the cumulative potential audience of several analogue over-the-air audio services held by the same natural or legal person reaches 20% of the total cumulative potential audience of publishers of audio services in analogue over-the-air mode. If these thresholds are met, the natural or legal person is considered to have 'significant position' and the CSA has to assess if this results in a detriment effect on media pluralism. If so, the procedure is set under Article 2.2.2 5-7. Sanctions are provided by Article 9.2.2-1 Bulgaria No - - - Croatia Electronic Media Act (OG 153/09) Audiovisual and radio The Council for Electronic Media Article 54 (1) states that the television and/or radio broadcaster who has a concession at the state level and a share exceeding 25% of the capital of another broadcaster who has the same kind of concession or a concession on the regional, county, city or municipality level, and vice versa will be considered impermissible concentration. Rules on Horizontal Concentration ▪ The television broadcaster at state level is allowed to own up to 25% share in the capital of another TV broadcaster (at state, regional, county, city or municipality level), and vice versa; ▪ The television broadcaster at local or regional level is allowed to own up to 30% share in the capital of another television broadcaster at local or regional level, in the same area; ▪ The radio broadcaster at state level is allowed to own up to 25% share in the capital of another radio broadcaster (at state, regional, county, city or municipality level), and vice versa; ▪ The radio broadcaster at local or regional level is allowed to own up to 30% share in the capital of another radio broadcaster at local or regional level, in the same area. In case of non-compliance: (2) Should the Electronic Media Council determine that the occurred changes in the ownership structure resulted in an impermissible concentration in the area of media, it shall give an order to the television and/or radio broadcaster and the media service provider set out in Article 79 of this Act to conform its ownership structure, within a certain deadline, in a manner which is not contrary to the provisions of this Act. (3) Should the television and/or radio broadcaster fail to comply with the order of the Electronic Media Council, the provisions of this Act stipulating the termination of validity of the concession prior to the expiration of the deadline for which it was awarded shall be applied, and the decision on the cancellation of the concession shall be passed by the Electronic Media Council. (4) Should the media service provider set out in Article 79 of this Act fail to comply with the order of the Electronic Media Council, the provisions of this Act stipulating the termination of validity of the license for satellite, internet and cable transmission of the audiovisual and/or radio program shall be applied. Cyprus Law on Radio and Television 7(I)/1998 Audiovisual and radio Radio and TV authority A set of rules aiming at limiting 'oligopolies and a monopoly' are provided in art.19 of the Law on Radio and Television and include a combination of criteria. Criteria include capital share thresholds, composition of boards of directors, horizontal and vertical ownership and number of licenses. 25% is the highest capital share of a licensee allowed for companies or individuals. In the case of a natural person, the threshold of 25% counts also, eventually, the shares of his/her relatives up to second degree. Also, a license cannot be granted to a company, if the said company or its shareholders hold more than 5% of the capital share in another radio or TV organisation or a daily/magazine. Art. 19.6 of the Law on Radio and Television 7(I)/1998 provides that any person that breaches provisions of art.19 -on ownership thresholds or disclosure of true ownership, may face imprisonment of up to three years or a fine of 85 400 euros or both penalties. Czechia Act No. 231/2001 Coll. (Broadcasting Act) Audiovisual and radio The Council for Radio and Television Broadcasting No single legal person, nor any single natural person, may be a holder of more than one licence for nation-wide analogue television broadcasting (section 55) and more than two licences for nation-wide digital television broadcasting, which authorise the distribution of full-format programs (section 55a). Local and regional television broadcasting (section 56): If any single legal or natural person is a holder of more than one licence to operate television broadcasting other than nation-wide television broadcasting, then the total coverage of the Czech Republic by such broadcaster shall not in aggregate exceed 70% of the total number of the population of the Czech Republic. Section 60 of Broadcasting Act then defines penalties for various breaches. The Council shall for example impose a fine on any natural or legal person who/which operates broadcasting without being entitled to do so, or upon any broadcaster who/which fails to notify the Council of any change in the information contained in the licence application according to Section 21 (2) - e.g. information on all shareholders, the amount of registered capital, shares of voting rights and capital contributions of shareholders and members. According to Section 63 (1) the Council shall also withdraw the licence if a licenced broadcaster attained the granting of the licence on the basis of false information in the license application or breached the obligation specified in Sections 55, 55a and 56 (number of licences for single legal/natural person in nation-wide/local television broadcasting). The Council shall also reject a licence application or not extend the validity of existing licence in defined cases. Denmark Radio and TV broadcasting act (Act No. 477/2010) Audiovisual and radio Radio and TV board Some radio and tv-stations (DR, TV2 and R´TV2 regional tv) are automatically granted a license under the law, while others need to follow an application procedure. Estonia No - - - Finland Act on Television and Radio Operations (2013) TV, radio Traficom (The Finnish Transport and Communications Agency) When declaring licences open for application and granting them, the licensing authority shall, taking into consideration the television broadcasting and radio broadcasting of the area in question as a whole, aim at promoting freedom of speech, the diversity of the provision of programmes and the needs of special groups of the public. A licence may be granted to a natural person, an organization or a foundation that is solid and evidently has the capability to maintain regular operations in accordance with the licence. France Law n° 86-1067 of 30 September 1986 (Loi Léotard) August 2000 no. 2000-719, July 2001 no. 2001-624, then other laws in 2004, 2008 and 2009 (as amended in 2020) Audiovisual communication, Digital terrestrial television, Online video- sharing platforms ARCOM (Regulatory Authority for Audiovisual and Digital Communication) Article 41 forbids: — the control of more than 1 analogue terrestrial national television whose audience exceeds 8% of total audiences, and more than 7 digital terrestrial televisions; — the control of both a national service whose audience is above 2.5% of total audience and of a local analog ue television service; — the control of 2 local television authorizations in the same zone (including one national and one local, except in outerseas departments); — the control of several local television authorizations within different zones representing an audience of more than 12 million people; — the control of more than 2 satellite television channels. It also caps the total audience of the radio services owned by that a single natural or legal person to 150 million people and an audience share superior to 20 % of the radio market. Administrative sanctions are provided under Title VI (art. 74 to 79-6) of the September 1986 law, and range between EUR 6 000 and 150 000. Ownership > Articles 39 and 40 forbid for terrestrial television channels: - the control of more than 49% of the capital shares or voting rights of national terrestrial channels whose audience exceeds 8% of total audiences; - the control of more than 15% of an analogue terrestrial channel if it already has more than 15% of one channel; - the control of more than 5% of a third analogue terrestrial channel if it already has more than 5% of two channels; - the control of more than 33% of a regional or local channel if it already controls a national channel whose audience exceeds 8% of total audiences. For cable television channels: - the control of more than 49% of one channel; - the control of more than 33% of another channel if it already controls 33% of one channel; - the control of more than 5% of a third channel if it already controls more than 5% of two channels. Article 41 of the September 1986 law now enables control, directly or indirectly, of up to 7 digital terrestrial broadcasting authorizations, when the services are broadcast by different companies. The article also caps the total audience of the different services owned by a singl e person to 12 million people." October 1984 “anti-Hersant” Law no. 84-937 (as modified by August 1986 law no. 86-897) Print media Competition Authority (Autorité de la Concurrence), the CSA can intervene in cases relating to cross-media concentration. Art. 11 forbids the acquisition of a daily “general and political information” (IPG) newspaper, if it enables a natural or legal person (or group of persons) to own, control directly or indirectly IPG publications whose total circulation exceeds 30% of the total national circulation of publications of the same nature. Art. 12, 13, 15 of the August 1986 law provide penalties that can go up to 1 year of prison and/or a EUR 30 000 fine (EUR 6 000 in some cases). Germany Regional-level rules and Interstate Treaty on Broadcasting and Telemedia (While radio broadcasting falls exclusively under the jurisdiction of Federal States (Bundesländers), and each State having its own media law and regulatory authority, television broadcasting is regulated both at the level of the States and, according to the Interstate Treaty on Broadcasting and Telemedia, at the national level via a joint management office (Die medienanstalten – DLM) Radio and a udiovisual German system almost entirely relies on the criteria of audience share. There are no limitations to horizontal, vertical or diagonal concentration as long as a service provider does not acquire dominant power of opinion. The dominant power is presumed: when a service annual average audience share exceeds 30%; when a service provider holds a dominant position in another media-relevant related market and reaches an overall share of 25%; when an overall assessment of its activities in television and in media-relevant related markets shows that the influence on the formation of opinion obtained as a result of these activities corresponds to that of a service provider with a 30% audience share. If a service provider reaches an annual average audience share of 10% with a general channel or an information-oriented thematic channel, it must allocate broadcasting time to independent third parties. The average audience share over a period of 12 months is used as a reference. The procedure stipulates the obligation on the part of broadcasters to assist the KEK in this task, failure of which can result on licence revocation. Further, the remedies include the following: no additional licence can be delivered to the provider found to have reached the criteria of audience share which puts him in a dominant position; subsequently, the KEK can: (1) propose to the service provider to give up its participating interests in services attributable to it until its audience share falls below the threshold; (2) propose to the service provider to limit its market position in media-relevant related markets until its audience falls below the threshold; (3) propose to the service provider to grant broadcasting time to independent third parties; (4) propose to the service provider to establish a programme advisory council. KEK engages in discussions with the service provider. However, in case of no agreement made, or in case the measures agreed upon are not implemented within a reasonable period, the regulatory authority DLM can revoke the licences of as many of the services as necessary to ensure that the service provider no longer exercises dominant power of opinion. Greece Art. 13 of Law 2328/1995 P ress National Council for Radio and Television (ESR) A physical or legal person can be the owner or partner of a non-corporate undertaking or partnership or shareholder of a capital company, which publishes, controls in any way or is a shareholder of another undertaking that publishes or controls: 1) maximum 2 daily political newspapers published in Athens, Piraeus or Thessaloniki; 2) one daily financial newspaper and one daily sports newspaper published in Athens, Piraeus or Thessaloniki; 3) two daily regional newspapers published in different regions; 4) two non-daily regional newspapers published in different regions; and 5) one Sunday newspaper. art. 5 (6) Law No. 3592/2007; Law No. 4229/2015 Electronic non -information media; digital terrestrial television National Council for Radio and Television (ESR) Art. 5(6)(b)(i) of Law 3592/2007: Participation in electronic non-information media is permitted, provided that it is limited to: - one non-information, lawfully operating TV outlet of a national or regional range, if there exists participation in an information, lawfully operating TV outlet of a national or regional range; - two non-information, lawfully operating TV outlets of a national or regional range, if there is no participation in an information, lawfully operating TV outlet of a national or regional range. Art. 5(6)(b)(ii) of Law 3592/2007: Participation in non-information radio outlets is permitted, provided that it does not exceed 15% of the tendered licences for the establishment, installation and operation of non-information radio outlets in each region/geographic area, in a maximum of three regions/geographic areas. Art. 5(6)(c) of Law 3592/2007: Until the granting of licences for analogue radio broadcasting, participation in non-information radio outlets is permitted up to five non-information, lawfully operating radio outlets in the region/geographic area of Attiki; three non-information, lawfully operating radio outlets in the region/geographic area of Thessaloniki; one non-information, lawfully operating radio outlet in other regions/geographic areas. Participation in more than five non-information lawfully operating radio outlets throughout the country in a maximum of three regions/geographic areas is not permitted. Breach of media ownership rules by candidates which apply for a licence for digital terrestrial television and radio entails exclusion from the licensing process. Hungary Media Act 2010 8Act CLXXXV of 2010 on Media Services and Mass Communication A udiovisual and radio NMHH (Media Council) Art. 71 (1) Those authorised to provide analogue linear radio media services based on a public contract or broadcasting agreement shall have the right to simultaneously provide a) maximum one national analogue linear radio media service, b) maximum two regional and four local analogue linear radio media services, or c) maximum twelve local analogue linear radio media services; (5) A regional or local linear radio media service provider or its owner may not, with the exceptions defined under Paragraph (6), acquire a qualifying holding in other undertakings providing regional or local linear radio media services falling within the reception area of their media services (6) The restriction defined under Paragraph (5) shall not be applied if a) the reception areas of the two media service providers overlap up to twenty percent at most, or b) unused transmission time remains following the evaluation of the tender; art. 70: regulatory model regarding media concentration based on audience share that restricts market positions when stations reach a certain threshold. The law prohibits media service providers from: having at least 35% annual average audience share in the market of linear audiovisual media services , or 40% in case of the combined market of linear audiovisual media services and the linear radio services ; Ireland Guidelines on Media Mergers 2015 Press, audiovisual, radio, internet media Broadcasting Authority of Ireland (BAI) Definition of “significant interest“ metrics that will be used to identify when a holding in a media business represents a ‘significant interest’: A holding or voting strength, or the nominal value of the shareholding, of between 10% and 19% (directly or indirectly) may constitute a significant interest. A holding or voting strength, or the nominal value of the shareholding, of more than 20% or more of the voting power (directly or indirectly) will generally constitute a significant interest. BAI's 2019 Ownership and Control Policy A udiovisual Broadcasting Authority of Ireland (BAI) Less than 15% is unproblematic -between 15%-20% additional considerations from BAI -between 20%-25% attract closer scrutiny -Ownership of more than 25% of the total number of radio stations (or "sound broadcasting services") operating in the Republic of Ireland is "unacceptable". As the licencing body for commercial radio stations, the BAI can thus ensure compliance with this specific ownership limitation. Outside the radio sector there are no specified ownership limitations. Italy Legislative decree 208/2021, art. 51 (3d) (new AVMS Code) Audiovisual, press AGCOM (Autorità per le garanzie nelle comunicazioni) Technical limits: 1) 20% of the television channels, or 20% of radio channels, that a given provider (through companies directly or indirectly controlled) can broadcast, relative to the total number of television and radio channels on terrestrial frequencies assigned by the national plan of television frequencies in technique digital; 2) The technical limit for newspapers is based on distributed copies: a) through companies owned or controlled: 20% cap at national level of distribution of daily newspapers; 50% cap at macroregional level (North-West; North-East; Centre; South); b) through associated companies: 30% cap at national level. Sanctions: 1) audiovisual and radio sector: denial of license. 2) press sector: nullity of act; AGCOM's orders to remove the dominant position. Law 67/1987 (3) Latvia Chapter VI of the National Security Law (last amended 2021) All market sectors Cabinet of Ministers As per Section 37, certain media outlets can be defined as relevant for national security and this subject to specific obligations (see Table 1.2), under media reach-related criteria. Those are: A udible medium whose coverage zone is at least 60% of Latvian territory: Audiovisual medium whose coverage zone is at least 95% of Latvian territory . Lithuania Law on Provision of Information to the Public, art.32, Law on Electronic Communications art 12 (4) L icensing of tv, radio excluded PSMs Radio and Television Commission, Communications Regulatory Authority (in addition to the Commission) for electronic communications Broadcasting licenses and re-broadcast content licences shall be issued under the tender procedure, except for the cases specified in paragraph 12 of this Article. The Commission shall publish invitations to tender for obtaining broadcasting licenses and/or re-broadcast content licenses not later than within 30 days of the receipt of the information specified in paragraph 4 of this Article from the Communications Regulatory Authority. The decisions of the Commission relating to the publication of invitations to tender shall be published on the website of the Commission. For electronic communications: art 12 (4) law on electronic comm "The Radio and Television Commission of Lithuania shall: when making decisions related to the licensing of broadcasting/re-broadcasting activities, consult the Communications Regulatory Authority on matters concerning electronic communications". In case of non-compliance, the sanctions provide for suspension/revocation of license under Art. 33 (15). Law on Electronic Communications (2004) E lectronic communications networks for radio, tv Communications Regulatory Authority Prepare and submit to the Government for approval the National Radio Frequency Allocation Table and implement it within the scope of its competence; prepare, together with the Radio and Television Commission of Lithuania, the Strategy and submit it to the Government for approval; draw up, on the basis of the Strategy and together with the Radio and Television Commission of Lithuania, the Strategic Plan for the Assignment of Radio Frequencies to Broadcasting and Transmission of Radio and Television Programmes (hereinafter referred to as the “Strategic Plan”); Luxembourg No - - - Malta Broadcasting Act R adio, tv Broadcasting authority The same organisation, person or company may concurrently own, control or be editorially responsible for more than one [...] nationwide television service, provided that: [...] (a) only one nationwide radio service may be licensed on the FM frequency to the same organization, person or company (b) not more than two generalist nationwide television services may be licensed to the same organization, person or company; (c) the same organisation, person or company may not own, control or be editorially responsible for more than one nationwide [...] television service predominantly transmitting news and current affairs". The Broadcasting Authority may suspend or terminate a broadcasting licence on the basis of Article 16(4) (violation of the licencee's obligations owed to the Authority). Broadcasting Act art. 10 (4C) R adio, tv Minister "responsible for culture" (see also Cultural Directorate) Stations owned or controlled by the Government company referred to in sub-article (4D) or for which the said company is editorially responsible shall be licensed by the Minister. For the purposes of enabling the Authority to carry out its regulatory duties in terms of law, the Minister shall, as soon as possible from the date of issue of any licence to the aforesaid Government company, notify in writing to the Authority a copy of such licence The Netherlands Media Act Radio Media Authority - The Commissariaat voor de Media (CvdM)- the Media Regulatory Authority Limitations exist only in the radio sector where broadcasting via the scarce FM spectrum is concerned: under art. 6.24(1) of the Media Act, one broadcasting organisation cannot hold more than one frequency or set of frequencies for its radio broadcasts. The article also provides that exceptions can be made by ministerial Regulation if the efficient use of spectrum calls for it (art. 6.24(3)). This article does not apply to PSM. *In 2003, FM-frequencies were auctioned by the State and a Regulation on allocation and use of frequencies for commercial radio broadcasting (based on the Media Act) was adopted with the provision that one broadcasting organisation could hold 2 frequencies, one of which was free from content requirements. In 2015, the Regulation was amended and the limitation was changed to a maximum of 4 frequencies for one broadcasting organisation. Poland No - - - Portugal Law N.27/2007 TV Entidade Reguladora para a Comunicação Social - ERC (Media Authority) Article 4-B (3) It is prohibited for any natural or legal person to hold, either directly or indirectly, including through a relationship of control, a number of licenses for national unrestricted free-to-air television programme services exceeding 50% of all the licenses granted to similar programme services in the same area of coverage. Law N. 54/2010 Radio Entidade Reguladora para a Comunicação Social - ERC (Media Authority) Article 4 (3-5) 3 - Natural or legal persons shall not hold, either directly or indirectly, namely though a relationship of control, a number of licenses for radio programme services on a local level exceeding 10% of all licenses granted on national territory. 4 - Natural or legal persons of private or cooperative sectors shall not hold, either directly or indirectly, namely though a relationship of control, a number of frequency modulated radio programme services on a national level equal to or exceeding 50% of programme services qualified for the same coverage area and for the same frequency band. 5 - Natural or legal persons shall not hold in the same district, metropolitan area, municipality, or, in the autonomous regions, in the same island, either directly or indirectly, namely though a relationship of control, a number of licenses for radio programme service on a local level exceeding 50% of programme services of the same scope qualified for each of the referred territorial areas. Romania National Audiovisual Law (Law 504/2002); Competition Law (No 21/1996) Audiovisual; General competence National Audiovisual Council (CNA); Romanian Competition Authority (RCA) The National Audiovisual Law does not specify any superior limit to the number of licenses held. However, there are regulations aiming to limit geographical concentration and setting thresholds related to audience share, as per Art 44(12): a) the national audiovisual license shall provide the right to broadcast the same program in a geographical area covering a potential audience of over 60% for radio and 70% for television of the country’s censed population; b) the regional audiovisual license shall entitle the broadcasting of the same program on the territory of one or more counties without reaching the coverage stipulated in point a)". Art 43(5) of the Law 504/2002 stipulates that the National Audio-Visual Council has to be informed about individuals or economic actors acquiring 10% or more of the companies' shares, and/or with voting rights in broadcasting/audio-visual licence granted companies. Exceptions to this article can only apply, in certain cases, to public authorities (Art. 47(1) if there is no other audio-visual license for a local program service; it provides exclusive information services regarding the respective community. Slovakia Broadcasting and Retransmission Act Act on Broadcasting and Retransmission limitations Digital Broadcasting Act Periodicals and Agency News and on Amendments to Certain Acts (Press Act). Tv, Radio, online General overseeing is done by the Broadcasting Council for both Act on Broadcasting and Digital Broadcasting Act. (Act on Broadcasting section 44 and in Digital Broadcasting Act section 54 para. 1 to 3.) Since 2020, there have been several changes regarding media ownership regulation, mainly concerning the analogue broadcasting which in Slovakia is now almost exclusively limited to radio broadcasting. One individual or legal entity is allowed to hold more than one license for analogue broadcasting meaning that one individual or legal entity may broadcast several different channels. It is also now permissible to transfer the license to a third party, provided that the Council for Broadcasting and Retransmission grants its prior consent with such transfer. One legal entity or one natural person can be granted at most one license to broadcast a television program service or one license to broadcast a radio program service. This condition shall not apply to a broadcast license granted for a mono-thematic television program service. Broadcasters may develop a programme network to an extent allowing that it is received by not more than 50% of the total population. The publisher of a periodical that is published at least five times a week and is available to the public in at least half of the territory of the Slovak Republic cannot simultaneously be a licensed broadcaster on the multi-regional or national level. (nb: There are no limits set for Public broadcaster (Slovak Radio and Television) in respect of licenses). If the Council's request for "repairing" the situation are not adhered to within the set time-frame, it can revoke the license. Slovenia Mass Media Act Radio, audiovisual, press The Ministry of Culture with the Securities Market Agency, Slovenian Competition Protection Agency, Agency for Communication Networks and Services (AKOS) and the Broadcasting Council Articles 56-63 of the Mass Media Act states the restrictions of concentration for a broadcaster of a radio or television programme service or a publisher of a general informative printed journal where 20 percent of an ownership share, or stake is the threshold when the approval of Ministry of Culture is needed. The competent ministry may refuse to issue approval to any person, referred to in the first paragraph hereunder, which would, by means of acquiring an ownership or management stake or a share in the voting rights: - obtain monopoly on the advertising market by itself or together with a group of associated persons; establish a prevailing position in the media sphere by achieving, itself or together with a group of associated persons, the coverage of more than 15% of the Republic of Slovenia with analogue low-lying terrestrial radio programmes, with regard to the overall coverage of this area by all radio programme services diffused through analogue low-lying terrestrial radio technique over the radio frequencies for analogue broadcasting; establish a prevailing position in the media sphere by achieving, itself or together with a group of associated persons, the coverage of more than 30% of the Republic of Slovenia with analogue low-lying terrestrial television programmes, with regard to the overall coverage of this area by all television programme services diffused through analogue low-lying terrestrial radio technique over the radio frequencies for analogue broadcasting; achieve, itself or together with a group of associated persons, a prevailing market share with the number of the issued copies of the journals exceeding 40 % of all sold copies of general informative printed journals in the Republic of Slovenia issued at least three times a week. Prior to the issue of the approval for obtaining the stake referred to in the first paragraph hereunder, the competent ministry shall obtain the data from the Securities Market Agency and an opinion of the body competent for the protection of competition. Prior to the issue of the approval for obtaining more than 20 percent in ownership or management stake or a share in the voting rights in the assets of a broadcaster of a radio or television programme service, the competent ministry shall obtain from the Agency the data on the coverage of population with radio and television programme services referred to in the second and the third indent of the third paragraph hereunder. The competent ministry shall also obtain the opinion of the Broadcasting Council. Spain Law 7/2010 (Audiovisual Act or Ley General de la Comunicación Audiovisual); Law 3/2013 on the creation of the National Markets and Competition Commission (Comisión Nacional de los Mercados y la Competencia - CNMC); Law 15/2007, Spain Competition Act (Ley de Defensa de la Competencia) Audiovisual, radio; competition law: all market sectors Comisión Nacional de los Mercados y la Competencia (National Markets and Antitrust Commission) Law 7/2010 provides in its Article 36 that no legal or natural person may have a "significant holding" (of at least 5% share capital or voting rights) in more than one national television operator whose average audience exceeds 27% in the 12 months prior to the acquisition. Moreover, there are additional limitations for operators that accumulate substantial rights for more than two multiplex channels, for regional operators with rights in more than one multiplex channel, and in any other scenario that prevents the existence of at least three different operators. As regards to radio services, the same Law 7/2010, in its article 37, prevents any individual or legal entity from directly or indirectly controlling more than 50% of the radio licences in its coverage area (or more than five licences in that area); neither may it control more than five radio licences in a single coverage area, nor more than one third of the licences with total or partial national coverage. In the same autonomous community, no individual or legal entity may control more than 40% of the existing licences in areas where only one licence has coverage. All these limits do not apply to "sound broadcasting stations managed directly by public entities". The limitations described above apply regardless of whether it is broadcast using digital or analogue technology. Sweden No - - - 7 .1.2 Measures regulating media ownership based on market shares Many Member States do not have legislation in this regard (Belgium (FL), Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Portugal, Slovakian Slovenia, Spain), while others do. Among those Member States with legislation on market shares, there are significant divergences notably regarding the quantitative thresholds of market share and their implementation (e.g. they apply to define what is a dominant company, or to limit the possibility to hold certain share of another media operator ) . Country Name of regulation Sectors Which authority is responsible for ensuring compliance What are the applicable procedures and benchmarks Austria Federal Act on Audiovisual Media Services All media The Federal Competition Authority, the Federal Cartel Prosecutor, media authority KommAustria. Decisions are made by the Federal Cartel Court. A dominant company in the sense of Austrian antitrust law is a company that is not exposed to competition or only insignificant competition (e.g. monopoly companies) or has a dominant market position in relation to other competitors; In particular, the financial strength, the relationships with other companies, the access to the procurement and sales markets as well as the circumstances that limit the market access for other companies must be taken into account. To make it easier to determine this market power, which is difficult to prove qualitatively, the burden of proof is shifted from the threshold values mentioned below to the disadvantage of the potential market dominant, but it can lead to the contrary evidence that it is not dominant. Quantitative thresholds market share of at least 30%, or market share of over 5% if max. 2 other companies are on the market, or market share of over 5% if the four largest companies on the market have a combined market share of at least 80%. Foreign ownership for TV services cannot exceed 49% of the shares. The consequences in case of non-compliance include: blocking of a merger or acquisition; binding commitments; fines. While assessing whether the limitations foreseen by the legislation are satisfied, KommAustria has a possibility even to revoke the licence, after a public hearing “if the television broadcaster transferred the shares contrary to this finding”. Belgium (FL) n/a n/a n/a n/a Belgium (FR) Décret coordonné sur les services de médias audiovisuels (version consolidée par le CSA au 21 août 2018) (FrAMSA) New media decree came into force on 21 April 2021 - Decree No [C − 2021/20568] Audiovisual, radio, video-sharing Conseil Supérieur de l’Audiovisuel (CSA) Specific thresholds do exist for the French speaking Community, with the added note that surpassing these thresholds is not prohibited unless obtaining such a "significant position" would result in a detrimental effect on media pluralism, as assessed by the CSA on a case-by-case basis. A legal or natural persons that hold more than 24% of the capital of television broadcaster, cannot control, directly or indirectly, more than 24% of the capital of another television broadcaster. Similar thresholds apply for both analogue radio and digital radio. If this should be the case, they may be designated by the CSA as having a significant position, which may result in sanctions foreseen in Article 159 (various degrees, from warnings to withdrawal of authorisation and pecuniary penalties). Bulgaria n/a n/a n/a n/a Croatia Media Act (OG 59/04) P ress Croatian Chamber of Commerce . Impermissible concentration is also to be reported to the Agency for Market Competition protection according to Article 17 of the Market Competition protection Act (OG 79/09) A new Electronic Media Act (EMA) has been passed in October 2021 introducing changes to the regulation of electronic media (audio-visual, radio, news websites, etc.) (OG 111/21). The new market dominance restriction (Article 65, paragraph 1) states that ˝if total annual income of a single media service or electronic publication provider reaches 40% of total annual income of all media service or electronic media providers in the Republic of Croatia, this will be considered a dominant market position which damages pluralism and diversity of electronic media˝. Article 37 of the Media Act (OG 59/04) states that a total of 40% of the market share in sales of print dailies or weeklies will be considered impermissible concentration. Cyprus Law on Radio and Television 7 (I)/1998 Audiovisual, radio Radio and TV authority 5% is the highest capital share of a licensee allowed for companies or individuals. In the case of a natural person, the threshold of 25% counts also, eventually, the shares of his/her relatives up to second degree. Also, a license cannot be granted to a company, if the said company or its shareholders hold more than 5% of the capital share in another radio or TV organisation or a daily/magazine. Czechia Act No. 143/2001 Coll. Protection of Economic Competition General Office for Protection of Competition The Act defines dominant position as having a share of 40 percent of the relevant market or above. However, this limit serves only as an orientation point, because the evaluation of the dominant position proceeds according to many different criteria. The dominant position is defined in Article 10: (1) one or more undertakings jointly (joint dominance) shall be deemed to have a dominant position on the relevant market, if their market power enables them to behave to a significant extent independently of other companies or consumers. The concentration of undertakings is then subject to approval by the Office in cases defined by the Law (the amount of net turnover). Denmark No - - - Estonia No - - - Finland No - - - France No - - - Germany Interstate Media Treaty and Regional Laws Audiovisual KEK (operates on behalf of the state media authorities) and Die medienanstalten - DLM - at the level of the States and at the national level via a joint management office. If the services attributable to an undertaking reach an annual average audience share of 30 percent of all viewers, dominant power of opinion shall be assumed to be given. Act against Restraints of Competition (GWB) Press and print media n/a In cases of mergers of print media, a maximum share of only 24.5 % is permitted. Greece Law No. 3592/2007 A udiovisual, radio and press Hellenic Competition Commission (HCC) Art. 3(3) of Law 3592/2007: Concentration of control defines the concept of dominant position in the market. When a natural or legal person is engaged in one or more media outlets of the same type, a dominant position exists when the person acquires a market share exceeding 35% in the relevant market (TV, radio or newspapers) (with due account taken of the range of the media involved). Note that pursuant to Art. 3(9) of Law 3592/2007, the percentage of concentration of control is calculated for the media outlet concerned as well as its shareholders or partners, within the meaning of Art. 5(3) of Law 3592/2007, and their ‘intermediaries’. Law No. 3592/2007 Audiovisual and radio National Council for Radio and Television (ESR) Art. 5(1): The concentration of electronic media (TV, radio) of the same type is prohibited. Art. 5(2): Ownership of an electronic media undertaking (TV, radio) is allowed up to 100%. Participation in another electronic media undertaking of the same type is allowed, provided that it does not lead to ‘control’, namely when a natural or legal person, which participates in an electronic media undertaking, influences decision-making on the management and general operation of another electronic media undertaking of the same type in a substantive manner. In particular, ‘control’ exists, where a natural or legal person: i) enjoys the capacity of owner, executive director, member of the governing body or manager of more than one electronic media [of the same type]; is one of the ten most important partners or shareholders of more than one electronic media [of the same type] (given the number of shares or voting rights held), provided that the natural or legal person concerned holds, directly or through third parties, at least 1% of the total capital or voting rights of the media at issue; ii) enjoys any of the capacities mentioned under i) in more than one electronic media of the same type; iii) enjoys the right (by law, company statute or assignment) to appoint or remove at least one member of the governing body or the manager of more than one electronic media of the same type. Law 2644/1998 P ay-tv, pay-radio provider National Council for Radio and Television (ESR) Pursuant to Art. 2(4) of Law 2644/1998, a licensed pay TV/pay-radio provider and its shareholders are allowed to possess a licence to operate just one free-to-air radio and just one free-to-air television station. Participation of a licensed pay-TV/pay-radio provider and its shareholders in another undertaking possessing a licence to operate a free-to-air radio or television station, is allowed, provided that it does not lead to ‘control’. ‘Control’ exists where a licensed pay-TV/pay-radio provider and its shareholders (natural or legal persons) which also possess a licence to operate a free-to-air radio or television station also participate in another undertaking that possesses a licence to operate a free-to-air radio or television station and substantively influence decision-making on its management and general operation. Control exists in particular when anyone of the above mentioned natural or legal persons: a) enjoy the capacity of owner, executive director, member of the governing body or manager in the undertaking concerned; is one of the ten most important partners or shareholders of the undertaking concerned (given the number of shares or voting rights held), provided that they hold, directly or through third parties, at least 1% of the total capital or voting rights of the undertaking at issue; b) enjoy the right (by law, company statute or assignment) to appoint or remove at least one member of the governing body or the manager of the undertaking concerned. Hungary Media Act 2010 8Act CLXXXV of 2010 on Media Services and Mass Communication R adio and tv NMHH (National Media and Info communications Authority) art. 70: The law prohibits media service providers from: any of its direct or indirect owners having business entities; or individuals with a controlling share/“qualifying holding” in any of the direct owners a given entity from operating an additional two linear media services (TV or radio), or from acquiring any share in a company operating linear media services.in the same market (national, regional, local). "Qualified holding” is defined in the 2010 Media Act as: a) “direct and indirect ownership” in an undertaking in excess of 25 percent of the undertaking’s assets or voting rights” ; and b): “a situation which ensures significant influence over the undertaking on the basis of a contract, the articles of association (statutes) or the preferred stock, through the appointment (removal) of the members of the decision-making or the supervisory bodies, or in any other way." If the thresholds and limitations are not respected, the audiovisual content provider shall take measures in order to increase the diversity of the media market by modifying the programme flow structure of its media services, by increasing the proportion of Hungarian works and programmes prepared by independent production companies, or in any other way. Ireland n/a n/a n/a n/a Italy Legislative decree 208/2021 (new AVMS Code) P ress, audiovisual, radio, electronic publishing, cinema AGCOM (Autorità per le garanzie nelle comunicazioni) The benchmarks for the economic limits (restrictions to market shares) are listed in art. 51 (3) as "symptomatic indices of a position of significant market power potentially detrimental to pluralism". Mergers and acquisitions must be notified when exceeding these limits; AGCOM must evaluate market power based on these limits and guidelines (set every 3 years). The thresholds are the following: 1) 20% of the SIC (Integrated Communications System, which includes: daily newspapers and periodicals; yearly and electronic publishing; radio and audiovisual media services; cinema; outdoor advertising; communication initiatives for products and services; sponsorships; and online advertising) and 50% of its sub-markets; 2) 10% of the SIC for some companies of the electronic communication sector. Under Art. 51 (6), 1) following AGCOM’s investigation which assesses a position of significant market power, potentially detrimental to pluralism: intervention to remove these positions ; 2) following acts or operations which can determine a prohibited situation: orders inhibiting the prosecution of the acts and removing their effects. Latvia The Law of Electronic Mass Media (2010) Electronic media n/a Section 14. It defines the dominant position of companies in the audio-visual sector with 35% of market share. Competition law (2002) All Competition Council The Competition law limits market share of any company up to 40%. However, the evaluation of dominant position of media firms will be provided only in the case of merger of companies. Chapter VI of the National Security Law (last amended 2021) All market sectors Cabinet of Ministers Restrictions are provided for commercial companies of significance for national security, as defined by Section 37, based on media reach criteria (see Table 1.1). Under Section 38, the Cabinet decides on obligations for such commercial companies, related, for example, to transferring the undertaking, and obtaining decisive influence. Under Section 40, a permit from the Cabinet is necessary before obtaining decisive influence or a qualifying holding in such a company. Under Section 42, a permit from the Cabinet is required for a transfer of such an undertaking. Under Section 41(1), “A shareholder, stockholder in a commercial company of significance to national security, a person who exercises indirect holding (right to vote), or a member must receive a permit to retain holding or to remain a member in the commercial company if its beneficial owner changes. Lithuania L aw on Competition A ll Competition Council Media concentration regulation follows general rules listed in the Competition Law (where the dominant position is defined as of 40% of the available market); no specific criteria for concentration regulation of the news media sector are provided. There are no special legal acts in Lithuania that would restrict the ownership concentration of the media organizations or the shares of the market that they occupy. Also, each of a group of three or a smaller number of economic entities (except for economic entities engaged in retail trade) with the largest shares of the relevant market, jointly holding 70 percent or more of the relevant market shall be considered to occupy a dominant position (according to the Law on Competition). https://kt.gov.lt/en/activities/abuse-of-dominance/related-information-1/investigation-procedure-1 Law on Electronic Communications (15 April 2004 No IX-2135) E lectronic communications network (radio, tv) Communications Regulatory Authority Art 15 (1). An undertaking shall be deemed to have significant market power if, either individually or jointly with others, it enjoys a position equivalent to dominance, i.e. a position of economic strength affording it a power to behave to an appreciable extent independently of competitors, customers and ultimately consumers. [...] (3). An undertaking shall be identified as having significant market power where this has been determined by a decision of the Communications Regulatory Authority based on market analysis, and it shall be deemed as such until the Communications Regulatory Authority determines by its decision based on another market analysis that the undertaking does not have significant market power. The Communication commission can impose on significant market power subjects the obligations under art. 17 of the law and transparency obligations (art. 18). Luxembourg No - - - Malta No - - - The Netherlands No - - - Poland 1992 Broadcasting Act 2007 Act on Competition and Consumer Protection A udiovisual, radio KRRiT/NBC - National Broadcasting Council The framework limits only monomedia concentration at the audiovisual and broadcasting markets. This is connected with a procedure of rewarding/revoking licences. A broadcasting licence may not be awarded if transmission of a programme service by the applicant results in achieving a dominant position in a given area (Article 36. 2.2). Yet, the Broadcasting Act does not explicitly define “a dominant position in the mass media in a given area”. It is the 2007 Act on Competition and Consumer Protection as amended, which provides for an interpretation of such a position. This is understood as a position that allows an entrepreneur to prevent efficient competition on the relevant market, entailing that the market share exceeds 40%. In compliance with the Broadcasting Act, the National Broadcasting Council evaluates whether a particular applicant may achieve such a dominant position considering above all the main goals of the Broadcasting Act, open and pluralistic nature of broadcasting. Article 38.2. states that “The broadcasting licence may be revoked if (3) by transmitting the programme service the broadcaster gains a dominant position in mass media on the given relevant market as defined in regulations on protection of competition and consumer.” Portugal No - - - Romania National Audiovisual Law (Law 504/2002) Audiovisual National Audiovisual Council (CNA) The threshold is placed at 30% and such a dominant position is defined as follows: Art 44(6) “A natural or legal person shall be deemed to hold a dominant position in shaping public opinion, in case the average market share of its services surpasses 30% of the relevant market.” (law 504/ 2002). Article 44(3): in evaluating a dominant position, only those program services with significant importance in shaping public opinion (such as generalist programs, news, analysis and debates on latest political and/or economical topics) owned either by the natural or legal person owning a licence or if they are direct or indirect holders of more than 20% of the capital shares or voting rights shares of a company holding an audiovisual licence, are taken into consideration. When a natural or legal person holds a dominant position in shaping public opinion that surpasses the rating defined bt law, the Council shall summon broadcasters with a majority position in shaping it, so as to abide by the accepted rating and to the time compliance which should be fulfilled. By the time the summon expires, a new evaluation shall be made and the Council shall decide upon the precise ways to diminish some of the participation quotas or the number of licenses held, in keeping with the natural or legal person’s choice, within a three-month period. In case, even after this latter term expires, the dominant position persists, the analogue audio-visual license shall be withdrawn. Slovakia No - - - Slovenia No - - - Spain No - - - Sweden Radio and Television Act (SFS, 2010:696, chapt. 4, 11§, 15§ and chapt. 13, 27§-28§) Radio and television There are two administrative authorities overseeing compliance with the ownership limitations but there are no clear criteria for them to use. The thresholds or limits to prevent a high level of horizontal concentration of ownership in the media sector is regulated in Radio and Television Act (SFS, 2010:696, chapt. 4, 11§, 15§ and chapt. 13, 27§-28§) and in the broadcasting licenses. However, the Radio and Television Act contains no clearer criteria than the wording: "ownership may not change more than to a limited extent". Thus, it is up to each control authority to assess what is really meant by "more than to a limited extent"(also note that this formulation has no constitutional support). This is problematic to define/enforce. In addition to this, the media sector is regulated on the basis of the more general competition law (SFS, 2008:579). 7 .1.3 Measures regulating cross-media ownership In 11 Member States, media companies operating in one sector cannot obtain an authorisation to operate in another media or non-media-related sector. At the same time, s ome Member States do not have any rule (Belgium (FL), Belgium (FR), Bulgaria, Czechia, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Ireland, Latvia, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Spain and Sweden). There are significant divergences among those national rules. Among those Member States that have measures, there are important differences. For example, Member States introduce specific limitations on cross-media ownership (prohibition for satellite license holders from controlling or investing in terrestrial television in Greece , prohibit ions from being in more than two of the following three situations in France : (i) hold one or more licences for terrestrial television services in an area with a population of more than 4 million, (ii) hold one or more licences for radio services serving areas with a population of up to 30 million, or (iii) publish one or more daily political and general newspapers representing more than 20 % of the total circulation of daily political and general newspapers ). By contrast, other Member States ( Czechia ) have no specific thresholds to prevent a high degree of cross-ownership between different types of media. Country Name of regulation Sectors Which authority is responsible for ensuring compliance What are the applicable procedures and benchmarks Austria Federal Act on Audiovisual Media Services (No. 84/2001, last amended in 2021) All The Federal Competition Authority, the Federal Cartel Prosecutor, media authority KommAustria. Decisions are made by the Federal Cartel Court. Media companies that control more than 30% of the Austrian newspaper or magazine or radio market are not allowed to own a TV station. Press can own radio but not TV Vertical A company that has more than 30% of coverage to the population by means of cable network on the national territory cannot own a television channel. Diagonal A company that has more than 30% of a nationwide range radio service, or more than 30% of a nationwide range of the daily or weekly press cannot be a television broadcaster. Belgium (FL) No - - - Belgium (FR) No - - - Bulgaria No - - - Croatia Electronic Media Act (153/09) A udiovisual, radio The Council for Electronic Media Article 61 states that the operator distributing audio-visual and/or radio programs could not be a television and/or radio service provider. The new EMA contains provisions targeting cross-media ownership in cases of cross-ownership between television, radio, print, and advertising. A new provision (Article 64, paragraph) includes ˝media service provides through internet, cable and other forms of transmission˝. This implicitly includes electronic publications although they are not mentioned as such in this article. The new EMA, however, excluded news agencies form cross-ownership restrictions, which existed in the previous version of the EMA. Companies that work in the advertising sector (marketing agencies), or physical entities affiliated with them (which own more than 10% share in their capital or more than 10% of management or voter's rights), may not be founders of radio or television broadcasters, nor can they own shares in the capital of the television or radio broadcasters. Article 54: (2) the television and/or radio broadcaster who has concession at the state level and a share exceeding 10% of the capital of publisher who publishes daily newspapers printed in more than 3 000 copies, and vice versa, (3) the television and/or radio broadcaster who has concession at the state level and a share exceeding 10% of the capital of a legal person who performs the activity of a newspaper agency, and vice versa, (4) the television and/or radio broadcaster who has concession at the state level and simultaneously publishes daily newspapers printed in more than 3 000 copies, (6) the television and/or radio broadcaster who has a concession at the regional or local level of coverage and simultaneously publishes daily newspapers of local importance in the same or in the neighbouring area, (7) the media service provider set out in Article 79 of this Act who simultaneously publishes daily newspapers printed in more than 3 000 copies, (8) the media service provider set out in Article 79 of this Act who has a share exceeding 10% of the capital of a publisher who publishes daily newspapers printed in more than 3 000 copies, and vice versa. There are no limitations relating to digital news media. Electronic Media Act A udiovisual, radio Electronic Media Council A particular broadcaster may perform either television media service or radio media service. Exceptions if the broadcaster does not provide television and radio media services in the same area (linked to limitations on media reach) Electronic Media Act P ress Electronic Media Council Media publishers cannot be also a media content operator and vice versa Cyprus Law on radio and tv A udiovisual, radio, press A large set of rules aiming at limiting 'oligopolies and a monopoly' provided in art. 19 of the Law on Radio and Television Organisations cover Radio and Television and the press to the extent that participation in press companies is connected with a Radio and/or a TV licence. If a company or its shareholders have or control in any way over 5% of the capital share of a press business or in a radio /or television company, the company cannot get a television /or a radio licence respectively (art. 19(4) of Law 7(I)1998). This means also that in cases of cross media ownership, but also in horizontal media ownership, a company can have one radio or one television licence; if they extent their participation in the capital share of another medium the shares of the company cannot be more than 5% of that second medium. This threshold applies to the person's shares added eventually to shares hold or controlled by his/her relatives' up to second degree. The radio and TV authority then monitors the situation and its prior approval is needed for any change in shareholding or management /control of a media (art. 20) Czechia No - - There are no specific thresholds to prevent a high degree of cross-ownership between different types of media, therefore no administrative authority to oversee compliance with them, and no sanctioning/enforcement powers. Only the Broadcasting Act (231/2001, section 58) sets the duty for broadcasters or rebroadcasters to notify the Broadcasting Council in case of market consolidation between radio and TV broadcasters. Denmark No - - - Estonia No - - - Finland No - - - France Law n° 86-1067 of 30 September 1986 (Loi Léotard) on audiovisual communication A udiovisual ARCOM (Regulatory Authority for Audiovisual and Digital Communication) “Pluri-media” concentration is addressed in Articles 41-1 and 41-2, with a “2-out-of-3” rule: for the CSA to deliver a national broadcasting authorization, no single agent can simultaneously be in more than 2 of the 3 following situations: 1. Control over television channels touching more than 4 million people; 2. Control over radio stations touching more than 30 million people; 3. Publish daily newspapers that represent more than 20% of the total national circulation. At the local level: 1. Control of one or several local television stations; 2. Control over one or several local radio channels that represent more than 10% of the cumulated local audience; 3. Control over one or several general and political daily newspapers in the same zone. Germany Interstate Media Treaty (Medienstaatsvertrag) and regional rules Audiovisual State media authorities and Commission on Concentration of Ownership in the Media (KEK) German media concentration law provides that no company may obtain “predominant power of opinion” (vorherrschende Meinungsmacht) in nationwide television. Such predominance is legally assumed to be in excess of 30% audience share, or – alternatively – when exceeding a 25% audience share threshold where a broadcaster also has relevant activities in other media markets. KEK focuses on television, but, to a limited extent, also includes other relevant markets. In a former decision, the acquisition of a large commercial TV company by a leading publishing house had been prohibited (Axel Springer case). Act against Restraints of Competition P ress State media authorities and Commission on Concentration of Ownership in the Media (KEK) High level of control is considered when the publication, production and distribution of newspapers, magazines and parts thereof, are eight times the amount of turnover. Greece Art. 3(3) of Law 3592/2007 A udiovisual, radio, press National Council for Radio and Television (ESR) Art. 3(3) of Law 3592/2007: Concentration of control defines the concept of dominant position in the market and it differs based on the four types of media or a combination of them is concerned: TV, radio, newspapers and magazines. So the range for a dominant position is between 25%-35%. When a natural or legal person is engaged in two or more media of a different type, a dominant position exists when the person acquires a market share of: - more than 35% in the relevant market of the range of coverage of each medium; - more than 32% percent in the aggregated market, when the person is active in two different media of the same range; - more than 28% in the aggregated market when the person is active in three different media of the same range; - more than 25% in the aggregated market when the person is active in four different media of the same range. Hungary Media Act 2010 Article 67-70 R adio NMHH, Media Council Art. 67-71 : (1) Those authorised to provide analogue linear radio media services based on a public contract or broadcasting agreement shall have the right to simultaneously provide a) maximum one national analogue linear radio media service, b) maximum two regional and four local analogue linear radio media services, or c) maximum twelve local analogue linear radio media services (2) With the exception of thematic analogue linear radio media services, providers authorised to provide national analogue linear radio media services and those having a qualifying holding therein may not acquire a qualifying holding in undertakings providing or distributing other media services. Ireland No - - - Italy Legislative decree 208/2021 (new AVMS Code) Electronic communications, audiovisual, radio, press AGCOM (Autorità per le garanzie nelle comunicazioni) Art. 51 (3b and 3.c) of the AVMS Code sets lower thresholds to evaluate concentrations in the following cases: 1) for electronic communication companies, achieving more than 20% of total revenues in the electronic communication sector, lower trhesholds for notifications and of the indexes to be considered "symptomatic" of significant market power: 10% of the total revenues of the SIC; 25% in one of more of its sub-markets; 2) companies whose exceed 8% of the SIC, and at the same time control or acquire shares newspapers (except for the electronic newspapers). (in the previous formulation, the thresholds were lower but to be evaluated automatically) Latvia No - - - Lithuania Law on Electronic Communications (No. IX-2135/2004) E lectronic communication networks (audiovisual, radio, infrastructures) Competition Council Article 15 (2) recites: "2. Where an undertaking has significant market power on the relevant market, it may also be deemed to have significant market power on a closely related market, where the links between the two markets are such as to allow the market power held in one market to be leveraged into the other market, thereby strengthening the market power of the undertaking" Luxembourg No - - - Malta Broadcasting Act (Act XII/1991, latest amended by Act XVI of 2018) Audiovisual and radio Broadcasting authority Art. 10 (5): ‘it is possible for one company to own broadcasting stations to the amount and type allowed by law together with any amount of press media, of whatever type or nature, varying from newspapers, magazines, pamphlets, posters, billboards, not to mention telephony companies as well’ (6A) The same organisation, person or company may not own, control or be editorially responsible for more than one community radio service and any organisation which owns, controls or is editorially responsible for a nationwide radio service or a nationwide television service or such other service as mentioned in sub-article (4)(d) may not own, control or be editorially responsible for a community radio service. The Netherlands No - - - Poland No - - - Portugal n/a n/a n/a n/a Romania No - - - Slovakia Act on Broadcasting and Retransmission limitations (Act No. 308/2000) Digital Broadcasting Act (No. 220/2007) Act no. 167/2008 Coll. on Periodicals and Agency News and on Amendments to Certain Acts (Press Act). Audiovisual, Radio, Press, Online General overseeing is done by the Broadcasting Council for both Act on Broadcasting and Digital Broadcasting Act. (Act on Broadcasting section 44 and in Digital Broadcasting Act section 54 para. 1 to 3.) Cross ownership is a holding of more than 25% in the share capital of other companies or more than 25% of the voting rights in other companies, as well as mutually among closely related persons. The publisher of a periodical that is published at least five times a week and is available to the public in at least half of the territory of the Slovak Republic cannot simultaneously be a licensed broadcaster on the multi-regional or national level. All forms of cross ownership or personal connection between the broadcaster of a radio program service and the broadcaster of a television program service to each other, or with a periodical press publisher on the national level, shall be prohibited. One legal or natural person can have a cross-ownership connection with several licensed broadcasters of radio programme services on the local or regional level, or with several licensed broadcasters of television programme services on the local or regional level only if the broadcasting of all of the broadcasters with whom this person has cross-ownership connections can be received by not more than 50% of total population. This provision excludes the Public Service Media, which form a single company that broadcasts both radio and television. A legal entity or natural person must not be a broadcaster and simultaneously provide a terrestrial multiplex on the territory of the Slovak Republic. One legal or natural person can have a cross-ownership connection with several licensed broadcasters of radio programme services on the local or regional level, or with several licensed broadcasters of television programme services on the local or regional level only if the broadcasting of all the broadcasters with whom this person has cross-ownership connections can be received by not more than 50% of total population. Slovenia Mass Media Act 1994 Audiovisual, Radio, Print Press The Ministry of Culture with the Securities Market Agency, Slovenian Competition Protection Agency, Agency for Communication Networks and Services (AKOS) and the Broadcasting Council Articles 56, 57, 59, 60 and 61 prevent a publisher of a daily informative printed medium that holds an ownership stake of more than 20 percent to also be the publisher or a co-founder of the broadcaster of a radio or television programme service and may not perform radio or television activities. Same goes for a broadcaster of a radio or television programme service with more than twenty percent ownership stake, he may not also be the publisher or a co-founder of the publisher of a daily informative printed medium (article 56 of the Mass Media Act). Article 59 states: "(1) A single broadcaster may perform radio activities alone or television activities alone, unless stipulated otherwise by law."). Articles 60 and 61 introduce the Incompatibility of performing advertising activities and radio and television activities and Incompatibility of performing telecommunications activities and radio and television activities. AKOS and Agency for Protection of Competition can refuse to give out a licence, based on articles 104., 104.a and 105 of Mass Media Act, however it rarely happens. Article 58 of Mass Media Act states the competent ministry may refuse to issue an approval licence, block a merger, acquisition, or divestiture. Digital media are not monitored to such extent. Spain No - - - Sweden No - - - 7 .2. Capital control laws regulating foreign ownership In a few Member States (Belgium (FR), Belgium (FL), Estonia, H ungary, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia) these laws do not exi s t. In 14 Member States, restrictions on foreign ownership exist, whereby non-EEA citizens or entities are forbidden from controlling more than a certain amount of capital in a national media company. Related to this set of rules are the administrative procedures which govern the allocation, renewal and withdrawal of licenses. These national rules present relevant divergences, as illustrated in the table below. For instance, online media players are often not covered by such media ownership/pluralism laws, also the conditions and thresholds vary greatly depending on the Member State. Country Name of regulation Sectors Which authority is responsible for ensuring compliance What are the applicable procedures and benchmarks Austria Federal Act dated 12th June 1981 on the Press and other Publication Media (Media Act – MedienG) All, including online n/a The application of media ownership provisions to foreign media owners is limited to the cases when foreign media are “completely or almost exclusively” distributed in Austria. Foreign ownership for TV services cannot exceed 49% of the shares. Investment Control Act, issued on 24 July 2020. (87th Federal Act, enacting an Investment Control Act and amending the Foreign Trade Act from 2011) Utilities, tech, supply of critical resources , including media Minister of Economy Investors not from EEA member countries or Switzerland need to obtain approval from the Minister of the Economy in the event of an acquisition which involves a stake of 25% or more or a controlling interest in Austrian companies active critical sectors. For particularly sensitive areas the threshold is lowered to 10%. The Minister of Economy can prohibit the transaction if it is capable of giving rise to a threat to public security or public order (the freedom and plurality of the media being categorized as a threat). Audiovisual Media Services Act – AMD-G Original version: Federal Law Gazette I No. 84/2001 as amended by: Federal Law Gazette I No. 150/2020 date of the version: 20 August 2021 Audiovisual n/a In the event that the media service provider is organized under the legal structure of a corporation, a partnership or a cooperative, a maximum of 49% of the shares may be held by foreigners or held by legal persons or partnerships that are under the uniform leadership of a foreigner or an undertaking which has its domicile abroad, or where foreigners or legal persons or partnerships having their domicile abroad have possibilities to take influence as it is regulated in § 244 (2), in connection with paragraphs 4 and 5 of the Business Code. Belgium (FL) n/a n/a n/a n/a Belgium (FR) n/a n/a n/a n/a Bulgaria The Law on the Economic and Financial Relations with Companies Registered in Jurisdictions with Preferential Tax Regime, Entities Controlled by Them and Their Beneficial Owners (referred to as the Offshore Companies Act) enacted in 2014 and amended several times since Audiovisual and radio Minister of Finance It prohibits companies registered in jurisdictions with preferential tax regimes (also called tax havens) and the entities under their control from directly or indirectly owning TV and radio licences but can be circumvented due to some exceptions: if the offshore company is involved in print periodicals publishing companies, the latter having submitted information about the ultimate owners who are natural persons under the Mandatory Deposition of Print and Other Words Act. Croatia n/a n/a n/a n/a Cyprus Radio and TV Law (Law 7(I) 98) Audiovisual and radio Cyprus Radio Television Authority (CRTA) The threshold for non-EU citizens is 5% (against the ordinary 25%!) on approval by the Council of Ministers and total for non-EU shareholders in a license should not exceed 25%. Art. 19: Only EU (legal or natural) persons can hold a licence to establish, install and operate a radio broadcaster or a television broadcaster of small local coverage. For TV of broader coverage, natural persons are excluded - Art. 18: The same natural or legal person shall be prohibited from obtaining more than one licences for a radio broadcaster and the same legal person shall be prohibited from obtaining more than one licences for a television broadcaster. Czechia n/a n/a n/a n/a Denmark Investment Screening Act (Act n. 842 of 10/05/2021) All commercial companies . Public authorities and institutions in the field of critical infrastructure, which constitutes one of the particularly sensitive sectors. Critical infrastructure includes companies and entities needed to maintain or restore the following socially important functions in the following 11 important sectors; one being the ICT which includes: publicly accessible electronic communications networks and services, news coverage covered by a public service broadcaster pursuant to the Radio and Television Broadcasting Act. Danish Business Authority Investment screening in Denmark is performed according to a two-part model consisting of a sector-specific authorisation requirement and a universal voluntary notification option. The Act covers not only the acquisition of shareholdings or voting rights in a company or entity, but also if similar control is achieved by other means. I.e. if, in other ways than by acquiring voting rights, similar control or significant influence is achieved, e.g. by agreement-based control and influence, by purchasing assets in the Danish company or by long-term loans. There will be similar control by other means if the foreign investor directly or indirectly gains control or significant influence in a Danish company or entity by e.g., Controlling voting rights by virtue of agreements with other investors, corresponding to at least 10% of the shareholding or voting rights (Under the rules on the sector-specific permit requirement, investors must obtain prior authorisation from the DBA) but (under the rules on notification, notification is voluntary for investments that will achieve at least 25% of the shareholding or voting rights or equivalent controls by other means, and where the investment may pose a threat to national security or public order). If a company has previously received authorisation for an investment, they must reapply for authorisation for subsequent acquisitions, which means that their shareholding or voting rights in the Danish company will amount to 20%, 1/3rd, 50%, 2/3rds or 100% after the acquisition. The rules on authorisation apply to among others, foreign nationals, national authorities and government agencies in non-EU and EFTA countries, including public institutions and state-owned investment funds, non-profit associations, non-profit organizations and similar legal entities outside the EU and EFTA. The rules on notification apply to among others, foreign nationals with the exception of nationals of EU and EFTA countries, companies domiciled outside EU or EFTA countries, companies domiciled in Denmark and other EU or EFTA countries if the company is controlled by persons or companies from countries outside the EU or EFTA. The Danish Business Authority may carry out further investigation if an investment has been made without authorisation in violation of the Act. If it turns out that the investment has been made without authorisation, the Authority can either order the violation to be brought to an end, i.e. authorisation must be applied for within a specified period, or order the investment to be stopped by a given date. Estonia No - - - Finland Limited Liability Companies Act (624/2006) All limited liability companies registered in accordance with Finnish law n/a n/a France Loi n° 86-1067 du 30 septembre 1986 (Loi Léotard) Press n/a Art.7 forbids foreigners from acquiring, directly or indirectly, more than 20% of the social capital or voting rights of a francophone publication. "Subject to international commitments entered into by France and comprising either a clause of national assimilation or a reciprocity clause in the field of the press, foreigners may not, from the publication of this law, proceed to a n acquisition having the effect of increasing, directly or indirectly, their share to more than twenty percent of the share capital or voting rights of a company publishing a French-language publication." Article 8: A second kind of limitation is stated as “Absence of links with a foreign government”. Publishing companies or media collaborators are not allowed to perceive directly or indirectly any subsidies or funding from a foreign government. In the French recent media acquisition history, however, there is no case that can be regarded as an example of this scenario. Loi n° 2016-1524 du 14 novembre 2016 Audiovisual and radio n/a Article 14. Authorization for a French-language terrestrial radio or television service shall not be granted to a company in which more than 20% of the share capital or voting rights are held, directly or indirectly, by persons of foreign nationality (so, non-French I suppose). French Monetary and Financial Code All n/a Articles L.151-1 et seq. R.151-1 et seq. The acquisition of control of a French company by a foreign company, or, for non-EU companies, the acquisition of a stake of 33.3% or more in a French company, qualifies as a foreign investment falling within the scope of the special regime governed by the articles mentioned here. In addition to general declaratory obligations, such foreign investment will require prior authorisation from the Ministry of Economy if they concern a "sensitive" sector. Germany Foreign Trade and Payments Ordinance of 2 August 2013 (Federal Law Gazette [BGBl.] Part I p. 2865), as last amended by Article 2 of the Ordinance of 25 August 2021 (BAnz AT 07.09.2021 V1) (Außenwirtschaftsverordnung - AWV) Media companies and also companies operating in critical infrastructure, the defense sector or IT security products. Ministry of Economics and Technology The German Federal Ministry for Economic Affairs and Energy (BMWi) can block direct and indirect foreign investments when the investment applies to at least 10% of the voting rights of certain German target companies. This 10% threshold applies to companies operating in critical infrastructure, the defense sector or IT security products. For all other sectors, the 25% threshold will remain in place. Media companies also fall under FDI control. Such transactions have to be reported and can be blocked as well. Greece Law 4339/2015 (art. 5º); Law 4512/2018 Audiovisual and radio National Council for Radio and Television (NCRTV) Companies limited by shares established in accordance with the legislation of an EU/EEA member state are subject to the obligation of registered shares up to natural persons. Such an obligation applies when the legislation of the country of establishment requires for the entire business of the undertakings concerned or for their ‘media activity’ registered shares up to natural persons for all the company’s shares. When no such obligation exists, a relevant certificate issued by a competent authority of the country concerned shall be furnished, provided that such certificate can be granted in accordance with domestic rules. By default, a sworn statement of the candidate will be submitted to the ESR. Law 3592/2007 Audiovisual and radio See sheet 1. Art. 5(14) of Law 3592/2007: The media ownership restrictions apply in the case of natural or legal persons which own or participate in media undertakings in Greece only as regards their activities in Greece. Law 1746/1988 Press Participation of foreign capital (from within or outside the EU) is subject to the obligation of registered shares up to natural persons. Such an obligation is imposed if the legislation of the country of establishment imposes such an obligation on the undertakings concerned for their entire activity or their activity in a specific field. When no such obligation exists, a relevant certificate issued by a competent authority of the country concerned shall be furnished, if such a certificate can be provided in accordance with domestic rules. By default, a sworn statement shall be submitted to the National Council for Radio and Television (NCRTV). The obligation for registered shares up to natural persons does not apply in the case of shares of companies listed in the member states of the EU and the OECD (Art. 24(3)) of Law 1746/1988). In addition, following the modifications brought to Article 24(3) of Law 1746/1988 by Law 4635/2019, the obligation for registered shares does not apply in the case of shares of a) undertakings for Collective Investment in Transferable Securities, established in EU/EEA Member States and supervised by competent authorities, regardless of whether or not they are admitted to regulated markets, b) Alternative Investment Funds, established in EU/EEA Member States, supervised by competent authorities and admitted to regulated markets; and c) Collective Investment Funds, established in OECD countries and admitted in regulated markets (Art. 24(3) of Law 1746/1988). Law 2328/1995 N ewspapers Restrictions on horizontal ownership (see sheet 1) apply also to the shareholders of undertakings which are not listed in the stock markets of EU and OECD countries (Art. 13(11) of Law 2328/1995). Hungary No - - - Ireland Ownership and Control Policy 2019 Audiovisual and radio Broadcasting Authority of Ireland (BAI) In considering ownership and/or control proposals, the BAI requires that non-EU entities shall have established a registered office within the EU. The BAI shall also have regard to the extent to which reciprocal arrangements for investment and licensing are in place with the relevant non-EU state. Relevant provisions of the Audio-Visual Media Services Directive will be applied as required. Italy Legislative decree n. 21/2012; Legislative decree n. 105/2019; Legislative decree n. 23/2020 Public and private companies in strategic sectors (Golden Power) Presidenza del consiglio, but other departments are involved: Treasury, Economic development, and Infrastructure, defense and other depending on the relevant sector In 2012 (with Decree-Law number 21 of 15 March 2012, converted with amendments with Law number 56 of 2012) marked a transition from the golden share to the so-called Golden Power system for foreign direct investments (FDI), which refers to a series of powers that can be exercised by the Government in strategic sectors. The current system of Golden Power results from of subsequent modifications and has been updated following also the Regulation (EU) 2019/452. In 2020, following the pandemic, a system of "enforced Golden Power" has been introduced, enlarging the sectors defined as strategic, and including media pluralism and media freedom (decree 23/2020). Procedure and benchmarks, after the 2020 reform, are: (i) the immediate and full operation of the notification obligations, provided for in the screening procedures; (ii) the introduction of percentage thresholds, upon reaching which the notification obligation is triggered; (iii) the partial subjection to the notification obligation also of investors belonging to the European Union; (iv) the introduction of new powers that can be activated automatically by the Presidency of the Council of Ministers, in case of violation of the notification obligation. In the reformed system (extended up to all 2021 by decree 56/2021), notifications are due by: 1) EU companies: in case they achieve control; 2) extra-EU companies: lower thresholds (above 10%, if the investment exceeds 1 million EUR); 3) companies of every nationality whose acts change the ownership structure and control of the assets concerned. These powers include: the possibility by the Government of vetoing certain corporate choices and the possibility of opposing the purchase of shareholdings in specific and well-defined circumstances. The special powers also allow the State to intervene in the circulation of shares and in the extraordinary transactions carried out by companies, regardless of a state participation in the corporate structure of the entity. The FDI notified are communicated to European Commission and the EU member states (EU coordination mechanism). Special powers (golden power) include, among others, the right to dictate specific conditions for the acquisition of shareholdings, to veto the adoption of certain corporate resolutions and to oppose the purchase of shareholdings. Legislative decree 208/2021 (new AVMS code) articles 13-28. AGCOM 435/01/CONS: https://www.mise.gov.it/images/stories/recuperi/Comunicazioni/Delibera_435_01_CONS.pdf Audiovisual (linear, satellite, on demand) Ministry of Economic Development for digital terrestrial; AGCOM fo r the others Companies must be based in Italy or EU; extra EU under reciprocity conditions Law n. 46/1981; law n. 62/2001 Press Court Italian and EU citizens in possession of political rights; companies based in Italy and EU. Extra-EU: under reciprocity conditions Latvia National Security Law (adopted on 14.12.2000; entry into force on 12.01.2001) Commercial companies registered in Latvia which are of significance to national security (among others, electronic communications with significant market power, audible broadcasting mass media with a coverage of 60% of the territory, audiovisual electronic mass media with a coverage of 95% of the territory); companies which operate a national critical infrastructure; companies which operate a European critical infrastructure. The Latvian Cabinet The Latvian Ministry (of Economic Affairs) Phase 1: The Latvian Ministry drafts a decision, taking into account the opinion of the State security services, and delivers the draft decision to the Latvian Cabinet for consideration. Phase 2: The Latvian Cabinet issues a final decision, which is notified to the addressee by the Latvian Ministry. A notification is sent to the company which is the object of the transaction at issue. The foreign investor must apply to the Ministry of Economics before carrying out the transaction. The Latvian Cabinet may decide to restrict a transaction if it results in influence endangering or potentially endangering national security in a commercial company of significance to national security. A transaction in violation of a decision prohibiting it is invalid. The Latvian Act does not provide for any further sanctions for violations of the obligations or non-compliance with the procedure. Lithuania Art. 22 Law on Provision of Information (last amended in 2019) A udiovisual n/a Article 22. 2 Only legal persons or legal persons established in the states of the European Economic Area and organisations which have no legal personality as well as branches of such legal persons and organisations which have no legal personality established in the Republic of Lithuania and in other states of the European Economic Area may be engaged in activities related to licensed radio and/or television programme broadcasting and/or re-broadcasting and to dissemination of television programmes and/or individual programmes via the Internet. Luxembourg n/a n/a n/a n/a Malta n/a n/a n/a n/a The Netherlands n/a n/a n/a n/a Poland 1992 Broadcasting Act Broadcasters KRRiT – Krajowa Rada Radiofonii i Telewizji (National Broadcasting Council) Under the Article 35, para 2, point 1, companies having foreign shareholders may be awarded a license under the condition that foreign shares in the equity stake or the capital do not exceed 49%. Also, companies with foreign shareholders may be awarded a broadcasting license if the company’s statutes stipulate that the share of votes exercised by foreign entities and subsidiaries does not exceed 49% of votes in a meeting of shareholders or a general meeting, or if foreign entities hold, directly or indirectly, a majority in excess of 49% of votes in a partnership. The consequence of non-compliance is non-granting the license, revoking the license or withdrawal of the consent of the KRRiT Chairman in case a foreign entity purchases or acquires shares or interest, or acquires rights in shares or interest in a company holding a broadcasting licence to transmit a programme service Portugal No - - - Romania No - - - Slovakia No - - - Slovenia The third Anti-COVID-19 Act (2020) - entered into force on 31 May 2020 Critical infrastructure, information, media Ministry of Economic Development and Technology Investments by foreign investors acquiring an interest of at least 10% of the share capital or voting rights to be notified to the Ministry. The definition of a 'foreign investor' is defined as a company or organization domiciled in, or a citizen of, an EU Member State, the EEA or Switzerland, or a third country. Meaning that this scrutiny applies to all investors outside Slovenia. Spain Law 7/2010 (Audiovisual Act) Audiovisual and radio Comisión Nacional de los Mercados y la Competencia (National Markets and Antitrust Commission) Article 25(1-4) of Law 7/2010 uses the expression "licencia de comunicación audiovisual", which includes both radio and television. Non-EEA members can be capital stock owners as long as there is a principle of reciprocity applied. Non-EEA nationals cannot hold directly or indirectly more than 25% of a capital stock in the radio or television sectors. Furthermore, the total shares in a ‘licensee’s capital held by individuals or bodies corporate from countries that are non-EEA members must be less than 50%. Application of sanctions (infringements range from minor to major and fines are applied accordingly) Royal Decree-Law 8/2020 Critical sectors including the media sector n/a Royal Decree-Law 8/2020 requires previous authorization from the Spanish Government for those Foreign direct investments ("FDI") in Strategic Sectors or conducted by Certain Investors, including the media sector. The list of certain investors include: a) foreign investors directly or indirectly controlled by the government (including sovereign funds, state bodies or the armed forces) of a third country; b) foreign investors that have already invested or been involved in the security, public health or public policy sectors in another Member State, and in particular those sectors listed above; and c) foreign investors subject to administrative or judicial proceedings in another Member State, in their home state or in a third state for engaging in criminal or illegal activities. Absence of the ex ante authorization will result in the FDI being deemed null and void and considered as an infringement. The Government may approve the investment or impose conditions, prohibit it or unwind it. The application for the ex ante authori s ation will be deemed to be rejected in case there is no decision by the government within six months from the application date. The infringement may be sanctioned with fines ranging between EUR 30 000 and the transaction value Sweden n/a n/a n/a n/a 7 . 3 . Media market scrutiny 7 .3.1 Measures regulating the involvement of media regulators in the context of the assessment of media mergers and acquisitions In several Member States, media regulators intervene in the assessment of media mergers and acquisitions . Nevertheless, their rules present relevant divergences. In particular, in eight Member States separate assessments of media mergers and transactions are done by the media regulator. In some Member States, the assessment of media mergers is subject to a set of relevant criteria, such as the likely effect of the merger on media plurality. At the same time, in other Member States no specific media pluralism assessment is provided for by the law. In 14 Member States (Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czechia, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Ireland, Latvia, Luxembourg, Malta, Romania, Slovakia, Spain and Sweden), there are no explicit media pluralism considerations in the context of the examination of such transactions. Country Name of regulation Sectors Which authority is responsible for ensuring compliance What are the applicable procedures and benchmarks Austria Federal Act against Cartels and other Restrictions of Competition of 2005, as amended on 21 September 2017 Competition Law - WettbG of 2002, as amended on 5 January 2022 Audiovisual and radio Press Federal Competition Authority Federal Cartel Prosecutor Cartel Court KommAustria (Austrian Communications Authority) Assessment procedure § 10(3) subpara. 1.Upon receipt of notification, the Federal Competition Authority shall, without delay, transmit the notification including its annexes in two identical copies to the Federal Cartel Prosecutor § 11(1) Within four weeks from receipt of a notification by the Federal Competition Authority, the official parties (§ 40 refers to the Federal Competition Authority and the Federal Cartel Prosecutor as 'official parties') may request the Cartel Court to examine the merger § 81(2) Before filing a request for examination pursuant to § 11, the Federal Cartel Prosecutor shall grant the Federal Competition Authority the opportunity to give its opinion § 82(1) The Federal Cartel Prosecutor may validly waive his right also vis-à-vis the Federal Competition Authority to file a request for examination with regard to the notification of a merger. The Cartel Court is the ultimate decision-making authority as stipulated in § 12. § 10(4) of the Competition Law: If the media sector is affected, the Austrian Communications Authority is to be given the opportunity to comment whether it has been requested to do so by the Cartel Court or not. The statement has no binding character for the Cartel Court. Belgium (FL) No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger Belgium (FR) n/a n/a n/a n/a Bulgaria No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger Croatia The Electronic Media Act of 2009, as amended on 22 October 2021 Audiovisual and radio Press Agency for the Protection of Competition Electronic Media Agency Electronic Media Council Assessment procedure Article 62(2) At the request of the body responsible for the protection of competition, the Electronic Media Agency shall submit an expert opinion within 30 days of receiving the request for the submission of that opinion. If the Electronic Media Agency does not submit the requested opinion after the expiry of that period, it shall be deemed that there are no objections to the implementation of the notified concentration. Article 63(1) Media service providers are obliged to notify the Electronic Media Council in writing within five days of any change of ownership, regardless of the conditions set out in competition regulations, in order to assess the effects related to the protection of pluralism and diversity of electronic media. Cyprus No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger Czechia No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger Denmark No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger Estonia No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger Finland No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger France Law n° 86-1067 of 30 September 1986 (Loi Léotard), as amended on 1 January 2022 Code of Commerce of 2000, as amended on 29 April 2022 Audiovisual and radio Press Competition Authority Audiovisual and Digital Communication Regulatory Authority Regulatory Authority for Electronic Communications, Posts and Press Distribution Assessment procedure Art. 41-4 of Loi Léotard: When a concentration operation concerning, directly or indirectly, a publisher or a distributor of radio and television services is the subject of an in-depth examination the Competition Authority collects, before ruling, the opinion of the Audiovisual and Digital Communication Regulatory Authority. To this end, the Competition Authority communicates to the Audiovisual and Digital Communication Regulatory Authority any referral relating to such operations. The Audiovisual and Digital Communication Regulatory Authority sends its observations to the Competition Authority within one month of receiving this communication. Art. 42-3 of of Loi Léotard: Without prejudice to the application of the first paragraph, any service publisher holding an authorization issued pursuant to articles 29,29-1,30-1,30-5 and 96 must obtain an authorization from the audiovisual and digital communication in the event of a change in the direct or indirect control, within the meaning of Article L. 233-3 of the Commercial Code, of the company holding the authorization. This approval is the subject of a reasoned decision and is issued taking into account compliance by the publisher, during the two years preceding the year of the application for approval, with its contractual obligations relating to the programming of the service. When the change in control relates to a national television service authorized pursuant to article 30-1 of this law or a radio service belonging to a national broadcasting network, within the meaning of article 41-3, and that this modification is likely to significantly modify the market in question, the approval is preceded by an impact study, in particular economic, made public in compliance with business secrecy. Germany Interstate Media Treaty of 2020 Act against Restraints of Competition of 1998, as amended on 9 July 2021 Audiovisual The Federal Cartel Office Land Media Authorities Commission on Concentration in the Media Monopolies Commission Assessment procedure Section 40(1) Act against Restraints of Competition: The Federal Cartel Office may prohibit a concentration notified to it only if it informs the notifying undertakings within a period of one month from receipt of the complete notification that it has initiated the examination of the concentration (second phase proceedings). Second phase proceedings are to be initiated if a further examination of the concentration is necessary Article 40(4) Act against Restraints of Competition: Prior to a prohibition, the supreme Land authorities in whose territory the undertakings concerned have their registered seat shall be given the opportunity to submit an opinion. In proceedings relating to the nationwide distribution of television programmes by private broadcasters, the Commission on Concentration in the Media Sector (‘KEK’) must be consulted prior to a prohibition in order to establish concentration levels in the media sector. Article 105 (3) Interstate Media Treaty: The Commission on Concentration in the Media shall, in particular, have the competence for assessing issues arising in connection with [...] changes of the shareholder structures being confirmed as unproblematic Greece n/a n/a n/a n/a Hungary Media Act of 2010, as amended in 2020 Prohibition of Unfair and Restrictive Market Practices of 1996 Audiovisual and radio Press Competition Authority Media Council Assessment procedure Section 171(1) of Media Act: The Competition Authority shall obtain the opinion of the Media Council relevant to the notification of concentration of enterprises under Section 24 of the Act LVII of 1996 on the Prohibition of Unfair and Restrictive Market Practices Section 68(2) of Media Act: In the case described under Paragraph a) of Subsection (1), if a media service provider affected by the rule restricting media market concentration wishes to acquire a share in a business entity engaged in providing media services, the Media Council shall refuse to grant regulatory approval in the procedure conducted according to Section 171 Section 171(2) of Media Act: The Media Council shall not have the right to refuse granting official approval, when the level of merger between independent sources of opinion after the merger will ensure the right for diversity of information within the relevant market for the media content service Section 171(4) of Media Act: The official assessment of the Media Council shall be binding upon the Competition Authority, however, this fact does not prevent the Competition Authority from: a) prohibiting a merger from being concluded that is already officially approved by the Media Council irrespective of any condition the Media Council may have imposed, or b) 491 imposing a condition or an obligation to implement a commitment as defined in Subsection (3) of Section 30 of the Competition Act that the Media Council failed to impose. Ireland No - - See below information on the competence of the Minister and Broadcasting authority in the context of media mergers Italy Antitrust Law 287/1990 of 1990, as amended on 29 November 2021 Law 249/1997 of 1997 Audiovisual and radio Competition Authority Communications Regulatory Authority Assessment procedure Article 16(1) of Antitrust Law 287/1990: The concentration operations referred to in Article 5 must be notified in advance to the Authority if the total turnover achieved at national level by all companies concerned is more than EUR 492 million and if the total turnover achieved individually at the national level by at least two of the companies concerned is higher than EUR 30 million Before exercising its powers vis-à-vis undertakings operating in the communications sector, the Competition Authority must seek an opinion from the Communications Regulatory Authority Article 1(6)(c)(11) of Law 249/1997: The Communications Regulatory Authority must express within thirty days of receipt of the relative documentation, its mandatory opinion on the measures, concerning operators in the communications sector, prepared by the Competition Authority The Council of State has clarified that, while the Competition Authority is required to request such an opinion, it is not binding, as the Competition Authority may depart from Communications Regulatory Authority's findings by giving clear and sufficient reasons for doing so Latvia No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger Lithuania Law on Electronic Communications of 2004, as amended on 1 January 2022 Law on Competition of 1999 Law on the Provision of Information to the Public of 1996, as amended on 26 April 2019 Audiovisual and radio Competition Council Radio and Television Commission Communications Regulatory Authority Assessment procedure Section III(10)(1) of Law on Competition: The intended concentration must be notified to the Competition Council and its permission shall be required where combined aggregate income of the undertakings concerned is more than LTL 30 million for the financial year preceding concentration and the aggregate income of each of at least two undertakings concerned is more than LTL 5 million for the financial year preceding concentration. Article 16 (7) of Law on Electronic Communications: The Communications Regulatory Authority has the right to consult the Competition Council when conducting an investigation of the electronic communications market. The Communications Regulatory Authority must obtain the opinion of the Competition Council on the definition of the relevant market, if the definition of this market differs from the recommendation of the European Commission referred to in Paragraph 3 of this Article. In all cases, the final decision is made by the Communications Regulatory Authority Article 22(5)(2) of Law on the Provision of Information to the Public: The Radio and Television Commission must refuse to give its consent to the transfer of the broadcaster’s and/or re-broadcaster’s shares (interests, member shares) and/or its control (management) when the transfer and acquisition of the licence holder’s shares (interests, member shares) and/or its control (management) results in concentration and an authorisation from the Competition Council has not been obtained where such an authorisation is required under the Law on Competition Luxembourg No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger Malta No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger The Netherlands n/a n/a n/a n/a Poland The Broadcasting Act of 1992, as amended in 2017 Act on Competition and Consumer Protection of 2007 Audiovisual and radio Press President of the Office of Competition and Consumer Protection National Broadcasting Council Assessment procedure Article 13(1) of the Act on Competition and Consumer Protection: The intention of concentration is subject to a notification submitted to the President of the Office Article 38a(3) of the Broadcasting Act: In the case of a merger, division or other transformation of a commercial company, the rights referred to in paragraph 1 [rights under the broadcasting licence] may transfer onto another entity with the consent of the National Broadcasting Council, expressed in the form of a resolution. Consent will be refused if: 1) the broadcaster gains a dominant position in the mass media on the given relevant market, as defined in regulations on protection of competition and consumers, 2) another entity takes over direct or indirect control over the operations of the broadcaster Article 38a(3a) of the Broadcasting Act: An individual may transfer the rights under the licence, subject to the consent of the National Broadcasting Council expressed in a resolution, onto a company of which the individual is a shareholder, and which meets the conditions referred to in Article 35. Article 38a(4) of the Broadcasting Act: The Chairman of the National Broadcasting Council will issue a decision, on the basis of a resolution of the National Broadcasting Council, granting, or refusing to grant, the consent referred to in paragraphs 3 and 3a. Portugal Law 19/2012 of 2003, as amended on 8 May 2012 Audiovisual and radio Press Portuguese Competition Authority Regulatory Entity for the Media Assessment procedure Article 44(1) Prior notification of merger operations of companies is submitted to the Competition Authority Article 94(4) of Law 19/2012: Decisions by the Competition Authority on mergers between companies in which the entities are subject to a prior opinion from the Regulatory Entity for the Media, which must be negative when clear risks to freedom of expression and confrontation of the different currents of opinion, in this case being binding on the Competition Authority Romania No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger Slovakia No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger Slovenia Electronic Communications Act of 2014 Prevention of Restriction of Competition Act of 2008 Mass Media Act of 1994 Audiovisual and radio Press Communications Networks and Services Agency Competition Protection Office Post and Electronic Communications Agency Assessment procedure Article 43(1) of the Prevention of Restriction of Competition Act: A concentration shall be notified to the Competition Protection Office prior to its implementation but not later than 30 days after the conclusion of the contract, the announcement of the public bid, or the acquisition of a controlling interest. Article 101(1) of the Electronic Communications Act: If the Communication s Networks and Services Agency finds, on the basis of an analysis of the relevant market, that this market is insufficiently competitive, it shall determine by decision the undertaking or undertakings with significant market power in this market. It shall acquire the opinion of the body responsible for the protection of competition before issuing the decision Article 214 of the Electronic Communications Act: (1) The Communications Networks and Services Agency and the body responsible for competition protection must exchange the data and information they require in order to discharge their competencies. In doing so, they must maintain the applicable level of confidentiality (2) The data and information referred to in the preceding paragraph must be limited to what is appropriate and proportionate to the purpose for which it was exchanged. (3) In analysing relevant markets and determining significant market power under this Act, the Communication s Networks and Services Agency shall cooperate with the body responsible for competition protection, which shall not affect its exclusive competence to take decisions in this area. The Competition Protection Office is not obliged by is likely to involve Communications Networks and Services Agency's expertise when deciding upon mergers but retains exclusive competence under the Competition Act Article 62 of the Mass Media Act: the Post and Electronic Communications Agency shall also participate in those procedures relating to broadcasters of radio and television programme services Spain No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger Sweden No - - No specific rules on the involvement of the media regulator in the context of a media merger 7 .3.2 Measures providing a system of ministerial override of media mergers and acquisitions on the basis of media pluralism, general national interests, strategic economic importance and preventing the creation of influential positions The fragmentation illustrated in the previous table is further stressed by additional national rules , on mergers and acquisitions , and that allow a ministerial override in some Member States, in particular Cyprus, France, Germany, Ireland, Italy, Nertherlands, Portugal, Slovenia and Spain. In these nine Member States, ministries or governmental bodies have the right to intervene in the assessments conducted by the media regulator or by the competition authority, and to override the regulatory authority’ decision, possibly on non-competition grounds, such as safeguarding of public/general interest. Elements such as the conditions to override, the bodies or public authorities to do so etc. greatly differ among them. Country Name of regulation Sectors Which authority is responsible for ensuring compliance What are the applicable procedures and benchmarks Austria No - - - Belgium (FL) No - - - Belgium (FR) n/a n/a n/a n/a Bulgaria No - - - Croatia No - - - Cyprus Control of Concentration between Undertakings Law 83 (I) of 2014 Audiovisual and radio Press Commission for the Protection of Competition Minister of Energy, Commerce, Industry and Tourism Council of Ministers Assessment procedure Article 36 of Control of Concentration between Undertakings Law: The Minister may, prior to the decision of the Commission for the Protection of Competition declare by a reasoned Order that a notified concentration shall be deemed to be of major public interest as regards the effect it may have on the public security, the pluralism of the media and the principles of sound administration. Article 37(b) of Control of Concentration between Undertakings Law: If it disagrees with the decision of the Commission for the Protection of Competition, it refers this decision to the Council of Ministers. Article 38(1) of Control of Concentration between Undertakings Law: the Council of Ministers shall decide without delay, weighing the reasons of public interest referred to in section 35 and the need for the protection of competition in the market, whether it will approve or not the concentration and, then, shall issue a relevant reasoned Order Article 38(4) of Control of Concentration between Undertakings Law: In cases where the Commission of Protection of competition considers by its decision taken that the notified concentration is compatible with the functioning of competition in the market, this concentration shall not apply, unless: (a) either the written statement of the Minister that he does not object to the decision of the Commission is communicated to the notifying party , or (b) the reasoned Order of the Council of Ministers by which it approves the concentration is communicated to the notifying party Czechia n/a n/a n/a n/a Denmark No - - - Estonia No - - - Finland No - - - France Code of Commerce of 2000, as amended on 29 April 2022 Audiovisual and radio Press Competition Authority Minister responsible for the economy Assessment procedure Article L430-3 Code of Commerce: Upon receipt of the notification file, the Competition Authority sends a copy to the Minister responsible for the economy. Article L430-5 IV Code of Commerce: If the Competition Authority does not take any of the three decisions provided for in III within the period mentioned in I, possibly extended pursuant to II, it informs the Minister responsible for the economy Article L430-7-1 I Code of Commerce: Within five working days from the date on which he received the decision of the Competition Authority or was informed thereof pursuant to Article L. 430-5, the Minister responsible for the economy may ask the Competition Authority for an in-depth examination of the transaction Article L430-7-1 II Code of Commerce: Within twenty-five working days from the date on which he received the decision of the Competition Authority or was informed thereof pursuant to Article L. 430-7, the Minister responsible for the economy may raise the case and rule on the operation in question for reasons of general interest other than the maintenance of competition If after 25 days post Phase II review the Minister responsible for the economy does not intervene, the Competition authority has the final say Germany Act against Restraints of Competition of 1998, as amended on 9 July 2021 Audiovisual The Federal Cartel Office The Federal Minister for Economic Affairs and Energy Assessment procedure Section 42(1) Act against Restraints of Competition: The Federal Minister for Economic Affairs and Energy will, upon application, authorise a concentration prohibited by the Bundeskartellamt if, in the individual case, the restraint of competition is outweighed by advantages to the economy as a whole resulting from the concentration, or if the concentration is justified by an overriding public interest Article 42(5) Act against Restraints of Competition: In the case of an application to authorise a prohibited concentration in the nationwide distribution of television programmes by private broadcasters, an opinion by the Commission on Concentration in the Media Sector must additionally be obtained. The Monopolies Commission shall submit its opinion within two months upon request by the Federal Ministry for Economic Affairs and Energy Greece n/a n/a n/a n/a Hungary No - - - Ireland Competition Act of 2002, amended by the Competition and Consumer Protection Act of 2014 Audiovisual and radio Press Competition and Consumer Protection Commission Broadcasting Authority of Ireland Minister for Communication, Energy and Natural Resources Assessment procedure Section 28B(1) In the case of a merger or acquisition that is a media merger, the undertakings involved that notified the Competition and Consumer Protection Commission under section 18(1), or that notified the European Commission, as the case may be, shall notify the Minister for Communications, Energy and Natural Resources in writing, and shall provide him or her with full details, of the proposal to put the merger or acquisition into effect Section 28B(5) If the Competition and Consumer Protection Commission makes a determination referred to in paragraph (a) or (b) of section 21(2) or paragraph (a), (b) or (c) of section 22(3) in relation to a media merger it shall, immediately after doing so, inform the Minister for Communications, Energy and Natural Resources of that fact Section 28D(1) The Minister for Communications, Energy and Natural Resources shall inform the undertakings that have made the media merger notification under section 28B of whichever of the following determinations he or she has made. Section 28D(1)(c) that the Minister for Communications, Energy and Natural Resources is concerned that the media merger may be contrary to the public interest in protecting plurality of the media in the State, and accordingly that the Minister for Communications, Energy and Natural Resources intends to request the Broadcasting Authority of Ireland to carry out an examination under section 28E Section 28E(9) The Broadcasting Authority of Ireland shall, not later than 30 working days before it is due to make its report to the Minister for Communications, Energy and Natural Resources Section 28G(1) The Minister for Communications, Energy and Natural Resources shall, not later than 20 working days from the date the report of the Broadcasting Authority of Ireland was made to him or her under section 28E(4), make whichever of the following determinations he or she considers appropriate Italy Antitrust Law 287/1990 of 1990, as amended on 29 November 2021 All market sectors Minister of Industry, Trade and Craft Council of Ministers Competition Authority Assessment procedure Article 16(3) Within five days from the notification of a transaction of concentration, the Competition Authority informs the President of the Council of Ministers and the Minister of Industry, Trade and Craft Section 25(1) of the Antitrust Law 287/1990: The Council of Ministers shall, at the proposal of the Minister of Industry, Trade and Craft, lay down the general criteria to be used by the Competition Authority when issuing authorization as a waiver to the prohibitions provided by section 6 of the law [prohibition on concentrations restricting free competition], when major general interests of the national economy are involved Section 25(2) of the Antitrust Law 287/1990: In cases when the entities or undertakings of countries participating in concentrations do not protect the independence of bodies or undertakings [...] or apply discriminatory provisions or impose clauses having similar effects in relation to acquisitions by Italian undertakings or entities, the President of the Council of Ministers can [...] prohibit the concentration on the grounds that it is against the essential national economic interests Latvia n/a n/a n/a n/a Lithuania n/a n/a n/a n/a Luxembourg n/a n/a n/a n/a Malta No - - - The Netherlands Competition Act of 1997, as amended on 25 June 2014 Audiovisual and radio Press Authority for Consumers and Markets Minister of Economic Affairs Council of Ministers Assessment procedure Article 34(1) It is prohibited to enter into a concentration before the intention to do so has been notified to the Authority for Consumers and Markets and four weeks have subsequently elapsed Article 47(1) The Minister may, when the Authority for Consumers and Markets has refused a license to implement a concentration, decide to allow the concentration if, in his opinion, this is necessary for important reasons in the public interest which outweigh the expected impediment to competition Article 49(1) The Minister shall make his decision on an application, in accordance with the opinion of the Council of Ministers, within twelve weeks of receipt of that application. Poland No - - - Portugal Decree-Law 125/2014 of 18 August 2014 Audiovisual and radio Press Portuguese Competition Authority Minister for the Economy The Government sitting in the Council of Ministers Assessment procedure Article 41 of Decree-Law 125/2014: A concentration which is prohibited by the Competition Authority may still be approved by the Council of Ministers under the proposal of the Minister of Economy, if the parties are able to demonstrate that the interests pursued by the merger in question are of fundamental strategic economic importance to the national economy and outweigh the competition restrictions generated in the relevant affected markets. The Minister for the Economy may propose to the full Government sitting in the Council of Ministers to authorise the operation when it benefits fundamental strategic interests on the national economy which outweigh the restrictions of competition arising from its implementation. The decision taken through a resolution of the Council of Ministers and published in the Official Journal, must be duly reasoned, and must contain conditions and obligations in order to mitigate its negative impact on competition. Romania n/a n/a n/a n/a Slovakia No - - - Slovenia Mass Media Act of 1994 Audiovisual and radio Press Ministry of Culture Competition Protection Office Post and Electronic Communications Agency Assessment procedure Article 58(1) of the Mass Media Act: Any person who wishes to acquire an ownership or management stake or a share in the voting rights in the assets of a broadcaster of a radio or television programme service or a publisher of general informative printed journal of twenty percent or more shall be obliged to obtain approval from the relevant ministry for the conclusion of the legal transaction or the resolution adopted by the General Meeting or another competent body of a company to be valid Article 62 of the Mass Media Act: The relevant ministry shall participate in the procedures of the body responsible for protection of competition relating to the concentration of publishers/broadcasters of mass media and operators; the Post and Electronic Communications Agency shall also participate in those procedures relating to broadcasters of radio and television programme services Spain Competition Act 15/2007 of 2007, as amended on 26 May 2017 Audiovisual and radio Press National Competition Commission Ministry of Economy and Finance Council of Ministers Assessment procedure Article 9(1) of Competition Act: Economic concentrations that fall under the scope of application of the article above shall be notified to the National Competition Commission prior to their implementation Article 60(1) of Competition Act: The Minister of Economy and Finance may refer the decision on the concentration to the Council of Ministers for reasons of general interest when, in the second phase, the National Competition Commission: a) Has resolved to prohibit the concentration b) Has resolved to subordinate its authorisation to the fulfilment of certain commitments proposed by the notifying parties or conditions Article 60(3) The Council of Ministers may: a) Confirm the resolution issued by the Council of the National Competition Commission b) Decide to authorise the concentration, with or without conditions. This decision must be duly justified on reasons of general interest other than protecting competition, in accordance with the provisions of Article 10. Before adopting the corresponding Decision, the National Competition Commission may be requested to issue a report. Sweden No - - - 7 .4. Laws on prominence and findability National laws concerning the prominence of European works applicable to linear and non-linear service providers (Articles 13(1) and 16 of AVSMD) differ among Member States, as illustrated in the table below. The lack of regulatory convergence is particularly visible in the context of national implementations of “measures to ensure the appropriate prominence of audiovisual media services of general interest”, which can be introduced by Member States in line with Article 7a of the revised AVMSD (Member States may introduce such measures if they wish so). In this area, there are different national approaches towards, for instance, the scope and the addressees of the prominence obligations. At the same time, other Member States have chosen not to introduce such obligations. COUNTRY FORM OF REGULATION THE RULES PRESCRIBED ACTORS TO WHICH THE RULES APPLY CONTENT/ SERVICES POSITIVELY DISCRIMINATED IMPLEMENTATION Austria Amendment of the Audiovisual Media Services Act, the KommAustria Act, the ORF Act and the Private Radio Act. The law entered into force on 1 January 2021. §20 (2) AMD-G §25 (2) Number 8 AMD-G: Easy visual design, findability and clarity and that it is possible to switch on the individual programs and additional services immediately §25 (2) 6 AMD-G: fair, equal and non-discriminatory conditions to all digital channels including EPG of terrestrial multiplex operators. Required to follow the new rules on accessibility, including the obligation to reserve at least 30% of European works in its program list and appropriately highlight them. Generally all digital programs and additional services are offered on an equal footing in terms of their visual design, findability and clarity. AVMS European works The Communications Authority Austria (KommAustria) monitors the implementation of the measures taken to promote European works. In case of a violation of the aforementioned duties to report the television broadcasters/providers of audiovisual services on demand commit an administrative offence and are to be fined up to EUR 10 000. Multiplex platforms, EPG Providers All digital programs and services Oversight by the Austrian Communications Authority (KommAustria) Belgium [Flemish Community] Media Decree ; No implementing decrees yet. Art. 181 - Accessibility, and providing EPGs subject to fair, reasonable, and non-discriminatory conditions. The Flemish Government may impose conditions on installing, accessing and presenting electronic program guides used in the context of digital programs when required to guarantee the end user's access to a number of clearly specified digital programs available in the Flemish Community. Providers of distribution services; EPG providers Unspecified Oversight by The Flemish Regulator for the Media (VRM). The VRM has the power to verify compliance and to sanction a violation with administrative penalties. Art. 157: non-linear television broadcasters must propose a minimum share of 30% of European works, including a significant proportion of European works in Dutch. The non-linear television broadcasters provide a prominent place for these European productions in their program catalog. The Flemish Government may impose quotas for the determination of a significant proportion of Dutch-language European productions as referred to in the first paragraph. On-demand AVMS European works, (recent, i.e. within 5 years), productions made by producers who are independent of the broadcaster Linear and non-linear television broadcaster must report on their implementation in practice to the VRM. Art. 155/1: the Flemish Government may lay down criteria and impose measures in order to ensure that appropriate attention is paid to television services of general interest and that their visibility and findability are guaranteed. PSM and Linear AVMS TV Content of general interest Oversight by the VRM. [French speaking Community] Decree of 4 February 2021 on audiovisual media services and video sharing services , the latter is implementing article 13.1 of the AVMSD) Art. 8.3.2-1: Electronic programme guides and application programme interfaces § 1. When a service provider uses a user interface including in particular a n electronic program guide, it can provide end users with features to select, organize and present certain programs or certain applications from service providers, and/or recommend some of them. It must ensure that it informs, within a reasonable period of time prior to its implementation, each service editor concerned. The service publisher may only oppose functionalities offered by a service distributor for as far as they would prejudice its autonomy and its editorial and editorial responsibility or its rights of intellectual property. § 2. Service providers must guarantee the transparency and neutrality of the algorithms of recommendation of the content they highlight in the user interfaces they use, without prejudice to the prominence of European works in the results of these recommendations, including audiovisual works of French-speaking Belgian origins. § 3. Subject to compliance with the legal provisions applicable to the processing of personal data, the distributors of services communicate to the publishers of audiovisual media services, the consumption data from guides and applications by end users concerning their services, based on fair, reasonable and non-discriminatory terms. § 4 To the extent necessary to ensure end-user accessibility to all digital audiovisual media services available in the French Community, the College of Authorization and control may set obligations relating to the installation, access and presentation of electronic guides to programs used by service providers in the context of broadcasting audiovisual media services digital. These obligations must be approved by the Government. These obligations may relate to the following requirements: 1° the insertion in the application program interfaces of a basic electronic program guide able to search audiovisual media service across all audiovisual media services available without discrimination 2° safeguarding fair and effective competition with regard to access for publishers and distributors of electronic program guide services; 3° respect for pluralism and the principle of non-discrimination with regard to the presentation of offers from service distributors EPG providers, platforms Unspecified The conseil supérieur de l'audiovisuel (CSA) Art. 8.3.2-1§4: the College of Authorization and Control may set obligations relating to the installation, access and presentation of electronic guides to programs used by service providers in the context of broadcasting audiovisual media services digital. These obligations must be approved by the competent Government. Article 4.2.2: §1. Service providers must, in their non-linear television services, offer a share minimum of 30% of European works, including one third of audiovisual works of French-speaking Belgian initiative. The minimum share of European works referred to in the first paragraph must increase gradually and each year to from the entry into force of this decree to reach 40% at the end of a transitional period of 5 years. At the end of the transitional period referred to in paragraph 1, paragraph 2, the Government, on the basis of an assessment carried out by the Authorization and Control Board, may set proportions higher than those referred to in this provision. § 2. The publishers of audiovisual media services ensure a particular enhancement of these works by highlighting in their catalog. § 3. The procedures for compliance with and monitoring of the obligations referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 are determined in a regulation of the Advisory Board referred to in Article 9.1.2-1, § 1, 2°, and approved by the Governement. On-demand AVMS European works The CSA verifies compliance with the obligations created by the decree and, if necessary, sanctions violations with an administrative penalty. The CSA drafts regulations regarding the terms of compliance and control of the obligations imposed on on-demand AVMS providers under their jurisdiction to ensure the prominence of European works. [German speaking Community] Statutory intervention. D ecree of the German speaking community of 1 M arch 2021 on media services and cinematographic performan ces Art. 30 Non-linear audiovisual media services providers must support the production of and access to European works. They must also reserve at least 30% of their catalogue for European works and must ensure that they are well known. On-demand AVMS European works The Medienrat has the power to verify compliance with the obligations created by the decree and, if necessary, to sanction a violation with an administrative penalty. Bulgaria Radio And Television Law (Закон за радиото и телевизията), last amended on 9 March 2021, and specifically amended to implement the new AVMSD rules on 22 December 2020 Art. 1 scope 1. the media services provided by media service providers under the jurisdiction of the Republic of Bulgaria; 2. services of video sharing platforms provided by providers of video sharing platforms under the jurisdiction of the Republic of Bulgaria insofar as they fall within the areas coordinated by [AVMSD] Art. 8b. The Council for Electronic Media may take measures to ensure sufficient visibility of media services of general interest in accordance with general interest objectives such as media pluralism, freedom of expression and cultural diversity. Actors are not specified at a granular level. Possibly addressed to all audovisual media service providers. Media services of general interest Council for Electronic Media No measures found taken by the Council since the entry into force of the law. Croatia Electronic Media Act , October 2021, on prominence of European works Art. 27: obligation of on-demand audiovisual media service providers to provide at least 30% of European works in their catalogues and to afford them prominence in the catalogue (in the cover page); the obligation is not applied to providers with low turnover or low audience “in accordance with the guidelines provided by the European Commission” On-demand AVMS providers, except those with low turnover or low audience European works The responsible body will be the Electronic Media Agency. Cyprus The Law on Broadcasting and Television Organizations (Amendment) (No. 2) Law of 2021, N. 197(I)/2021 Law on the Cyprus Broadcasting Corporation , N. 196(I)/2021 Both published in the Official Journal on 23 December 2021 Art. 31A of the Law on Broadcasting and Television Organizations: “(1) Providers of on-demand audiovisual media services, which come under the jurisdiction of the Republic, must ensure a share of at least thirty percent (30%) for European works in their catalogues and that these works occupy a prominent position.” Article 11 of the Cyprus Broadcasting Corporation Law: “The Cyprus Broadcasting Corporation must ensure that on-demand audiovisual media services provide a share of at least thirty percent (30%) for European works, in their catalog ue s and that these projects hold visible position. ” On-demand AVMS,except those with low turnover or low audience, Cyprus Broadcasting Corporation (PSM) European works Broadcasting Authority The above percentage may be periodically reviewed by the Broadcasting Authority after consultation with the Cyprus Broadcasting Corporation. Czech Republic The Act on Services of Video Sharing Platforms and on Amendments to Certain Related Acts was scheduled for a first reading on 11 January 2022. Further negotiations were planned to take place 22 May 2022. It is currently unclear if and how the envisaged prominence measures are included in the current proposal. Denmark Act Amending the Radio and Television Operations Act of 2010 , Law No. 805 of 09/06/2020 The Act is further implemented by 12 Ministerial Orders. Most notably the Draft Order on video-sharing platform services - notification 2020/198/DK Primary legislation: Sect. 51 - Video Sharing Platform Services Video-on-demand services: VOD services shall promote, where practicable and by appropriate means, the production of and access to European works. Secondary legislation: Draft Order on programming services based on registration § 14. Providers of on-demand audiovisual media services shall ensure that European works, cf. Annex 1, constitute at least 30% of their catalogues and are given sufficient prominence. Paragraph 2. The requirement in accordance with paragraph 1 does not apply to providers of on-demand audiovisual media services with low turnover or low audience. Paragraph 3. The Ministry of Culture shall lay down guidelines for the calculation of the proportion of European works pursuant to paragraph 1 and for the definition of a small target group and low revenue pursuant to paragraph 2. Paragraph 4. Providers shall, upon request, submit information on compliance with paragraph 1 to the Radio and Television Board. On-demand AVMS European works Oversight by the Danish Radio and Television Board The AVMSD implementation entered into force on July 1, 2020. The Order entered into force on September 15, 2020. Estonia Act Amending the Media Services Act and Related Acts 327 SE , adopted on the 16 February 2022 and published in the Riigi Teataja on 27 February 2022. §24: Promotion of production and accessibility of European works by audiovisual on-demand media service provider regarding the accessibility, findability on the catalogue 46) subsection 24(1) is amended and worded as follows: (1) An on-demand audiovisual media service provider shall ensure that at least 30 per cent of the programs in its program catalog are European works and include them, including works completed in the last five years. On-demand AVMS, excluding those with low turnover or low audience European Works Technical Surveillance Authority Finland Law amending the Act on Electronic Communications Services of 2014 entered into force on 1 January 2021. Transposition of the AVMSD and the European Electronic Communications Code. Sect. 209 - Video on-demand services requirements to comply with the new rules on accessibility, including the obligation to reserve at least 30% of European works in its program list and ensure the visibility of these works in its program list, excluding music performance and live-streaming. On-Demand AVMS European works Oversight by the Finnish Transport and Communications Agency (Traficom). France Broadcasting/audiovisual media Loi n° 86-1067 , as amended by Decree n°2021-1382 of 25 O ctober 2021 and Decree No. 2021-793 of 22 June 2021 relating to on-demand audiovisual media services The Law still requires amendments or publication of various new implementing decrees. The obligation entered into effect as of January 2022. Article 20-7 “I.-For the purposes of this article, “user interface” means any device presenting the user with a choice among several audiovisual communication services or among programs from these services, which is: 1° Installed on a television or on equipment intended to be connected to the television; 2° Installed on a connected speaker; 3° Made available by a service provider; 4° Made available within an application store; II.-As of January 1, 2022, operators who determine the terms and conditions for presenting services on user interfaces whose number of users or units marketed on French territory exceeds a threshold set by decree ensure, within a period specified by the same decree appropriate visibility of all or part of the services of general interest under the conditions specified by the Regulatory Authority for Audiovisual and Digital Communication. This obligation does not apply to interfaces that exclusively offer services from the same publisher, from a publisher and its subsidiaries, or from a publisher and subsidiaries of the company that controls it within the meaning of 2° of the 41-3. Services of general interest are understood as services published by one of the bodies mentioned in Title III of this law and by the TV5 channel for the exercise of their public service missions. After public consultation, the Audiovisual and Digital Communication Regulatory Authority may include, in a proportionate manner and with regard to their contribution to the pluralistic character of currents and thought and opinion and to cultural diversity, other services of audiovisual communication. It makes the list of these services public. Taking into account the customization capabilities of users, appropriate visibility can be ensured in particular by highlighting: 1° On the home page or screen; 2° In recommendations to users; 3° In the results of searches initiated by the user; 4° On remote control devices for equipment giving access to audiovisual communication services. The presentation chosen must also guarantee the identification of the publisher of the service put forward.” The clarifying degree is currently available in draft form . Operators who determine the terms of presentation of services on user interfaces and who exceed the threshold of numbers of users set by the decree. General Interest services, incl. PSM by default and commercial content upon exception. Oversight by CSA The CSA may issue a formal notice in case of infringement or non-compliance, and may eventually issue sanctions according to art. 20-7 III The CSA may decide which commercial content may be further included based on its capacity to contribute to cultural diversity and media pluralism. This may only be done via public survey and after public announcement of the survey result. The CSA will still further define its understanding of the general obligations related to the organisation of user interfaces. Art. 27 of Decree no. 2021-1382: PSM and Broadcast media Given the missions of general interest of public sector organizations and the different categories of audiovisual communication services broadcast by terrestrial hertzian way, decrees in Council of State establish the general principles defining the obligations concerning: 2° The broadcasting, in particular at prime time , of proportions at least equal to 60% of European cinematographic and audiovisual works and of proportions at least equal to 40%. 100 of cinematographic and audiovisual works of French original expression; However, for the application of the provisions provided for in the above paragraph to audiovisual works broadcast by authorized services, the Audiovisual and Digital Communication Regulatory Authority may substitute for peak viewing hours significant listening hours that 'it will set annually, for each service, according in particular to the characteristics of its audience and its programming as well as the importance and nature of its contribution to production; Section 29 of Decree no. 2021-793: On-demand AVMS Under the conditions specified by the agreement or the specifications, the publishers of services reserve at all times a substantial proportion of the works whose development is ensured other than by the mere mention of the title, for European works or works of French original. By taking into account the personalization capabilities of users, service publishers can provide this enhancement in particular: 1° On their home page, in particular by displaying visuals, making trailers available and specific headings; 2° In the content recommendations, individualized or not, suggested by the publisher to its users; 3° In searches for programs initiated by the user; 4° Within the promotional campaigns of the service. PSM, Broadcast media, on-demand AVMS European works Germany Media State Treaty Media State Treaty entered into force, November 7 2020. Art. 13(1) AVMSD is transposed into German law in § 77 of the Interstate Media Treaty (Medienstaatsvertrag – MStV). Thus, the German Media Authorities are the competent authorities for the oversight of the respective measures. Specific measures to ensure appropriate prominence are outlined in § 7 of the Statute of the Media Authorities on European Works. Consequently, such measures are in particular special areas easily recognizable, directly reachable and permanently available from the main page of the on demand service. This should be accompanied by the possibility to search for European works in the pages search tool and a presence of such works at a share of 30 percent in categories for the orientation of the user, e.g. “new”; “recent highlights”; “best movies/series of the…”; “recommendations”; “popular”. Broadcasting, Broadcast-like telemedia and telemedia, European works The German Media Authorities gather data by on demand services on the share of European works in the respective catalogues as well as on the prominence of such content. The Media Authorities assess the measures taken by the platform on a case-by-case basis, taking into account the entirety of measures taken by the respective provider Art. 7a: In Germany, Art. 7a AVMSD has been transposed in the revised Interstate Media Treaty by the German Länder. This specific part of the new media regulation entered into force in September 2021 and includes a mechanism facilitating the findability of certain offers on user interfaces that are particularly relevant to the formation of public opinion. The German regulation covers the full variety of audiovisual media content by German public media providers (broadcasting and online offers). Additionally, it applies to certain offers of commercial providers, which make a significant contribution to the diversity of opinions and offers in Germany. Within the regulation, the German legislator stated an exhaustive list of the criteria that can be used to define general interest content: - the amount of time spent reporting on political and historical events, - the amount of time spent reporting on regional and local information, - the ratio between in-house productions and programme content produced by third parties, - the quota of accessible offers, - the ratio between trained employees and employees who still need to be trained, involved in creating the programme, - the quota of European productions, and - the quota of offers for young target groups. Broadcasting, Broadcast-like telemedia and telemedia, By default: Public broadcasters; Other: commercial audiovisual media services need to be approved on application of the media service provider as “offers of public value” by the German media authorities (DLM). Art. 7a: The German media authorities determine the commercial providers of general interest in accordance with the Interstate Media Treaty. The selected offers are appointed by the state media authorities for a period of three years and published in a list on the state media authorities' website. §84 (2): similar services or content may not be treated differently in terms of findability, in particular sorting, arrangements or presentation in user interfaces, without an objectively justified reason; findability may not be unreasonably impeded. §84 (3): user interface shall be easily findable. §85: The principles underlying a media platform or user interface for the selection of broadcasting, broadcast-like telemedia and telemedia shall be made transparent by the provider. §93: Providers of media intermediaries must, in the interests of ensuring pluralism of opinion, provide the following information in a readily perceptible, immediately accessible and constantly available at all times: the criteria which decide on the access of a content to a media intermediary and and the retention of the content, and the central criteria of an aggregation, selection and presentation of content and their weighting, including information on how the algorithms used work algorithms used. In order to ensure diversity of opinion, media intermediaries must not discriminate against journalistically edited offerings on whose perceptibility they have a particularly high influence. No discrimination of similar content without an objectively justified reason Media intermediary providers Journalistically edited offerings 14 regional state media authorities, that work in conjunction with the 4 centralized agencies, that have different competences (ZAK, GVK, KEK and KJM) The German media authorities determine the commercial providers of general interest in accordance with the Interstate Media Treaty. Greece Law 4779/2021 on the provision of audiovisual media services , 20.02.2021 transposing the AVMS Directive Article 11 transposing Art 7a of AVMS Directive: Measures to ensure prominence of audiovisual media services of general interest, particularly services promoting pluralism, freedom of speech and cultural pluralism, may be taken by virtue of a Decree issued by the Minister of Digital Governance, upon consultation with the Greek National Council for Radio and Television. AVMS audiovisual media services of general interest The Minister in charge of the Secretariat-General for Communication and Media, upon consultation with the Greek National Council for Radio and Television may issue a Decree No current implementation of the Decree Article 17 1. Providers of bespoke media services must ensure that their lists include at least thirty percent (30%) European projects and that these projects have a prominent place in them. These providers must submit to the ESR in June each year. D ata on the implementation of the obligations arising from the present and concerning the previous year. 5. The obligations imposed under paragraphs 1 and 2 do not apply to media service providers with low turnover or low visibility, as defined in the European Commission guidelines. On-demand AVMS, excluding those with low turnover or low audience European works Greek National Council for Radio and Television Hungary Law amending certain laws on media services , T/6355, approved on 3 July 2019. § 13. (1) The Mttv. Section 20 (2) is replaced by the following provision: '(2) At least thirty per cent of the total duration of the programs made available in a given calendar year in the offer of on-demand audiovisual media services shall be European works and at least ten per cent Hungarian works. An on-demand audiovisual media service provider must ensure that European works are prominently displayed in its programming. " on-demand AVMS European works Oversight by the Media Council According to Sections 186-189. of the Media Act, the Media Council or the Office of the National Media Communications Authority can implement legal sanctions in case of non-adherence. These sanctions can be warnings or fines. The Media Council monitors compliance with quota rules based on the reporting obligation of media service providers. In case of insufficient European or Hungarian content, the fine usually does not exceed HUF 100 000. Ireland Broadcasting Act of 2009 The Broadcasting Act of 2009 is still in effect. (Updated 17 January 2020) However, on 28 September 2021, the Government declared its intent regarding the proposed Online Safety and Media Regulation Bill (latest version of 25 January 2022). Currently, the Draft Bill passed Second Stage reading in the Seanad on 22 February 2022. Prominence of European works 159C. (1) A media service provider under the jurisdiction of the State which provides an audiovisual on-demand media service shall take any steps required by rules under this section to ensure prominence of European works in any catalogue of that service. (3) The Commission shall make rules setting out the steps that media service providers must take for the purposes of subsection (1). (4) Without prejudice to the generality of subsection (3), the steps required by the rules referred to in subsection (3) may relate to: the visibility and presentation of European works within a catalogue; the inclusion of information in a catalogue in relation to whether or not a work is a European work, and the placement of that information; the accessibility of European works within a catalogue, including the configuration of search tools; references to European works in advertising for the service; the promotion of minimum percentages of European works within a catalogue to the audience of the service, and the means to be used for such promotion. (5) In making rules under subsection (3), the Commission shall have regard to— the objective of cultural diversity, the desirability of providing European works to the widest possible audience, technological developments, developments in audiovisual on-demand media service markets, and any relevant reports produced by the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services established by Article 30b of the Directive. (6) The Commission may make rules prescribing records a provider must keep and any other action a provider must take to enable compliance with the requirement in subsection (1) to be assessed. On-demand AVMS, excluding those with low turnover or low audience European works Until the new Draft Bill is passed, the Broadcasting Act of 2009 is still in effect. (Last updated 17 January 2020) Oversight by the Broadcast Authority of Ireland. Sect. 77 – Appropriate prominence Contract which must include a provision whereby certain designated services (public services channels) are given prominence on the EPGs provided under this contract. PSBs, parliamentary channel, and commercial ‘free to air’ services (via awarded contracts under the Act). Both PSBs and commercial broadcasting services with public interest content. Italy Legislative Decree 31 July 2005 , n.177 Art. 32§2: Specific rules of prominence relating to the numbering of the channels: national generalist channels shall be listed between nr.1 and nr.9, and they are requested to include news and current affairs content in their schedules In this regard, it should be noted that this provision, in requesting the intervention of Agcom to adapt the automatic channel numbering plan (LCN) in consideration of the new frequency structure and the methods of defining the technical areas, did not make changes to the article 32, paragraph 2, of the legislative decree 31 July 2005, n. 177, as amended by article 5, paragraph 2, of legislative decree no. 44. In this sense, the aforementioned article 32, paragraph 2, in identifying the principles and criteria to which the Authority must comply for the purposes of drawing up the numbering plans, specifies that: "Without prejudice to the right of each user to reorder the channels offered on digital television as well as the possibility for pay TV offer operators to introduce additional and additional program guide and channel sorting services, the Authority, in order to ensure fair, transparent and non-discriminatory conditions, adopts a specific plan for the automatic numbering of digital terrestrial channels, free-to-air and paid, and establishes with its own regulation of the methods for assigning numbers to audiovisual media service providers authorized to broadcast audiovisual content in digital terrestrial technique, on the basis of the following principles and guiding criteria in order of priority: guarantee of ease of use of the automatic channel sorting system respect for users' habits and preferences, with particular reference to national generalist channels; subdivision of the numbering of national broadcasting channels, on the basis of the prevailing programming criterion, in relation to the following thematic programming genres: semi-general, children and teenagers, information, culture, sport, music, teleshopping. In the first range of numbers, adequate spaces must be provided in the numbering to enhance the programming of quality local broadcasters and that linked to the territory. In the same number of numbers, no programs aimed at an adult-only audience should be broadcast. In order to guarantee the widest pluralism in conditions of equality among the subjects operating in the market, a series of numbers must be reserved for each gender, available for new entrants; identification of specific numbers for audiovisual media services a Therefore, without prejudice to the application of these principles and guiding criteria, in implementation of the aforementioned article 1, paragraph 1035, of the 2018 Budget Law, the subject of this provision is the "updating" of the automatic numbering plan of the television service channels digital terrestrial (LCN) and the relative methods of assigning numbers, already adopted by the Authority. definition of the conditions of use of the numbering, providing for the possibility, on the basis of agreements, of exchanging the numbering within the same genre, subject to notification to the competent administrative authorities; revision of the numbering plan on the basis of market development, after consultation with the interested parties. DTT Service providers General interest channels broadcast free-to-air “generalist programmes” and are requested to include news and current affairs content in their schedules (their requirements are detailed). PSB activity is considered a general interest service. Autorità per le Garanzie nelle Comunicazioni (AGCOM) Resolution no. 116/21/CONS Update of the automatic numbering plan for digital terrestrial television channels, of the methods for assigning numbers to audiovisual media service providers authorized to broadcast audiovisual content in digital terrestrial technique and of the related conditions of use Without prejudice to the application of the aforementioned principles and guiding criteria of art.32, and the implementation of the 2018 Budget Law, the subject of the 2021 Resolution is an update to the automatic numbering plan for DTT service providers and the related methods of assigning numbers. AGCOM started the revision of this system in 2020, resulting in 2021 in the updated LCN-logical channel numbering . At the moment of writing there is no final numbering, but the general guidelines go as follows: n.0-99 are reserved for national broadcasters First, the aforementioned principles remain, reserving n.1-9 for national generalist channels Second, providers of quality and local content received the ranges between n.10-19 and 71-99. Third, n. 71 to 74 and nr.171-174 are reserved for consortia of local and national broadcasters intent on distributing similar programming over multiple regions. An overview of tables and regulations can be found here . AGCOM is currently working on its practical implementation, including drafting a necessary definition of general interest content. DTT Service providers National broadcasters with lower LCN i.e. higher and more prominent ranking Decree of 8 November, 2021, n.208 Implementing AVMSD (EU) 2018/1808 Entered into force 25 December 2021 Art. 53 Programming obligations of European works by suppliers of linear audiovisual media services: 1. Linear audiovisual media service providers reserve to European works most of their time of diffusion, excluding the time set aside for news, sporting events, television games, pubblicita ', teletext and televendite services. 2. […] 3. In the time slot from 18:00 to 23:00, the public service concessionaire for radio, television and multimedia reserves at least 12 percent of the broadcast time, excluding the time set aside for news, sporting events, television games, pubblicita ', teletext and televendite services, a cinematographic and audiovisual works of fiction, animation, original documentaries of original Italian expression, everywhere produced. At least a quarter of this share is reserved for works films of original Italian expression produced everywhere. 4. […] Art. 55 Obligations of on-demand audiovisual media service providers 1. The set of catalogs of on-demand audiovisual media service providers subject to Italian jurisdiction must contain at least 30 per cent of prominent European works. [2-5. …] 6. The regulation of the Authority referred to in this article provides, among other things, the modalities with which the service provider of audiovisual media ensures adequate prominence to European works in catalogs of the programs offered and defines the quantification of obligations with reference to European works produced by producers independent. 7. The regulation of the Authority referred to in this article is adopted in compliance with the provisions, insofar as they are compatible, of referred to in articles 52, 53, 54 and 56, as well as the principle of promotion of European audiovisual works. In particular, the regulation, in defining the procedures for fulfilling the obligations of programming, it provides, regardless of any methods, procedures or algorithms used by media service providers audiovisuals on request for the personalization of the profiles of the users, even the adoption of tools such as the provision of a dedicated section on the main login page or a specific category for the search of the works in the catalog and the use of a share of European works in advertising campaigns or of promotion of the services provided. […] AVMS, with possible exemptions for services with low turnover or low audience European works Autorità per le Garanzie nelle Comunicazioni (AGCOM) Sanctions made possible by art. 56 of the same Decree Art. 29 General provisions 1. In order to ensure pluralism, the freedom of expression, cultural diversity and effectiveness information for the widest possible audience, is guaranteed adequate emphasis on the audiovisual and radio media services of general interest provided through any receiving tool or access to such services employed by users, whatever the platform used for the provision of the same services. 2. The Authority, by means of guidelines, defines the criteria of qualification of an audiovisual or radio media service as a service of general interest. By the same lines guide, the Authority also defines the modalities and criteria to which manufacturers of equipment suitable for receiving signals radio television or radio, the service providers of indexing, aggregation or retrieval of audiovisual content or sound systems or the lenders who determine the methods of presentation of services on user interfaces, will have to comply with purpose of ensuring compliance with the provisions of paragraph 1. “any receiving tool or access to such services employed by users, whatever the platform used for the provision of the same services” e.g. networks, media intermediaries, EPG providers AVMS of general interest Implementation, supervision and enforcement by AGCOM Latvia Amendments to the Electronic Mass Media Law entered into force on 1 December 2020 Art. 23(5) Electronic media services providing on-demand audiovisual services shall include at least 30% of European audiovisual works in their catalog and shall promote their accessibility and visibility, including through labeling, a separate section or search tools On-demand AVMS European works National Electronic Mass Media Council of Latvia (NEPLP) In case the electronic mass media do not comply with law (it includes the prominence), NEPLP is able to act and enforce measures against the electronic mass media. Lithuania Law on the Provision of the Information to the Public Similar laws: (i) Law on Electronic Communications ; (ii) Law on National Radio and Television ; (iii) Law on Information Society Services No relevant prominence measures were found in the context of this mapping. Art. 34 1 (1-2) provides there shall be freedom to provide audiovisual from the EU/EEA member states and signatories of the European Convention on Transfrontier Television (relevant actors – Providers of audiovisual media services). Audiovisual media services from other countries are allowed as long as they comply with the laws. A working document of the Ministry of Culture reveals that it was concluded that there is no need to implement anything with regard to Art. 7a AVMSD specifically “because the article does not provide any specific measures to be taken” (see page 27). N/A N/A The Radio and Television Commission (RTC). However, they have no competence of matters of prominence due to an absence of legal measures regulating prominence. Luxembourg Loi du 26 février 2021 portant modification de la loi modifiée du 27 juillet 1991 sur les médias électroniques. - Legilux (public.lu) Règlement grand-ducal du 26 février 2021 amending the Grand-Ducal Regulation of 5 April 2001 laying down the rules applicable to the promotion of European works in audiovisual media services . Article 3 of the Regulation of 2001: Obligation to allocate a majority proportion of its broadcasting time under certain conditions to european work. Article 5 bis (modified in 2010 and 2021 ): On-demand audiovisual media service providers shall offer a share of at least 30 per cent of European works in their catalogues and shall showcase these works. They must also provide a report on the implementation to this obligation every 4 years. No other prominence rules found as such regarding the content as pointed also by ERGA SG3 2020 Report on art. 7a AVMSD . on-demand AVMS European works Luxembourg Independent Broadcasting Authority Malta AVMSD Transposition: Act. No. LVI of 2020 - Broadcasting Amendment Act In force since December 7, 2020. Art. 16N - European works On-demand audiovisual media services should ensure that their catalogues contain at least a minimum share of 30% European works and they are given sufficient prominence. on-demand AVMS European works Oversight by the Malta Broadcasting Authority and the Malta Communications Authority. Netherlands Consolidated Media wet (Media Act) latest update July 2021 In November 2020 the latest revised AVMS Directive has been transposed in the Dutch Media Act. As a consequence, several provisions have been amended including of course the requirement for VoD service providers to offer a minimum share of 30% European works in their catalogues. The Dutch legislator has opted for minimum harmonization, limiting the transposition to the mandatory provisions. Art. 7a has thus not been implemented. There also is no political discourse on the matter currently ongoing, though the Dutch Ministry of Education, Culture and Science is currently exploring legislative options and other instruments to ensure prominence of general interest content. On-demand AVMS European works Commissariaat voor de Media The CvdM can in certain cases impose administrative fines of up to EUR 225 000 per violation, and issue cease and desist orders. Further, the CvdM can reclaim or reduce financial public media budget contributions. Lastly, the CvdM is allowed to reduce or withdraw broadcasting airtime for public service media or, in the case of a commercial media service provider, revoke a license. Secondary legislation Beleidsregel quota commerciële media-instellingen 2022 , 18.01.2022, implementing articles 3.20-3.25 and 3.29 of the amended Media Act ( mirrored for the PSB ). Article 7. Prominence of European works on commercial media services on demand (Commercial services) Bringing European productions to the attention of a commercial media service on demand as referred to in Article 3.29c, second paragraph, of the Act can be ensured, inter alia, by: a. providing a section dedicated to European works accessible from the home page of the service; b. the possibility to search for European works in the search function available as part of that service; or c. the use of European works in the campaigns of that service or a minimum percentage of European works recommended in the catalog of that service, for example through the use of banners or similar tools. Article 6. Prominence of European works on audiovisual media services on demand (Public Service Media) Bringing European works to the attention as referred to in Article 2.115(3) of the Act can be ensured, inter alia, by: a. providing a section dedicated to European works accessible from the home page of the service; b. the possibility to search for European works in the search function available as part of that service; or c. the use of European works in the campaigns of that service or a minimum percentage of European works recommended in the catalog of that service, for example through the use of banners or similar tools. VoD service providers should report over their entire catalogue per each quarter of the year or, alternatively over the full year if they wish to do so. Also they will have to report how they ensure prominence. The CvdM will not describe into detail the means for ensuring prominence but will refer in general to the different ways also mentioned in the recitals of the AVMS Directive (i.e. search options, specific European/country categories, homepage references, recommendations and other AI based tools and general marketing activities). It is up to the media service providers to demonstrate to the CvdM the reasoning and appropriateness of certain measures. When it comes to granting exemptions the CvdM will closely follow the guidelines of the European Commission and use the proposed definitions and thresholds of low audience share and turnover. The upcoming Policy rules will further elaborate on possible exemptions based on low audience share or turnover in line with the European Commission’s guidelines, published on 7 July 2020 (Guidelines pursuant to Article 13(7) of the Audiovisual Media Services Directive on the calculation of the share of European works in on-demand catalogues and on the definition of low audience and low turnover). Also the way share of European works in catalogues of on demand media services should be qualified and calculated will be further explained by the CvdM in these new Policy rules. On-demand and PSM AVMS, excluding those with low turnover or limited audience European works Commissariaat voor de Media Poland Act of 11 August 2021 amending the Broadcasting Act and the Cinematography Act In force since 1 January 2022 Art. 47f(1) Providers of on-demand audiovisual media services shall promote European works, including those originally created in Polish, in particular by 1) appropriately marking the origin of those works in the catalogue and making possible to search them, or 2) placing information and materials promoting European works, including those originally produced in Polish. Art. 47 f(2) Providers of on-demand audiovisual media services shall allocate at least 30% of the catalogue content to European works, including those which were originally produced in Polish, and give them an appropriate prominence in the catalogue. On-demand AVMS, excluding those with low turnover or limited audience European works Oversight and supervision by the National Broadcasting Council (KRRiT) Portugal Lei n 74/2020 , amending Law No. 27/2007, of 30 July, which approves the Law of Television and Audiovisual Services on Demand, and Law No. 55/2012, of 6 September, on the promotion, development and protection of cinema art and cinematographic and audiovisual activities Art. 45 On-demand audiovisual service catalogs shall ensure a minimum share of 30% of European works that must be guaranteed a prominent position, and these catalogs must devote at least half of that percentage to independent European creative works, originally in Portuguese, produced less than five years ago. Article 7a AVMSD was not transposed to the national framework by Law 74/2020. On-demand AVMS, excluding those with low turnover or limited audience European works Entidade Reguladora para a Comunicação Social (‘ERC’) art. 75 specifies the possible sanctions when failing to comply to art. 45 Romania Chapter III: The content of the audiovisual communication of the Audiovisual Law of 2002 Art. 23(1) “On-demand audiovisual media services promote, where practicable and by appropriate means, the production of and access to European works. Such promotion could relate, inter alia, to the financial contribution made by such services to the production and rights acquisition of European works or to the percentage and/or prominence of European works in the catalogue of programs offered”. Art. 23(2) “The Government, with the help of the Romanian Audiovisual Council (CNA), shall send reports to the European Commission every four years regarding the implementation of Art. 23(1) On-demand AVMS European works Oversight by the Romanian Audiovisual Council (CNA) * (see after must-offer table) The Council has the competence to fine after repeated non-compliance. The Draft Law amending the Audiovisual Law of 2002 to implement the renewed AVMSD – approved by the Government and Parliament. T he deadline for the submission of the Senate’s amendments was 24 March 2022 and the final report submission was on 5 April 2022. Art. 23(1) amending Art. 23(1) above, would change to “On-demand audiovisual media services are obliged to allocate at least 30% of their catalogues to European works, as well as ensuring the promotion of these works. Promotion can be achieved by facilitating access to these works, through a section dedicated to European works that is accessible from the home page of the service, the possibility of searching for European works in the search tool available in that service, the use of European works in campaigns of the respective service or ensuring a minimum percentage of European works promoted from the catalogue of the respective service, the use of banners or similar instruments. On-demand AVMS, excluding those with low turnover or limited audience European works Oversight by the Romanian Audiovisual Council (NAC). Art. 23(2) above was removed Article 7a of the revised AVMSD was transposed into the draft Law amending and supplementing the Audiovisual Law by Art. 42(7), as follows: “Audiovisual media service providers shall ensure appropriate visibility for the following categories of content considered to be of general interest: a) official announcements of public institutions and authorities, in the context of public alert, warning and information actions carried out in accordance with the law, provided that these announcements do not promote their own image of the respective institution or authority; b) official information and communication of public authorities regarding disasters, state of emergency, state of war, state of siege, state of necessity or state of alert or other similar situations regulated by special laws.” On-demand AVMS Pre-defined general interest content Oversight by the Romanian Audiovisual Council (NAC) Slovakia Draft Act on Media Services and on Amendments to Certain Acts , approved by Government on 3 November 2021, and entered into effect on 1 January 2022. However, on February 8, 2022, the author of the bill requested the postponement of the enforcement until the next ordinary session of the National Council of the Slovak Republic. This took place on 15 March 2022. § 70 European works of an on-demand audiovisual media service provider shall reserve at least 30% of the total number of programs offered in the program catalog per calendar month in each on-demand audiovisual media service and ensure that they are duly emphasized. For the purposes of this Act, emphasis means the promotion of audiovisual works by facilitating access to these works, in particular by creating a special offer European works in the program catalog or the possibility to search for European works in the search engine. On-demand AVMS, with possible exemptions for those with low turnover or limited audience European works The Radio and Television Council of Slovakia The AVMS Regulator should be enforcing a provision, that contains the measure. It is expected, that if there is a breach of the provision, the Regulator should be obliged to impose a sanction. Slovenia Act Amending Audiovisual Media Services Act , December 2021, on quota and prominence of European works Art. 17: providers of on-demand audiovisual media services are obliged to secure at least a 30% share of European works in their catalogues on annual basis. The European and Slovenian audiovisual works must be placed in a prominent place and properly promoted. This can be through a dedicated section for European and Slovenian works, which can be accessed from the home page of the service, with the possibility for search for European and Slovenian works in the search engine available under this service, using European and Slovenian works in the campaigns of this service, with at least a 30% share of European works and 5% share of Slovenian works promoted in the catalogue of this service etc. The obligations do not apply to providers with the turnover generated in the Republic of Slovenia in the preceding financial year lower than 200 000 euros. On-demand AVMS European works If adopted, the responsible regulatory body will be the Agency for Communication Networks and Services. Electronic Communications Act , 2013, on prominence of programmes of public interest in classification of programmes by distribution networks Secondary legislation: adopted by the regulatory body to specify rules and requirements established in the Electronic Communications Act; General Act on classification of the programmes in the public digital television distribution networks , 2013: on prominence of public service television programmes. Art. 112, para. 3: obligation of the Agency to adopt a statute/secondary regulation with guidelines for distribution networks on classification of the programmes taking into account public interest, specified in the media legislation, and interests of the end-users. Secondary: AKOS shall prepare instructions for operators to sort TV channels in particular order in their TV schemes (this only applies to TV channels licensed in Slovenia and users can later edit the channel list on their own). The instructions should take into account public interest pursued by media legislation. The purpose of instructions on sorting of TV channels is to put domestic TV channels of general public interest at the forefront of the TV schemes. These instructions are set out in the General Act on Sorting Channels in Public Digital Television Networks. According to this act, the first and second TV channel of Slovenian public service broadcaster must be placed in the first two places. Article 4: obligation of operators of digital distribution networks to classify the distributed programmes in a way to place two public service television programmes at the starting positions (TV Slovenia 1 on the first place and TV Slovenia 2 on the second place) As media legislation encourages also promotion of EU AV works, such content can also be considered as general interest content to some extent. With exception of the AVMS Law, which transposes vast majority of the AVMS Directive into Slovenian legislation, we are not aware of any other regulations regarding the promotion of EU AV works. Operators of distribution networks Programmes spe c i f ied by the Agency as prominent taking into account public interest and interest of end-users. Secondary: Two programmes of public service television (TVSLO 1 and TVSLO 2) Responsible regulatory body is Agency for Communication Networks and Services (AKOS). Spain Legislative proposal: Draft audiovisual law (Final version of 17.12.2021) On 3 March 2022, the Law was accepted and planned for further formal enactment. Article 112. European audiovisual work quota obligation in communication services 1. Television audiovisual communication service providers will reserve a percentage of their programming or catalog ue for European works, in accordance with the provisions of the following articles. 2. Regulations will establish the assumptions and terms in which compliance with the obligation established in the previous section may be exempted or made more flexible for providers with a low volume of business, for audiovisual communication services with a low audience or for those cases in which the obligation is impracticable or unjustified due to the nature or subject matter of the audiovisual communication service. Secondary regulation may be further required to specify prominence requirements. On-demand AVMS, with possible exemptions for those with low turnover or limited audience European works National Commission of Markets and Competition Sweden The Modernised Radio and Television Act (SFS 2020: 875) is in force. Amendments to the Radio and Television Act (2010: 696) entered into force on December 1, 2020. Chapter 6 Section 8: providers of video-on-demand services shall ensure that at least 30 per cent of the catalogue consists of programmes of European origin and that these programmes are given prominence. The obligation does not apply to providers of services with a low turnover or a low audience. The SPBA may decide, on a case-by-case basis, to grant exemptions from the obligation if, given the nature or theme of the service in question, it is deemed unjustified or impracticable to fulfil the obligation. According to Chapter 16 Section 6 of the Swedish Radio- and Television Act, providers of video-on-demand services shall report to the SPBA the proportion of the service’s catalogue consisting of programmes of European origin and how these programmes have been given prominence pursuant to Chapter 5 Section 8. The SPBA has recently issued regulations in regard to the reporting by the providers. On-demand AVMS, excluding those with low turnover or limited audience European works Oversight by the Swedish Press, Radio, and Television Authority, including powers to the NRA to issue regulation on the compliance reporting related to promotion of EU works (timing of reporting, form of report, etc.) 7 .5 Media-specific laws on the disclosure and reporting of media ownership in the EU Rules on the disclosure and reporting of media ownership appear to be envisaged in the legislation of most Member States. Nevertheless, their legislation presents relevant divergences. The transparency requirements are not always linked to media-specific laws, or to media pluralism objectives. Also, the press sector seems often less constrained in terms of media ownership transparency than are the television or radio sectors. In addition, where such rules exist, the granularity of the information available in the media specific registries varies. Country Name of regulation Sectors How are the rules on the disclosure and reporting of media ownership enforced Specific media registries Austria Federal Media Act of 1981, as amended on 25 February 2015 Audiovisual and radio Press In addition to reporting obligations to the national regulatory authority, the media players are obliged to transparently report on their ownership to the public. This is ensured with provision in the Federal Media Act § 25(2): The media owner shall be specified by name or company name, including the object of the company, residential address, or registered office (branch office) and the names of the executive bodies and officers of the media owner authorized to represent the company and, if there is a supervisory board, its members. In addition, the ownership, shareholding, share and voting rights proportions shall be stated in respect of all persons holding a direct or indirect share in the media company . Furthermore, any undisclosed shareholdings of media owner s and in persons holding a direct or indirect share in the media owner as specified in the previous sentence shall be stated, and fiduciary relationships shall be disclosed for each level. In the case of direct or indirect shareholdings of foundations, the founder and the relevant beneficiaries of the foundation shall be disclosed. If the media owner is an association or an association holds a direct or indirect share in the media owner, the management board and the purpose of the association shall be stated in respect of such association § 25(1) In the case of periodical media products the imprint shall also include information as to the web address at which the information will, on a constant basis, be easily and directly retrievable, or such information shall be added in the relevant medium. For broadcast programmes all above information shall either be constantly available on an easily retrievable teletext page or be published in the Official Gazette of “Wiener Zeitung” within one month after the broadcast starts and within the first month of each calendar year. In the case of periodically published electronic media the information shall either state under which web address the information will be constantly easily and directly retrievable, or such information shall always be added in the respective medium No specific media registry Federal Act on Audiovisual Media Services of 2001, as amended on 20 August 2021 Audiovisual § 64(1)(3) the obligation to report changes in ownership structure pursuant to § 10 (7) or (8) § 10(7) The media service provider shall communicate to the regulatory authority the ownership or membership structures, existing at the time when an application for being granting a license or a report is filed, together with the application or the report. In the event that shares in the media service provider are held, directly or indirectly, by corporations, partnerships or cooperatives, their ownership structures must also be communicated, and their fiduciary relations disclosed. The media service provider shall submit to the regulatory authority the updated data regarding the direct or indirect ownership structure, the address and the power of representation by 31 December of each year § 10(8) In the event of a transfer to third parties of more than 50 per cent of the shares held by the television broadcaster at the time when the license is granted or a finding is made pursuant to this paragraph, the television broadcaster shall report this transfer in advance to the regulatory authority No specific media registry Private Radio Broadcasting Act of 2001, as amended on 1 January 2016 Radio § 5(5) The applicant shall communicate to the regulatory authority the ownership relationships or membership relationships, existing at the time when an application for being granting a licence is filed, together with the application, and any changes in these relationships immediately, but not later than 14 days of the legal effectiveness of the assignment or transfer of shares § 22(4) If any changes occur in the ownership or membership relationships after the licence is granted, the broadcaster shall report these to the regulatory authority immediately, but not later than 14 days after the legal effectiveness of the assignment or transfer of shares § 22(5) In the event of a transfer to third parties of more than 50 percent of the shares held by the radio broadcaster at the time when the license is granted or a finding is made pursuant to this paragraph, the broadcaster shall report this transfer in advance to the regulatory authority No specific media registry Belgium (FL) Act on Radio and Television Broadcasting of 2009 Flemish Government Decree of 30 June 2006 Audiovisual and radio Article 139 of the Act on Radio and Television Broadcasting: When applying for a licence, new local, regional, and community-wide radio stations, as well as regional TV stations, have to communicate information about their company statutes and financial structure to the Flemish Media Regulator. Any changes in their shareholder structure following the notification or the obtaining of the licence should be communicated and are subject to approval by the Flemish Government. Article 41-42 of the Flemish Government Decree of 30 June 2006: Other radio or television broadcasters, as well as distributors and network operators who are only subject to a prior notification obligation (and not a licensing requirement) have to add the following information to their notification: company statutes, financial structure, shareholders structure, list of board members. Article 182 of the Act on Radio and Television Broadcasting: Service providers that make available to the public one or more linear or nonlinear broadcasting services of one or more television broadcasters falling within the competence of the Flemish Community, annually provide the Flemish Regulator for the Media with an activity report, and refer to the composition of the shareholders, the number of subscribers, the number of subscribers in the Dutch-language area, the programs transmitted and the annual accounts approved by the general meeting of shareholders Article 198(3) of the Act on Radio and Television Broadcasting: Anyone can offer a cable broadcasting network if they submit an annual activities report, mentioning the shareholder structure, the number of subscribers and broadcasts, as well as the balance sheet and annual accounts, as approved by the general shareholders meeting Even though the Flemish media law does not explicitly contain disclosure obligations vis-a-vis the public, the public has access to information about media company structures through annual reports published by the regulator, though without naming the final beneficiaries. Relevant information can be found in public commercial registers such as National Bank of Belgium and the Crossroads Bank for Enterprises. The Flemish audiovisual media laws impose transparency obligations towards the regulator who is tasked with collecting, processing, and publishing information about concentration and ownership in a meaningful way towards the public (in the case of the Flemish Regulator for the Media under the form of annual reports) No specific media registry Belgium (FR) Act of 14 July 1997 on Belgian radio and television of the French Community, as amended by Decree of 3 December 2004 as amended by the Decree of 11 September 2009 Audiovisual and radio The French Community legislator considers transparency of publishers an essential component of pluralism as it allows the public to form an opinion on the value to be given to information and opinions in radio and television programs. That is why the services of editors (radio and television) have an obligation to make public, on their website or on the Audiovisual Council's website, a series of information about them: Article 6. §1 Act of 14 July 1997 on Belgian radio and television of the French Community: All editors of broadcasting services have to make available 'basic information' to the public in order to allow it to form its opinion about the value of information and ideas distributed in the programs of that editor. Art. 6. §2 Act of 14 July 1997 on Belgian radio and television of the French Community In order to ensure transparency of ownership and control structures, as well as their level of independence, editors, distributors and network operators are obliged to send the Audiovisual Council the following information: - identification of shareholders (and percentage of shareholding) - interest of these shareholders in other broadcasting or media companies - identification of natural or legal persons active in program supporting businesses, contributing to a substantial level to the production of programs - any change of the above occurring during the duration of the authorisation - any control agreements concluded by the company with one or more shareholders, and any shareholders' agreements with regards to control The Audiovisual Council makes this information publicly available on a dynamic online database. The information on the database comes from the annual reports that publishers and distributors are required to submit to the regulator, as well as from other public or private sources . Online website of the media regulator Bulgaria Law on Mandatory Deposition of Press and Other Works Disclosure as amended in 2018 Access to Public Information Act of 2000, as amended in 2018 Audiovisual and radio Press Article 7(4) of the Law on Mandatory Deposition of Press and Other Works Disclosure: The publishers of print media are obliged to notify the Ministry of Culture within 7 days after the changes of the ownership take place. A register of ultimate print media owners is published on the official website of the Ministry of Culture. Article 7(6) of the Law on Mandatory Deposition of Press and Other Works Disclosure: requires the ultimate owners of the print media to be identified on the media website and once a year – in the print edition itself. The disclosure is addressed to the public institution (declarations) and available to the public (public registry online). Article 7a(8) of the Law on Mandatory Deposition of Press and Other Works Disclosure: envisages general obligation for media to publish their ownership structures on their website. The scope of persons with transparency obligations has been extended to all media service providers and distributors of print media. Article 7a(3) of the Law on Mandatory Deposition of Press and Other Works Disclosure: By 30 June each year, the media service provider submits to the Ministry of Culture a declaration identifying its actual owner and indicating whether the owner holds a public office, as well as any funding received in the previous calendar year, its size and reason, including person's details , who made the financing. Where the media service provider is a public company, the competent institution under whose control the company is supervised shall be indicated. Where the person who actually controls the content of the media service and / or editorial policy is different from the actual owner of the media service provider, that fact shall be stated in the declaration Article 7b of the Law on Mandatory Deposition of Press and Other Works Disclosure: The distributor of periodical print media shall submit to the Ministry of Culture annually by 30 June a declaration identifying its actual owner, as well as the number of objects for retailing periodicals which he uses in his business. The distributors are obliged to declare all changes in ownership. They have also an obligation to publish up-to-date information about its real owner and on its website. On top of the Ministry of Culture registry, the Council for Electronic Media maintains registers with identification data of all radio – and AVMS providers on its official website. Public information on ownership structures is available in 1) the Commercial Register; 2) a register kept by the Ministry of Culture; 3) the provider's website; 4) The Council for Electronic Media Online website of the media regulator + website of Ministry of Culture Croatia Electronic Media Act of 2009, as amended on 22 October 2021 Audiovisual and radio Article 1 of the Electronic Media Act: It is forbidden not do disclose the ownership structure or the share ownership by any legal means Article 52(3) of the Electronic Media Act: A media service provider shall be obliged to publish the data referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article (data on a legal person and its seat, i.e., name, surname and permanent residence of all legal and natural persons who have directly or indirectly become holders of stock or a share in that legal person, along with the data on the percentage of stocks or the share they possess) in the Official Gazette Article 57(1) of the Electronic Media Act: The television and/or radio broadcaster and the media service provider set out in Article 79 of this Act shall report in writing on any change in the ownership structure to the Electronic Media Council Official Gazette Media Act of 2004, as amended on 7 July 2013 Press Article 1 of the Media Act: It is forbidden not do disclose the ownership structure or the share ownership by any legal means Article 12(1) of the Media Act: A newspaper publisher shall report the publication of the press in the Register kept at the Croatian Chamber of Commerce Article 12(4) of the Media Act: Legal entities that perform the activity of printing distribution shall also register in the Register referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article Article 12(8) of the Media Act: The publisher is obliged to report to the Register any change in the data stated in the application Article 59 of the Media Act (OG 59/04) defines sanctions (In case of non-compliance the Chamber will write a letter of warning, in case of continued non-compliance a fine of 1 mil Kuna will be exacted) The Croatian Chamber of Commerce keeps a register of print and print distribution legal entities. However, in case of cross ownership the Agency for Market Competition Protection is the responsible body according to Article 36(3) of the Media Act Register Cyprus Radio and Television Stations Law of 1998, as amended in 2021 Audiovisual and radio Part II(3)(2)(e) The Cyprus Broadcasting Authority is to verify the actual ownership of audiovisual media service providers in order to ensure their independence, as well as to exclude tendencies, actions or aspirations for their concentration, oligopoly or monopoly Part II(3)(2)(h) The Cyprus Broadcasting Authority is to draw up a report every three years on the development of pluralism and the acquisition of shares in audiovisual media service providers, which it shall submit to the Council of Ministers and the House of Representatives and a summary of which shall be published in at least two daily newspapers. Article 20(1) The names of the shareholders, as well as of the legal beneficiaries of shares, who hold more than 5% of the shares in a television or radio organization with nationwide or local coverage, are published in at least two daily newspapers in January each year. Article 30A(2) Audiovisual media service providers under the jurisdiction of the Republic shall make available to the Broadcasting Authority of Cyprus information relating to their ownership status, including that of the beneficial owners. For radio and television organisations detailed data are submitted to the Cyprus Broadcasting Authority with the application for a license. They include a declaration by every single shareholder for his/her part and, eventually, for the part of his/her relatives up to 2nd degree. The real owner should be declared in case of trustees. No change in shareholding can take place without prior approval by the Authority. The Authority can ask an applicant or a licensee to submit any documents it deems necessary, and the latter have the obligation to submit them. However, though the Cyprus Broadcasting Authority disposes the information described, they deny access to it to anybody, and they do not publish this information in their "Pluralism in the media report" they draft every three years. No specific media registry Press Law of 1989 Press Article 13(1) of the Press Law: The owner's name and address and the name of the person responsible under the law- without any specifics on shareholding (true or trustees), management etc- appear on the registration application form of a title and on the form which is required in case of change of ownership. This information should also be published on every issue of the newspaper. The basic information needed to establish ownership – covering shareholding, beneficial ownership, or indirect ownership - is not required to be disclosed to the public No specific media registry Czechia Radio and Television Broadcasting Act of 2001, as amended in 2010 Audiovisual and radio Section 17(1) and (2) of the Radio and Television Broadcasting Act: During the distribution of licences for digital broadcasting, the Council shall assess the following [...] the transparency of ownership relations in the applicant’s company No specific media registry Denmark No - - - Estonia Media Services Act of 2010 Audiovisual Section 16(1)(4) 1 : Audiovisual media service provides must make clearly and consistently accessible on the web page: the ownership structure, including the name of the beneficial owner, the personal identification code and the country of the personal identification code, in the absence of the personal identification code, the time and place of birth and the country of residence, as well as information concerning the manner of verification of the person; No specific media registry Finland Act on the Exercise of Freedom of Expression in Mass Media of 2003 Audiovisual and radio Press Section 5 The publisher or broadcaster shall ensure that the publication or broadcast includes information on the head editor and the publisher or broadcaster's identity and the responsible editor. However, the name of the publishing/broadcasting organization can then be used to request ownership data on the company per the Limited Liability Companies Act (624/2006) If the publisher/broadcaster is an association rather than a company, information on its members, rules, founding documents etc. can be requested from the Finnish Patent and Registration Office, per Associations Act (503/1989) section 47. No specific media registry France Law n° 86-1067 of 30 September 1986 (Loi Léotard), as amended on 1 January 2022 Audiovisual and radio Article 38 of Law n° 86-1067: Any natural or legal person who eventually acquires at least 10% of the capital or voting rights of an audiovisual media (down from 20% in the original version, pursuant to a July 2004 law) to inform the Audiovisual and Digital Communication Regulatory Authority within one month. Article 43(1) of Law n° 86-1067: Any editor of an audiovisual communication service make public: its (business) name; the names of its legal representative and of its 3 main associates, of the director and of the chief editor; the list of the legal person’s publications and of the other audiovisual communication services it is in charge. The Audiovisual and Digital Communication Regulatory Authority publishes the information on the capital structure of publishers on its website Online website of the media regulator Law n° 86-897 of August 1986, as amended on 34 May 2019 Press Section 5 In any press publication, the following information is brought to the attention of readers in each issue: (1) If the publishing company does not have legal personality, the surname and first name of the owner or the main co-owner; (2) If the publishing company is a legal person, its name or company name, its registered office, its legal form as well as the name of its legal representative and of the natural or legal persons holding at least 10% of its capital; (3) The name of the director of publication and that of the editorial manager This information is also accessible on the home page of any online press service Section 6 Any publishing company must inform readers or Internet users of the publication or the online press service, within one month from the date on which it acquires knowledge of it itself, or when the next issue of the publication: (1) Any transfer or promise to transfer company rights having the effect of giving an assignee at least one third of the share capital or voting rights; (2) Any transfer or promise of transfer of ownership or operation of a press publication title or an online press service; (3) Any change in the status of the publishing company; (4) Any change in the directors or shareholders of the company Each year, the publishing company must bring to the attention of the readers or Internet users of the publication or the online press service all the information relating to the composition of its capital, in the event of ownership by any natural or legal person of a fraction greater than or equal to 5% of it, and of its governing bodies. It mentions the identity and shareholding of each of the shareholders, whether they are natural or legal persons. No specific media registry Germany Interstate Media Treaty of 2020 Regional Laws Audiovisual and radio Press Regarding the press sector, in principle, there are 16 state laws for print media which contain provisions on disclosure of ownership. The German Commission on Concentration in the media (KEK) publishes a media database online which also contains information on corporate investments, amongst others, in the fields of TV, Radio, Press and Online. The website of KEK gives very detailed information on ownership and also details on the amount of shares owners are holding. Article 55(7) Notwithstanding any other notification requirements the broadcaster and the parties holding a direct or indirect interest in the broadcaster within the meaning of Article 62 are required to submit a statement to the competent state media authority upon expiry of the calendar year without delay, indicating whether and to what extent any change has occurred within that calendar year with regard to relevant participating interests and facts necessitating attribution pursuant to Article 62. Online website of the media regulator Greece Law 1746/1988 Law 3548/2007 Press Article 24 of Law 1746/1988: When applying for registration, online news media must provide information on their owner (natural or legal person). In the case of companies limited by shares, a detailed list of shareholders has to be submitted. Online news media operators can register in the Register upon request. Ownership data is accordingly collected for the media outlets interested in registration. Article 24(1) of Law 1746/1988: The shares of companies limited by shares that own newspapers/magazines must similarly be registered shares held by natural persons Article 24(2) of Law 1746/1988: If the ownership of all or part of the registered shares of the aforementioned companies is held by another company limited by shares, then all the shares of that company must also be registered shares held by natural persons Article 2(2)(5) and (7) of Law 3548/2007: In order to be registered in the Registry of the Regional and the Local Press, held by the General Secretariat of Information and Communication, regional and local newspapers must indicate on one of their first two pages the names, address, telephone number of the fax machine and the electronic address of their owners. Non-compliance with media ownership disclosure obligations in relation to the registration of media companies in the Registry of the Regional and the Local Press and the renewal of their registration entails non-registration and erasure from the registry respectively The e-Pasithea database of the General Secretariat of Information and Communication similarly provides some information concerning the ownership structures of the printed press to the public. Registry of the Regional and the Local Press e-Pasithea database of the General Secretariat of Information and Communication Law 3592/2007 on Concentration and Licensing of Mass Media Enterprises and Other Provisions of 2007 Law 4339/2015 Audiovisual and radio Article 12(1) of Law 4339/2015: Candidate undertakings applying for a licence for free-to-air digital terrestrial television and their shareholders who enjoy shares or voting rights that exceed 1% of the undertakings’ capital or of the voting rights in their general assembly are subject to control by the National Council for Radio and Television as regards compliance with media ownership transparency rules. The shares of the shareholders of the candidate companies must ultimately end up in natural persons. Article 52 of Law 4339/2015: The General Secretariat of Information and Communication maintains a Registry of Online News Media Article 53(1) of Law 4339/2015: The Registry contains information on their ownership status Article 53(2) of Law 4339/2015: Registered media are required to notify the General Secretariat of Information and Communication of any change in their ownership structures The National Council for Radio and Television (ESR) publishes some information on the ownership structures of radio and TV enterprises. No media-specific provisions require the disclosure of digital native media ownership details directly to the public. In any case, the Register can only be accessed by registered members. It is not directly accessible to the public. Registry of Online News Media Hungary Media Act of 2010, as amended in 2020 Audiovisual and radio Press Article 41(1) of the Media Act: The provision of linear media services subject to this Act provided by media service providers established in Hungary may commence subsequent to the notification of and registration by the Office of the National Media and Infocommunications Authority Article 42(9) of the Media Act: The media service provider of a linear media service shall notify the Office about any changes concerning its registered data within fifteen days after the change Article 63(14) of the Media Act: The media service provider shall report to the Media Council within five days any changes taking place to its ownership structure or its data indicated in the public contract Article 184(1)(cd) of the Media Act: Regulations on changes in the ownership structure and other data of media service providers, publishers of press products and ancillary media service providers, the relevant reporting of such changes and the publication of certain data The records are available for free or electronically on fee-based subscription through private companies. The data does not include information on ultimate owners. Registry of the Office of the National Media and Infocommunications Authority Ireland Competition Act of 2002, amended by the Competition and Consumer Protection Act of 2014 Audiovisual and radio Press Section 28M of the Competition Act, as inserted by section 74 of the Competition and Consumer Protection Act: Requires the Broadcasting Authority of Ireland to prepare and send a report every 3 years to the Minister for Communications, Energy and Natural Resources describing the ownership and control arrangements for undertakings carrying on a media business in the State. The Minister for Communications, Energy and Natural Resources sends a copy of the report before each House of the Oireachtas. Soon after, the Minister for Communications, Energy and Natural Resources shall publish it on the internet. Furthermore, since August 2020, these reports have been augmented by the existence of the mediaownership.ie resource commissioned by the Broadcasting Authority of Ireland. The site constitutes a publicly accessible Media Ownership Monitor website which is updated annually. Online website of the media regulator Italy Law 249/97 Press Law 47/1948 Audiovisual and radio Press Article 1(6) of Law 249/97: the Authority for guaranteeing the Communications holds the public list of communication operators (ROC). Name, business name, office address, field of activity, ownership structure, corporate structure. Parent companies (who control the companies obliged to enlist in the ROC) must communicate to ROC details of the control (act, structure, shares, voting rights). Article 5 of the Press Law 47/194: Requires legal registration of media provider in the local Court, where is a "registro della stampa". Names of editor and publisher must be indicated, but details on ownership are not required. Online media must register in "registro della stampa" if they publish daily or - if their update news periodically - if they require any public support, or if their annual turnover is over 100 000 EUR. Publishers of daily newspapers and periodicals must disclose names and details in case of trust companies. Register of Communication Operators (ROC) Latvia Law on Press and Other Mass Media of 1990, as amended on 18 November 2020 Electronic Mass Media Law of 2010, as amended on 17 December 2020 Audiovisual and radio Press Section 10 of Law on Press and Other Mass Media: Founders and owners of mass media that are capital companies shall be obliged to inform the Commercial Register Office of their beneficial owners in the cases and in accordance with the procedures laid down in the Commercial Law. Section 18(4) of Electronic Mass Media Law: In order to receive a broadcasting permit a private person (including the winner of a tender), regardless of the country of registration or the place of residence thereof, shall submit an application to the National Electronic Mass Media Council by appending thereto information on the beneficial owner. There are no rules that stipulate disclosing of ownership data to general public, but the National Electronic Mass Media Council publishes this information in its website and the Commercial register is also publicly available. However, the Register of companies receives owners’ information, but disclosure of the names of individuals that own media companies to public is not mandatory. Online website of the media regulator Lithuania Law of Provision of Information to the Public of 1996, as amended on 23 December 2015 Audiovisual and radio Press Article 22(3) of the Law of Provision of Information to the Public: Upon selling or otherwise transferring at least 10% of the shares (interests, member shares) of a broadcaster and/or re-broadcaster holding the broadcasting and/or re-broadcasting licence, the licence holder must, not later than within 30 days of the transfer of ownership rights, inform thereof the Radio and Television Commission of Lithuania Article 24(1) of the Law of Provision of Information to the Public: Legal persons who are publishers of local, regional and national newspapers and magazines or managers of the information society media [...] must submit to the institution authorised by the Government in the field of provision of information to the public [...] the data on their participants who have the right of ownership to or control at least 10% of all the shares or assets (where the assets are not share-based) and inform of the revised data if they change. Notifications of the revised data must contain the names and surnames (names) of such participants, their personal numbers (registration numbers), the stake held in the assets or the number of shares as well as the percentage of votes, administrative bodies, and members thereof as well as information about property relations and/or joint activity linking them with other producers and/or disseminators of public information and/or their participants. Where the participants of the legal persons are legal persons registered in the Republic of Lithuania or in a foreign state, the participants of such entities must also be indicated. The institution authorised by the Government shall publish the received data on its website not later than within 15 days from the date of receipt thereof. As for print and Internet media, this information is publicly available on the website of the Ministry of Culture - though, in reality, this information is not always available. Also, as seen from information on the Ministry's website, information often appears to be outdated. There is no legal requirement for media to publish their ownership structures on company websites (one exception is the legal requirement to public circulation number for print issues). Only some of the leading news media declare their ownership information on their own websites. Online website of the Ministry of Culture Luxembourg Law on Freedom of Expression Press Article 62 of the Law on Freedom of Expression: specifies that any non-periodical publication shall state the name and address of the author or publisher. Article 63 of the Law on Freedom of Expression: periodical newspaper publication shall disclose the identity and work of the publisher’s address, the identity and business address of the person in charge of writing as well as the place and the date of the first making the newspaper available to the public. These information are not accessible in the online version of the print media we observed. Article 66 of the Law on Freedom of Expression, only the identity of the following people has to be disclosed: (1) people holding directly or indirectly more than 25% of the legal capital of the legal person, (2) people composing the administrative and management bodies, as well as (3) people in charge of the management of the company. This information is to be published once a year, in the first edition or the first delivery. Article 69 of Law on Freedom of Expression: these provisions do not apply to electronic media regulated in the law of 1991 on electronic media No specific media registry Malta Broadcasting Act of 1991, as amended on 12 July 2020 Audiovisual and radio Article 15 of the Broadcasting Act: The Broadcasting Authority is entitled to require and obtain any type of information it considers necessary from the license holders Article 16J(2) of the Broadcasting Act: The media service provider shall make accessible to the Broadcasting Authority information concerning its ownership structure, including the beneficial owners The Authority, however, does not make this information publicly available. No specific media registry Press Act of 1974, as amended on 14 May 2018 Press Article 35(1) of the Press Act: Whosoever is the editor or the publisher of a newspaper shall, within ten days of his becoming editor or publisher, as the case may be, produce to the Registrar a declaration containing (a) in the case of the editor - (i) his [her] name and surname, a legally valid identification document number, age and place of residence; and(ii) the title and nature of the newspaper, and the intervals at which it is proposed to be published and (b) in the case of a publisher - (i) if the publisher is an individual, his [her] name, surname, age, place of residence and a legally valid identification document number; (ii) if the publisher is a company or other association of persons, its name, address, the particulars mentioned in sub-paragraph (i) in respect of its judicial representative, and, where applicable, its company or partnership registration number; (iii) the title and nature of the newspaper and the intervals at which it is proposed to be published; and (iv) the name and address of the press where the printing is to take place; and both the editor and the publisher of any newspaper shall keep the Registrar at all times informed of his [her] place of residence and shall communicate to the Registrar any change in his place of residence within ten days of such change. Article 51(2) of the Press Act: It shall be lawful for the Registrar to demand and obtain information from any person concerning the ownership of a newspaper published in Malta or of a company or other association of persons that is or at any time was, directly or indirectly, the owner of such a newspaper or with regard to the transfer of shares or control of any such company Press Registrar The Netherlands No - - - Poland Broadcasting Act of 1992, as amended on 11 August 2021 Audiovisual and radio Article 10(2) of the Broadcasting Act: The Chairman of the National Broadcasting Council may require a media service provider to provide materials, documentation and information to the extent necessary for the purpose of supervising the provider’s compliance with the provisions of the Act, the terms of the broadcasting licence or self-regulation acts binding upon it The purpose of this requirement is to review financial and economic conditions of broadcasters including advertising revenues, financial results (profits and losses), ownership structure and capital concentration. No specific media registry Portugal Media Transparency Law of 2015 Audiovisual and radio Press Article 3(1) of the Media Transparency Law: The list of holders on their own account or on behalf of others, and beneficial owners of shares in the share capital of entities that pursue media activities, together with the composition of their governing bodies, as well as the identification of the person responsible for editorial and supervision of the contents broadcast, is communicated to the Regulatory Authority for the Media by the entities referred to in paragraph 1 of article 2, without prejudice to compliance with the provisions of article 16, when applicable. Article 4 of the Media Transparency Law: The communication referred to in paragraph 1 of the previous article must be renewed and updated, within 10 working days from the occurrence of the following constitutive facts: a) Acquisition or exceeding, by a holder or holder, of 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40% or 50% of the share capital or voting rights; b) Acquisition or surpassing, by any entity in the chain to which a participation of at least 5% of the thresholds of 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40% or 50% of the share capital or rights of vote; c) Reduction, by a holder or holder, of its shareholding to a value lower than each of the percentages indicated in the preceding paragraphs; d) Changing the domain of the entity that carries out media activities; e) Change in the composition of the administrative and management bodies or in the structure of responsibility for guiding and supervising the contents broadcast; f) Change in shareholdings, by the holders and holders of entities that pursue media activities, in legal persons that hold direct or indirect shareholdings in other media bodies. Article 6(2) and (3) of the Media Transparency Law: The Regulatory Authority for the Media makes this information available through its official website, through a database that is easy to access and consult, specially created for this purpose. The information must also be made available, within 10 working days, on the main page of the website of each of the media owned by entities subject to communication obligations Article 6(4) of the Media Transparency Law: In the absence of an electronic site, the information must be made available, within 10 working days, on one of the first 10 pages of all periodicals held by the entity subject to that duty and, if such entity holds other media, on one of the 10 first pages of a general information newspaper with national scope Article 10(1) of the Media Transparency Law: Following the practice of registration acts referring to the ownership of entities that carry out media activities, these must be officially communicated to the ERC by the person responsible for the registration, regardless of their public or private nature Online website of the media regulator Romania The Audio-visual Law of 2002, as amended on 31 May 2019 Audiovisual and radio Article 43(5) of The Audio-visual Law: Any natural or legal person holding or acquiring a quota from the share capital that is equal to or higher than 10% of the share capital or of the voting rights of a company holding an audio-visual or broadcasting license or of a company that controls a company holding such a license must notify the Council thereabout within one month since the date when it has reached such a quota. Article 48 of The Audio-visual Law: Providers of audiovisual media services shall assure simple, direct and permanent access of the public to at least the following information categories: a) name, legal status, social headquarter b) name of the legal representative and the structure of the shareholders to the level of the natural and legal person, as associate or shareholder having a larger share than 20% of the social capital or of the voting rights of a company holding audiovisual license; c) names of the persons in charge of the trade company management and of those that are mainly in charge of the editorial responsibility Information on the shareholders of audiovisual media companies is accessible on the website of the National Audiovisual Council Online website of the media regulator Slovakia Press Act of 2008 Broadcasting and Retransmission Law of 2000, as amended on 28 January 2022 Audiovisual and radio Press Section 6(4)(d) of the Press Act: [...] details of the publisher of the periodical, namely 1. name, registered office and identification number of the person, if it is a legal entity, 2. business name, place of business and identification number of the person, if he is a natural person - entrepreneur, 3. name, surname and address of residence in the territory of the Slovak Republic, if he is a natural person. Section 11(4)(k) of the Press Act: The Ministry of Culture has to be informed about ownership structure in relation to every stakeholder that has reached at least 20% stake; this information is publicly accessible in the press listings published by the Ministry. § 6a(1)(j)(3) of the Broadcasting and Retransmission Law: The annual report shall contain [...] property relations and personnel relations in broadcasting ( § 42 to 44 ), including an overview of the ownership structures of broadcasters § 47(1)(b) of the Broadcasting and Retransmission Law: When deciding on the granting of a license, the Broadcasting and Retransmission Council is obliged to consider and take into account the transparency of the applicant's ownership relations § 50(4) of the Broadcasting and Retransmission Law: In the license transfer, the Broadcasting and Retransmission Council shall not give its consent if the transparency of ownership or the transparency or credibility of the financial resources intended to finance the broadcast by the person to whom the license is to be transferred or transferred is not ensured No specific media registry Slovenia Mass Media Act of 2006 Audiovisual and radio Press Article 12(1) and (2) of the Mass Media Act: For the purpose of entry in the mass media register the publisher/broadcaster must register the mass medium at the relevant ministry prior to commencing the performance of activities. There the publisher/broadcaster must disclose information of the persons who have at least five 5 percent in the voting rights within the assets of a publisher/broadcaster of a general informative printed daily or weekly or a radio or television programme service. Article 13(1) of the Mass Media Act: The relevant ministry must enter a mass medium in the register if the applicant fulfils all the conditions prescribed by the present Act, and must issue a ruling on entry in the mass media register within fifteen days of receiving the application, or request supplementary information for the application within the same period. Article 64(1) of the Mass Media Act: By the end of February each year a publisher/broadcaster must publish the following information in the Official Gazette of the Republic of Slovenia: the full name and address of permanent residence of any natural person and/or the business name and head office address of any legal entity that in the publisher’s/broadcaster’s assets holds a stake of five percent or more of the capital or a share of five percent or more of the management or voting rights, and the full names of the members of the publisher’s/broadcaster’s board of directors or management body and supervisory board. (2) The publisher/broadcaster must report any changes to the information specified in the previous paragraph to the Official Gazette of the Republic of Slovenia within thirty days of their occurrence. (3) The Official Gazette of the Republic of Slovenia must publish the information specified in the first and second paragraphs of this article within fifteen days of receiving the order to publish. No specific media registry Spain General Law for Audio-visual Communication of 2010, as amended on 1 August 2012 Audiovisual and radio Press Article 33(1) of the General Law for Audio-visual Communication: The providers of the audiovisual communication service shall be registered in a public or regional State Registry of Audiovisual Communication Service Providers of a public nature, taking into account the relevant scope of coverage of the issue Article 33(2) of the General Law for Audio-visual Communication: In this State Registry of Audiovisual Communication Service Providers, the holders of significant shares in the providers of the audiovisual media service shall also be registered, indicating the percentage of capital they hold. For the purposes of the provisions of this Law, significant participation is understood to represent, directly or indirectly a) 5% of the share capital, (b) 30% of the voting rights or lower percentage. However, there is no obligation to show the ultimate owners of the companies that are part of the shareholding of the companies, nor the shareholder relationship with other media companies. Newspaper companies and digital natives have no legal obligation to publish their ownership structure unless they are listed companies National Registry of Audiovisual Communication Service Providers Sweden No - - - 7 . 6 L aw s on state advertising 13 Member States do not have rules regulating state advertising (Bulgaria, Czechia, Cyprus, Estonia, Finland, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Poland and Slovenia). Where laws on state advertising do exist, they vary among Member States, for example, according to the forms of advertising that are covered, the entities that are subject to the rules, the thresholds triggering their application, who can access the information that is made available and the allocation criteria. In Austria, there is a threshold of EUR 5 000 per quarter of a year for the disclosure of any order for placing advertisements. Country Name of regulation Sectors Which authority is responsible for ensuring compliance What are the applicable procedures and benchmarks Austria 2012 Media Transparency Law, amended in 2015 All media Court of Audit The government, public bodies and state-owned corporations must disclose their media collaborations (such as placing advertising orders and allocating subsidies to media owners), if the total amount of the paid fees exceeds 5 000 euro per quarter of a year. Art. 1(1): "[...] shall publicly disclose the name of the periodical medium and the amount of the fee as well as, in the case of subsidies to media owners of a periodical medium, the name of the recipient of the subsidies and the amount of the subsidies." Belgium (FL) Flemish Community Radio and Television Broadcasting Act (FIRTA), 27 March 2009, amended o n 2 July 2021 Audiovisual and radio Department of Communication of the DAR (Diensten voor het Algemeen Regeringsbeleid- Services for General Government Policy) Flemish Regulator for the media (VRM) For "public service announcements", the FIRTA law means forms of non-commercial promotional messages that can be brought on both commercial and public service television channels (in contrast to commercial advertising which can only be shown on the private channels and the PSM's radio channels but not on the latter's TV channels). These messages are (a) any message from a governmental organization, public institution or state enterprise fulfilling a public service task, in relation to its policies; (b) any message from a social or humanitarian organization or civil society organization, in relation to its public interest mission; and (c) any message from an authorized or subsidized cultural organization to promote its cultural activities (Article 2, 3 FIRTA). The mapping of these purchases is done by the department of Communication of the DAR (Diensten voor het Algemeen Regeringsbeleid) and is dependent on the reports made by the different entities. Belgium (FR) The ministerial cabinets of the French Community choose their own media plan. RTBF management contract, Articles 42bis, B and 75 Advertising, media Ministerial cabinets A dvertising in children’s programmes is restricted for La Trois, one of the three main channels of the PSM. Bulgaria No - - - Croatia 2021 Electronic Media Act (transposition of AVMSD) (OG 111/21) All media Electronic Media Council Article 38 of the 2021 Electronic Media Act (transposition of AVMSD) (OG 111/21) requires state bodies and public institutions founded by the Republic of Croatia to spend 15% of the annual amount intended for the promotion or advertising of their services or activities on advertising in regional and local publishers of television and / or radio and / or with providers of electronic publications registered in the Register of Providers of Electronic Publications. There are legal obligations of informing the Electronic Media Council about the placed advertising by 31 March of each calendar year. Cyprus No - - - Czech ia Act No. 137/2006 Coll. Public Contracts n/a n/a Denmark not law, but case law n/a Ombudsman; Radio and TV Board This issue is not regulated by law, but by general principles developed in case law on objective public administration. These principles require factuality, equality and proportionality in all governmental/administrative decisions - including decisions on state advertising in the media. Estonia No specific laws. Only general laws on transparency such as the Public Information Act and the Public Procurement Act. - - - Finland No - - - France 29 January 1993 “Sapin Law” (no. 93-122); Law 9 December 2016 “Sapin 2” law All media n/a Any purchase of advertising space via an intermediary must be contractually defined, prices must be made transparent and public. n/a Public purchase of advertising space Interministerial team (representatives of purchasing and communication services), coordinated by the Government Information Service [SIG] under the authority of the Prime Minister and validated by the Department of State purchases (DAE, created by the 3 March 2016 decree no. 2016-247). The SIG, which was created in 1990, is in charge of analyzing public opinion trends for the government, informing the public of the Prime Minister’s and government’s actions and managing and coordinating the Government’s communication (18 October 2000 decree no. 2000-1027). It grants authorizations for ministerial communication campaigns, the creation of State websites and mobile applications. It was completely reorganized in February 2019. Germany Only general procurement law applies - - - Greece Presidential Decree 261/1997 E ach type of regional media (print media, radio and audiovisual) Minister responsible for the Media, Secretariat for Information and Communication At least 30% of the budget planned for each type of media should be allocated to regional media (Art. 4(2) of Presidential Decree 261/1997 as in force). To select the outlets that shall display the ads, the public bodies that wish to get advertised have to employ certain criteria, with due respect to the principle of non-discrimination and value-for-money: the cost of the ad, the overall outlet circulation/audience share, and its popularity within the target audience (Arts 6 and 7 of Presidential Decree 261/1997). Turning to transparency, the law requires that public authorities submit, on an annual basis, to the General Secretariat for Information and Communication a list detailing the amount they spent on advertising on each type of media the past year and to specify the recipients (Art 4(7) of Presidential Decree 261/1997). Art 9(1)(a) of Law 3548/2007 foresees that these lists shall be published on the website of the General Secretariat of Information and Communication. The e-pasithea portal, operated by the Secretariat (http://www.minpress.gr/e-pasithea/Reports/frmTriminaioReports.aspx) indeed lists, for each public authority, the amount it spent on advertising in the previous years and the recipient media outlet, as specified in law. (COVID 19- related): Act of Legislative Content of 20 March 2020 ; Decision 227/2020; Law 4761/2020, Joint Ministerial Decision 72958/2021 - Government Gazette 5445 / Β / 21-11-2021 n/a n/a Throughout the duration of the COVID pandemic and for a maximum period up to 6 months (i.e. up to end of September 2020), the government may, by way of derogation from existing legislation, outsource the implementation of communication and information campaign services concerning the protection of public health and other urgent issues of societal interest related to the measures adopted in the context of the COVID pandemic.The Decision, issued on March 21 (Decision 227/2020), specified the procedure and the kinds of services to be outsourced but left it to the contactor to determine, in a campaign plan, the news media that would display the relevant messages without listing any criteria or principles upon which the selection would be based. It set the total campaign budget at 20 million Euros. In September 2020, Law 4728/2020 was adopted. Art. 14 thereof reiterates the content of the aforementioned Article 68 (of the Act of Legislative Content of 20 March) and extends its application for the entire duration of the COVID-19 crisis. The decision was renewed for 2021. Joint Ministerial Decision 840/2020 Government Gazette 4754 / Β / 27-10-2020 defined inter alia the terms and conditions of the assignment of the campaign for the provision of communication and information services to the citizens, regarding the protection of public health and the adoption of measures to prevent the spread of COVID – 19, manner and frequency of campaign messages, the contract execution procedure as well as the payment procedure of the Media, assigned with the implementation of the campaign. The following Joint Ministerial Decision 72958/2021 - Government Gazette 5445 / Β / 21-11-2021 included similar provisions regarding the assignment of the campaign to pan-Hellenic television stations. The list with the outlets, included non-existent news websites and the funds had been disbursed in a way that was closely aligned to the government’s agenda Hungary No - National Communication Bureau After the 2014 general elections, the government established a new body for advertising budget allocation, the National Communication Bureau, which holds a non-accountable and non-transparent budget for media buying annually. Ireland Mix of national and EU rules on procurement P ress n/a Any public body seeking to place an advert in Irish print media must do so via an intermediary appointed via a public tender process. This intermediary (usually an ad agency) places print ads on behalf of public bodies but, according to the tender document, must do so as per the instructions of the public body. The tender document explicitly states that "Insertion of the advertisement in another newspaper, periodical or publication other than the one specified shall be regarded as failing to fulfil the requirements of this contract". In other words, it appears to be up to the public body to determine where the ad should be placed. Italy Legislative decree n. 208/2021 (new AVMS code) Public administration AGCOM Under Art. 49: Government departments and agencies that buy adverting on mass media must destinate 15% of the expenditure to local radio and tv (operating in EU countries), and 50% to the press (daily newspapers and periodicals). These expenditures must be communicated yearly to AGCOM by governments departments and public authorities. It is worth noting that the same provisions do not apply to publicly owned companies. In case of non-compliance with these rules, administrative fines are issued. Latvia No - - - Lithuania No - - - Luxembourg No - - - Malta n/a n/a n/a n/a The Netherlands Media Act 2008 n/a n/a There is no detailed legislation regarding distribution of state advertising to media outlets. The Media act contains general provisions allocating airtime on national PSM channels to the government for the purpose of broadcasting state information ('overheidsvoorlichting') (art. 6.5 and 6.6). This can be considered as airtime for information campaigns. A number of broadcasting hours is granted annually on the request of the ministry of general affairs. These hours must be fully and exclusively used for the purposes of state information campaigns. A yearly evaluation of State campaigns is published. This report lays out in detail all the media expenditure of campaigns that had a budget exceeding 150 000 EUR. The expenses are shown for different platforms (television, radio, online) as compared to the previous year. A yearly list of campaigns with a detailed report of the media expenditure on different platforms, the campaigns' objectives and how long each campaign ran on different media platforms is also published. Poland n/a n/a n/a n/a Portugal Law No. 95/2015 Press, audiovisual and radio Media Regulatory Authority (ERC) and Competition Authority (AdC) The entities promoting State advertising (direct administration services of the State, public institutes and entities that make up the public business sector of the State) communicate to the ERC, through the Digital Platform of Institutional Publicity of the State and following the express indications in the User Manual, the costs of acquiring advertising space, which must be carried out within 15 days of its contracting and with the submission of the respective supporting documentation. After the communication, the ERC analyzes the amount invested in the acquisition of advertising space, comparing them with the respective supporting documentation, and publishes an updated monthly report on the award and distribution of campaigns on its website. Additionally, the ERC prepares an annual report on the degree of compliance with the law, which it sends to the Assembly of the Republic by the end of the first semester of each calendar year. The ERC does not have sanctioning powers, but only the duty to report cases of non-compliance to the Court of Auditors Romania Basic law on procurement of advertisement A ll market sectors n/a n/a Slovakia Governed by general rules of the Act on public procurement (343/2015 Z. z.) and supervised by the Office for Public Procurement n/a n/a n/a Slovenia No - - - Spain Law 15/2007, Competition Act A ll market sectors National Markets and Antitrust Commission (Comisión Nacional de los Mercados y la Competencia - CNMC) Law 15/2007 is the only one that applies to all media, but is a generic law that does not take into account the specificity of the media sector. Sweden Swedish Marketing Act (SFS, 2008:486) and the Competition Act (SFS, 2008:579) A ll market sectors Swedish Press and Broadcasting Authority Swedish Competition Authority ( Reklamombudsmannen ) State advertising is distributed to media outlets based on the set of criteria stipulated in the law. Annex 8 : overview of self-regulatory press/media councils Information in the table below has been submitted by the European Federation of Journalists in April 2022 in the context of the ongoing preparatory action “Media Councils in the digital age (#3)” (Connect/2020/3659691). T he project will build on the existing comparative database webpage . The Code of Ethics of each council will also be presented in English on the individual pages. Country Press/media council Website Comments Austria Österreichischer Presserat https://www.presserat.at/ Belgium Raad voor de Journalistiek https://www.rvdj.be/ Conseil de déontologie journalistique, https://www.lecdj.be/fr/ Bulgaria National Council for Journalistic Ethics http://mediaethics-bg.org/ Croatia n/a https://www.hnd.hr/zakljucci-novinarskog-vijeca-casti Ethical Commission within Association of Journalists - Croatian Journalists Association Cyprus Cyprus Media Complaints Commission http://www.cmcc.org.cy/ Czechia n/a n/a Denmark Danish Press Council https://www.pressenaevnet.dk/ Estonia Estonian Press Council http://vana.meedialiit.ee/pressinoukogu/index-eng.html Finland The Council for Mass Media http://www.jsn.fi/en/ France Council for Ethical Journalism and Mediation https://cdjm.org/ Germany Deutscher Presserat https://www.presserat.de/en.html Greece n/a n/a Hungary Editor's Forum Hungary http://korrektor.hu/ Ireland Press Council of Ireland https://www.pressombudsman.ie/ Italy n/a n/a Order of Journalists - not equivalent to a Press Council Latvia n/a n/a Lithuania Etikos Komisija http://www.etikoskomisija.lt Luxembourg Conseil de Presse Luxembourg http://www.press.lu Malta n/a http://igm.org.mt Ethical Commission within Association of Journalists - Istitut tal-Ġurnalisti Maltin Netherlands Raad voor de Journalistiek https://www.rvdj.nl/ Poland Rada Etyki Mediów http://www.rem.net.pl/ Council of Media Ethics within Association of Journalists (SDP) Portugal n/a n/a Romania n/a n/a Slovakia Tlačovo-digitálna rada Slovenskej republiky http://trsr.sk Slovenia n/a https://razsodisce.org/ Joint Ethical Commission between Union and Association of Journalists Spain Commission of Ethics and Guarantees of the Professional Journalists Corporation of Andalusia https://periodistasandalucia.es/periodismo/miembros-la-comision/ Regional body Information Council of Catalonia https://fcic.periodistes.cat/ Regional body Sweden Media Ombudsman http://www.medieombudsmannen.se/ Annex 9: Interplay between the intervention and relevant EU legislation The tables below list the most important elements of existing/upcoming EU law which are relevant in the context of the intervention subject to this Impact Assessment . The tables seek to explain the complement arity of the proposed intervention vis-à-vis those elements . Table 1 : Interplay between the intervention and the Audiovisual Media Services Directive (AVMSD) 2010/13/EU, as amended by Directive (EU) 2018/1808 The revised AVMSD The intervention The revised AVMSD created the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA) as a technical advisory group to the Commission. While ERGA concluded a voluntary Memorandum of Understanding to strengthen cooperation between its members, its current status as an expert group and the non-binding character of its cooperation does not allow it to resolve cross-border issues, issue guidance (in particular on media pluralism issues), or take collective action . Article 3 of the revised AVMSD allows Member States to restrict reception on their territory of media services from other Member States where they prejudice or present a serious and grave risk of prejudice to public security, including national security and defence. Such temporary restrictions are effective only vis-à-vis content distributors established in the Member State imposing the restrictions. The revised AVMSD does not provide for a way to have the restrictions implemented vis-à-vis distributors, such as satellite operators, established in other Member States. In practice, this results in enforceability gaps: restricted content continues to be transmitted by satellite operators established in other Member States. Also, the revised AVMSD does not regulate issues related to protection of the EU’s information space from third country providers outside EU jurisdiction for public security reasons. T he revised AVMSD encourages Member States to adopt measures to make accessible information on the ownership structure of (only) audiovisual media. The intervention would step up the current cooperation by giving powers to ERGA to resolve effectively cross-border cases through cooperation, to issue opinions or guidance in regulatory areas relevant to media pluralism, and to coordinate action s against third country service providers . Regarding media ownership transparency, t he intervention would complement the AVMSD by going beyond both in terms of personal scope (it would apply to any media company and not only audiovisual) and material scope (actions to ensure the availability of information on the interests and activities of media companies’ owners in other media or non-media economic sectors). Table 2: Interplay between the intervention and the Anti-Money Laundering (AML) Directive (EU) 2015/849, Proposal for an Anti-Money Laundering Regulation (COM/2021/420 final) and EU Company Law Directive 2017/1132 Anti- M oney Laundering Directive AML Regulation proposal EU Company Law Directive The intervention The Anti-Money Laundering (AML) Directive aims to ensure the beneficial ownership transparency of corporate and other legal entities incorporated within the EU. In particular, it requires that information on beneficial ownership is available to the general public through central registers in each Member State. This framework is expected to be strengthened through the AML Regulation, which once adopted and enforced, would further harmonise the beneficial ownership transparency obligations. The EU Company Law Directive harmonises disclosure requirements for EU limited liability companies and requires that such information is publicly available in the national business registers and can be accessed through the Business Registers Interconnection System. These legal initiatives are not media-specific but apply to media companies as well. The horizontal instruments do not require the disclosure of information on the interests and activities of media companies’ owners in other media or non-media economic sectors. The intervention would cover actions to ensure that such information is available as it is key to ensure transparency on the factors that can influence editorial decisions and media accountability vis-à-vis their audiences. Table 3: Interplay between the intervention and the Digital Services Act ( DSA) (COM/2020/825) soon to be adopted DSA The intervention The DSA will oblige very large online platforms to assess and mitigate risks for freedom of expression and information , civic discourse and electoral processes and public security (including those related to disinformation) and regulate platforms’ content moderation practices. The DSA is a horizontal instrument which does not cover sector-specific issues such as monitoring and safeguarding media-specific risks online by independent regulators. T he intervention would act as a plug-in to this horizontal framework by empowering the Board to detect , evaluate and address media-specific risks o n very large online platforms , complementing the content moderation and risk assessment and mitigation framework of the DSA . Table 4: Interplay between the intervention and the Digital Markets Act ( DMA) (COM/2020/842) soon to be adopted DMA The intervention The DMA sets out certain obligations on gatekeepers, such as giving access to performance measurement tools to publishers and advertisers on request. It gives the media and advertising ecosystem better opportunities to understand the market dynamics, calculating advertising prices and revenue. However, it does not subject provider s of audience measurement systems to principles of transparency, objectivity and inclusiveness regarding the methodologies used to carry out audience measurement. The intervention would provide for principles of transparency, objectivity and inclusiveness of audience measurement. It would also oblige providers of proprietary audience measurement systems , which can cover more players than DMA’s obligations on gatekeepers, to make available, at the request of third parties, information on the methodology of their systems. Table 5: Interplay between the intervention and the State aid rules (Article 107 TFEU) State aid rules The intervention The EU state aid rules (Article 107 TFEU) ensure that any aid granted by Member States through State resources in any form whatsoever which distort or threaten to distort competition by favouring certain undertakings or the production of certain goods shall, in so far as it affects trade between Member States, be incompatible with the internal market. The rules apply horizontally and include also media companies. State aid rules are applied on a case-by-case basis and often ex post . For example, concerning state advertising, i f the state purchases advertising on market terms, state aid rules will not apply. Although public funding would be considered as state aid under Article 107(1) TFEU, public service media benefit from the derogation provided for services of general economic interest on the basis of Article 106(2) TFEU, insofar as the funding is provided to fulfil their public service mission. Protocol 29 on public service broadcasting recognises the competence of Member States to provide for the funding of public service media insofar as such funding is granted for the fulfilment of the public service remit as conferred, defined and organised by each Member State, and insofar as such funding does not affect trading conditions and competition in the Community to an extent which would be contrary to the common interest, while the realisation of the remit of that public service shall be taken into account. The modalities of public service media management’s appointment or dismissals or the rules on the balanced media coverage are outside the scope of application of state aid rules. T he intervention would aim to ensure that state advertising to media is systematically subject to ex ante rules on transparency, notably as regards the beneficiaries and the amounts spent by the state. It would also aim to enhance the independent functioning of public service media through a general principle of balanced media coverage by public service media and targeted safeguards related to their governance, namely appointments and dismissal of their management. The intervention would not interfere with Member States’ competence to provide for funding to public service media to fulfil their remit, as conferred, defined and organised at national level. S ubsidiarity Grid Proposal for a Regulation of the European Parliament and of the Council establishing a common framework for media services in the internal market ( European Media Freedom Act ) and amending Directive 2010/13/EU Can the Union act? What is the legal basis and competence of the Unions’ intended action? 1.1 Which article(s) of the Treaty are used to support the legislative proposal or policy initiative? The proposal’s general objective is to improve the functioning of the internal media market. Improving the functioning of the internal media market would foster the provision of quality media services and thus strengthen the integrity of the internal market as a whole. A regulation providing common rules, underpinned by a structured cooperation framework for media regulators within a Board composed of representatives of the relevant national independent media regulatory authorities or bodies, will achieve this objective. The CJEU case law confirms that Article 114 TFEU is an appropriate legal basis for the creation of new structures under EU law. This is particularly relevant given the governance aspect of the initiative. The proposal would aim to foster closer cooperation between national media regulators within an EU Board, which would be empowered to promote the effective and consistent application of the new framework ( including via non-binding opinions upon request by or in agreement with the Commission and assisting the Commission in drawing up guidance). The CJEU has previously held that Article 114 TFEU allows for the establishment of a Union body responsible for contributing to the implementation of a process of harmonisation in situations where, in order to facilitate the uniform implementation and application of acts based on that provision, the adoption of non-binding supporting and framework measures seems appropriate . Article 114 TFEU has been used by other initiatives pertinent to the media sector, such as the proposal for the Copyright Directive and the proposal for a Regulation on online transmissions and retransmissions . Most recently, the Digital Services Act and the proposal for a Regulation on political advertising were based on Article 114 TFEU. 1.2 Is the Union competence represented by this Treaty article exclusive, shared or supporting in nature? Shared competence Subsidiarity does not apply for policy areas where the Union has exclusive competence as defined in Article 3 TFEU . It is the specific legal basis which determines whether the proposal falls under the subsidiarity control mechanism. Article 4 TFEU sets out the areas where competence is shared between the Union and th e Member States. A rticle 6 TFEU sets out the areas for which the Unions has competence only to support the actions of the Member States. Subsidiarity Principle: Why should the EU act? Does the proposal fulfil the procedural requirements of Protocol No. 2 : Has there been a wide consultation before proposing the act? Is there a detailed statement with qualitative and, where possible, quantitative indicators allowing an appraisal of whether the action can best be achieved at Union level? In line with the Better Regulation Guidelines, stakeholders were widely consulted as part of the impact assessment process. The consultation strategy for the impact assessment on the European Media Freedom Act targeted all types of stakeholders impacted by the initiative, including media outlets (including private and public television and radio broadcasters, press publishers), advertisers, online platforms and media market players, journalists associations and trade unions, regulatory authorities, NGOs, academia and citizens. In addition to the Commission open public consultation and feedback on the c all for e vidence, the Commission organised meetings with key stakeholders and experts to gather additional evidence and data on the specific problems to be addressed by the initiative, the policy approach and its impact, as well as technical information about existing industry practices. It also analysed numerous position and analytical papers received in the context of the initiative’s preparation of the initiative. The preparation of the impact assessment underpinning the initiative was supported by two external studies who also conducted targeted workshops with key stakeholders , case studies and surveys and individual consultations. Both the explanatory memorandum (section 2) and the impact assessment (chapter 3) contain respect ively sections on the principle of subsidiarity, fo r more details see question 2.2 below. Does the explanatory memorandum (and any impact assessment) accompanying the Commission’s proposal contain an adequate justification regarding the conformity with the principle of subsidiarity? The objectives of the intervention cannot be achieved by Member States acting alone, as the problems are increasingly of a cross-border nature and not limited to individual Member States or to a subset of Member States. Production, distribution and consumption of media content, including news, are increasingly digital and cross-border as the internet continues to drive the transformation of traditional media business models. The provision of media services across the EU is increasingly affected by global platforms, which act as gateways to media content while being prominent online advertising providers. A common EU approach, promoting convergence, transparency, legal certainty and a level playing field for the relevant media market players is the best way to advance the internal media market. It will reduce the burden for media service providers, who have to comply with different national legal regimes when they operate in several Member States. It will enhance legal certainty for media market players, thereby promoting fair competition and cross-border investment. It will also enable media regulators to adopt coordinated responses in matters affecting the EU’s information space and in particular the protection of EU consumers’ interests. The initiative takes due account of the Protocol on the system of public broadcasting in the Member States (the Amsterdam Protocol) and Article 4(2) of the Treaty on European Union (TEU). It will not interfere with Member States’ competence to provide funding to public service media so that they can fulfil their public service remit, as conferred, defined and organised at national level, nor will it interfere with national identities or regulatory traditions in the media field. T he European Parliament and the Council have called upon the Commission at several occasions to address shortcomings in the EU media market and safeguard media freedom and pluralism in that market. Based on the answers to the questions below, can the objectives of the proposed action be achieved sufficiently by the Member States acting alone (necessity for EU action)? A common EU approach, promoting convergence, transparency, legal certainty and a level playing field for the relevant media market players is the best way to advance the internal media market. The objectives of the intervention cannot be achieved by Member States acting alone, as the problems are increasingly of a cross-border nature and not limited to single Member States or to a subset of Member States. Production, distribution and consumption of media content, including news, are increasingly digital and cross-border as the internet continues to drive the transformation of traditional media business models. Provision of media services across the EU is affected by global platforms which act as gateways to media content whilst dominating online advertising. The identified market failures in the EU media market have Union relevance as they arise across borders and affect several Member States. The initiative will take due account of the Protocol 29 on the system of public broadcasting in the Member States. It will not interfere with Member States’ competence to provide funding for public service media so that they can fulfil their public service remit, as conferred, defined and organised at national level. It would only envisage general principles to strengthen the independence of public service media and reinforce their societal role as recognised in the Protocol. This Impact Assessment discards the option of a full harmonisation of rules applicable to public service media (as regards their remits, organisation and funding conditions), to ensure that the initiative is compatible with the Protocol and Member States’ competences in this area. The initiative will not interfere with national identities or regulatory traditions in the media field, in line with Article 4(2) of the Treaty on European Union (TEU). The Impact Assessment discards the option of a full harmonisation of national media pluralism laws. It takes due account of stakeholders’ views that uniform and detailed EU media pluralism rules would be undesirable and disproportionate, as such rules must be adapted to the historic and cultural background of each Member State. Instead, the initiative would aim to strike the right balance between generally couched provisions and more specific rules that allow to reach the policy objectives (including legal certainty). Member States would have to ensure that independent media regulators are involved in the scrutiny of media transactions, guided by a set of qualitative criteria. It would include a mechanism enabling media regulators to consult each other and draw up non-binding opinions at EU level in view of promoting the proper functioni ng of the internal media market , in respect of Commission’s powers under the Treaties. The Member States’ powers on media concentration would remain with the competent authorities. Are there significant/appreciable transnational/cross-border aspects to the problems being tackled? Have these been quantified? The objectives of the intervention cannot be achieved by Member States acting alone, as the problems are increasingly of a cross-border nature and not limited to single Member States or to a subset of Member States. Production, distribution and consumption of media content, including news, are increasingly digital and cross-border as the internet continues to drive the transformation of traditional media business models. Provision of media services across the EU is affected by global platforms which act as gateways to media content whilst dominating online advertising. The identified market failures in the EU media market have Union relevance as they arise across borders and affect several Member States. Would national action or the absence of the EU level action conflict with core objectives of the Treaty or significantly damage the interests of other Member States? In the absence of the EU level action, media will operate in a substantially weakened internal market. Member States will have no incentives to address the fragmentation of their laws and procedures related to media pluralism and such laws will continue to be misused in certain cases for protectionist reasons. Further internal market fragmentation is likely to arise given the inherent cross-border nature of digital media services and Member States’ likely attempts to address media plurality challenges online (as already m anifested in some Member States ). This, in turn, will continue to induce costs and make it more difficult for media companies to invest and operate across borders, while an increase in the level of cross-border investment is unlikely . To what extent do Member States have the ability or possibility to enact appropriate measures? Intervention at national level would not solve the identified problems. Action by Member States would lack scale or the necessary harmonising effect and would increase disparity and fragmentation. Furthermore, Member States might lack incentives to reform their media frameworks, e.g. changing rules meant to shield national markets or players from competition or making the allocation of state resources more transparent and fair. The potential creation of a common governance structure to ensure the implementation of the new framework also requires EU intervention. In addition, in view of the inherent cross-border nature of digital markets, any national attempt to regulate media diversity online could only partly solve the issues for recipients of media services. Finally, considering that in some cases the interference in editorial independence and operation of media comes directly from the state, it is unlikely that such a problem would be addressed voluntarily and effectively at the national level. How does the problem and its causes (e.g. negative externalities, spill-over effects) vary across the national, regional and local levels of the EU? The proposal aims to address several problems that hinder the proper functioning of the internal media market. These are: a) obstacles to cross-border activity and investment; b) insufficient regulatory cooperation and convergence; c) interference in the free provision of quality media services; and d) opaque and/or unfair allocation of economic resources. T he gravity of the problems varies across the EU : Obstacles to cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market affects especially the broadcasting sector, which is traditionally regulated (at EU and/or national level), and to a lesser extent the press sector (where covered by the national rules) ; I nsufficient regulatory cooperation and convergence , on its side, affects national regulatory authorities in all MS and mainly providers regulated at EU level, i.e. providers of audiovisual media services and video-sharing platforms, and ultimately also impacts consumers and other media market players, such as media content distributors ; Interference in free provision of quality media services in the internal market has resulted in an increasingly hostile investment environment vis-à-vis foreign companies in several Member States and the resulting exodus of foreign media owners from certain national markets driven by both regulatory and political pressure reasons has not been counterbalanced by new media services entering the markets . With regard to the o paque and/or unfair allocation of economic resources in the internal media market , the opacity of and biases inherent to proprietary systems of audience measurement skew advertising revenue flows, affecting negatively media companies across the EU , while the non-transparent and/or unfair allocation of state advertising is an issue, to a larger or lesser extent, in most Member States . Is the problem widespread across the EU or limited to a few Member States? The identified problems affect the Union as a whole. Are Member States overstretched in achieving the objectives of the planned measure? Due to the inherent cross-border nature of digital markets, any national attempt to regulate media diversity online could only partly solve the issues for recipients of media services. Action by Member States would lack scale or the necessary harmonising effect and would increase disparity and fragmentation. How do the views/preferred courses of action of national, regional and local authorities differ across the EU? The option of a balanced legislative intervention is supported by most stakeholders, including the national media regulators and the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA). Only publishers would prefer a recommendation, although they do support measures on audience measurement, state advertising and protection of journalistic sources. As regards governance, there is wide support for an oversight structure based on ERGA. Regulators and the media freedom community in particular are in favour of strengthening ERGA, while companies and business associations would rather keep it in its current form. Based on the answer to the questions below, can the objectives of the proposed action be better achieved at Union level by reason of scale or effects of that action (EU added value)? Are there clear benefits from EU level action? Yes, EU level action could reduce the burden for market players to comply with different national legal regimes when they operate in several Member States. It would increase predictability and enhance legal certainty for media market players, thereby promoting fair competition and cross-border investment. It c ould also allow for a coordinated response of media regulators in matters affecting the EU’s information space. Are there economies of scale? Can the objectives be met more efficiently at EU level (larger benefits per unit cost)? Will the functioning of the internal market be improved? The initiative, by establishing a common EU framework fostering cross-border activity, strengthening cooperation between regulators, promoting free provision of quality media content, and addressing practices that distort competition, would create conditions more favourable for the development of media services across borders and increase consumer choice by better access to quality media content. This will strengthen the internal media market whilst promoting media freedom and pluralism, protected under the Charter of Fundamental Rights. What are the benefits in replacing different national policies and rules with a more homogenous policy approach? A better functioning internal media market will lead to increased investment, scaling up and competition, thus improving the viability of media companies and providing consumers with access to a more diverse range of quality media content. The annual net economic benefits, in terms of increased revenues of media companies, are estimated at EUR 2.9 billion. The expected societal benefits include growing accountability and trust in the media and improving media freedom and pluralism, thus strengthening the rule of law and democratic standards . Do the benefits of EU-level action outweigh the loss of competence of the Member States and the local and regional authorities (beyond the costs and benefits of acting at national, regional and local levels)? T he initiative will not interfere with national identities or regulatory traditions in the media field. The l egislative proposal will provid e common rules for the internal market for media services , and will assign important tasks to the Board, as the collective body of independent media regulators, including tasks to provide expert advice on regulatory, technical or practical aspects of media regulation, to issue opinions on market concentrations likely to affect the functioning of the internal market and to coordinate actions with regard to media service providers (including from third countries) not following EU media standards . The recommendation will encourag e media companies and Member States to foster media independence and transparency . Such a multi-layered and flexible approach will bring the desired benefits while optimising the costs for media market players and public authorities . Will there be improved legal clarity for those having to implement the legislation? The proposed Regulation will promote convergence , transparency and legal certainty for the relevant media market players. It will reduce the burden for media service providers, who have to comply with different national legal regimes when they operate in several Member States. It will enhance legal certainty for media market players, thereby promoting fair competition and cross-border investment. It will also enable media regulators to adopt coordinated responses in matters affecting the EU’s information space and in particular the protection of EU consumers’ interests. 3. Proportionality: How the EU should act Does the explanatory memorandum (and any impact assessment) accompanying the Commission’s proposal contain an adequate justification regarding the proportionality of the proposal and a statement allowing appraisal of the compliance of the proposal with the principle of proportionality? The initiative builds on existing legal frameworks and will only focus on areas where additional EU action appears necessary for the proper functioning of the internal media market, including to ensure a level playing field and independent operation of media market players across the EU. It is limited to issues on which Member States cannot achieve satisfactory solutions on their own, and provides for a well-calibrated harmonisation that does not go beyond what is necessary to achieve the objective of establishing a common framework for the proper functioning of the internal market for media services, while guaranteeing the quality of such services. The fact that several of the proposed rules are principle-based also contributes to ensuring the proposals’ proportionality. The proposal gives rise to limited compliance and enforcement costs that will likely be offset by significant benefits for media market players and citizens. By enhancing transparency and reducing regulatory fragmentation in the market, the proposal will enhance legal certainty and fair competition while reducing market distortions. This will increase investors’ confidence and make cross-border media market transactions less burdensome, creating a positive environment for investments and free provision of media services across the EU. Citizens and businesses will also benefit from a more diverse and plural media offer, increased transparency and improved access to information. Based on the answers to the questions below and information available from any impact assessment, the explanatory memorandum or other sources, is the proposed action an appropriate way to achieve the intended objectives? Yes, as mentioned in the Impact Assessment and the Explanatory Memorandum, the preferred option will establish some core principles/rules for the media market, and empower the Board, the collective body of independent media regulators, to come up with expert views, opinions and collective action, hence preserving national regulatory discretion in the media sector. The principles/rules could be relied upon in front of national courts and the Commission could launch infringements proceedings in particular in case of systemic issues. Moreover, national media authorities could be granted targeted enforcement powers in certain areas of the new legislation, such as the rules on audience measurement. The non-binding element of the option - the recommendation - will guide the regulatory effort on the more sensitive issues (media independence safeguards) or matters where significant progress has been achieved as a result of other EU legal instruments (media ownership transparency). Such a multi-layered and flexible approach will bring the desired benefits while optimising the costs for media market players and public authorities, especially taking into account the lower cost of the Commission secretariat compared to the EU office. Is the initiative limited to those aspects that Member States cannot achieve satisfactorily on their own, and where the Union can do better? T he requirements in the EU initiative would not go beyond what is needed to achieve the general and specific objectives and would not impose disproportionate costs. This option will meet the general objective of the intervention - to improve the functioning of the internal media market - in an efficient, coherent, proportionate and largely effective way. Is the form of Union action (choice of instrument) justified, as simple as possible, and coherent with the satisfactory achievement of, and ensuring compliance with the objectives pursued (e.g. choice between regulation, (framework) directive, recommendation, or alternative regulatory methods such as co-legislation, etc.)? T he preferred option consist s of a legislative instrument and a recommendation to media companies and Member States to foster media independence, underpinned by a governance structure consisting of the Board assisted by a Commission secretariat. This option will meet the general objective of the intervention - to improve the functioning of the internal media market - in an efficient, coherent, proportionate and largely effective way. The financial modelling estimates the net economic benefits, in terms of increased revenues, at EUR 2 885 million for the first year and EUR 2 898.1 million for the following years, above the expected benefits from other options. T he legislative instrument will establish some core principles/rules for the media market, and empower the Board, the collective body of independent media regulators, to come up with expert views, opinions and collective action, hence preserving national regulatory discretion in the media sector. The principles/rules could be relied upon in front of national courts and the Commission could launch infringements proceedings in particular in case of systemic issues. Moreover, national media authorities could be granted targeted enforcement powers in certain areas of the new legislation, such as the rules on audience measurement. The non-binding element of the option - the recommendation - will guide the regulatory effort on the more sensitive issues (media independence safeguards) or matters where significant progress has been achieved as a result of other EU legal instruments (media ownership transparency). Such a multi-layered and flexible approach will bring the desired benefits while optimising the costs for media market players and public authorities, especially taking into account the lower cost of the Commission secretariat compared to the EU office. Does the Union action leave as much scope for national decision as possible while achieving satisfactorily the objectives set? (e.g. is it possible to limit the European action to minimum standards or use a less stringent policy instrument o r approach?) The initiative builds on existing legal frameworks and will only focus on areas where additional EU action appears necessary for the proper functioning of the internal media market, including to ensure a level playing field and independent operation of media market players across the EU. It is limited to issues on which Member States cannot achieve satisfactory solutions on their own, and provides for a well-calibrated harmonisation that does not go beyond what is necessary to achieve the objective of establishing a common framework for the proper functioning of the internal market for media services, while guaranteeing the quality of such services. The fact that several of the proposed rules are principle-based also contributes to ensuring the proposals’ proportionality. Does the initiative create financial or administrative cost for the Union, national governments, regional or local authorities, economic operators or citizens? Are these costs commensurate with the objective to be achieved? The proposal gives rise to limited compliance and enforcement costs that will likely be offset by significant benefits for media market players and citizens. By enhancing transparency and reducing regulatory fragmentation in the market, the proposal will enhance legal certainty and fair competition while reducing market distortions. This will increase investors’ confidence and make cross-border media market transactions less burdensome, creating a positive environment for investments and free provision of media services across the EU. Citizens and businesses will also benefit from a more diverse and plural media offer, increased transparency and improved access to information. While respecting the Union law, have special circumstances applying in individual Member States been taken into account? The gravity of the problems identified varies across the EU and some issues are more serious for certain Member States. This has been assessed and made clear in the Impact Assessment when describing the problems and underlying drivers and taken into account for selecting the preferred option (see above). EXECUTIVE SUMMARY SHEET Impact assessment on the European Media Freedom Act A. Need for action What is the problem and why is it a problem at EU level? As media markets become more digital and inherently cross-border , s everal problems hinder t he proper functioning of the internal media market . These are : o bstacles to cross-border activity and investment ; i nsufficient regulatory cooperation and convergence ; i nterference in the free provision of quality media s e rvices ; and o paque and/or unfair allocation of economic resources . While the gravity of the problems varies across the EU, overall they make it difficult for media players to use the internal market to its full potential , to maintain economic sustainability and to fulfil properly their societal role to inform citizens and businesses. What should be achieved? The general objective is to improve the functioning of the internal media market. S pecific objectives of the initiative are the following: f ostering cross-border activity and investment in the internal media market ; i ncreasing regulatory cooperation and convergence in the internal media market ; f acilitating free provision of quality media services in the internal market ; and e nsuring transparent and f air allocation of economic resources in the internal media market . What is the value added of action at the EU level (subsidiarity)? The initiative will reduce the burden market players face in order to comply with different national legal regimes when they operate in several Member States . It will increase predictability and legal certainty, promot e fair competition ( especially vis-à-vis global online platforms ) , enhance cross - border investment and improve the quality of media services provided in the EU . Intervention only at national level would lack scale and the necessary approximating effect . In any case, the initiative will not interfere with national identities or regulatory traditions in the media field. B. Solutions What are the various options to achieve the objectives? Is there a preferred option or not? If not, why? Three options were assessed in detail in addition to the dynamic baseline. Option 1: Recommendation on media pluralism and independence, encouraging Member States and, in certain areas, companies in the media market to implement a set of actions to promote media pluralism, editorial independence and as transparency and fairness in the media market. Option 2: Legislative proposal and recommendation on media independence , the former providing common rules for the internal market for media services and the latter encouraging media companies and Member States to foster media independence and transparency. Option 3: Enhanced legislative proposal adding on top of all the legislative elements of Option 2 further obligations for companies in the media market and regulators to foster the availability of quality media services and transparent/fair allocation of economic resources in the media market. Legislative proposals would envisage the creation of a b oard composed of representatives of the relevant national regulatory authorities , assisted by a secretariat provided by the Commission ( S ub-option A ), or an independent EU office ( S ub -option B ). The preferred option recommended for political adoption is O ption 2 S ub-option A . What are different stakeholders ’ views? Who supports which option? The option of a balanced legislative intervention as opposed to no action or detailed standard-setting is supported by the public and most other stakeholders, including the media freedom community, consumer organisations, national media regulators , the European Regulators Group for Audiovisual Media Services (ERGA) , public and private bro adcasters, content distributors, online intermediaries and the advertising ecosystem players. Only publishers would prefer a recommendation , although t hey do support measures on audience measurement, state advertising and protection of journalistic sources . A s regards governance, there is wide support for an oversight structure based on ERGA. Regulators and the media freedom community in particular are in favour of strengthening ERGA, while companies and business associations would rather keep it in its current form. C. Impacts of the preferred option What are the benefits of the preferred option (if any, otherwise of main ones)? A better functioning internal media market will lead to increased investment, scaling up and competition , thus improving the viability of media companies and providing consumers with access to a more diverse range of quality media content. The annual net economic benefits, in terms of increased revenues of media companies, are estimated at EUR 2.9 billion. The expected societal benefits include growing accountability and trust in the media and improv ing media freedom and pluralism , thus strengthening the rule of law and democratic standards. What are the costs of the preferred option (if any, otherwise of main ones)? The preferred option will entail no costs for citizens, and only negligible adjustment costs for businesses, i.e. overall one-off costs for all companies between EUR 9.4 and 14 million and recurrent annual costs between EUR 5.6 and 14.5 million all of which will be absorbed into business-as-usual costs . The a nnual costs for public authorities will be EUR 6.1 million . This will include approximately EUR 2 to 2. 3 million in annual costs for the EU : 8-10 full-time equivalent posts plus a round EUR 1 million operational budget estimated for the governance solution set out in S ub- option A. What are the impacts on SMEs and competitiveness? Costs for SMEs are expected to be minor, mainly linked to familiarisation with the new measures . T hey will be balanced by increased benefits, which are expected to be significant as the preferred option would enable SMEs to operate, including across borders, in a more predictable and consistent regulatory environment . The initiative would expand the playing field for SMEs to compete with other market players, including online platforms. In addition, more transparen t and fairer allocation of state advertising would reduce market distortions , for the benefit of SMEs. Will there be significant impacts on national budgets and administrations? National authorities will incur recurring administrative and enforcement costs , but also savings : national media regulator s could expect to save up to 20% of their current annual expenditure related to coordination in ERGA. T he preferred option is expected to increase the quality of cooperation among media regulators and help them to tackl e the cross-border challenges . In addition, the measures on state advertising and independence safeguards for public service media will increase transparency and effectiveness of the u s e o f state resources . Will there be other significant impacts? Growing provision of quality media content, g reater market transparency and safer information space will empower and better protect consumers , improving the conditions for the exercise of f reedom of expression and information . In addition , improved access to quality media services for the public and businesses will improve the integrity of the single market as a whole . Proportionality? The measures envisaged in the preferred option are focused and do not go beyond what is necessary to achieve the objectives of the initiative . In particular, t he preferred option only envisages balanced harmonisation measures , coupled with a cooperation framework for national media regulators in an EU b oard, which are necessary for the proper functioning of the internal media market. The proposal is mindful of the burden on different actors and limits the new obligations to the essential ones , with direct compliance and enforcement costs commensurate with the initiative’s objectives . D. Follow up When will the policy be reviewed? A fter the adoption of the legislative instrument , Member States will be given between 3 and 6 months to adapt their national frameworks , depending on the relevant provisions . Its first evaluation will take place 4 years after the new rules’ entry into force, and subsequent evaluations will be carried out every 4 years . An independent mechanism to monitor risks to the functioning of the internal market for media services will be established under the legislative instrument . In the case of the recommendation, a specific monitoring scheme will also be envisaged. In particular, Member States will submit to the Commission all relevant information regarding measures and actions taken on media ownership transparency . Other areas of the recommendation will be monitored as part of the mechanism established by the legislative instrument . Andmed algatuse kohta Nimetus Ettepanek: Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määrus , mille ga luuakse meediateenustele siseturul ühtne raamistik (Euroopa meediavabaduse määrus ) ja muudetakse direktiivi 2010/13/EL Proposal for a Regulation of the European Parliament and of the Council establishing a common framework for media services in the internal market (European Media Freedom Act) and amending Directive 2010/13/EU Eelnõu nr COM(2022) 457 Esitamise kuupäev: 1 6 .0 9 .2022 Menetluskord EL-is: tavamenetlus SEISUKOHA Valitsusse toomise alus 1. FORMCHECKBOX RK KT S § 152 1 lg 1 p1 - algatuse/teatise reguleerimisala nõuab seaduse või Riigikogu otsuse vastuvõtmist, muutmist või kehtetuks tunnistamist 2. FORMCHECKBOX RK KT S § 152 1 lg 1 p2 - algatuse/ vastuvõtmisega või teatises toodud meetmete rakendamisega kaasneb oluline majanduslik , sotsiaalne või muu mõju 3. FORMCHECKBOX RK KT S § 152 1 lg 2 - Euroopa Liidu asjade komisjoni või väliskomisjoni nõue 4. FORMCHECKBOX VVS § 20 1 lg 1 - algatuse/teatise reguleerimisala nõuab VV pädevusse kuuluva otsuse vastuvõtmist (määruse vastuvõtmine, muutmine, tühistamine) 5. FORMCHECKBOX VVS § 20 1 lg 2 - seisukoha võtmist algatuse/teatise osas peab oluliseks peaminister või minister (on poliitiliselt oluline või tundlik (Eestis või EL-is)) Valitsusele esitamine Kuupäev 10.11 . 2022 (KOK 0 2 .1 1 .2022) EL menetluse ajakava Siseriiklik menetlus Vastutav min KuM Kaasatud ministeeriumid JuM, MKM, VäM Sotsiaalpartnerid, huvigrupid Kaasata kõik asjasse puutuvad partnerid ja huvigrupid EELNÕU ÜLEVAADE Euroopa Parlamendi ja Nõukogu määruse ettepanek u , millega luuakse meediateenustele siseturul ühtne raamistik , e esmärk on parandada EL-sisese meediaturu toimimist meedia mitmekesisuse ja sõltumatuse kaitse kaudu. M äärusega tagatakse, et nii avalik kui ka erameedia saab ELi siseturul hõlpsamini piiriüleselt tegutseda ilma tarbetu surveta ja võttes arvesse digipööret meediaruumis. Kavandatav määrus sisaldab muuhulgas meetmeid toimetuse otsustesse avaliku ja erasektori (s t poliitilise ja ärihuvidest lähtuva ) sekkumise ja jälgimise vastu. Selle keskmes on avalik-õigusliku meedia sõltumatus ja stabiilne rahastamine ning riikliku reklaami jaotamise ja meediaomandi läbipaistvus. Ühtlasi hõlmab see meetmeid toimetajate sõltumatuse kaitsmiseks ja huvide konfliktide avalikustamiseks. Samuti käsitletakse meediaomandi koondumist ja luuakse uus sõltumatu Euroopa meediateenuste nõukoda, kuhu kuuluvad riiklikud meediaasutused. Konkreetsemalt e elnõuga: kohustatakse liikmesriike austa m a meediateenuse osutajate toimetusvabadust ja tugevda m a ajakirjanduse allikakaitset. M eediateenuse osutajad peavad tagama omandi läbipaistvuse, avalikustades vastava teabe, ning võtma meetmeid toimetusotsuste sõltumatuse nimel ; luuakse kaitse nuhkvara meedia, ajakirjanike ja nende perekondade vastu kasutamise eest; nähakse ette, et a valik-õiguslik u meedia rahastamine peab olema piisav ja stabiilne, et toimetus saaks tegutseda sõltumatult. Avalik-õigusliku meediaettevõtte tegevjuht ja juhatus tuleb ametisse määrata läbipaistval, avatud ja mittediskrimineerival viisil. Avalik-õigusliku meediateenuse osutaja d pea vad kooskõlas oma eesmärgiga ja erapooletult kajastama mitmekesiseid seisukohti ja teavet ; kohustatakse liikmesriike hindama meediaturu koondumise mõju meedia mitmekesisusele ja toimetuse sõltumatusele. Määrus näeb ka ette , et liikmesriikide võetud õiguslikud, regulatiivsed või haldusmeetmed, mis võivad meediat mõjutada, oleksid nõuetekohaselt põhjendatud ja proportsionaalsed ; kehtestatakse uued nõuded riikliku reklaami jaotamiseks meediale, nii et see oleks läbipaistev ja mittediskrimineeriv . Seadusega suurendatakse ka reklaamitulu mõjutavate tarbijaskonna mõõtmise süsteemide läbipaistvust ja objektiivsust, eelkõige internetis ; kehtestatakse k aitsemeetmed kutsestandardite kohaselt toodetud meediasisu põhjendamatu eemaldamise vastu. Kui tegemist ei ole süsteemsete riskidega, nt desinformatsioon, peavad väga suured digiplatvormid, kes kavatsevad kõrvaldada platvormi poliitikaga vastuolus oleva seadusliku meediasisu, teavitama meediateenuse osutajaid eelnevalt kõrvaldamise põhjustest. Digiplatvormid peavad m eediateenuse osutajate kaebusi menetlema eelisjärjekorras ; nähakse ette õigus kohandada meediapakkumisi seadmetes ja liidestes, n t nutitelerites, kus kasutajad võivad muuta vaikeseadeid vastavalt eelistustele ; luuakse ELi meediaõiguse raamistiku tulemuslikku ja järjepidevat kohaldamist toetav Euroopa meediateenuse nõukoda, mis aitab komisjonil koostada suuniseid meedia reguleerimise kohta ja avaldab arvamusi meediaturge ning meediaturu koondumist mõjutavate riiklike meetmete ja otsuste kohta. Nõukoda kooskõlastab ka riiklikke reguleerivaid meetmeid seoses EL i väliste ja avalikku julgeolekut ohustavate meediakanalitega, et nood ei hoiaks kõrvale ELis kehtivatest eeskirjadest. Nõukoda algatab ka struktureeritud dialoogi väga suurte digiplatvormide ja meediasektori vahel, et pakkuda juurdepääsu mitmesugustele meediapakkumistele ja jälgida, et platvormid järgiksid enesereguleerimise algatusi, nt desinformatsiooni käsitlevat tegevusjuhendit . Määruse eelnõu põhineb komisjoni õigusriigi aruannetel ja läbivaadatud audiovisuaalmeedia teenuste direktiivil , millega nähakse ette audiovisuaalmeediat käsitlevate riiklike õigusaktide kooskõlastamine ELis. Eelnõu tugineb ka digiteenuste õigusaktile , digiturgude õigusaktile ning uuele desinformatsiooni käsitlevale tegevusjuhendile . See on osa ELi jõupingutustest demokraatliku osaluse suurendamisel, väärinfo tõkestamisel ning meedia mitmekesisuse ja vabaduse toetamisel . Ettepanek täiendab hiljutist soovitust ajakirjanike kaitse, turvalisuse ja võimestamise kohta ning direktiivi, mis kaitseks ajakirjanikke ja õiguste kaitsjaid kohtuvaidluste kuritarvitamise eest (üldsuse osalemise vastaste strateegiliste hagide tõkestamise pakett) . Meediavabaduse määrus toetab ka meediasektori elujõulisuse, vastupidavuse ja digipöörde algatusi, mis on vastu võetud meedia ja audiovisuaalvaldkonna tegevuskava ning läbivaadatud autoriõiguse normide alusel. Määrusega koos avaldat i Euroopa Komisjoni soovitus , mille eesmärk on aidata leevendada toimetuse otsustesse põhjendamatu sekkumise ohtu ja parandada ligipääsu teabele meedia omanike kohta. Soovituses esitatakse v abatahtlike heade praktikate kataloog meediaettevõtetele toimetuse sõltumatuse edendamiseks ja ettepanekud meediaettevõtetele ning liikmesriikidele meedia omandisuhete läbipaistvuse suurendamiseks . Võimalikud sots-maj. mõjud võimalikud õiguslikud muudatused Mõju eelarvele Kommentaarid SEISUKOHAD Eesti seisukoht Teiste riikide seisukohad Kommentaarid Resolutsiooni liik: Riigikantselei resolutsioon Viide: Kultuuriministeerium / / ; Riigikantselei / / 2-5/22-02046 Resolutsiooni teema: Euroopa meediavabaduse määrus Adressaat: Kultuuriministeerium Ülesanne: Tulenevalt Riigikogu kodu- ja töökorra seaduse § 152` lg 1 p 2 ning Vabariigi Valitsuse reglemendi § 3 lg 4 palun valmistada ette Vabariigi Valitsuse seisukoha ja otsuse eelnõu järgneva algatuse kohta, kaasates seejuures olulisi huvigruppe ja osapooli: - Ettepanek: Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määrus, millega luuakse meediateenustele siseturul ühtne raamistik (Euroopa meediavabaduse määrus) ja muudetakse direktiivi 2010/13/EL, COM (2022) 457. EISi toimiku nr: 22-0552 Tähtaeg: 31.10.2022 Adressaat: Justiitsministeerium, Majandus- ja Kommunikatsiooniministeerium, Välisministeerium Ülesanne: Palun esitada oma sisend Kultuuriministeeriumile seisukohtade kujundamiseks antud eelnõu kohta (eelnõude infosüsteemi (EIS) kaudu). Tähtaeg: 21.10.2022 Lisainfo: Eelnõu on kavas arutada valitsuse 10.11.2022 istungil ja Vabariigi Valitsuse reglemendi § 6 lg 6 kohaselt sellele eelneval nädalal (02.11.2022) EL koordinatsioonikogus. Esialgsed materjalid EL koordinatsioonikoguks palume esitada hiljemalt 31.10.2022. Kinnitaja: Katrin Juhandi, Euroopa Liidu asjade direktori asetäitja Kinnitamise kuupäev: 06.10.2022 Resolutsiooni koostaja: Elen Nurme [email protected], 693 5201 Eelnõude infosüsteemis (EIS) on antud täitmiseks ülesanne. Eelnõu toimik: 21.2.1/22-0552 - COM(2022) 457 Proposal for a REGULATION OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL establishing a common framework for media services in the internal market (European Media Freedom Act) and amending Directive 2010/13/EU Eelnõu kohta seisukoha esitamine Vabariigi Valitsuse istungile vastavalt Riigikantselei 06.10.2022 resolutsioonile. Osapooled: Kultuuriministeerium Tähtaeg: 31.10.2022 00:00 Link eelnõu toimiku vaatele: https://eelnoud.valitsus.ee/main/mount/docList/2f1c3d97-740d-4047-82e1-b28b3623269f Link menetlusetapile: https://eelnoud.valitsus.ee/main/mount/docList/2f1c3d97-740d-4047-82e1-b28b3623269f?activity=1 Eelnõude infosüsteem (EIS) https://eelnoud.valitsus.ee/main